Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutLedcor Construction Inc; 2010-05-13; PWS10-31UTIL Part 5 of 5SECTION 15056 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials and installation of ductile-iron pipe and fittings for potable water systems. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. ANSI B16.42 Ductile iron pipe flanges and flanged fittings, classes 150 and 300. ASTM A536 Specification for ductile iron castings. AWWA C104 Cement mortar lining for ductile iron pipe and fittings for water AWWA C105 Polyethylene encasement for ductile iron pipe systems AWWA C111 Rubber-gasket joints for ductile iron pipe AWWA C600 Installation of ductile iron water mains and their appurtenances 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings CMWD Standard Specifications 09900,15000, 15044, 15061, 15064, 15108, and 15112 1.4 SERVICE APPLICATION Ductile-iron pipe shall be used only in specific areas, locations, and uses allowed by the City. 1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Ductile-iron pipe and fittings shall be manufactured per AWWA C110, C111, C115, C150, C151, and C153. Gray-iron and cast-iron fittings or flanges shall not be used. 2. Ductile-iron fittings manufactured per AWWA C153 shall be installed on mains 12" and smaller only. 3. Joints for ductile-iron pipe and fittings shall be mechanical, flanged, or push-on in accordance with AWWA C110, C111, and C153. 4. Except as amended herein, or otherwise shown on the Approved Plans, joints for ductile-iron pipe and ductile-iron fittings shall have a pressure rating equal to or greater than the adjacent piping. JUNE 2008 1of8 SECTION 15056 Ducile-lron Pipe and Fittings 5. Joints in buried piping may be of the push-on, flanged or mechanical-joint type per AWWA C111 except where particularly specified on the Approved Drawings. 6. Joints that are aboveground, within structures, or submerged shall be flanged unless otherwise shown on the Approved Plans. B. Unless otherwise specified, ductile-iron flanges shall be in accordance with AWWA C115, rated at a working pressure of 1,724 KPa (250 psi). Where required in order to connect to the flanges of 1,724 KPa (250 psi) butterfly valves, or as otherwise shown on the approved plans, ductile-iron flanges shall be compatible with AWWA C207, Class "F". Maximum working pressure of flanges shall be as specified in AWWA or ASME/ANSI. Flanges shall be integrally cast per AWWA C110 or shop-threaded per AWWA C115. Flanges shall be solid. Hollow-back flanges are not permitted. Gray-iron or cast-iron flanges are not permitted. Threading of flanges in the field is not permitted. Where threaded flanges are used, the pipe or spool piece to which they are connected will be hydrostatically tested in the presence of the Engineer prior to installation. The pipe section or spool piece shall be hydrostatically tested for 15 minutes at the pressure rating of the flanges. No leaks shall be permitted. C. Plain ends shall conform to the requirement of AWWA C151 and to the dimensions included within AWWA C110 to accept a mechanical joint, push-on joint, flanged coupling adaptor, flexible coupling, or grooved coupling. Refer to Section 15000 for coupling descriptions. D. The exterior surfaces of all pipe and fittings shall be factory coated with a minimum one-(1) mil thick petroleum asphaltic material per AWWA C110 and C151. E. All pipe and fittings shall be cement-mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104, using the double thickness requirements indicated in said standard. Type II or Type V Portland cement per ASTM C 150 shall be used. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of each shipment of pipe shall be required to supply a statement certifying that each lot or load of pipe and fittings has been subjected to and met the tests specified for ductile-iron pipe and fittings per AWWA C110, C111, C115, C150, C151, and C153, as applicable. B. All pipe shall have a home mark on the spigot end to indicate proper penetration when the joint is made. C. Ductile-iron pipe shall bear indelible identification markings as required by AWWA C151. JUNE 2008 2 of 8 SECTION 15056 Ducile-lron Pipe and Fittings 1.7 SUBMITTALS The following items shall be submitted and reviewed by the City prior to shipping of ductile-iron pipe and fittings: A. An affidavit of compliance with AWWA C104, C110, C111, C115, C150, C151, C153, and the requirements of this specification. B. Typical joint details. C. Typical details and description of lining and coating. D. Calculations supporting selected wall thickness. E. Calculations demonstrating that each proposed restrained joint arrangement can resist the applied forces. F. Cathodic protection materials. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Delivery, storage, and handling of ductile-iron pipe and fittings shall follow the recommendations of AWWA C600 and as specified herein: A. Handling of pipe shall be performed with lifts, cranes, or other suitable equipment and devices. Slings, hooks, or pipe tongs shall be padded and used in such a manner as to prevent damage to the pipe, linings, and coatings. The pipes shall not be dropped or dragged. B. During transport, the pipe shall be supported and secured against movement using padded devices in such a manner to prevent damage. C. Stored pipe shall be protected from damage and kept free from dirt and foreign materials by closing the ends of the pipe. Other pipeline materials shall be protected by appropriate packaging or wrapping. Gaskets shall be stored in a cool location out of direct sunlight. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be handled and stored in a dry location in a manner that will ensure proper use with respect to types and sizes. D. Pipe laid out for installation shall be placed on earth berms or timber cradles adjacent to the trench in the numerical order of installation. E. Maintain plastic end caps on all pipe and fittings in good condition until the pipe is ready to be installed in the trench. Periodically open the plastic end caps and spray clean potable water inside the pipe for moisture control. F. Under no circumstances shall ropes or other devices be attached through the fitting's interior for handling. JUNE 2008 3 of 8 SECTION 15056 Ducile-lron Pipe and Fittings 1.9 RECYCLED WATER IDENTIFICATION Ductile-iron pipe and fittings for recycled water shall be identified with purple-colored coating, purple polyethylene sleeves, identification labels or signs in accordance with Section 15000. 1.10 CORROSION PROTECTION Polyethylene encasement shall be installed on all buried ductile-iron pipe and fittings in accordance with Section 15000. Additionally, all buried ductile iron fittings with bolted connections (flanges, mechanical joints, etc) shall be coated with wax tape in accordance with Section 09902. 1.11 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification tape shall be installed for ductile-iron pipe and fittings in accordance with Section 15000. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 DUCTILE-IRON Ductile-iron pipe and appurtenant components and materials shall be selected from the Approved Materials List in accord with the Standard Drawings. 2.2 GASKETS A. Mechanical joint rubber gasket configuration and materials shall comply with AWWA C111, and according to the applicable joint type and pressure rating of the piping system. B. Flange gaskets shall be 1/8" thick acrylic or aramid fibers bound with nitrile for all sizes of pipe. Gaskets shall be full-face type with pre-punched holes. Ring gaskets extending to the inner edge of the bolt circumference may be used only upon approval of the City Engineer. C. Push-on joint rubber gaskets shall be per AWWA C111. D. If organic solvents or petroleum products are encountered during the course of the work, alternate gasket materials or joint treatment may be required by the Engineer. 2.3 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES Bolts and nuts shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.4 WAX TAPE COATING Wax Tape shall be provided in accordance with Section 09902 and the Approved Materials List. JUNE 2008 4 of 8 SECTION 15056 Ducile-lron Pipe and Fittings 2.5 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT Polyethylene encasement shall be provided in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.6 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification tape materials shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL At all times when the work of installing pipe is not in progress, including worker break times, ends of the pipe shall be closed with a vermin-proof and child-proof cap or plug. Do not permit trench water to enter the pipe. Do not place tools, clothing, or other materials in the pipe. The Contractor shall maintain the interior of the pipe in a sanitary condition free from foreign materials. 3.2 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING Trenching, backfilling and compacting shall be performed in accordance with Section 02223. 3.3 DEWATERING The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times during construction ample means and devices to promptly remove and dispose of all water from any source entering trench excavations or other parts of the work. Any damage caused by flooding of the trench shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Dewatering shall be performed by methods that will maintain a dry excavation, preservation of the final lines and grades and protection of all utilities. If flooding of the trench does occur, the Contractor shall immediately dewater and restore the trench. Damaged or altered pipeline appurtenances or trench materials shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Engineer. 3.4 PIPE INSTALLATION When the work requires and the size of the pipe allows entry of personnel into the pipe, the Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State regulations for confined space entry. Work inside pipelines shall not be undertaken until all the tests and safety provisions of the Code of Federal Regulations 1910.146, and the General Industry Safety Orders of the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 5159 for confined space entry have been performed and the area is verified as safe to enter. JUNE 2008 5 of 8 SECTION 15056 Ducile-lron Pipe and Fittings The Contractor shall furnish and install all pipe, specials, fittings, closure pieces, valves, supports, bolts, nuts, gaskets, jointing materials, and all other appurtenances as shown on the Approved Plans and as required to provide a complete and workable installation. Install pipe in the trench as follows: A. Inspect each pipe and fitting before lowering the pipe or fitting into the trench. Inspect the interior and exterior protective coatings. Patch damaged areas in the field with material recommended by the protective coating manufacturer. Thoroughly clean the ends of the pipe. Remove foreign matter and dirt from inside of the pipe and keep pipe clean during and after installation. B. Install pipe according to the manufacturer's approved order of installation. Install pipes uphill if the grade exceeds 10%. Lower the pipe onto the bedding at the proper lines and grades. C. The manufacturer's printed installation guide outlining the radius of curvature that can be negotiated with pipe sections of various lengths shall be followed, except they shall not exceed the deflections allowed in AWWA C600 according to joint type. Combined deflections at rubber gasket or flexible coupling joints shall not exceed that recommended by the manufacturer. D. The pipe shall have firm bearing along its full length, and bell holes shall be provided at each joint to permit visual inspection of the joint and prevent the pipe from being supported by the bell end or coupling. E. Pipe Assembly: 1. Push-On Type: Assemble the pipe joint using a lubricant selected from the Approved Materials List. Insert the spigot end into the bell or coupling to the proper insertion mark. Check that the elastomeric ring has not left the groove during assembly by passing a feeler gauge around the completed joint. Drive spigot ends of the pipe into bell ends in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Stabbing shall not be permitted. 2. Mechanical Joint Type: Assembly of mechanical joint fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations regarding installation. F. During installation operations, do not place tools, clothing, or other materials in the pipe. G. When pipe installation is not in progress, including worker break times, ends of the pipe shall be closed with a vermin-proof and child-proof cap or plug. Do not permit trench water, animals, or foreign material to enter the pipe. 3.5 CORROSION PROTECTION Polyethylene encasement shall be installed on all buried ductile-iron pipe and fittings in accordance with Section 15000. Additionally, all buried ductile iron fittings with bolted connections (flanges, mechanical joints, etc) shall be coated with wax tape in accordance with Section 09902. JUNE 2008 6 of 8 SECTION 15056 Ducile-lron Pipe and Fittings 3.6 FLANGED PIPE AND FITTINGS Flanged connections shall be installed where indicated on the Approved Drawings. A. Bolt holes shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines. B. The bolts, nuts and flange faces shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire brush prior to assembly. C. Bolts and nuts shall be lubricated with a City-approved anti-seize compound. D. Nuts shall be tightened in an alternating "star" pattern to the manufacturer's recommended torque. E. Coat the exterior of exposed flanges, bolts and nuts located aboveground or within vaults in accordance with Section 09910. 3.7 MECHANICAL JOINT CONNECTIONS A. Install mechanical joint connections per AWWA C600 and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prior to installation of the mechanical joint, clean the socket and plain end of the pipe. Lubricate both the gasket and plain end of the pipe with an approved lubricant per AWWA C111 immediately prior to slipping the gasket onto the plain end of the pipe. C. Tighten the bolts to the normal range of bolt torque per the manufacturer's recommendations and AWWA C600k, Table 3, as follows: Pipe Diameter Bolt Size Range of Torque 3" 5/8" 61-81 N-M (45-60 ft.-lb.) 4-24" 3/4" 102-122 N-M (75-90 ft.-lb.) 30-36" 21" 136-163 N-M (100-120 ft.-lb.) 3.8 CROSSES A. Each flanged ductile-iron cross shall be installed with flanged ductile-iron pipe spools between the cross and the valves. The spools are included to position the valves a sufficient distance from the cross to allow installation of the thrust blocks without conflicting with the valve actuators. B. The spools shall be 18" long for pipe sizes 8" through 12", and 24" long for pipe sizes 16" and larger. C. The spools shall be equal in class to the adjacent pipe. 3.9 JOINT BONDING AND CATHODIC PROTECTION Bonding of joints to provide continuity, flange insulation kits, internal epoxy linings, and other cathodic protection items and materials shall be installed where shown on the Approved Plans in accordance with the Standard Drawings and Section 16640. JUNE 2008 7 of 8 SECTION 15056 Ducile-lron Pipe and Fittings 3.10 COUPLINGS FOR DUCTILE-IRON PIPE Mechanical type flexible joints shall be installed where shown on the Approved Drawings. Grooved couplings shall be used in vaults and above ground. Flexible couplings may be used, where indicated on the drawings, below ground, but may also be used above ground with restrained joints. Flanged coupling adapters shall be used for buried pipelines, where allowed by the City. A. Grooved joint couplings shall be installed per AVWVA C606 and as indicated in Section 15000. B. Flanged coupling adapters, where allowed by the City, shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Flexible couplings shall be installed per Section 15000 and the manufacturer's recommendations. D. All couplings for ductile-iron pipe shall be shop-coated in accordance with Section 15000. 3.11 CONCRETE Concrete thrust and anchor blocks shall be installed in accordance with Section 03000 and the Standards Drawings. 3.12 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification tape shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. 3.13 DISINFECTION AND BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING Disinfection, bacteriological testing, and flushing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15041. 3.14 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Field hydrostatic testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15044. END OF SECTION JUNE 2008 8 Of 8 SECTION 15056 Ducile-lron Pipe and Fittings SECTION 15057 COPPER TUBING, BRASS AND BRONZE PIPE FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials and installation of copper tubing, brass and bronze pipe fittings and appurtenances. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. ANSI B1.20.1 Pipe treads, general purpose ANSI B16.18 Case copper alloy solder joint pressure fittings 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings CMWD Standard Specifications 09900, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15056, 15061 and 15064 1.4 SERVICE LATERAL WET TAP CONNECTIONS Contractor shall perform all wet tap connections to existing pipelines in accordance with Section 15000. 1.5 RECYCLED WATER IDENTIFICATION Copper Tubing, Brass, and Bronze Pipe Fittings for recycled water shall be identified with purple color coating, purple polyethylene sleeve, identification labels or signs in accordance with Section 15000. 1.6 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be used for all copper tubing, except that which is bored or jacked, in accordance with Section 15000. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 COPPER TUBING Copper tubing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B 88 Type K or ASTM B 88 M (Metric) Type A seamless copper water tube. Copper tubing up to 1" diameter shall be soft; 2" may be soft or rigid. Components shall be selected from the Approved Materials List in accordance with the Standard Drawings. JUNE 2008 1of3 SECTION 15057 Copper Tubing, Brass and Bronze Pipe Fittings 2.2 BRASS PIPE, NIPPLES, AND FITTINGS Threaded nipples, brass pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM B 43, regular wall thickness. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1. Fittings shall be flared or silver soldered pr CMWD Standard Drawings W3 and W4. 2.3 BRONZE APPURTENANCES A. Corporation stops, curb stops, meter and angle meter stops, meter flange adapters, and bronze-bodied service saddles shall be selected from the Approved Materials List in accordance with the Standard Drawings. B. Fittings shall be flared type or silver soldered. C. All items specified herein shall be manufactured of bronze conforming to ASTM B 62. D. Service saddles shall be the double strap type. Service saddles shall be used on all service and appurtenance connections on PVC piping. For piping materials other than PVC, service and appurtenance connections shall be performed in accordance with the Approved Drawings. 2.4 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES Bolts and nuts shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and the Approved Materials List. 2.5 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape materials shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS A. Trenching, bedding, backfilling and compacting shall be performed in accordance with CMWD Standard Drawings. Provide a minimum cover of 30" below finished street grade. B. Cut tubing true and square and remove burrs. C. Bends in soft copper tubing shall be long sweep. Shape bends with shaping tools. Form bends without flattening, buckling, or thinning the tubing wall at any point. D. Assemble copper tubing and fittings per the manufacturer's recommendation in accordance with the Standard Drawings. JUNE 2008 2 of 3 SECTION 15057 Copper Tubing, Brass and Bronze Pipe Fittings E. Install warning/identification tape in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. F. All fittings shall be soldered or flared as shown on the Approved Plans and Standard Drawings. 3.2 SERVICE SADDLES A. Service saddles shall be located a minimum of 24" from any pipe joint or fittings. B. Service saddles for connections shall be located a minimum of 24" from other saddles. Additionally, multiple service saddles for connections that are installed on the same side of a single pipe length shall be alternately staggered between 10o and 30o to prevent a weak plane in the pipe. C. The surface of the pipe shall be clean and all loose material shall be removed to provide a hard, clean surface. D. The service saddle shall be tightened in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to ensure a tight seal, using care to prevent damage or distortion of the service saddle or corporation stop due to over-tightening. E. The tap into the pipe shall be made in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendation. Tapping tools and shell cutters with internal teeth or double slots that will retain the coupon shall be used. 3.3 DISINFECTION AND BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING Disinfection, bacteriological testing, and flushing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15041. 3.4 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Field hydrostatic testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15044. END OF SECTION JUNE 2008 3 of 3 SECTION 15057 Copper Tubing, Brass and Bronze Pipe Fittings SECTION 15063 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SEWER PIPE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section designates the requirements for the manufacture and installation of polyvinyl chloride, abbreviated PVC, gravity sewer pipe to be furnished and installed by the Contractor, at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Plans as herein specified. This work shall be in accordance with these specifications and the City of Carlsbad Standards for Sanitary Sewers. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS ASTM D2321 Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe ASTM D2412 Pipe Stiffness Test ASTM D3034 PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings (4" to 15") ASTM D3212 Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipe Using Elastomeric Seals ASTM F477 Elastomeric Gaskets for Joining Plastic Pipe ASTM F679 PVC Large Diameter Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings (18" to 27") UNI-B-5 Uni Bell Recommended Practice for the Installation of PVC Sewer Pipe 1.3 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE The Contractor shall refer to the following Specification section(s) for additional requirements: A. Trenching, Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction: 02223 B. Cast-ln-Place Concrete: 03000 C. Testing of Gravity Sewer Pipelines: 15043 1.4 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall furnish submittals in accordance with the General Provisions. Submittals are required for the following: A. Submit Shop Drawings, material lists, manufacturer's literature and catalog cuts and other information. B. An affidavit from the pipe manufacturer including compliance with requirements of the Plans and Specifications shall be delivered with the pipe. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of each shipment of pipe shall be required to supply a statement certifying that each lot or load of pipe has been subjected to the tests specified for PVC gravity sewer pipe. Tests shall show that the pipe has been found to meet all the requirements of ASTM D3034, F679, and/or F794 as applicable. B. Sewer pipe shall be furnished in standard 14' or 20' lengths, unless otherwise detailed or required on the Approved Plans. Random lengths may be furnished but shall not exceed 15% of the total footage. SECTION 15063 JUNE 2008 1 of 7 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Gravity Sewer Pipe C. PVC pipe and couplings shall bear indelible identification markings as required by ASTM D3034, F679 and/or F794 and as follows: 1. All pipe, fittings, and couplings shall be clearly marked at an interval not to exceed 5' as follows: a. Nominal pipe diameter. b. PVC cell classification. c. Company, plant, date of manufacture, ASTM and SDR designation. Fittings and couplings do not require the SDR designation. d. Service designation or legend. 2. All pipe shall have home marks on the spigot ends to indicate proper penetration when joints are made. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. PVC pipe shall be stored in suppliers' yards and on the job site in accordance with AWWA M23 and the manufacturer's recommendations. PVC pipe that has been subjected to excessive ultraviolet radiation from the sun shall not be used. The determination as to the acceptability of PVC pipe faded by the sun's radiation shall rest solely with the City's Engineer. B. Store PVC pipe in the field by supporting the pipe uniformly per AWWA M23. Do not stack pipe higher than 4' or stack the pipe with weight on the bell ends. Cover stored PVC pipe to protect it from the sun's ultraviolet radiation. Any pipe that has been contaminated with any petroleum products (inside or outside) shall not be installed. C. Pipe and fittings shall be handled according to manufacturer's recommendations. Proper care shall be used to prevent damage in handling, moving, and placing the pipe. All pipe, fittings, and other pipeline materials shall be lowered into the trench in a manner that prevents damage. Pipe shall not be dropped, dragged or handled in a manner that will cause bruises, cracks, or other damage. PVC pipe or fittings that have been gouged or scratched shall be subject to rejection as determined by the City Engineer. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL PVC gravity sewer pipe shall be made of PVC plastic having a cell classification of 12454-B, 13364-A, or 13364-B as defined in ASTM D1784. The fittings shall be made of PVC plastic having a cell classification of 12454-B, 12454-C, or 13343-C as defined in ASTM D1784. 2.2 PIPE A. PVC gravity sewer pipe, fittings, coupling and joints, 4-inch through 15-inch, shall be manufactured in conformance with the requirements of ASTM D3034, SDR 35 and shall have gasketed joints. All pipe shall be of solid wall construction with smooth interior and exterior surfaces. B. PVC gravity sewer pipe, fittings, coupling and joints, 18-inch through 21-inch, shall be manufactured in conformance with the requirements of ASTM F679 with T-1 wall thickness SECTION 15063 JUNE 2008 2 of 7 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Gravity Sewer Pipe and shall have gasketed joints. All pipe shall be of solid wall construction with smooth interior and exterior surfaces. C. The minimum pipe stiffness for both small diameter and large diameter PVC gravity sewer pipe shall be 46 psi according to ASTM D2412. D. Pipe Manufacturer's, or equal 1. J-M Manufacturing, Co. 2. Certainteed Corp. 3. Diamond Plastics 2.3 JOINTS A. The pipe shall be jointed with an integral bell gasketed joint that meets the requirements of ASTM D3212. The gasket shall be manufactured from a synthetic elastomer and factory installed in the belled end of the pipe. Gasket shall conform to ASTM F477. B. All pipe shall have a homemark on the spigot end to indicate proper penetration when the joint is made. The socket and spigot configurations for fittings and couplings shall be compatible to those used for the pipe. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. At all times when the work of installing pipe is not in progress, including worker break times, close the ends of the pipe with a tight-fitting, vermin-proof and child-proof, cap or plug. Do not permit trench water to enter the pipe. Do not place tools, clothing, or other materials in the pipe. The Contractor shall maintain the interior of the pipe in a sanitary condition free from foreign materials. B. Where pipe sections less than standard pipe lengths are required, the pipe sections shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation guide and shall only be used with the approval of the City Engineer. The minimum pipe length permitted is 5' when used to connect to manholes and cleanouts. The minimum pipe length permitted for stub outs shall be 36". 3.2 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION Trenching, bedding, backfilling and compaction operations shall be performed in accordance with Section 02223. 3.3 DEWATERING The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times during construction ample means and devices to promptly remove and dispose all water from any source entering trench excavations or other parts of the work in accordance with Section 02223. Any damage caused by flooding of the trench shall be the Contractors responsibility. Dewatering shall be performed by methods that will maintain a dry excavation, preservation of the final lines and grades and protection of all utilities. Sewer mains shall not be used as drains for dewatering construction trenches. If flooding or the trench does occur, the Contractor shall immediately dewater and restore the trench. Damaged or altered pipeline appurtenances or trench materials shall be repaired or replaces as directed by the Engineer. 3.4 PIPELINE INSTALLATION > SECTION 15063 JUNE 2008 3 of 7 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Gravity Sewer Pipe When the work requires and the size of the pipe allows entry of personnel into the pipe, the Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State regulations for confined space entry. Work inside pipelines shall not be undertaken until all the tests and safety provisions of the Code of Federal Regulations 1910.146, and the General Industry Safety Orders of the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 5159 for confined space entry have been performed and the area is verified as safe to enter. The Contractor shall furnish and install all pipe, specials, fittings, closure pieces, supports, gaskets, jointing materials, and all other appurtenances as shown and as required to provide a complete and workable installation. Pipe installation shall be as recommended in UNI-B-5 except as modified below and as shown on the Approval Plans. A. Inspect each section of pipe prior to lowering the pipe into the trench. Thoroughly clean the ends of the pipe. Remove foreign matter and dirt from inside of the pipe and keep pipe clean during and after installation. B. Install pipe according to the manufacturer's approved order of installation to the proper lines and grades as shown on the Approved Plans. 1. Pipe shall be installed with pipe bells up-grade. Lay pipes uphill if the grade exceeds 10 percent (10%). 2. Installation tolerances for the pipe shall not vary more than 2" horizontally or 1" vertically from the alignment and elevation shown on the Approved Plans. 3. Install the pipe such that the identification markings on each pipe section are continuously aligned for the total length of the pipeline alignment. Orient the strip marking upwards to the 12 o'clock position (top) of the trench opening. 4. Avoidance of reverse slope: Any pipeline installed with reversed slope, as evidence by ponding of water or sag, is not allowed. Any such pipeline shall be removed and replaced (at proper line and grade) to the nearest upstream and downstream sewer structure as directed by the City Engineer. C. The pipe shall have firm bearing along its full length, and bell holes shall be provided at each joint to permit visual inspection of the joint and prevent the pipe from being supported by the bell and or coupling. D. Field cutting and milling shall be accomplished to equal the quality of shop-fabricated ends in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. E. Pipe Assembly: Assemble the pipe joint using the lubricant supplied by the pipe manufacturer. Insert the spigot end into the bell or coupling to proper insertion mark. Check that the elastomeric ring has not left the groove during assembly by passing a feeler gauge around the completed joint. Drive the spigot end into the bell in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Stabbing shall not be permitted. F. Pipe curvature shall comply with design requirements specified in Chapter 6 of Volume 1 of the Carlsbad Engineering Standards. Mechanical means shall not be used to accomplish bending. Bending should be done manually by workers in the trench. Curvature will be accomplished by bending the pipe rather than deflecting joints. G. PVC wyes shall be located where shown on the Approved Plans in accordance with the Standard Drawings. Wyes shall not be placed closer than 5' from the exterior of any structure such as manholes. 3.5 SEWER LATERALS A. The Contractor shall install sewer laterals using wye-branch fittings sized and located as shown on the Approved Plans. SECTION 15063 JUNE 2008 4 of 7 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Gravity Sewer Pipe B. All sewer laterals that are to be left unconnected to a building lateral extension shall be capped and identified as shown on the Standard Drawings. C. All sewer laterals shall run perpendicular from the sewer main to the property line. They shall be bedded, backfilled and compacted the same as the sewer main into which they connect in accordance with Section 02223. D. All Sewer laterals shall be plugged or capped at the end of the last joint, to withstand the internal pressure during leakage and infiltration testing. 3.6 SADDLE CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SEWER MAINS The Contractor shall furnish the saddle fitting, appurtenances and all other materials necessary to complete the connection. The Contractor shall provide all equipment and labor required for the excavation and installation of the connection including, but not limited to backfill and pavement replacement. In certain circumstances the Contractor may be required to provide a water truck, bypass pump, and fittings as part of the equipment for making the connections. Emergency standby equipment or materials may be required of the Contractor by the City Engineer. Saddle connections to existing sewer mains for the tie-in of new sewer laterals shall be as follows: A. Prior to construction, Contractor shall pothole the existing pipe at the location of the proposed connection. The City shall inspect the pothole prior to Contractor's repair of trench. Contractor shall record the following information on Record Drawings: 1. Pipe size, outside diameter. 2. Pipe type such as PVC or VCP. 3. Elevation, grade, and alignment. 4. Can the tie-in be made at the indicated location, assure no collars, pipe bells, fittings or couplings exist in the area of the connection. 5. Potential conflicts with existing utilities. B. To facilitate the proposed connection and allow for slight adjustment in alignment, the Contractor shall leave a minimum 10' gap between the new pipe installation and the proposed connection point at the existing main. The Contractor shall leave a gap longer than 10' if conditions warrant, or if directed by the Engineer. C. After the City Engineer has given approval to proceed with the connection, the Contractor shall schedule the connection with the City Engineer. 1. Tie-ins will be scheduled at the convenience of the City. Work may be scheduled for nights and weekends if required. 2. The Contractor shall give the City Engineer a minimum of five (5) working days notice prior to any proposed excavation. Scheduling shall be subject to approval of the City Engineer. SECTION 15063 JUNE 2008 5 of 7 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Gravity Sewer Pipe 3. The City Engineer may postpone or reschedule the connection operation if, for any reason, the City Engineer believes that the Contractor is improperly prepared with competent personnel, equipment, or materials to proceed with the connection. 4. If progress in completing the connection within the time specified is inadequate, the City Engineer may order necessary corrective measures. Corrective measures may consist of directing City personnel or another contractor to complete the work. All costs for corrective measures shall be borne by the Contractor. D. Contractor may proceed with the excavation and connection, only when approved materials are onsite, connection operations have been scheduled and a copy of the approved traffic control plan has been supplied to the City Engineer. 1. The Contractor shall saw-cut pavement, excavate and provide and install shoring and steel plating, when necessary, one day prior to the wet tap or cut-in installation. 2. The Contractor shall provide lights, barricades and traffic control in accordance with the Agency of jurisdiction as deemed necessary for the excavation by the City Engineer. 3. After the City Engineer has given approval to proceed, the Contractor shall complete the installation as shown on the Approved Plan in accordance with Standard Specifications including: a. Installing the pipe section(s) necessary to make the closure to the new system. b. Complete all backfill and compaction of the trench in accordance with Section 02223. c. Make all pavement repairs and/or replacement as necessary in accordance with agency of jurisdiction requirements. d. Discard pipe and appurtenances removed from service as specified in this Section. e. In lieu of a saddle connection, a wye connection may be made by cutting the sewer and installing a wye. All applicable provisions of this Specification will be adhered to in making a cut-in wye connection. 3.7 CONNECTION TO EXISTING SEWER SYSTEMS A. Connection to the existing sewer system at an existing manhole or dead end shall be made as shown on the Approved Plans in accordance with Section 03460. All work shall be performed in the presence of the City Engineer. B. In order to prevent accidental use of the new sewer before completion and acceptance, the new inlet to the existing tie-in manhole and outlet of the new upstream manhole shall be sealed with expandable plugs. Installation of plugs shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the City Engineer. Plugs shall be removed at the time of final inspection or as directed by the City Engineer. SECTION 15063 JUNE 2008 6 of 7 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Gravity Sewer Pipe 3.8 PIPELINE ABANDONMENT A. Sewer pipelines specifically identified to be abandoned in-place shall be slurry filled with a 2- sack cement slurry. All other inactive sewer lines shall be removed, unless directed otherwise by the City Engineer. B. Sewer laterals shall be cut and capped at the main or property line, as directed by the City Engineer. END OF SECTION SECTION 15063 JUNE 2008 7 of 7 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Gravity Sewer Pipe SECTION 15064 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE AND FITTINGS (AWWA C900) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section designates the requirements for the manufacture and installation of polyvinyl chloride, abbreviated PVC, pressure pipe, to be furnished and installed by the Contractor, at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Plans as herein specified. Specifications for related Work are as follows: AWWA C900 PVC Pressure Pipe ANSI A21.10 Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings AWWA C110 Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings AWWA C153 Ductile Iron Compact Fittings AWWA Manual M23 Pipe Design and Installation 1.2 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE The Contractor shall refer to the following Specification section(s) for additional requirements: A. Disinfection of Piping: 15041 B. Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipeline: 15044 1.3 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall furnish submittals in accordance with Section 2-5.3 of the GENERAL PROVISIONS. Submittals are required for the following: A. Submit Shop Drawings, material lists, manufacturer's literature and catalog cuts and other information. Materials shall be selected from the Approved Materials list. B. Submit an affidavit from the pipe manufacturer that all delivered materials comply with the requirements of AWWA C900, the Plans and Specifications. 1.4 PAYMENT A. Payment for the Work in this section shall be included as part of the lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant thereto. B. Payment by the linear foot shall be for each diameter and for each pipe strength designation measured horizontally over the pipe centerline. NOVEMBER 2009 1 of 5 SECTION 15064 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings (AWWA C900) PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL Material used to produce the pipe shall be made from Class 12454-A or B rigid polyvinyl chloride compounds in accordance with AWWA C900 Section 2.1 (Basic Materials), with an established hydrostatic design basis (HDB) equal to or greater than 4000 psi for water at 73.4 degrees F (23 C). Elastomeric gaskets shall comply with the requirements of AWWA C900 Sections 2.1.5 and 2.1.5.1 (Gaskets and Lubricants). 2.2 PIPE PVC pressure pipe, 4-inch through 12-inch, shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C900, and shall be of the sizes and dimension ratio (DR) shown on the Plans. The pipe shall have integral bell and spigot joints with elastomeric gaskets in accordance with AWWA C900 Section 2.2 (Pipe Requirements). The pipe shall conform with the outside diameter of cast-iron pipe unless otherwise specified and shall conform with the wall thickness of DR series 14 or 18. 2.3 FITTINGS All fittings for PVC pressure pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI A21.10, AWWA C110 or C153. All fittings shall be made of ductile iron and the letters "Dl" or "DUCTILE" shall be cast on them, unless otherwise specified. Bell size shall be for Class 150 and Class 200 cast-iron equivalent PVC pressure pipe, including the rubber-ring retaining groove. 2.4 SERVICES SADDLES Service saddles for PVC pressure pipe shall be made of silicone bronze or brass and shall be double banded or wide single band style and selected from the Approved Materials list. The band(s) and nuts shall be type 304 stainless steel and designed specifically for use with AWWA C900 PVC pipe. Each saddle shall accurately fit the contour of the pipe O.D. without causing distortion of the pipe. The saddle shall be securely held in place with stainless steel bolts and nuts. The service saddle shall have a published working pressure at least equal to the pressure class of the pipe on which it is installed. All saddles shall be provided with torque information and installation instructions. Saddles shall be in accordance with Carlsbad Rules and Regulations for the Construction of Potable Water Mains. 2.5 JOINT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Joint Restraint Systems may be used for PVC or ductile-iron pipe when shown on the Approved Plans or with prior approval of the City Engineer. Contractor shall submit shop drawings and catalog data for joint restraint systems in accordance with the General Provisions. Joint Restraint Systems shall be ductile-iron and shall consist of a split-ring restraint with machined (not cast) serrations on the inside diameter and connecting bolts, and shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. NOVEMBER 2009 2 of 5 SECTION 15064 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings (AWWA C900) 2.6 DEFLECTION COUPLINGS A. Deflection couplings shall be selected from the District's approved materials list and deflections shall not exceed 80% of the manufacturer's written recommendations. Depending on the manufacturer, this will result in a maximum allowable deflection of 2° at each bell for a maximum of 4° total deflection with each deflection coupling. Deflection couplings are allowed on AWWA C900 PVC pipe for pipe sizes 4" through 12". B. Deflection couplings for use with AWWA C905 PVC Pipe shall be submitted to and approved by the City Engineer prior to installation. PARTS- EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE LENGTHS Laying lengths shall be 20-feet with the manufacturer's option to supply up to 15% random (minimum length 10-feet) sections. No deflections at bells, fittings or of the pipe will be allowed. The use of deflection collars shall be required. 3.2 MARKING Each pipe length shall be marked showing the nominal pipe size, O.D. base, the AWWA pressure class, and AWWA specification designation in accordance with AWWA C900 Section 2.6 (Marking Requirements). For potable water application, the pipe shall be white or blue in color and the seal of the testing agency that verified the suitability of the material for such service shall be included. 3.3 EARTHWORK Excavation and backfill, including the pipe bedding, shall conform to the provisions of Section 02223. 3.4 GENERAL INSTALLATIONS PROCEDURES AND WORKMANSHIP PVC pressure pipe and fittings shall be installed per AWWA Manual M23 "PVC Pipe-Design and Installation", and as herein specified. Proper care shall be used to prevent damage in handling, moving, and placing the pipe. Hoist pipe with fork lift or other handling equipment to prevent major damage or shorten its service life. A cloth belt sling or a continuous fiber rope shall be used to prevent scratching the pipe. The pipe shall be lowered and not dropped from the truck. Dropped pipe will be rejected. NOVEMBER 2009 3 of 5 SECTION 15064 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings (AWWA C900) Prior to laying the pipe, the bottom of the trench shall be graded and prepared to provide uniform bearing throughout the entire length of each joint of pipe. Bell holes of ample dimension shall be dug in the bottom of the trench at the locations of each joint to facilitate the joining. The trench shall have a flat or semi-circular bottom conforming to the grade to which the pipe is to be laid. The pipe shall be accurately placed in the trench to the lines and grades on the Plans. Fittings shall be supported independently of the pipe. 3.5 LONGITUDINAL BENDING Neither Longitudinal bending nor deflection of joints is allowed on AWWA C900 PVC pressure pipe. Deflections less than allowed with standard ductile iron fittings shall be accomplished with the use of deflection couplings designed for use with AWWA C900 PVC pipe. Deflection couplings shall be selected from the District's approved materials list and deflections shall not exceed 80% of the manufacturer's written recommendations. Depending on the manufacturer, this will generally result in a maximum allowable deflection of 2° at each bell for a maximum of 4° total deflection with each deflection coupling. Deflection couplings are allowed on AWWA C900 PVC pipe for pipe sizes 4" through 12". Deflection couplings for larger pipe require the specific approval of the City Engineer. 3.6 PIPE JOINT ASSEMBLY The spigot and bell shall slide together without displacement of the rubber gasket. The joint shall be dirt free. The best laying practice is with the bell facing in the direction of laying. Insert the rubber ring into the groove making sure the ring is completely seated. Lubrication of the spigot and instruction of use shall be supplied by the pipe manufacturer. The spigot shall be inserted into the bell and forced slowly into position by use of a large bar lever and a wood block across the pipe end. For large pipe, a come-along (with padding that will not scratch the pipe) may be used. 3.7 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKS Concrete thrust blocks shall be placed as shown on the Plans and shall conform to the requirement of Section 03000. Concrete blocks shall be placed between the undisturbed ground and the fittings to be anchored. Quantity of concrete and the bearing area of the pipe and undisturbed soil shall be as shown on the Plans, unless otherwise determined by the City Engineer. The concrete shall be placed, unless specifically shown otherwise on the Plans, so that the pipe joints and fittings will be accessible to repairs. 3.8 JOINT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Joint Restraint Systems shall be installed as shown on the Approved Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Joint Restraint Systems may be used in lieu of concrete thrust blocks with permission of the City Engineer. NOVEMBER 2009 4 of 5 SECTION 15064 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings (AWWA C900) 3.9 PREVENTING FOREIGN MATTER FROM ENTERING THE PIPE At all times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open end of the pipe shall be closed with a tight-fitting cap or plug to prevent the entrance of foreign matter into the pipe. These provisions shall apply during the noon hour as well as overnight. In no event shall the pipeline be used as a drain for removing water which has infiltrated into the trench. The Contractor shall maintain the inside of the pipe free from foreign materials and in a clean and sanitary condition until its acceptance by the City Engineer. 3.10 LEAKAGE TEST General: All pipelines shall be tested in accordance with Section 15044, Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipe. 3.11 DISINFECTION Disinfection shall be in accordance with Section 15041, Testing, Flushing and Disinfection of Piping. END OF SECTION NOVEMBER 2009 5 of 5 SECTION 15064 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings (AWWA C900) SECTION 15074 BLOW-OFF ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials, testing, and installation of blowoff assemblies. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings CMWD Standard Specifications 09900, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15056, 15057, 15061, 15064, and 15100 1.3 SERVICE APPLICATION A. Blowoff assemblies shall be installed on potable and recycled water mains. B. Blowoff assemblies shall be sized and located as shown on the Approved Plans. In general, blowoff assemblies will be installed at low points of pipelines as shown below: 1. 2" blowoff assemblies or multiple 2" blowoff assemblies will be required on pipelines 4", thru 12". 2. 4" blowoff assemblies will be required on pipeline sizes 12" thru 16". 3. 6" blowoff assembly will be required on pipeline sizes 18" and larger. 1.4 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be installed for blowoff assemblies in accordance with Section 15000. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL Blowoff assemblies and appurtenant components and materials shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.2 CONCRETE Concrete thrust or anchor blocks shall be placed as shown on the approved plans in accordance with Section 03000. 2.3 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification tape materials shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and the Approved Materials List. 2.4 FIELD PAINTING AND COATING Field painting and coating materials shall be in accordance with Section 09900 and the Approved Materials List. JUNE 2008 1of2 SECTION 15074 Blow-off Assemblies PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Blowoff assemblies shall be installed at locations shown on the Approved Plans or as directed by the District Engineer in accordance with the Standard Drawings. B. Blowoff assemblies shall be connected to water mains no closer than 24" to a bell, coupling, joint or fitting. C. Locations of blowoff assembly shall be in accordance with the Standard Drawings. 3.2 CONCRETE Concrete thrust or anchor blocks shall be placed as shown on the Approved Plans in accordance with Section 03000. 3.3 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. 3.4 DISINFECTION OF BLOWOFF ASSEMBLIES Blowoff assemblies shall be disinfected in accordance with Section 15041 in conjunction with disinfecting the main to which it is connected. Blowoff assembly valves shall be operated and the assembly shall be flushed to completely disinfect all internal parts. 3.5 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Blowoff assemblies shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with Section 15044 in conjunction with hydrostatically testing the pipeline to which it is connected. END OF SECTION JUNE 2008 2 of 2 SECTION 15074 Blow-off Assemblies SECTION 15092 MISCELLANEOUS COUPLINGS, PIPE AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION All valves, couplings, and appurtenances shall conform to requirements of the standard dimensions and pressure classification of the immediately adjacent pipe, valve or appurtenance as specified. 1.2 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE The Contractor shall refer to the following Specification section(s) for additional requirements: A. Painting and Coating: 09900 B. Petrolatum Wax Tape Coating: 09902 1.3 SUBMITTALS Contractor shall furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 2-5.3 of the GENERAL PROVISIONS. The following submittals are required: A. Submit Shop Drawings for all miscellaneous couplings, pipe and appurtenances. Shop Drawings shall include listing of materials of construction, with ASTM reference and grade, including lining and paint coating intended for use, with lining and coating manufacturers' and paint numbers listed. 1.4 PAYMENT Payment for the Work in this section shall be included as part of the lump-sum or unit- price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant thereto. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 GASKETS, NUTS, AND BOLTS Gaskets for flanged joints shall be "drop-in" type asbestos composition sheet packing, graphited on both sides, "drop-in" type, conforming to the requirements of ANSI B16.21 and shall be as manufactured by Crane Co., Garlock or approved equal. Bolts and studs for aboveground installations shall be cadmium plated and shall conform to ASTM A307, Grade B, "Steel Machine Bolts and Nuts and Tap Holes," when a ring gasket is used and shall conform to either ASTM A261, "Heat-Treated Carbon Steel Bolting Material" or ASTM A193, "Alloy-Steel Bolting Material for High Temperature Service," when a full-face gasket is used. Bolts and nuts shall be heavy hexagon series. Nuts shall conform to ASTM A194, "Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure and High Temperature Service" either in Grade 1, 2 or 2H. The fit shall be ANSI B1.1, "Unified Screw Threads," Class 2, except that Class 3 fit shall be used in JUNE 2008 1of2 SECTION 15092 Miscellaneous Couplings, Pipe and Appurtenances holes tapped for studs. Threads may be made by either cutting or cold forming. Between 1/4-inch and 3/8-inch shall project through the nut when drawn tight. Washers shall be provided for each nut and shall be the same material as each nut. All buried flanges, including bolts, nuts and washers, shall be encased in wax tape per Section 09902. All bolt threads shall be lubricated with non-oxide grease. Flanged faces shall be wire brushed and cleaned prior to joining each flange. 2.2 WAX TAPE COATING Unless otherwise specified on the Plans, all couplings and appurtenances for underground installation shall be encased in wax tape per Section 09902 and the City Standard Drawings. 2.3 PAINTING AND COATING All miscellaneous couplings, pipe and appurtenances referenced in this section shall be painted and coated, interior and exterior, in accordance with Section 09900, Painting and Coating. 2.4 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS Joints for which flexible couplings are required, shall be selected from the Approved Materials list. Gaskets shall be plain rubber gaskets. Threads on bolts of compression collars shall be lubricated with non-oxide grease before assembling the coupling. 2.5 PIPE UNIONS Screw unions may be employed on pipelines 2-1/2-inches in diameter and smaller. Pipes and fittings made of non-ferrous metals shall be isolated from ferrous metals by nylon insulating pipe bushings, unions or couplings manufactured by Smith-Blair, Pipe Seal and Insulator Co. or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION JUNE 2008 2 of 2 SECTION 15092 Miscellaneous Couplings, Pipe and Appurtenances SECTION 15099 PROCESS VALVES, REGULATORS AND MISCELLANEOUS VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials, testing and installation of manually operated process valves such as check valves, pressure control valves, pressure reducing valves and ball valves. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. American Water Works Association AWWA C508 Standards for Swing Check Valve ASTM B62 Standards for Ball Vales 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings CMWD Specification Sections 09900, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15057, 15074, 15108, and 15112 1.4 SERVICE APPLICATIONS Check valves, pressure control valves, pressure reducing valves, bronze gate valves and ball valves are primarily used in the installation of potable and recycled water main appurtenances and where called for on the Approved Plans and indicated on the Standard Drawings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS The following items shall be submitted to the City for review and approval prior to ordering or delivery of valves per Section 2-5.3 of the GENERAL PROVISIONS. A. The valve manufacturers catalog data showing the size to be used, valve dimensions, pressure rating and materials of construction. B. Manufacturers catalog data and proof of NSF certification on the lining materials to be used. C. Installation procedures including field adjustments as required. JUNE 2008 1of5 SECTION 15099 Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves 1.6 SIZING OF VALVES Valves shall be the same size as the appurtenance in which they are to be installed with unless otherwise called for on the Approved Plans or indicated on the Standard Drawings. 1.7 VALVE ENDS Valve ends shall be compatible with the piping system or appurtenance in which they are to be installed or as called for on the Approved Plans or indicated on the Standard Drawings. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Valves shall be delivered and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Valves shall remain in factory packaging until ready for installation. Valves shall not be stored in contact with bare ground. 1.9 POLYETHYLENE WRAP Polyethylene wrap shall be used for the buried installation of valves in accordance with Section 15000. 1.10 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS Valve boxes and extension stems shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 RUBBER-FLAPPER SWING CHECK VALVE A. Swing check valves and appurtenant components shall be in accordance with AWWA C508 and selected from the Approved Materials List. A submittal will be required as described in this Section. B. Rubber-flapper swing check valves shall have a heavily constructed ductile-iron body and cover. The body shall be long pattern design (not wafer), with integrally cast-on end flanges. The flapper shall be Buna-N having an "O" ring seating edge and be internally reinforced with steel. C. Flapper shall be captured between the body and the body cover in a manner to permit the flapper to flex from closed to full open position during flow through the valve. Flapper shall be easily removed without need to remove valve from line. Check valves shall have full pipe size flow area. Seating surface shall be on a 45° angle requiring the flapper to travel only 35° from closed to full open position, for minimum head loss and non-slam closure. JUNE 2008 2 of 5 SECTION 15099 Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves D. Buna-N flapper shall be high-strength coated fabric, coated both sides with 70 DURO, which creates an elastic spring effect, molded internally, to assist the flapper to close against a slight head to prevent slamming. When essential to create backflow through the check valve, as directed by the City Engineer, an external backflow device shall be furnished. E. Valve ends shall be flanged ductile-iron in accordance with Section 15056 unless otherwise called for on the Approved Plans or directed by the City Engineer. F. Check valves shall be tested by the manufacturer and the test results shall be approved by the City Engineer prior to shipment to the project. Check valves must unseat at a head no greater than 24". 2.2 SMALL DIAMETER ISOLATING VALVES Provide all small diameter valves and cocks for shut-off process connections, instrumentation and other miscellaneous uses in accordance with the Approved Plans. These valves shall be of the same material and pressure rating as the adjacent process piping. Shutoff valves shall be compatible with instrumentation and other equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.3 CORPORATION STOPS Corporation stops shall be in the ball type with a bronze body and T-Head operator. Valve ends shall be compatible with the piping system in which they are being installed or as called for on the Approved Plans or indicated on the Standard Drawings. Corporation stops shall be rated for a minimum pressure of 1,379 KPa (200 psi). Corporation stops shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.4 ANGLE METER STOPS Angle meter stops shall be the ball type with a bronze body and 90° lock wing. Valve ends shall be flare style inlet and swivel meter nut for 1" and meter flange for 2" outlets. Angle meter stops shall be rated for a minimum pressure of 1,379 KPa (200 psi). Angle meter stops shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.5 CUSTOMER METER SHUT-OFF VALVE Customer meter shut-off valves shall be the ball type with a bronze body and lever handle operator. Valve ends shall be swivel meter nut for 1" inlets and meter flange for 2" inlets. Customer meter shut-off valves shall be rated for a minimum pressure of 200 psi. The City Engineer may require the use of a customer meter shut-off valve equipped with a 90° lock wing. JUNE 2008 3 of 5 SECTION 15099 Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves 2.6 BALL VALVES Ball valves 2" and smaller shall be of bronze construction conforming to ASTM B62 and equipped with a T-Head or lever handle operator as required. Valve ends shall be compatible with the piping system in which they are being installed or as indicated on the Approved Plans or Standard Drawings. Ball valves shall be rated for a minimum pressure of 1,379 KPa (200 psi). Ball valves shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS Backflow preventers shall be in accordance with Section 15112 and selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.8 POLYTHYLENE WRAP Polyethylene wrap shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.9 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Valves shall be set in true alignment straddling the centerline of pipe with the valve operator in the vertical position unless otherwise noted on the Approved Plans or shown on the Standard Drawings. B. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the applicable section of these specifications for the piping material and joint type being used. C. Aboveground valves shall be rigidly held in place using supports and hangers in accordance with the Approved Plans and Standard Drawings. The stem orientation of valves in elevated piping shall be as approved by the City Engineer for accessibility, except that no valves shall be installed with stems aligned below horizontal. Saddle type valve supports shall be provided. Supports shall be of rugged construction providing at least one hundred twenty degrees (120°) under support for the valve body. Valve supports shall be constructed of steel, and shall be anchored to the foundations using stainless steel anchor bolts. JUNE 2008 4 of 5 SECTION 15099 Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves 3.2 POLYETHYLENE WRAP Installation of polyethylene wrap for buried valves shall be in accordance with Section 15000. 3.3 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. 3.4 DISINFECTION OF THE VALVES Disinfection and flushing shall be in accordance with Section 15041, as part of the progress of disinfecting the main pipeline. The valves shall be operated during the disinfection period to completely disinfect all internal parts. 3.5 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Valves shall be hydrostatically tested in conjunction with the pipelines in which they are installed in accordance with Section 15044. END OF SECTION JUNE 2008 5 of 5 SECTION 15099 Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves SECTION 15100 RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES (RWGV's) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials, testing, and installation of manually operated resilient wedge gate valves (RWGV's). 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings CMWD Standard Specifications 15000, 15041, 15044, 15056, 15057, 15061, 15064, 15074, 15108 and 15112 1.4 SERVICE APPLICATION A. Resilient wedge gate valves (RWGVs) shall be installed on potable and recycled water mains and appurtenances in accordance with the Approved Plans and the Standard Drawings. B. Resilient wedge gate valves shall be used for open/closed operations, throttling service and frequent operation after long periods of no actuation. C. In general, resilient wedge gate valves shall be used when valves are required on pipelines and appurtenances 4" through 16". D. Valves for pipelines sized 18" and larger generally require the use of butterfly valves (BFV) in accordance with Section 15102. E. All valves shall be of at least the same pressure class as the adjoined pipe. 1.5 SUBMITTALS The following items shall be submitted for review and approval per Section 2-5.3, prior to ordering or delivery of resilient wedge gate valves. A. An affidavit from the valve manufacturer stating that valves have successfully passed hydrostatic tests in accordance with AWWA C509 and manufacturer's own coatings tests. B. The valve manufacturer's catalog data showing the size to be used, valve dimensions, pressure rating and materials of construction. C. Manufacturer's catalog data and proof of NSF certification for the lining materials to be used. JUNE 2008 1of5 SECTION 15100 Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) 1.6 SIZING OF VALVES Valves shall be the same size as the line in which they are installed unless otherwise noted on the Approved Plans. 1.7 VALVE ENDS Valve ends shall be compatible with the piping system in which they are being installed in accordance with the Approved Plans or directed by the City Engineer. Ductile-iron flanges shall be in accordance with Section 15056. 1.8 VALVE TESTING Resilient wedge gate valves shall be hydrostatically tested and valve coatings shall be holiday detected prior to shipment to the field in accordance with the testing procedures shown in Appendix A. Valves delivered to the site prior to successful hydrostatic testing and holiday detection shall be subject to rejection. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Valves shall be delivered and stored in accordance with AVWVA C550. The port openings shall be covered with plastic, cardboard or wood while in transit and during storage in the field. These covers shall remain in place until valves are ready to be installed. Valves shall not be stored in contact with bare ground. Valves shall not be stacked. 1.10 CORROSION PROTECTION Buried Valves: All bolted connections and bolted valve components (bonnets, flanges, etc.) shall be coated with Wax Tape in accordance with Section 09902 and the entire valve encased in polyethylene in accordance with Section 15000. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES (RWGV's) A. Resilient wedge gate valves and appurtenant components and materials shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. B. RWGV's shall be ductile-iron in accordance with AWWA C509 and C515 except as modified herein. C. Each valve shall have a smooth unobstructed waterway free from any sediment pockets. D. All RWGV's shall be leak-tight at their rated pressure. E. RWGV's shall have a non-rising low-zinc bronze or stainless steel stem, opened by turning left (counterclockwise). JUNE 2008 2 of 5 SECTION 15100 Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) F. Stem seals shall be the O-ring type incorporating a minimum of two rings as required by AWWA C509. G. Low-friction torque-reduction thrust washers or bearings shall be provided on the stem collar. H. Wedge (gate) shall be fully encapsulated with a bonded-in-place Nitrile elastomer covering. Minimum thickness of the rubber seating area shall be 1/4". I. Valves for buried applications shall be provided with a 2" square operating nut, and valves located above ground or in structures shall be equipped with a hand wheel in accordance with AWWA C509 unless otherwise indicated on the Approved Plans. J. RWGV interior and exterior surfaces (except for the encapsulated disc) shall be coated as described below. K. All bolts and nuts used in the construction of RWGV's shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2.2 EPOXY LINING AND COATING Epoxy linings and coatings for valves shall be provided in accordance with AWWA C210, C213, and C550, with the following modifications: A. Epoxy lining and coating of valve surfaces shall be performed by the manufacturer in a facility with qualified personnel, where the environment can be controlled. Epoxy lining and coating of valves in the field is prohibited. B. Repairs made to manufactures applied coatings shall be performed in a facility with qualified personnel, where the environment can be controlled. The facility shall be approved by the valve manufacturer. C. Surface preparation shall be as detailed in SSPC-SP5, White-Metal Blast Cleaning. D. Liquid epoxy lining and coating materials shall be listed in the NSF Listing for Drinking Water Additives, Standard 61, certified for use in contact with potable water. E. The minimum dry film thickness for epoxy linings shall be 0.008". Liquid epoxy lining shall be applied in two (2) coats in accordance AWWA C210. F. Powder epoxy coating materials shall contain one hundred percent (100%) solids, in accordance with AWWA C213. JUNE 2008 3 of 5 SECTION 15100 Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) 2.3 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.4 CONCRETE Concrete used for anchor or thrust blocks shall be Class 560-C-3250 as specified in section 03000. 2.5 WAX TAPE COATING Wax Tape shall be in accordance with Section 09902 and selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.6 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT Polyethylene encasement shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install valves with the bolt holes straddling the vertical centerline of pipe and the operating nut in the vertical position unless otherwise noted on the Approved Plans. B. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the applicable section of these specifications for the piping material and joint type being used. C. Joints shall be cleaned and installed in accordance with Section 15056. 3.2 CORROSION PROTECTION Buried Valves: All bolted connections and bolted valve components (bonnets, flanges, etc.) shall be coated with Wax Tape in accordance with Section 09902 and the entire valve encased in polyethylene in accordance with Section 15000. Exposed Valves: The exterior of valves installed above ground or exposed in vaults or enclosures shall be field painted in accordance with Section 09900. 3.3 CONCRETE Concrete thrust, anchor, and support blocks shall be installed in accordance the Standard Drawings. The concrete shall be placed so that valves and valve operators will be accessible for repairs or replacement. JUNE2008 4of5 SECTION 15100 Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) 3.4 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. 3.5 DISINFECTION OF VALVES Disinfection and flushing of valves shall be in accordance with Section 15041, as part of the process of disinfecting the main pipeline. The valves shall be operated during the disinfection period to completely disinfect all internal parts. 3.6 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Valves shall be hydrostatically tested in conjunction with the pipeline in which they are installed in accordance with Section 15044. END OF SECTION JUNE 2008 5 of 5 SECTION 15100 Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) SECTION 15102 BUTTERFLY VALVES (BFV's) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials, testing, and installation of manually operated butterfly valves (BFV). 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. References shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. American Water Works Association (AWWA) C504 Standards for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings CMWD Standard Specifications 09900, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15056, 15061 and 15064 1.4 SERVICE APPLICATION A. Butterfly valves (BFV) shall be installed on potable and recycled water mains and appurtenances where shown on the Approved Plans and in accordance with the Standard Drawings. B. Butterfly valves shall be used for open/closed operations and throttling service and frequent operation after long periods of inactivity. C. In general, butterfly valves shall be used when valves are required on pipelines 18" and larger and where the use of a motor-operated valve is required as shown on the Approved Plans. Butterfly valves smaller than 18" shall only be used as indicated on the Approved Plans or with the prior approval of the City Engineer. D. Valves for pipelines sized 16" and smaller generally require resilient wedge gate valves (RWGV's) in accordance with Section 15100. E. All valves shall be of at least the same pressure class as the adjoined pipe. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals are required per Section 2-5.3 including an affidavit from the valve manufacturer showing the following: 1. Actuators used were furnished and installed by the valve manufacturer. 2. Valves have successfully passed hydrostatic testing per AWWA C504 and coatings testing by the valve manufacturer. JUNE 2008 1of6 SECTION 15102 Butterfly Valves (BFV's) B. The valve manufacturer's catalog data showing the size to be used, valve dimensions, pressure rating and materials of construction. C. Actuator manufacturer's catalog data and detail construction sheets showing the dimensions, materials, number of turns, and required torque input of the actuator to be used. D. Manufacturer's catalog data and proof of NSF certification on the lining materials to be used. 1.6 SIZING OF VALVES Valves shall be the same size as the line in which they are installed unless otherwise shown on the Approved Plans. 1.7 VALVE ENDS Valve ends shall be flanged ductile-iron unless otherwise called for on the Approved Plans or as directed by the City Engineer. Ductile-iron flanges shall generally be in accordance with AWWA C115, rated at a working pressure of 1,724 KPa (250 psi). When Class 250 butterfly valves are shown on the Approved Plans or are otherwise required, ductile-iron flanges shall be compatible with AWWA C207, Class "F". Maximum working pressure of the flange shall be as specified in AWWA or ASME/ANSI. Flanges shall be integrally cast per AWWA C110. 1.8 VALVE TESTING Butterfly valves shall be hydrostatically tested and coatings holiday detected prior to shipment to the field. Valves delivered to the site prior to successful hydrostatic testing and holiday detection will be subject to rejection. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Valves shall be delivered and stored in accord with AWWA C504 and AWWA C550. The port openings shall be covered with plastic, cardboard or wood while in transit and during storage in the field. These covers shall remain in place until the valve is ready to be installed. Valves shall not be stored in contact with bare ground. Valves shall not be stacked. 1.10 CORROSION PROTECTION Buried Valves: All bolted connections and bolted valve components shall be coated with Wax Tape in accordance with Section 09902 and the entire valve encased in polyethylene in accordance with Section 15000. JUNE 2008 2 of 6 SECTION 15102 Butterfly Valves (BFV's) PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 BUTTERFLY VALVES (BFV) A. Butterfly valves and appurtenant components and materials shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. B. Butterfly valves shall be short body, leak-tight closing, and rubber-seated in accordance with AWWA C504 except as modified herein. C. Except as modified below, BFV's shall be Class 1 506 in accordance with AWWA C504, rated for a flow velocity of 16 ft/s. D. Where the static pressure of the pipeline in which the BFV is to be installed exceeds 1.03 Pa (150psi), a Class 250B butterfly valve in general conformance with AWWA C504 shall be required. Class 250B butterfly valves shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering or delivery. E. Butterfly valves shall open by turning left (counterclockwise). Valve disc shall rotate ninety degrees (90°) from the full open position to the tight shut position. F. Butterfly valve interior and exterior surfaces shall be coated as described below. 2.2 MANUAL VALVE ACTUATORS A. General: 1. All valve actuators shall be watertight, designed for buried or submerged uses. Actuators shall be fully gasketed, sealed, and factory packed with grease. 2. As directed by the City Engineer, actuators for valves located above ground or in vaults and structures may have hand wheels or chain wheels. Minimum hand wheel diameter shall be 12"). The actuator shall be equipped with a dial indicator, which shows the position of the valve disc. The City Engineer may require the use of 2" square operating nuts in some cases. 3. Actuators for valves shall be provided with a 2" square-operating nut when buried or when indicated on the Approved Plans. 4. Actuators shall have travel stops, which can be adjusted in the field without having to remove the actuator from the valve. 5. Actuators shall be sized for opening and closing the valve at the valve's full rated working pressure and at a flow velocity of 16 ft/s. 6. Actuators shall accept a minimum of 300 foot-pounds of input torque at the full open and full closed positions without damage to the actuator or the valve. JUNE 2008 3 of 6 SECTION 15102 Butterfly Valves (BFV's) 7. Actuators equipped with 2" operator nuts shall require a maximum input torque of 150 foot-pounds to operate the valve. A maximum input torque of 80 foot-pounds shall be required to operate valves with hand wheels. 8. Actuators shall be of the same manufacturer as the valve where possible or as directed by the City Engineer. 9. Actuators shall be installed, adjusted, tested and certified by the valve manufacturer prior to shipping. 10. Actuators shall require a maximum of one hundred (100) input turns for the complete ninety-degree (90°) movement of the disc. 11. Actuators shall receive an epoxy coating on the exterior surface as described below. B. Traveling Nut Actuators: 1. Actuators for butterfly valve sizes 18" through 24" may be the manual traveling nut type. Traveling nut actuators shall not be used on valves requiring motor driven actuators or where the City has specified a worm gear type actuator. 2. Actuators shall be capable of producing the below listed output torque at the closed position: Valve Size in mm (inches) Output Torque Nm (foot-pounds) 450(18") 3729(2750) 500 (20") 3729 (2750) 600 (24") 6372 (4700) C. Worm Gear Type Actuators: 1. Actuators for butterfly valve 30" or larger shall be the worm gear type. In addition, worm gear type actuators shall be used on butterfly valves requiring motor driven actuators or where the City has specified a worm gear actuator. 2. Worm gear actuators shall be totally enclosed and self-locking. 2.3 EPOXY LINING AND COATING Epoxy linings and coatings for valves and actuators shall be provided in accordance with AWWA C210, C213 and C550, with the following modifications: A. Epoxy lining and coating of valve surfaces shall be performed by the manufacturer in a facility with qualified personnel, where the environment can be controlled. Epoxy lining and coating of valves in the field is prohibited. JUNE 2008 4 of 6 SECTION 15102 Butterfly Valves (BFVs) B. Repairs made to shop-applied coatings shall be performed in a facility with qualified personnel, where the environment can be controlled. The facility shall be one that is approved by the valve manufacturer. C. Surface preparation shall be as detailed in SSPC-SP5 White Metal Blast Cleaning. D. Liquid epoxy lining and coating materials shall be listed in the NSF Listing for Drinking Water Additives, Standard 61, certified for use in contact with potable water. E. The minimum dry film thickness for epoxy linings shall be 0.008". Liquid epoxy lining shall be applied in two (2) coats in accordance with AWWA C210. F. Powder epoxy coating materials shall contain one hundred percent (100%) solids, in accordance with AWWA 213. 2.4 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and the Approved Materials List. 2.5 CONCRETE Concrete used for anchor or thrust blocks shall be Class 560-C-3250 as specified in section 03000. 2.6 WAX TAPE COATING Wax Tape shall be provided in accordance with Section 09902 and the Approved Materials List. 2.7 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT Polyethylene encasement shall be provided in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install valves with the bolt holes straddling the vertical and horizontal centerlines of pipe, with the operating nut in the vertical position, unless otherwise noted on the Approved Plans. B. Valves shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendation in accordance with the applicable specification for the piping material and joint type being used for the valve and the water main. C. Joints shall be cleaned and installed in accordance with Section 15056. JUNE 2008 5 of 6 SECTION 15102 Butterfly Valves (BFV's) 3.2 FLANGE INSULATING KITS Flange insulating kits shall be installed where shown on the Approved Plans in accordance with Standard Drawing. 3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION Buried Valves: All bolted connections and bolted valve components shall be coated with Wax Tape in accordance with Section 09902 and the entire valve encased in polyethylene in accordance with Section 15000. Exposed Valves: The exterior of valves installed above ground or exposed in vaults or enclosures shall be field painted in accordance with Section 09900. 3.4 CONCRETE Concrete thrust, anchor, and support blocks shall be installed as called for in the Standard Drawings. The concrete shall be placed so that valves and valve operators will be accessible for repairs or replacement. 3.5 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. 3.6 DISINFECTION OF THE VALVES Disinfection and flushing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15041, as part of the process of disinfecting the main pipeline. The valves shall be operated during the disinfection period to completely disinfect all internal parts. 3.7 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Valves shall be hydrostatically tested in conjunction with the pipeline in which it is connected in accordance with Section 15044. END OF SECTION JUNE 2008 6 of 6 SECTION 15102 Butterfly Valves (BFV's) SECTION 15108 AIR RELEASE VALVE, AIR AND VACUUM VALVE, AND COMBINATION AIR VALVE ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes the materials and installation instructions for above ground air release valve, air and vacuum valve, and combination air valve assemblies. The term "air valve" is used generically in this specification to refer to requirements common to all of the specified air release valves, air and vacuum valves, and combination air valves. Otherwise, the various types of air valves are addressed by the individual designations commonly used in AWWA and industry standards. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. American Water Works Association (AWWA) C512 Standards for Combination Air Valve Assemblies 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings CMWD Standard Specifications 09900, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15056, 15057, 15061, 15064, 15100, 16640 1.4 SERVICE APPLICATION A. Combination air valves are generally installed on all potable and recycled water mains at high points and where shown on the Approved Plans and in accordance with the Standard Drawings. B. Unless otherwise directed by the City Engineer, combination air valves will be required as indicated below: 1. 2" combination air valve assemblies shall be installed on pipeline sizes 6" and 8". 2. 2" combination air valve assemblies shall be installed on pipeline sizes 10" and 12". 3. Multiple 2" and 4" combination air valve assemblies shall be installed on pipeline sizes 16" and 20". 4. 6" combination air valve assemblies shall be installed on pipeline sizes 24" through 36". C. Air release valves and air and vacuum valves shall be installed in accordance with the Approved Plans or as directed by the City Engineer. JUNE 2008 1of4 SECTION 15108 Air Release Valve, Air and Vacuum Valve, and Combination Air Valve Assemblies 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Valves shall be delivered and stored in accordance with AWWA C550. The port openings shall be covered with plastic, cardboard, or wood while in transit and during storage in the field. These covers shall remain in place until the valve is ready to be installed. Valves shall not be stored in contact with bare ground. Valves shall not be stacked. 1.6 RECYCLED WATER IDENTIFICATION Air valve assemblies and enclosures used for recycled water shall be identified with purple-colored coating, identification labels or signs in accordance with Section 1500. 1.7 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification tape shall be installed for air valve assemblies in accordance with Section 15000. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 COMBINATION AIR VALVES A. Combination air valves and appurtenant components and materials suitable for the system pressure shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. B. Combination air valves shall comply with AWWA C512 except as modified herein. C. 2" combination air valves shall be the single-body type incorporating stainless steel internal components and National Pipe Threaded (NPT) inlet and outlet configurations. D. 4" and 6" Combination Air Valves shall be the single-body type. Valves shall incorporate stainless steel internal components, protective hood and flanged inlet. E. Internal protective epoxy coatings shall be provided in accordance with AWWA C550. 1. Liquid epoxy lining and coating materials shall be listed in the NSF Listing for Drinking Water Additives, Standard 61, certified for use in contact with potable water. 2. The minimum dry film thickness for epoxy linings shall be 0.008". Liquid epoxy lining shall be applied in two (2) coats in accordance with AWWA C210. JUNE 2008 2 Of 4 SECTION 15108 Air Release Valve, Air and Vacuum Valve, and Combination Air Valve Assemblies 2.3 ENCLOSURES Air Valve Enclosures shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.4 CONCRETE Concrete used for anchor or thrust blocks and equipment pads shall be in accordance with Section 03000. 2.5 BREAK-AWAY BOLTS Combination air valves, air release valves and air and vacuum valves located above ground sized 4" and larger shall be installed with break-away bolts in accordance with the Standard Drawings and selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.6 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.7 FIELD PAINTING AND COATING Field painting and coating materials shall be in accordance with Section 09900 and selected from the Approved Materials List. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Air valve assemblies shall be provided as shown on the Approved Plans. Additional air valve assemblies may be required in areas of potential air entrapment, at the discretion of the City Engineer. B. Air valve assemblies shall be installed relative to street improvements in accordance with the Standard Drawings. C. Connections for the air valve assemblies shall be made within a section of the main line no closer than 24" to a bell, coupling, joint or fitting. 3.2 CONCRETE Concrete thrust or anchor blocks and equipment pads shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Drawings. 3.3 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. JUNE 2008 3 of 4 SECTION 15108 Air Release Valve, Air and Vacuum Valve, and Combination Air Valve Assemblies 3.4 DISINFECTION Air valve assemblies shall be disinfected in accordance with Section 15041 in conjunction with disinfecting the main to which it is connected. The assembly valves shall be operated and the assembly flushed to completely disinfect all internal parts. 3.5 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Air valve assemblies shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with Section 15044 in conjunction with the pipeline to which they are connected. 3.6 FIELD PAINTING AND COATINGS A. Field repairs to the enclosure shall not be permitted. Enclosures requiring repairs to the coating shall be returned to the supplier or coating vendor for repairs or recoating. END OF SECTION JUNE 2008 4 of 4 SECTION 15108 Air Release Valve, Air and Vacuum Valve, and Combination Air Valve Assemblies SECTION 15112 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials, installation, and testing of reduced-pressure backflow prevention devices and check valve and double check valve assemblies. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. State of California Department of Health Services Division of Drinking Water and Environmental Management, Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies for Service Isolation. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Agencies of Jurisdiction Rules and regulations regarding "Cross Connection Control and Backflow Prevention" CMWD Standard Drawings CMWD Standard Specifications 09900, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15056, 15057, 15061, 15064 and 15100 1.4 SERVICE APPLICATION A. Reduced-pressure backflow prevention assemblies shall be provided on all commercial, industrial irrigation and multi-family water services. B. Reduced-pressure backflow prevention assemblies shall be provided on all irrigation services by potable and recycled water. C. Reduced-pressure backflow prevention assemblies shall be provided on potable water services where recycled water, well water or any other water supply is served to the same property. D. Reduce pressure backflow preventers assemblies shall be provided at all points of connections to City sources at construction sites. E. Double check detector assemblies shall be provided on all fire services. F. The City shall be the final authority as to the location, installation, and type of backflow prevention device required. JUNE 2008 1of4 SECTION 15112 Backflow Preventers 1.5 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS A. The Design and construction of the backflow prevention assembly shall meet the requirements called for in this specification except that any modifications specifically shown on the Approved Plans shall take precedence over these general standards. B. The nominal size of the backflow prevention device shall be equal to or greater than the size of the purchased meter. For example, a 1" meter shall have a 1" or larger backflow device. C. The assembly shall include same size valves located on either side of the backflow prevention assemblies. Four test cocks shall be appropriately located on the assembly for testing and certification. D. The nominal size of double check detector assemblies shall be as shown on the Approved Plans or as directed by the Fire Department. E. Enclosures and concrete slabs shall be provided only as shown on the Approved Plans. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Backflow prevention assemblies shall be delivered and stored in accordance with AWWA C210, AWWA C213, and AWWA C550. The port openings shall be covered with plastic, cardboard, or wood while in transit and during storage in the field. These covers shall remain in place until the backflow assembly is ready to be installed. Backflow assemblies shall not be stored in contact with bare ground. Backflow assemblies shall not be stacked. 1.7 RECYCLED WATER IDENTIFICATION Backflow prevention assemblies and enclosures for recycled water shall be identified with purple-colored coating, identification labels, or signs in accordance with Section 15000. 1.8 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be installed for backflow prevention assemblies in accordance with Section 15000. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLIES Backflow prevention assemblies shall be among those listed on the list of "Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies for Service Isolation" as issued by the State of California Department of Health Services, Division of Drinking Water and Environmental Management. JUNE 2008 2 of 4 SECTION 15112 Backflow Preventers 2.2 CONCRETE Concrete used for slabs and anchor or thrust blocks shall be in accordance with Section 03000. 2.3 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and the Approved Materials List. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall comply with the latest edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code, applicable local agency and City requirements. B. Backflow prevention assemblies shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Drawings. C. Water service and fire service shut-off valves will be secured closed during installation until an approved backflow prevention device is installed and tested in compliance with this specification. D. When static pressure exceeds 1.03MPa (150psi), or when recommended by the backflow device manufacturer, a pressure-reducing valve shall be installed as shown on the Standard Drawings. 3.2 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. 3.3 CONCRETE Concrete thrust or anchor blocks and slabs shall be installed in accordance with Standard Drawings. 3.4 ENCLOSURES Enclosures shall be installed where shown on the Approved Plans in accordance with the Standard Drawings. 3.5 DISINFECTION Disinfection and flushing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15041, as part of the process of disinfecting the main pipeline. The backflow assemblies shall be operated during the disinfection period to completely disinfect all internal parts. JUNE2008 3of4 SECTION 15112 Backflow Preventers 3.6 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Backflow assemblies shall be hydrostatically tested in conjunction with the pipeline to which they are connected in accordance with Section 15044. 3.7 TESTING The City will inspect and initially test each backflow prevention assembly after inspection of its proper installation is complete. Required maintenance of the backflow prevention device and appurtenances and annual testing of the device shall be the private owner's responsibility. END OF SECTION JUNE2008 4of4 SECTION 15112 Backflow Preventers SECTION 15121 PIPING EXPANSION COMPENSATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Flexible pipe connections. 1.02 Design Criteria A. Base expansion calculations on 50 degrees F installation temperature to 210 degrees F for hot water heating, 350 degrees for steam and condensate and 140 degrees F for domestic hot water, plus 30 percent safety factory. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Flexible pipe connector shop drawing data to include maximum allowable temperature and pressure rating, overall face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure and total number of wires in braid. C. Expansion joint shop drawings to include maximum allowable temperature and pressure rating, and maximum expansion compensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Flexible Pipe Connections A. For steel piping construct with stainless steel inner hose and braided exterior sleeve. B. For copper piping construct with bronze inner hose and braided exterior sleeve. C. Use connectors suitable for minimum 125 psi WSP and 450 degrees F and 200 psi WOG and 250 degrees F. D. Approved manufacturer: Flexonics, Product: SERIES 401M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. B. Accomplish structural work and provide equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping, loops and pipe offsets. C. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Piping Expansion Compensation Specifications 15121-1 SECTION 15139 FIRE HYDRANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes the materials for and installation of fire hydrant assemblies. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings CMWD Standard Specifications 09900, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15056, 15061, 15064, and 15100 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Hydrant outlet sizes and configuration shall be as shown on the Approved Plans or as directed by the fire department of jurisdiction. B. Hydrants shall generally have the following number and size of outlets as directed by the fire department of jurisdiction: 1. Residential: One 2-1/2" outlet and one 4" outlet 2. Commercial: Two 2-1/2" outlets and one 4" outlet 3. Industrial: One 2-1/2" outlet and two 4" outlets 1.5 SERVICE APPLICATION A. Fire hydrants shall be installed on potable water mains as shown on the approved drawings. B. Wet-barrel hydrants shall generally be used for pressures up to 1.38 MPa (200 psi). System pressures up to and including 1.03 MPa (150 psi) require standard wet-barrel hydrants, and pressures up to 1.38 MPa (200 psi) require high-pressure wet-barrel hydrants in accordance with the Approved Materials List. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Fire hydrants shall be delivered and stored in accordance with AWWA C210, AWWA C213, and AWWA C550. The port openings shall be covered with plastic, cardboard or wood while in transit and during storage in the field. These covers shall remain in place until the valve is ready to be installed. Fire hydrants shall not be stored in contact with bare ground. Fire hydrants shall not be stacked. 1.7 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be installed for fire hydrant assemblies in accordance with Section 15000. JUNE 2008 1of3 SECTION 15139 Fire Hydrants PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 HYDRANTS A. Fire hydrants and appurtenances shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. B. Wet-barrel fire hydrants shall comply with AWWA C503 and these specifications unless otherwise indicated on the Approved Drawings. C. All outlets shall be provided with National Standard Fire-Hose Threads. Outlets shall be equipped with plastic caps. D. Wet-barrel fire hydrant flanges and appurtenant bury ells and spools shall incorporate a six-hole bolt pattern. 2.2 BOLTS AND NUTS A. Hydrant flange bolts and nuts shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. B. Wet barrel fire hydrants not equipped with break-off check valves shall be installed with break-away flange bolts selected from the Approved Materials List. The hollow shafts of break-away bolts shall be filled with silicone sealant. Bolts and nuts shall be zinc-plated A307 carbon steel in accordance with Section 15000. 2.3 CONCRETE Concrete used for splash pads, thrust or anchor blocks shall be in accordance with the Standard Drawings. 2.4 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape materials shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and the Approved Materials List. 2.5 FIELD PAINTING AND COATING Field painting and coating materials shall be in accordance with Section 09900 in accordance with the Approved Materials List. JUNE 2008 2 of 3 SECTION 15139 Fire Hydrants PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Fire hydrant assemblies shall be installed at locations shown on the Approved Plans or as directed by the fire department of jurisdiction in accordance with the Standard Drawings. B. The location and port orientation of the Fire Hydrant shall be in accordance with the Standard Drawings. C. Fire hydrant flange bolts shall be set with nuts on top. Torque nuts uniformly and progressively in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Fill the hollow bolt shafts of break-away bolts with silicone sealant. D. Depending on location, fire hydrant assemblies may require protection posts or concrete retaining walls. When required by the City Engineer, or when shown on the Approved Plans, protection posts or retaining walls shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Drawings. 3.2 CONCRETE Concrete thrust and anchor blocks shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Drawings. 3.3 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. 3.4 DISINFECTION OF FIRE HYDRANT The fire hydrant assembly shall be disinfected in accordance with Section 15041, as part of the process of disinfecting the main pipeline. The assembly valves shall be operated and the assembly flushed to completely disinfect all internal parts. 3.5 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Fire hydrant assemblies shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with Section 15044 in conjunction with the pipeline to which it is connected. 3.6 FIELD PAINTING AND COATING The fire hydrant exterior shall be field painted in accordance with Section 09900. END OF SECTION JUNE 2008 3 of 3 SECTION 15139 Fire Hydrants SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Pipe, duct and equipment hangers, supports and associated anchors. B. Equipment bases and supports. C. Sleeves and seals. D. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks. 1.02 Quality Assurance A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13. B. Supports for Standpipes: In conformance with NFPA 14. C. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Pipe and Duct Hangers and Supports A. Pipe Support: All piping shall be supported in such a manner that it is securely attached to the structure of the building. Attachment shall be capable of supporting the tributary weight of the pipe and contents in any direction. 1. Pipes, ducts, and conduits shall be supported and braced per OSHPD anchorage pre-approval No. OPA-0349, the Mason Industries "Seismic Restraints Guidelines for Suspended Piping, Ductwork and Electrical Systems" or No. OPA- 0114, the "B-Line Seismic Restraint System" or OPA-0300, the "Tolco Seismic Restraint Systems Guidelines." 2. The maximum support spacing for vertical and horizontal pipes shall be as required by the California Plumbing Code, Chapter 3, but not less than that indicated in the table below for horizontal piping. Maximum Spacing for Horizontal Pipes Water / Waste Hanger Pipe Rod Cast Nat. Med. Size Size Copper Steel Iron Gas Gases 1/2" 3/8" 6' 6' - 6' 6' 3/4" 3/8" 6' 8' - 8' 8' 1" 3/8" 6' 8' - 8' 8' 1-1/4" 3/8" 6' 8' - 10' 10' 1-1/2" 3/8" 6' 10' 10' 10' 10' 2" 3/8" 10' 10' 10' 10' 10' 2-1/2" 1/2" 10' 10' 10' 10' 10' 3" 1/2" 10' 10' 10' 10' 10' 4" 5/8" 10' 10' 10' 10' 10' 6" 5/8" 10' 10' 10' 10' 10' 8" 5/8" 10' 10' 10' 10' 10' B. Duct Supports: The maximum support spacing for ducts shall be as required by the California Mechanical Code Chapter 10 and SMACNA. C. Arrange hangers to prevent transmission of vibration from piping/ducting to building structure and allow for expansion and contraction to hangers and supports. Clearance for application of specified insulation without cutting pipeline covering or fitting covering in installation of pipe hangers and fittings shall be provided. Uninsulated copper or brass pipe or tubing shall be isolated from ferrous hangers or supports as indicated herein. Where concealed piping may be supported from structural floor, provide angle members Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Supports and Anchors Specifications 15140-1 to span joint or distribute load of additional members. All hangers and pipe\duct supports that are exposed to weather shall be made of galvanized steel. D. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Carbon Steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. E. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches and Cold Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. F. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. G. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over. H. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. I. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp; adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over. J. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. K. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches and All Cold Pipe Sizes: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange and concrete pier or steel support. L. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. M. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated or felt lines. N. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shield over insulation in 180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support. O. Shield for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger (Except Cold Water Piping): Pipe covering protective saddles. P. Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Hard block non- conducting saddles in 90 degree segments, 12 inch minimum length, block thickness same as insulation thickness. Q. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. 2.02 Manufacturers - Seismic Bracing A. Systems: Products of B-Line, Inc., Oakland, CA, are the standard of quality required and specified herein. Similar products of other manufacturers meeting the same standards of performance and approved by OSHPD may be submitted for approval. 2.03 Inserts A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.04 Flashing A. Metal Flashing: 24 gage galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing: 5 Ib/sq ft sheet lead for waterproofing; one Ib/sq ft sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Flexible Flashing: 1/16-inch thick sheet compatible with roofing. D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. 2.05 Equipment Curbs A. Fabricate curbs as detailed on the drawings. 2.06 Sleeves A. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel. C. Sleeves, for Pipes through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed as specified in Division 7, Firestopping. D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. F. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible, as specified in Division 7, Insulation. G. Sealant: 1. Non-fire rated applications: polyurethane, two-component type. 2. Fire-rated applications: single component, fire rated. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Supports and Anchors Specifications 15140-2 2.07 Fabrication A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. C. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 2.08 Finish A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Inserts A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts flush with slab surface. D. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut [above] [flush with top of] [recessed into and grouted flush with] slab. 3.02 Pipe Hangers and Supports A. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2-inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. B. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. C. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. D. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. E. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 3.03 Equipment Bases and Supports A. Provide equipment bases of type indicated on drawings. B. Provide templates, anchor bolts and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.04 Flashing A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 7 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one-inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and calk, metal counterflash and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor, shower, mop sink, drains and floor sinks watertight to adjacent materials with Noble Seal 40 mil thick. E. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms, installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for sound control. 3.05 Sleeves A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth and provide floor plate. C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and fire rated calk seal in accordance with Division 7. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. D. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Supports and Anchors Specifications 15140 - 3 SECTION 15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Identification of mechanical products installed under Division 15. 1.02 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size and color-coding for mechanical identification. C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Seton Name Plate Company. B. Brady Company 2.02 Materials A. Color: Unless specified otherwise, conform with ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. C. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 2-inch diameter with smooth edges and brass chain. D. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters; identified as indicated below, including direction of flow: System Letters Refrigerant Suction Line R.S.L. Refrigerant Liquid Line R.L.L. Control Compressed Air C.C.A. Pumped Condensate P.C. Gravity Condensate G.C. Domestic Cold Water D.C.W. Domestic Hot Water D.H.W. Domestic Hot Water Return D.H.W.R. Compressed Air C.A. Fire Protection FS Natural Gas NG E. Stencil Paint: In accordance with Painting Section, semi-gloss enamel. F. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape of not less than 6 inch wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Preparation Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Mechanical Identification Specifications 15190-1 A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.02 Installation A. Plastic Nameplates: Install with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners or adhesive. B. Metal Tags: Install with brass chain. C. Stencil Painting: Apply in accordance with Painting Section. D. Equipment: Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with metal tags. E. Controls: Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. F. Valves: Identify valves in main and branch piping with brass tags. Obtain existing numbering from Owner and continue existing sequence. G. Piping: Identify piping, concealed or exposed with stenciled painting. Tags may be used on small diameter piping. Identify service, flow direction and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and "T", at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure and at each obstruction. H. Ductwork: Identify ductwork with stenciled painting. Identify as to air handling unit number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure and at each obstruction. 3.03 Valve Chart and Schedule A. Provide valve charts and schedules in aluminum frame with clear plastic shield. Install at location as approved. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Mechanical Identification Specifications 15190 - 2 SECTION 15245 VIBRATION ISOLATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Vibration isolation. 1.02 Quality Assurance A. Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load condition. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate vibration isolator locations with static and dynamic load on each, on shop drawings and described on product data. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.04 Certificates A. Submit manufacturer's certificate that isolators are properly installed and properly adjusted to meet or exceed specified requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Approved Manufacturers A. Mason Industries. B. California Dynamics Corp. 2.02 Vibration Isolators A. Vibration isolators for utility set exhaust fans, air compressors and other motor driven equipment requiring isolation shall be CALDYN TYPE RJ or approved equal in Mason. B. Spring isolators for piping shall be CALDYN TYPE HH or approved equal in Mason. C. Isolators shall be pre-approved by OSHPD. 2.03 Fabrication A. Provide pairs of neoprene side snubbers or restraining springs where side torque or thrust may develop. B. Select springs to operate at 2/3 maximum compression strain with 1/4 inch ribbed neoprene pads. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install vibration isolators for motor driven equipment. B. Provide spring isolators on piping connected to isolated equipment as follows: Up to 4 inch diameter, first three points of support; 5 to 8 inch diameter, first four points of support; 10 inch diameter and over, first six points of support. Static deflection of first point shall be twice deflection of isolated equipment. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Vibration Isolation Specifications 15245 -1 SECTION 15260 PIPING INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 Quality Assurance A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application with five years minimum experience. B. Materials: Flame spread smoke developed rating of 25-50 in accordance with ASTM E84. C. Compliance: All insulating material shall meet the minimum requirements of California Energy Commission's Latest Energy Efficiency Standards. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Providing work under this section shall be company licensed by the State as an insulation contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Approved Manufacturers A. Water Piping Insulation: 1. Knauf Fiberglass. 2. Owens-Corning Fiberglas. 3. Johns Mansville. B. Refrigerant Piping Insulation: 1. Armaflex 520 2. Halstead Insul-Tube 3. Rubatex 2.02 Insulation A. Material: One-piece molded glass fiber with factory applied fire retardant jacket with 4" wide longitudinal lap. Service up to 850 degrees F. Schuller International, Inc. "Micro- Lok". B. Material: Flexible foamed pipe insulation. 2.03 Jackets A. Interior Applications: 1. Vapor Barrier Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier with self-sealing adhesive joints. 2. PVC Jackets: One-piece, premolded type. 3. Canvas Jackets: UL listed treated cotton fabric, 8-oz/sq yd. B. Exterior Applications: 1. Aluminum Vapor Barrier Jackets: ASTM B209; 0.020 inch thick; smooth finish. 2.04 Accessories A. Insulation Bands: 3/4 inch wide; 0.015-inch thick galvanized steel. B. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015-inch thick aluminum. C. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting mineral wool. D. Finishing Cement: ASTM C449. E. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation. F. Refrigerant Pipe Insulation Exterior Finish: WB Armaflex finish by Armstrong or Rubatex Protective Coating 67 x 944. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Preparation A. Install materials after piping has been tested and approved. 3.02 Installation Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Piping Insulation Specifications 15260-1 A. Water Piping Insulation: 1. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. 3. In exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. 4. On insulated piping with vapor barrier, insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections and expansion joints. 5. On insulated piping without vapor barrier and piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations. 6. Provide an insert not less than 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation between support shield and piping, but under the finish jacket, on piping 2 inches diameter or larger to prevent insulation from sagging at support points. Inserts shall be cellular glass or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts may be used. 7. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions and interruptions. 8. Where pipe hangers are equipped with rollers, provide a 16 ga. Galvanized shield, covering 180° of the insulation circumference between rollers and high density insert supported piping. 9. Jackets: a. Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature shall have standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Insulate fittings, joints and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe and finish with glass cloth and adhesive. PVC jackets may be used. b. Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated dual-temperature pipes or pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature (including roof drains and condensate lines) shall have vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Insulate fittings, joints and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe, and finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive. c. Indoor, Exposed Applications: For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces, insulate as for concealed applications. Finish with canvas jacket; size for finish painting. Do not use PVC jackets. d. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jackets. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping. Insulate fittings, joints and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. B. Refrigerant Piping Insulation: 1. For condensing units, install insulation on above ground refrigerant suction piping and fittings, including thermal bulb, from thermal expansion valve. For spilt system heat pump units, install insulation on above ground refrigerant liquid and suction piping and fittings. Install insulation on above ground not gas bypass lines. 2. Install insulation in snug contact with pipe and in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations: a. Insulate flexible pipe connectors. b. Insulate thermal expansion valves with insulating tape. c. Insulate fittings with sheet insulation and as recommended by Manufacturer. 3. Slip insulation on tubing before tubing sections and fittings are assembled keeping slitting of insulation to a minimum. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Piping Insulation Specifications 15260-2 4. Install insulation on lines through clamp assembly of pipe support. Do not butt insulation up against sides of clamp assembly. Install sleeve around insulation at each clamping location to prevent crushing of insulation when clamp is tightened. 5. Stagger joints on layered insulation. Seal joints in insulation. 6. Install insulation exposed outside building so "slit" joint seams are placed on bottom of pipe. 7. Paint exterior exposed insulation with two coats of specified exterior finish. 3.03 Schedule of Insulation Thickness Insulation thickness and conductivity shall be as required by the latest California Energy Commission Standards but not less than that indicated in the table below: Nominal Pipe Diameter (in inches) Fluid Temp. Range °F Conductivity Range (in BTU Inch Per Hour Per SF °F Insulation Mean Rating Temp. °F 1& Less 1.25-2 2.50-4 5-6 8& Larqer Service Water Heating Systems Above 105 0.24-0.28 100 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 Cooling Systems (Refrigerant & Condensate Drain Lines) 40-60 0.23-0.27 75 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 Below 40 0.23-0.27 75 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Piping Insulation Specifications 15260 - 3 SECTION 15290 DUCTWORK INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Ductwork insulation. B. Insulation jackets. C. Duct liner (thermal and acoustical). D. Exhaust fan ductwork insulation (for Shooting Range only). 1.02 Quality Assurance A. Applicator: Company specializing in ductwork insulation application with five years minimum experience. B. Materials: UL listed; flame spread/fuel contributed/smoke developed rating of 25/50/50 in accordance with ASTM E84. C. Compliance: All insulating material shall meet the minimum requirements of California Energy Commission's latest Energy Efficiency Standards or California Mechanical Code, whichever is higher level, but not less than that specified in this section. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Approved Manufacturers - Insulation A. Schuller International, Inc. B. Owens Corning Fiberglas. C. Certainteed Products Co. D. Thermal Ceramics Fire Master. 2.02 Materials A. Type A: Minimum 1-1/2" thick and 0.75 Ib/cu.ft. minimum density. Flexible glass fiber; ASTM C612; commercial grade; with installed thermal resistance of 4.2. Vapor barrier material with a perm rating not exceeding 0.5 perm. B. Type B: Minimum 1-1/2" thick and 3.0 Ib/cu.ft. minimum density. Rigid glass fiber; ASTM C612; Class 1; with installed conductive value of 0.16 at 75 degrees F or equivalent thermal resistance of 6.3. Vapor barrier material with a perm rating not exceeding 0.5 perm. C. Type C: Minimum 1" thick and 1.5 Ib/cu.ft. minimum density. Flexible glass fiber; ASTM C553; with installed conductive value of 0.16 at 75 degrees F or equivalent thermal resistance of 6.3; coated air side for maximum 5,000 ft./min. air velocity. D. Type D - Vapor Barrier Jacket: Kraft Paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum film. E. Type E - Jacket: 8 oz. canvas finished with lagging adhesive. F. Type F - One-piece molded glass fiber with factory applied fire retardant jacket with 4" wide longitudinal lap. Service up to 850 degrees F. Install aluminum vapor barrier jacket (ASTM B209; 0.020 inch thick; smooth finish. Schuller International, Inc. "Micro-Lok". Insulating cement to be (ASTM C195; hydraulic setting mineral wool. G. Adhesives: Waterproof fire-retardant type. H. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive to ASTM E84. I. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage, and self-adhesive pad. J. Joint Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh. K. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage. L. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Preparation A. Install materials after ductwork has been tested and approved. B. Clean surfaces for adhesives. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Ductwork Insulation Specifications 15290 -1 3.02 Installation A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide insulation with vapor barrier when air conveyed may be below summer ambient temperature. C. Exterior Insulation Concealed Application: 1. Adhere insulation to duct with spot application of fire retardant adhesive in sufficient quantities to prevent sagging. 2. Insulation shall be butted with facing overlapping all joints at least 2" and sealed with fire retardant vapor barrier adhesive. 3. Secure insulation with 18 gauge corrosion resistant wire spaced on 12" centers or secured with outward clinch corrosion resistant staples on 4" center. 4. Duct with a width over 30" shall be further secured on the underside with mechanical fasteners on 18" maximum center. 5. Seal all breaks and punctures with vapor barrier tape and same type of fire retardant adhesive. 6. All transverse and longitudinal joints, seams and penetrations of the vapor barrier facing shall be covered with 4 oz. canvas stripping tape applied and sealer with fire retardant mastic. D. Exterior Insulation Exposed in the Building - Rectangular Duct: 1. Insulation shall be fastened to duct with stick clips with washers. 2. Fasteners shall be spaced 12" to 18" on center with a minimum of two rows per side of duct. 3. Secure insulation in place with washers firmly embedded in insulation. 4. Form corners with 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 26 gauge galvanized steel angle prior to covering with canvas and hold in place with 16 gauge galvanized wire. 5. Seal all joints, breaks, and punctures with fire retardant vapor barrier adhesive. 6. Insulation shall be covered with 8 oz. canvas and sized for finish painting. E. Liner (Type C) Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. Secure insulation with mechanical fasteners on 15-inch centers maximum on top and side of ductwork with dimension exceeding 20 inches. Seal and smooth joints. Do not use nail-type fasteners. Fasteners shall start within 3" of leading edge of transverse joints. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. 2. Ductwork dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for airflow. Increase ductwork to allow for insulation thickness. 3. Line ductwork is a minimum of 25 feet upstream and downstream of supply, return, relief and exhaust fans. Fans for hoods, and direct evaporative coolers, are excluded from this requirement. F. Walk-In Plenum Application: Adhere insulation on interior surface of plenum with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. Secure insulation with mechanical fasteners. Seal and smooth joints. Do not use nail-type fasteners. G. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. H. Exterior Insulation Exposed to Atmosphere (Shooting Range exhaust fans only): 1. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. 3. In exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. 4. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions and interruptions. 5. Jackets: a. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jackets. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal ductwork. Insulate fittings and joints with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining ductwork, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Ductwork Insulation Specifications 15290-2 3.03 Schedule TYPE INSULATION DUCTWORK THICKNESS - INCH Concealed Supply Ducts A,D 1-1/2" Concealed Return Duct A,D 1-1/2" Supply and Return Ducts, Exposed in the Building B 1-1/2" Supply and Return Ducts, Exposed to Atmosphere C 2" Duct Liner for Exhaust Ducts C 1" Duct Liner for Supply & Return Duct (Interior) C 1" Duct Liner for Supply & Return Duct (Exterior) C 2" Exhaust Ducts over Shooting Range, Exposed to Atmosphere F 1" END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Ductwork Insulation Specifications 15290 - 3 SECTION 15330 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. This section covers design equipment, installation, testing and all materials required for the automatic fire sprinkler protection system. B. Contractor shall be responsible for the complete system design, layout, hydraulic calculations, preparation of shop drawings, field installation, coordination and completion in accordance with project requirements and applicable codes and standards. C. Work or equipment not indicated or specified which is necessary for the complete and proper operation of the work of this section in accordance with the true intent and meaning of the contract documents shall be provided by this Contractor and incorporated under this section of the work at no additional cost to the owner. 1.02 Related Work A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. B. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification. C. Division 16 - Electrical 1.03 References A. The system shall meet all requirements of the latest edition of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 13), Installation of Fire Sprinkler Systems, and all other applicable codes and ordinances, whichever are more stringent shall apply. All fire protection equipment shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) for fire protection use and/or approved by Factory Mutual (FM). Test system in accordance with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction with the fire inspector present for system certification. B. Prior to procurement and installation, the contractor shall submit his/her qualifications, shop drawings and hydraulic calculations stamped and signed by a California State Registered Professional Engineer or a C-16 Licensed Contractor, with a minimum of three (3) years related experience, to the authority having jurisdiction. No installation work shall be started until shop drawings and hydraulic calculations have been approved. C. California Building Code (CBC) Chapter 9, Fire Protection System. 1.04 System Description A. System to provide coverage for entire building. B. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system. C. Provide system to hazard occupancy classification required by the authority having jurisdiction. 1.05 Quality Assurance A. Shop Drawing and Product Data: Shop drawings, hydraulic calculations and product literature shall be furnished to the authority having jurisdiction in conformance with NFPA 13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems. B. Equipment and Components: Bear UL/FM label or marking and State Fire Marshal listing. C. Specialist Firm: Company specializing in sprinkler systems with three (3) years experience. 1.06 Regulatory Requirements A. Hydraulic Calculations, Product Data, and Shop Drawings: Bear stamp of approval of City of Carlsbad Fire Marshal. 1.07 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1, per 1999 NFPA 13. B. Include hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, components and accessories, copy of City of Carlsbad Fire Marshal approved Underground Piping Plan, material data sheets and copies of CSFM listings for all fire alarm related devices.. C. Submit shop drawings and hydraulic calculations to City of Carlsbad Fire Protection Plan Checker for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Specifications 15330 -1 1.08 Project Record Documents A. Submit documents under provisions of Division 1. B. Contractor shall provide and keep up-to-date a complete "as-built" record set of blueline prints which shall show every change from the original drawings and the exact "as-built" locations and sizes of the work provided under this section of the specifications. This set shall include locations, dimensions, depth of buried piping, shut-off valves, etc. On completion of the work, this set of prints shall be delivered to the Owner. 1.09 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include written maintenance data on components of system, servicing requirements, and Record Drawings. C. Include maintenance, and inspection data, replacement and part numbers and availability, location and numbers of service depot. 1.10 Extra Stock A. Provide extra sprinklers as required by NFPA 13. B. Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. C. Provide metal storage cabinet in location designated by the architect. 1.11 Design Requirements A. These specifications (Section 15330) are general and are not intended to define specific types of features, devices and appurtenances that are necessary to meet the requirements of the governing authorities mentioned herein. B. It shall be the contractor's complete responsibility to determine in advance of submitting a bid for the work under Section 15330 any areas requiring special consideration due to the type of occupancy or storage of materials. These special requirements shall be incorporated into the automatic fire sprinkler design as necessary to conform with the requirements of NFPA 13, Owner's Insurance Underwriter and all other authorities having jurisdiction. C. It is the contractor's responsibility to verify existing water supply flow and pressure at all points of connection and base hydraulic calculations on this information. D. Prior to design and installation of any work, the contractor shall carefully prepare complete working drawings of the automatic fire sprinkler system. The contractor shall examine the Structural, Architectural, Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical drawings for the construction of the building in order to fully inform himself as to the scope and detail for the work which will be required of him before proceeding. 1.12 Coordination A. Clearances and Openings: Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate his/her work with all other trades to avoid conflict and permit for a neat and orderly appearance of the entire installation. The contractor shall, in advance of the work, furnish instructions to the general contractor as to his/her requirements for equipment and material installation of any kind, whether or not specifically mentioned on drawings or in the specifications, and shall include recesses, chases in walls, and all required openings in the structure. Should furnishing this information be neglected, delayed or incorrect and additional cuttings are found to be required, the cost of the same shall be charged to this contractor. B. Piping runs found to be in conflict with work of other trades, as a result of neglected coordination, shall be removed and reinstalled in new locations designated by the architect at no additional expense to the owner. 1.13 Protection A. All work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times. Contractor shall repair all damage caused either directly or indirectly by his/her own work persons. Contractor shall also protect his/her own work from damage. He shall close all pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. He shall protect all his/her equipment and materials against direct, water, chemical and mechanical injury. Upon completion, all work shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in a new condition. B. Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage to equipment and materials until he has received written notice from the architect that his/her work has been accepted. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Specifications 15330 - 2 1,14 Uninspected Work A. Contractor shall not allow or cause of his/her work to be covered up before it has been duly inspected, tested and approved by the authorized inspectors having legal jurisdiction over his/her work. Should he fail to observe the above, he shall uncover his/her work and after it has been inspected, tested and approved, recover it at his/her own expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Piping Materials A. Buried Piping: 1. Cast Iron Pipe: ANSI/AWWA C151. a. Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C110, standard thickness. b. Joints: ANSI/AWWA C111, rubber gasket. c. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts and washers. B. Above Ground Inside Building Piping: Piping up to and including 2" diameter shall be steel, Schedule 40 black conforming to ASTM A53. 2-1/2" diameter piping and larger shall be Schedule 10 continuous welded steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-795. Schedule 40 piping shall be threaded using Class 125 cast iron fitting conforming to ANSI B16.4. Schedule 10 piping shall be roll grooved using approved grooved fittings and couplings. 2.02 Piping Specialties A. Automatic Sprinkler Valve: Alarm check valves shall be provided with standard trimmings including retard chamber, pressure gauges, testing bypass, and all necessary pipe, fittings and accessories required for a complete trimming installation, in accordance with NFPA 13. Acceptable alarm check valve is "Tyco" Model AV-1-300 or approved equal. B. Alarm Gong: Electric alarm bell complete with 10 inch diameter gong, vibrating mechanism, 120 VAC, UL approved for outdoor/indoor installation, weatherproof back box for outdoor application and 2 sets of leads for in/out wiring. Potter-Roemer Figure 6230 or approved equal. C. Hose Valve: Straight pattern with red iron wheel handle, chrome plated rated for 300 psig wwp, rough brass, provide hose valves with male threaded outlet with brass cap and chain, equal to Potter-Roemer Model No. 4235. D. Waterflow Detector: Provide a pressure type water flow switch, closed circuit water flow indicators with two sets of S.P.D.T. contacts, UL Listed, 1/2-inch NPT connection, Maximum pressure rating of 250 PSI NEMA 4 rated, with tamper resistant cover, equal to Potter-Electric Model No. PS10-2A. 1. Electrical connections shall be of rigid conduit type. No plug-in connectors will be permitted. E. Tamper Switches: Provide an approved tamper switch at all fire sprinkler system control and main fire service valves. Tamper switch shall be UL approved and shall meet NFPA requirements. Potter-Roemer Figure 6220 for OS&Y gate valve or approved equal. F. Pressure Gauge: 1. Provide 3-1/2 inch diameter single spring bronze Bourdon tube type gauges with brass case and chrome plated brass ring with heavy glass, equal to Potter Roemer Model No. 6240. 2. Provide gauges at the top of the ach standpipe riser, and at other required locations. 3. Gauges shall be controlled by shut-off valves and shall be provided with a drain outlet. 2.03 Acceptable Manufacturers - Sprinkler Heads A. Reliable B. STAR C. Gem Sprinkler Company D. Viking 2.04 Sprinkler Heads A. All heads shall be quick-response type. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Specifications 15330-3 B. Suspended Ceiling: Reliable Model No. F1FR recessed type with the head and the escutcheon having bright chrome plated finish unless otherwise specified by the Architect. C. Finished Areas Having a Hard Lid: Reliable Model No. F1FR/CCP recessed type with the cover plate having a white finish unless otherwise specified by the Architect. D. Exposed Areas: Reliable Model No. GFR upright type having a bronze finish unless otherwise specified by the Architect. E. Unfinished Areas Requiring Sidewall Heads: Reliable Model No. SW56 having a bronze finish unless otherwise specified by the Architect. F. Finished Areas Requiring Sidewall Heads: Reliable Model No. SWC56 with the cover plate having a white finish unless otherwise specified by the Architect. G. Guards: Reliable model C1 or C2, guard finish to match sprinkler finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Preparation A. Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work. 3.02 Installation - Piping A. Supervision: The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced Superintendent who shall be qualified in all phases of the work of this section and who shall constantly be in charge of the work of this Section. 1. All installations shall be per referenced standards. Follow manufacturer's directions and recommendations in all cases as required for all approvals and warranty enforcement. 2. Any cutting of structure shall be subject to approval by the architect. Beams, decks and other structural components shall not be cut or altered in any way unless previously approved. 3. Provide flexible couplings where required to provide extension capability and sway bracing for earthquake protection per NFPA 13. 4. Entire sprinkler system shall be installed in such a manner so that it can be drained in accordance with NFPA 13. Drains shall be located at suitable points as approved by architect. No primary or auxiliary drain shall be located in any public area or electrical room. All drains shall discharge into dedicated receptors. B. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall as indicated. C. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. D. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. E. Center heads in two directions in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required. F. Apply strippable tape or paper cover to ensure sprinkler head, escutcheons, and cover plates do not receive field paint finish. G. No work shall be covered or enclosed until inspected, tested and approved by architect and authority having jurisdiction. Should any work be concealed before inspection, the contractor shall, at his/her own expense, uncover such work and after it has been inspected, tested and approved, provide for all repairs as may be necessary to restore any other affected work to its original and proper condition. H. Use best of workmanship in the installation of all piping and in particular all piping exposed in areas having no suspended ceilings. Install all piping as high as possible and where possible, install branch piping between structural framing and run main piping only below beams. I. Sprinkler head layout must accommodate ceiling mounted HVAC register and lighting locations. Coordination with work of these trades is the responsibility of contractor. J. Provide concrete thrust blocks for fire water mains and laterals. Construct thrust blocks per Water District's standards. K. Without exception, no piping shall be run under or through any skylight or skylight well. Any additional upright or pendent sprinklers, which may be required by skylight locations, shall be the responsibility of this contractor. L. All pipe penetrations at fire rated walls and floors shall be sealed with fire rated material in accordance with approved UL listed fire seal system assembly. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Specifications 15330-4 3.03 Fabrication A. General: All pipe, fittings, etc., shall be prepared by qualified and trained personnel experienced with the products involved and the recommended methods of preparation. All cuts, threads and grooves shall be made according to applicable codes, standards and accepted good practices. Pipe shall be free of damage, flaws and burrs. Threads and groove shall not be excessively shallow or deep. Fittings shall be made onto pipe no tighter than necessary. Cracked or broken fittings shall be replaced by contractor, without exception. Excess dope and oils shall be removed before shipment to job site. B. Welding: 1. All welding to be shop welded. Contractor shall obtain approval from the Inspector of Records prior to any welding on field. 2. Welding methods shall comply with AWS D10.9, Level AR-3 and ANSI B31.1. Contractor shall be responsible for all welded joints and any qualifying procedures of certification required for welders and related personnel. 3. Holes in pipe for welded outlets shall be cut to full inside diameter of fitting prior to welding in place. Holes shall be free of slag and welding residue and of smooth, continuous bore. Fittings shall not penetrate internal diameter of run piping. Holes shall be cut by hole saw or other rotary bit. Torch cutting of holes is strictly prohibited. 4. All welded pipe shall be subject to inspection by the Inspector of Records before it is installed. Provide documentation of acceptance, as required, at time of project closeout. 3.04 Cleaning A. Thoroughly clean all parts of apparatus and equipment. Exposed parts that are to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster and other materials, and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. B. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with steel brushes to remove the rust and other spots, and left smooth and clean. C. All pipe to be free of cutting oil prior to installation. D. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. 3.05 System Tests A. For pressure test, use a hydrostatic pressure of 50 psi greater than the maximum working pressure of the system, hydrostatic test pressure shall be not less than 200 psi. Hold this pressure not less than 2 hours. Prior to the pressure test, fill that portion of the pipeline being tested with water for a soaking period of not less than 24 hours. For leakage test, use a hydrostatic pressure not less than the maximum pressure of the system. Leakage test may be performed at the same time and at the same test pressure as the pressure test. Repair all leaks and replace piping, fittings and other system components as required, at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Test shall be witnessed by authority having jurisdiction and Architect. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Specifications 15330-5 SECTION 15375 STANDPIPE AND FIRE HOSE SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Dry standpipe system. B. Fire department connection. 1.02 References A. NFPA 14 - Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. 1.03 Quality Assurance A. Conform to NFPA 14. 1.04 Regulatory Requirements A. Conform to UBC Standards, Chapter 60 and NFPA 14 for standpipe and hose system. B. Equipment and Components: Bear UL/FM label or marking. 1.05 Submittals A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Describe supports, components, accessories, and sizes. C. Submit product data to Fire Marshal for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect. 1.06 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data. B. Include valve data, servicing requirements and test schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Piping Materials A. Buried Piping: Ductile iron. B. Above Ground Inside Building: Steel, Schedule 10. 2.02 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Potter-Roemer B. Standard Fire-West C. Seco 2.03 Equipment A. Hose Reel: Cast steel; polished chrome finish; swivel type with pins and water stop. B. Hose 100 feet of latex lined linen 1-1/2" hose; mildew and rot-resistant. C. Nozzle: Brass, chrome plated; combination fog-straight stream and adjustable shut-off nozzle. D. Angle Valve: 1-1/2 inch nominal size, specified in Section 15310. E. Fire Department Inlet Connection: Free-standing type; brass finish; 2-1/2 inch size, thread to match fire department hardware, automatic drip, two-way threaded dust cap and chain of same material and finish, marked "Standpipe - Fire Department Connection". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Locate angle valve in cabinet at 60 inches above floor. Locate fire department connection below angle valve and not closer than 4 inches from side or bottom of cabinet. C. Connect wet standpipe system to water source ahead of domestic water connection. D. Where static pressure exceeds 100 psi at any hose station, provide pressure-reducing valve to prevent pressure on hose exceeding 90 psi. E. Provide two-way fire department outlet connection on roof. F. Provide connection for alarm and supervisory control to building alarm system. 3.02 Cleaning A. Flush entire system of foreign matter. 3.03 System Test A. Hydrostatically test entire system in accordance with NFPA 14. B. Test shall be witnessed by Fire Marshal, Architect and Project Inspector. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Standpipe and Fire Hose System Specifications 15375-1 SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Sanitary sewer piping system. B. Water system. C. Storm water piping system. D. Natural gas piping system. E. Condensate drain piping system. F. Compressed air system. G. Fittings. J. Valves. I. Gas solenoid valve shut-off system. 1.02 Related Work A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. B. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification. C. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation. D. Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties. E. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures. F. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment. 1.03 References A. ANSI B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 NS 300. B. ANSI B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. C. ANSI B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings -DWV. D. ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. E. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. F. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel ,for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. G. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. H. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. I. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. J. AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids. K. AWWA C110 - Ductile - Iron and Gray - Iron Fittings 3 in. through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids. L. AWWA C111- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. M. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. N. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. O. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. P. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. Q. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal. R. AWWA C601 - Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water. S. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9. 1.05 Submittals A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. 1.06 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Deliver products to site. B. Store and protect products. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Piping Specifications 15410-1 C. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Sanitary Sewer and Vent Piping, Buried Within 5 Feet of Building A. Cast Iron Pipe: Hubless, ASTM A74 service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp and shield assemble. B. Polyethylene Encasement: ASTM D1248 polyethylene tube or sheet form to encase cast iron pipe, with minimum 0.004-inch (0.10 mm) thickness. Install encasement as per ASTM A74 and manufacturer's recommendations. 2.02 Sanitary Sewer and Vent Piping, Above Grade A. Cast Iron Pipe: Hubless, ASTM A74, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp- and-shield assemblies. 2.03 Water Piping, Buried Within 5 Feet of Building A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI B16.18, cast copper alloy soler joint pressure fittings. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA. 2.04 Storm Water Piping, Buried Within 5 Feet of Building A. Cast Iron Pipe: Hubless, ASTM A74, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp and shield assemble. B. Polyethylene Encasement: ASTM D1248 polyethylene tube or sheet form to encase cast iron pipe, with minimum 0.004-inch (0.10 mm) thickness. Install encasement as per ASTM A74 and manufacturer's recommendations. 2.05 Storm Water Piping, Above Grade A. Cast Iron Pipe: Hubless, ASTM A74, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp and shield assemble. 2.06 Natural Gas Piping, Below Grade A. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D2513, SDR 11.5. Fittings: ASTM D2683 or ASTM D2513 socket type. Joints: Fusion welded; plastic to steel connections with ASTM D2513 transition fittings or risers. Pipe shall be buried 30 inches deep and backfill with sand, including identification tape and #18 bare copper tracer wire. B. Transition riser from below grade polyethylene pipe to above grade steel pipe; ASTM D2513, Schedule 40 steel epoxy coated casing weld or threaded end, the polyethylene end shall be fusion welded, as manufactured by "Central" or equal. 2.07 Natural Gas Piping, Above Grade A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black. Fittings: ANSI B16.3, malleable iron threaded fittings, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. Joints: Screwed with approved standard threads, or AWS D1.1 welded. B. Steel pipe exposed to weather shall be prime coated and painted. Color as selected by Owner. 2.08 Condensate Drain Piping, Above Grade A. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI B16.29, wrought copper solder joint drainage fittings. Joints: ASTM B32, solder Grade 95TA. Insulate concealed piping with one-inch thick fiberglass insulation with factory applied vapor barrier jacket. 2.09 Compressed Air, Above Ground A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded or welded to ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.9, and ASME Sec 1. 2.10 Flanges, Unions, and Couplings A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; neoprene gaskets for gas service; 1/16 inch thick preformed. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Piping Specifications 15410 - 2 C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction and expansion; "C" shaped composition sealing gasket; steel bolts, nuts and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe. D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, and water impervious isolation barrier. Underground metal piping shall be bonded for electrical continuity. 2.11 Acceptable Manufacturers - Globe Valves A. Crane, Model 1310 B. Stockham, Model B-17 C. Milwaukee, Model 1502 2.12 Globe Valves A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, screwed ends, with backseating capacity. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends. 2.13 Acceptable Manufacturers - Ball Valves A. Apollo, Model 70-200 Series B. Nibco, Model T-113 C. Stockham, Model S-216 2.14 Ball Valves A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, threaded ends. B. Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle, flanged. C. Ball Valves for Fuel Oil: Carbon steel construction, two piece body, chrome plated bronze ball, conforming to ASTM B584 and ASTM B16, PTFE stem packing, pressure rating of 600 psi WOG non-shock, similar to Watts Series B6400. 2.15 Acceptable Manufacturers - Gas Cocks A. Peter Healey, Model 7005 B. Conbraco, Model 50 Series 2.16 Gas Cocks A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, teflon packing, threaded ends. B. Over 2 Inches: Cast iron body and plug, non-lubricated, teflon packing, flanged ends. 2.17 Gas Seismic Valves A. SGV-1: Provide a valve consisting of a swing check valve arrangement with an acceleration-sensitive triggering mechanism. The trip mechanism shall consist of a steel ball resting on a tapered cup-shaped support. The trip mechanism shall be factory set and sealed. A sight glass is provided so that the Open or Closed indicator can be seen, and the trip mechanism status of the valve can be easily determined. The valve assembly shall be certified by the California Sate Architect's Office, approved by the local authority, meet the requirements of ANSI Z21.70 and ASCE 25-97. Equal to Pacific Seismic Products Model No. 316F(60). 2.18 Acceptable Manufacturers - Swing Check Valves A. Crane, Model 1342. B. Stockham, Model B-309. C. Milwaukee, Model 1509. 2.19 Swing Check Valves A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze 45 degree swing disc, solder ends. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, 45 degree swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. 2.20 Acceptable Manufacturers - Relief Valves A. Watts B. Wilkins C. Conbraco Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Piping Specifications 15410 - 3 2.21 Relief Valves A. Bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labeled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Preparation A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.02 Installation A. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. Underground metal piping shall be bonded for electrical continuity. B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints or connected equipment. F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. H. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points. I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 1.5 ft. of cover. J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. K. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. L. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage as indicated on drawings. Maintain gradients. M. Excavate in accordance with Division 2 for work of this Section. N. Backfill in accordance with Division 2 for work of this section. O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. P. Provide one plug cock wrench for every ten plug cocks sized 2 inches and smaller, minimum of one. Provide each plug cock sized 2-1/2 inches and larger with a wrench with set screw. Q. Provide firestopping at fire rated walls, floors or ceiling assemblies under provisions of Division 7. R. Underground metal piping shall be bonded for electrical continuity if rubber gasketed, mechanical, grooved end, or other nonconductive type joints are used. S. Install compressor unit on concrete housekeeping pad. Refer to Division 3. T. Install compressor unit on vibration isolators. Level and bolt in place. Refer to Section 15242. U. Make air cock and drain connection on horizontal casing. V. Install line size gate valve and check valve on compressor discharge. W. Connect condensate drains to nearest floor drain. X. Install valve drip connections at low points of piping system. Y. Install take offs to outlets from top of main, with shut off valve after take-off. Slope take off piping to outlets. Z. Install compressed air couplings, female quick connectors, and pressure gages where outlets are indicated. AA. Install tees instead of elbows at changes in direction of piping. Fit open end of each tee with plug. BB. Identify piping system and components. Refer to Section 15190. 3.03 Field Quality Control A. Compressed Air Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean and test compressed air piping in accordance with ANSI B31.1. B. Repair or replace compressed air piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest to demonstrate compliance. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Piping Specifications 15410 - 4 3.04 Application A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. D. Install gate or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment or part of system. E. Install globe or ball valves for throttling, bypass or manual flow control services. Install access panel in hard ceilings and or walls as indicated on plans. 3.05 Disinfection of Domestic Water Piping System A. Disinfect ion of potable water system shall comply with ANSI/AWWA C651-92. B. When hot and cold water piping, including fixtures, have been installed, tested and accepted. Disinfect the system using any of the three methods of chlorination explained in AWWA C651-92 standard. C. The basic disinfection procedure shall consist of: 1. Preventing contaminating materials from entering the water piping system during storage, construction or repair. 2. Removing, by flushing or other means, those materials that may have entered the water piping system. 3. Chlorinating any residual contamination that may remain, and flushing the chlorinated water from the piping system. 4. Protecting the existing distribution system from backflow due to hydrostatic pressure test and disinfection procedures. 5. Determining the bacteriological quality by laboratory test after disinfect ion. At least one water sample from the existing distribution system shall be tested. 6. Final connection of the water piping system to the active distribution system. D. Submit Record of Compliance: The record of compliance shall be the bacteriological test results certifying the water sampled from the water piping system to be free of coliform bacteria contamination, and to be equal to or better than the bacteriologic water quality in the distribution system. E. Submit Record of Compliance: The record of compliance shall be the bacteriological test results certifying the water sampled from the new water piping to be free of coliform bacteria contamination. 3.06 Tests A. Test entire piping systems, including valves and fittings in accordance with governing codes and ordinances, conduct testing in the presence of Owner's Representative and the local Inspector until satisfactory to both. B. Sanitary Soil, Waste, Storm Drain and Vent Piping: The system shall be tested with ten- foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system for at least fifteen minutes before inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at all points. C. Domestic and Industrial Hot and Cold Water Piping Systems: The system shall be tested and proved tight under a water pressure not less than the working pressure under which it is to be used. The piping shall withstand the test without leaking for a period of not less than fifteen minutes. D. Gas System: The system shall be tested with air, CO2 or nitrogen. The piping shall stand a pressure of not less than ten pounds per square inch gauge pressure, test pressure shall be held for not less than fifteen minutes, with not perceptible drop in pressure. For welded piping and for piping carrying gas at pressures in excess of fourteen inches of water column pressure, the test pressure shall be not less than 60 pounds per square inches and shall be continued for not less than thirty minutes. 3.07 Cleaning Piping Systems A. After piping systems have been tested and proved tight, clean piping systems of dirt, scale, oil, grease, waste and other foreign substances that may have accumulated during the process of installation. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Piping Specifications 15410-5 3.08 Service Connections A. Provide new sanitary sewer service. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connection, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage. B. Provide new water service complete with sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced concrete bridge. Caulk enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material. Anchor service main inside to wall. Provide 18 gage galvanized sheet metal sleeve around service main to 6 inch above floor and 2 feet minimum below grade. Size for minimum of 2 inches of loose batt insulation stuffing. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Piping Specifications 15410 - 6 SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Roof and floor drains. B. Floor sinks. C. Trench drains. D. Cleanouts. E. Backflow preventers. F. Water hammer arresters. G. Hose bibb. H. Trap Primers. I. Valve yard boxes. J. Access panels. 1.02 Related Work A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. B. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping. C. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures. D. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment. 1.03 References A. ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent. B. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. C. ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle. D. ANSI A112.21.1-Floor Drains. E. ANSI A112.21.2-Roof Drains. F. ANSI A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arresters. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout. 1.05 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes and finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Roof Receptor A. RR-1: Lacquered cast iron body with a no hub bottom outlet, 2-inch solid water dam, cast iron dome bottom strainer secured with stainless steel vandal proof screws, underdeck clamp sump receiver, adjustable extension sleeve (for insulation) or perforated or slotted ballast guard extension for inverted roof, see Schedule on drawings for Model number. 2.02 Acceptable Manufacturers - Roof Drains A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn C. Josam 2.03 Roof Drains A. RD-1: ANSI A112.21.2; lacquered cast iron body with sump, removable cast iron dome strainer, membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop with adjustable underdeck clamp roof sump receiver waterproofing flange leveling frame adjustable extension sleeve (for insulation) or perforated or slotted ballast guard extension for inverted roof; see Schedule on drawings for Model number. B. OD-1: Lacquered cast iron body and clamp collar and bottom clamp ring; cast iron dome; pipe extended to 2 inches above flood elevation; see Schedule on drawings for Model number. 2.04 Acceptable Manufacturers - Floor Drains A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Specialties Specifications 15430 -1 C. Josam 2.05 Floor Drains A. FD-1: ANSI A112.21.1; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, round, adjustable polished nickel-bronze strainer; and trap primer connection; see Schedule on drawings for Model number. 2.06 Acceptable Manufacturers - Floor Sinks A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn C. Josam 2.07 Floor Sinks A. FS-1: Lacquered cast iron body, seepage flange; epoxy coated interior, aluminum dome strainer, clamp collar, and square nickel bronze frame and grate, see Schedule on drawings for Model number. 2.08 Acceptable Manufacturers - Trench Drains A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn C. Josam 2.09 Trench Drains A. TD-1: Precast Polyester concrete channel of interlocking design with a built-in slope of 0.6 %, integral metal rail and radiused bottom, secured grate, bottom outlet, 4-inch dome strainer, and suitable for heavy traffic loads; see Schedule on drawings for Model number. 2.10 Acceptable Manufacturers - Cleanouts A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn C. Josam 2.11 Cleanouts A. Exterior Surfaced Areas C.O.Y.B.: Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover. B. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas G.C.O.: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover. C. Interior Finished Floor Areas F.C.O.: Lacquered cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar and adjustable nickel-bronze strainer, round with scoriated cover in service areas and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. D. Interior Finished Wall Areas W.C.O.: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. 2.12 Acceptable Manufacturers - Backflow Preventers A. Watts B. Wilkins C. Hersey/Beeco 2.13 Backflow Preventers A. BFP-1: ASSE 1013; Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer: Bronze body with bronze and plastic internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve which opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer and four test cocks; For Model numbers see Schedule on Drawings. 2.14 Acceptable Manufacturers - Water Hammer Arresters A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn C. Josam 2.15 Water Hammer Arresters Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Specialties Specifications 15430-2 A. ANSI A112.26.1; sized in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range - 100 to 300 degrees F and maximum 250 psig working pressure; see Schedule on drawings for Model number. 2.16 Acceptable Manufacturers - Hose Bibbs A. Acorn B. Woodford C. Josam 2.17 Hose Bibbs A. HB-1: Provide recessed box, having one piece cast construction with stainless steel angles for anchoring, aluminum wall flange with an anodized satin finish and built-in drip lip. The door shall be provided with a cam lock, when fully open the door shall remain in position. Valves shall be cast bronze, exposed parts chrome-plated, tamper resistant lockshield bonnet and replaceable cartridge, Y* inch inlet for hot and cold, and % inch outlet with vacuum breaker, see Schedule on drawings for Model number. B. HB-2: Provide cartridge- operated type with lockshield bonnet and removable key handle, chrome plated, heavy rough brass construction, vacuum barker, 3A inch male hose thread, % inch NPT inlet, see Schedule on drawings for Model number. 2.18 Acceptable Manufacturers - Trap Primers A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn C. Josam 2.19 Trap Primers A. TP-1; ANSI A112.26; cast bronze with 1/2-inch connection. See Schedule on drawings for Model number. B. TP-2: Provide a trap primer enclosed in a 12" x 12" x 4" NEMA-1 enclosure, with a 3/4" inch NPT female inlet complying with ANSI/ASME Bl.20.1, outlet shall be 5/8" or 1/2" inch compression fitting, with a 3/4" Type L copper tubing manifold complying with ATM B88, provide with circuit breaker, switch, timer, manual override, solenoid valve marked as UL listed, electronic assembly tested and certified per UL #73, and backflow device anti- siphon atmospheric vacuum breaker meets Los Angeles code, IAPMO, ASSE 1001 and CSA. Provide in accordance with ASSE Standard No. 1018. See Schedule on drawings for Model number. 2.20 Acceptable Manufacturers - Valve Yard Boxes A. Brooks Products, Inc. B. Alhambra Foundry, Company 2.21 Valve Yard Boxes A. Precast concrete valve box, traffic resistant, armored body with a heavy cast iron ring and cast iron traffic cover. The cover shall be marked with the name of the service. Provide box extensions as required; Model 1.RT series as manufactured by Brooks Products, Inc. 2.22 Access Panels A. 12" x 12" No. 4 finish stainless steel flush type, locate and set after review. Steel door and frame with metal flange with concealed hinges and screwdriver operated stainless steel cam lock. Karp style DSC-214M for fire rated construction use KRP-150FR. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Preparation A. Coordinate forming of floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations. 3.02 Installation and Application A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Install atmospheric and pressure type vacuum breaker in such a way that the critical level is minimum 6 inches above the flood level rim of the receptor. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Specialties Specifications 15430 - 3 E. Install water hammer arresters in the hot and cold water supply to each fixture, fitted with a quick closing valve (flush valve, self-closing metering valve, etc.) or in header water supply when applicable. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Specialties Specifications 15430 - 4 SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Water closets. B. Urinals. C. Lavatories. D. Sinks. E. Service sinks. F. Drinking fountains. 1.02 References A. ANSI A112.6.1 - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use. B. ANSI A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings. C. ANSI A112.19.1 - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures. D. ANSI A112.19.2 -Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. E. ANSI A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures. F. ANSI A112.19.4 - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures. G. CBC Section 1115B, Table 1115B-1 and Section 1118B. 1.03 Quality Assurance A. Fixtures: By same manufacturer for each product specified throughout. B. Trim: Commercial grade by same manufacturer for each product specified throughout. C. Accessible plumbing fixtures shall comply with all the requirements of CBC section 1115B. D. Heights and location of all fixtures shall be according to CBC table 1115B-1. E. Fixture controls shall comply with CBC section 1118B. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include fixtures, sizes, utility sizes, trim and finishes. 1.05 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Submit 4 copies of operation and maintenance data. 1.06 Warranty A. Provide 1-year manufacturer's warranty. B. Warranty: Include coverage of electric water cooler compressor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers - Fixtures A. American Standard B. Kohler C. Eljer 2.02 Acceptable Manufacturers - Fixture Trim A. Symmons B. Chicago Faucet 2.03 Acceptable Manufacturers - Flush Valves A. Sloan B. Zurn 2.04 Acceptable Manufacturers - Water Closet Seats A. Olsonite B. Beneke C. Church 2.05 Acceptable Manufacturers - Fixture Carriers A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn C. Josam 2.06 Acceptable Manufacturers - Mixing Valves (Pressure Balanced) A. Symmons B. Leonard Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Fixtures Specifications 15440-1 C. Powers 2.07 Water Closet, Floor Mounted, Normal A. Bowl: ANSI A112.19.2; 1.6 gallons per flush, siphon jet, vitreous china closet bowl with elongated rim, 1-1/2" spud and china bolt caps. For model number see schedule on drawings. B. Flush Valve: ANSI A112.18.1; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with oscillating handle, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop, adjustable tailpiece, spud coupling and flange for 1-1/2 inch top spud, vacuum breaker. For model number see schedule on drawings. C. Seat: Solid white plastic, open front with self-sustaining hinge, stainless steel posts and nuts. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.08 Water Closet, Floor Mounted, Accessible A. Bowl: ANSI A112.19.2M; 1.6 gallon per flush, siphon jet, vitreous china closet bowl with elongated rim, 17-1/4" high for accessibility, 1-1/2 inch top spud and china bolt caps. For model number see schedule on drawings. B. Flush Valve: ANSI A112.18.1; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with oscillating handle, escutcheon, seat bumper, integral screwdriver stop, adjustable tailpiece, spud coupling and flange for 1-1/2 inch top spud, vacuum breaker. For model number see schedule on drawings. C. Seat: Solid white plastic, open front with self-sustaining hinge, stainless steel posts and nuts. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.09 Urinal, Wall Hung, Accessible A. Urinal: ANSI A112.19.2; vitreous china, siphon jet with flushing rim, integral trap, removable stainless steel strainer, 1-1/4 inch top spud. For model number see schedule on drawings. B. Flush Valve: ANSI A112.18.1; exposed chrome plated, battery powered diaphragm type with oscillating handle, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop, vacuum breaker. For model number see schedule on drawings. C. Wall Mounted Carrier: ANSI A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.10 Lavatory, Countertop, Accessible A. L-1 and L-2 Bowl: Integral with countertop, see Architectural drawings for details. B. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated single handle with 0.5 GPM aerator, open grid strainer, faucet with chrome plated 17 gage L.A. pattern cast brass P-trap and arm with escutcheon, and rigid supply. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.11 Sink, Single Compartment, Accessible A. S-1 Bowl: ANSI A112.19.3; 6-1/2 inch deep, 22" x 17" outside dimensions, 18 gage thick, Type 304 stainless steel, underlining with undercoating, 3-1/2 inch strainer. For model number see schedule on drawings. B. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated swing spout with dual lever handle, 2.2 GPM aerator, chrome plated 17 gage L.A. Pattern cast brass P-trap and arm with escutcheon, rigid supplies. For model number see schedule on drawings. C. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated gooseneck spout fitting with 4" wrist blade handles, 2.2 GPM aerator, chrome plated 17 gage L.A. pattern cast brass P-trap and arm with escutcheon and rigid supply. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.12 Mop Sink, Floor Mounted A. Bowl: 28 x 28 inch white enameled cast iron, with 3" IPS drain and flat chrome strainer and vinyl rim guard. For model number see schedule on drawings. B. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated fitting with vacuum breaker, lever handles adjustable supply arms with integral stops. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.13 Laundry Sink A. LS-1 Bowl: 23" x 17-1/4" x 13" deep, white (molded stone, with 3" "P" trap coated inside and out with white enamel, integral cleanout with "P" trap, and flat chrome strainer and vinyl rim guard. For model number see schedule on drawings. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Fixtures Specifications 15440-2 B. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated faucet, chrome plated I.A Pattern P-trap, Chicago open grid strainer, Chicago supplies and stops. For model numbers see schedules on drawings. 2.14 Drinking Fountain, Accessible A. Fountain: Wall mounted, 18 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel, accessible, vandal- resistant bubbler with push bar action and 1-1/4 inch P-trap. For model number see schedule on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Inspection A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough in and installation. B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this Section. 3.02 Installation A. Accessible plumbing fixtures shall comply with all the requirements of CBC section 1115B. Heights and location of all fixtures shall be according to CBC Table 1115B-1. Fixture controls shall comply with CBC Section 1118B. B. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. Provide and install pre-molded beige color insulation kit by "Truebro" at all handicap accessible lavatories. C. Provide chrome plated rigid supplies to fixtures with loose key stops reducers and secured escutcheons. D. Install components level and plumb. E. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. F. Caulk fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Division 7, color to match fixture. Remove and wipe clean excess sealant. G. Install flush valves in such a way that the vacuum breaker critical level is minimum 6 inches above the flood level rim of the receptor. 3.03 Adjusting and Cleaning A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise or overflow. B. At completion, clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. C. Adjust accessible lavatory faucet flow for 10-second minimum duration. 3.04 Protection of Finished Work A. Protect finished work. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Fixtures Specifications 15440 - 3 SECTION 15450 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Water heaters. B. Expansion tank. C- Aquastat. D. Time switch. E. Circulation pumps. F. Air compressors. 1.02 Related Work A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. B. Section 15242 - Vibration Isolation. 1.03 References A. UL 174 - Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 1.05 Regulatory Requirements A. Conform to UL 174 requirements for water heaters. 1.06 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1. D. Submit manufacturer's certificate that pressure vessels meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.07 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Submit operation and maintenance data. B. Include operation, maintenance and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability and service depot location and telephone number. 1.08 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Deliver products to site. B. Store and protect products. C. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.09 Warranty A. Provide three-year manufacturer's warranty. B. Warranty: Include coverage of [commercial water heaters]. PART 2 - PRODUCTS For Equipment Model Numbers see Schedule on Drawings. 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers - Water Heaters A. A.O. Smith. B. Lochinvar. C. Rheem. D. Bradford White. 2.02 Water Heaters The equipment hereinafter described is to be furnished and installed complete by this Contractor. See "Equipment Schedule" on drawings for size, capacity and model. A. Gas-Fired Water Heater: Shall bear the A.G.A. label and shall have the manufacturer's name, serial number, capacity in gallons, BTU input rating and date of installation firmly fastened thereto. The heater shall be complete with gas cock; fully automatic burner, pilot light with automatic safety control, ASME approved pressure and temperature relief valve, snap acting automatic thermostat, draft diverter, vent thimble, vent cap and counterflashing Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Equipment Specifications . 15450-1 as required. Pipe relief drain to nearest approved floor sink or as indicated on drawings. For size and capacity see drawings. B. Electric Water Heater: Water heater shall bear the UL label and shall have the manufacturer's name, serial number, capacity in gallons, kW input rating and date of installation firmly fastened thereto. The heater shall be complete, ASME approved pressure and temperature relief valve, snap acting automatic thermostat. Pipe relief drain to nearest approved floor sink or as indicated on drawings. For size and capacity see drawings. C. Electric Instant Flow Tankless Water Heater: The point-of-use water heater shall be a Chronomite Laboratories Instant-Flow Micro Tankless Electric Water Heat, Model M20L with 277 Vac, with Celcon waterways and nichrome heating coils, or an approved equal. Hot Water Storage vessels are expressly prohibited, 104°F. 2.03 Domestic Water Expansion Tank A. Precharged welded steel tank with air charging valve and removable heavy duty butyl/ EPDM diaphragm or bladder separating water and air with a working pressure of 150 psig. All internal parts shall comply with FDA regulations and approvals. The tank shall have NPT stainless steel connection, gauge glass openings and drain and be constructed in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. For model number see schedule on the drawings. 2.04 Aquastats A. Provide immersed type adjustable volatile liquid mercury tube switch similar to Mercoid Type DA-37-2 Range 5 (I pole single), similar to Mercoid Type DA-37-127 Range 5 (2 pole duplex). Set in oversized tee and nipple in hot water return line for automatically controlling hot water circulators and hot water circulating pumps. B. Electric Water Heater: Water heater shall bear the UL label and shall have the manufacturer's name, serial number, capacity in gallons, kW input rating and date of installation firmly fastened thereto. The heater shall be complete, ASME approved pressure and temperature relief valve, snap acting automatic thermostat. Pipe relief drain to nearest approved floor sink or as indicated on drawings. For size and capacity see drawings. 2.05 Time Switch A. Provide an adjustable heavy duty self-starting synchronous motor clock (120 volt) in NEMA-1 enclosure for automatically controlling hot water circulators, hot water circulating pumps, distilled water booster pumps and demineralizer water booster pumps. B. Clock shall have seven-day calendar dial, similar to Tork Series W and the number of poles as required. 2.06 Acceptable Manufacturers - In-Line Circulation Pumps A. Bell and Gossett, see schedules. 2.07 In-Line Circulation Pump A. All bronze construction body, stainless steel face plate, 30% glass filled Noryl impeller, carbon steel shaft, stainless steel shaft sleeve, mechanical, carbon on silicon carbide seal, sealed precision steel ball bearing permanently lubricated motor bearings, maximum operating pressure of 145 psi; 1/25 HP, 115 volts, 2650 rpm, non-overloading type motor, drip-proof. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.08 Air Compressors A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ingersoll-Rand, Champion or Quincy. B. AC-1: 1. Type: Tank mounted two-stage lubricated duplex reciprocating. 2. Construction: Close-grained cast iron frame, overhung type crankshaft with "lifetime" ball bearings, precision ground replaceable crankpin bushings, one- piece connecting rod with integral lubrication dippers. Separate cast cylinders, finned copper air-cooled intercoolers and stainless steel valves. 3. Receiver ASME, National Board coded, with pressure gauge, drain valve service valve and safety valve with automatic condensate drain trap, dry type inlet filter/silencer with replaceable element. 4. Control: NEMA 1 magnetic starters wall mounted. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Equipment Specifications 15450 - 2 2.09 Quick Air Line Couplers and Connectors A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Aro, Amflo or Halstead. B. Item AO-1: Female coupler, 1/4-inch body size, 18 cfm, with a combination filter, regulator and gauge, filter shall be provided with a metal bowl and sight glass. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Water Heater Installation A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to AGA, ANSI/NFPA 54 and UL requirements. B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and electrical work to achieve operating system. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Plumbing Equipment Specifications 15450-3 SECTION 15535 REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Piping. B. Refrigerant. C. Moisture and liquid indicators. D. Valves. E. Strainers. F. Check valves. G. Pressure relief valves. H. Filter-driers. I. Solenoid valves. J. Expansion valves. K. Receivers. L. Flexible connections. M. Pressure regulator. 1.02 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Submit shop drawings indicating schematic layout of system, including equipment, critical dimensions and sizes. C. Submit product data indicating general assembly of specialties, including manufacturer's catalogue information. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Submit welder's certification of compliance with AWS D1.1 on systems using welded steel piping. F. Submit data indicating pipe sizing. G. Submit test reports. H. Submit Test reports indicating results of leak test, acid test. 1.03 Project Record Documents A. Submit record documents. B. Accurately record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories on record drawings. 1.04 Regulatory Requirements A. Conform to ASME B31.9. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC 9 and applicable state labor regulations. 1.05 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Deliver products to site. B. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place. C. Store and protect products. D. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Piping A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn or annealed for gage and control device connections. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder Grade 95TA. B. Copper Tubing to 7/8 inch OD: ASTM B88, Type K, annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.26 wrought copper. 2. Joints: Flared. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 and 0.365 inch wall for sizes 12 inch and over, black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Refrigeration Piping and Specialties Specifications 15535 -1 2. Joints: AWS D1.1, welded. 2.02 Refrigerant A. Refrigerant: See condensing unit schedule. 2.03 Moisture and Liquid Indicators A. Indicators: Double port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sight glass, color coded paper moisture indicator and plastic cap; for maximum working pressure of 460 psi and maximum temperature of 200 degrees F. 2.04 Valves A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring, nylon seat disc, solder or flared ends with positive back seating; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F. B. Packed Angle Valves: Forged brass or nickel plated forged steel for steel piping, forged brass seal caps with copper gasket, rising stem and seat with back seating, molded stem packing, solder or flared ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F. C. Packed Ball Valves: Two piece forged brass Body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 325 degrees F. 2.05 Strainers A. Straight Line or Angle Line Type: Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge with screen of stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass; for maximum working pressure of 430 psi. B. Straight Line, Non-Cleanable Type: Steel shell, copper plated fittings, stainless steel wire screen for maximum working pressure of 430 psi. 2.06 Check Valves A. Globe Type: Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass guide and disc holder, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon seat disc; for maximum working pressure of 450 psi and maximum temperature of 300 degrees F. B. Straight Thru Type: Brass body and disc, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, neoprene seat; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 250 degrees F. 2.07 Pressure Relief Valves A. Straight Thru or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and stamped with ASME UV and National Board Certification NB; for standard 450 psi setting; selected to ASHRAE 15. 2.08 Filter-Driers A. Replaceable Cartridge Angle Type: ARI 750, UL listed, brass shell and bronze cap, perforated brass shell and molded desiccant filter core; for maximum working pressure of 350 psi. B. Permanent Straight Thru Type: ARI 750, UL listed, steel shell with molded desiccant filter core, for maximum working pressure of 400 psi. 2.09 Solenoid Valves A. Valve: ARI 760, pilot operated, copper or brass [or steel] body and internal parts, synthetic seat, stainless steel stem and plunger assembly with flared, solder or threaded ends; for maximum working pressure of 450 psi. Stem shall permit manual operation in case of coil failure. B. Coil Assembly: UL listed, replaceable with molded electromagnetic coil, moisture and fungus proof with surge protector and color coded lead wires, integral junction box UL 429. 2.10 Expansion Valves A. Angle or Straight Thru Type: ARI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body, internal or external equalizer, adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet strainer, with replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing bulb. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Refrigeration Piping and Specialties Specifications 15535-2 B. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available pressure drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 10 degrees F superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load and excessively oversized at part load. 2.11 Receivers A. Internal Diameter 6 inch and Smaller: ARI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed; 400 psi, maximum pressure rating, with tapings for inlet outlet, and pressure relief valve. B. Internal Diameter Over 6 inch: ARI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code; 400 psi with tapings for inlet, outlet and pressure relief valve. 2.12 Flexible Connectors A. Corrugated [stainless steel] [bronze] hose with single layer of [stainless steel] exterior braiding, minimum 9 inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure 400 psi. 2.13 Pressure Regulator A. For hot gas bypass, evaporator and crankcase pressure regulation. Body shall be bronze or forged steel with fully adjustable pressure setpoint, upstream or downstream selection depending on function. Connections to be sweat or flaired for copper tube connection, or steel for welded connection to steel piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Preparation A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.02 Installation A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one percent in direction of oil return. E. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints or connected equipment. G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. H. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings. Coordinate size and location of access doors with related architectural sections. I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. Refer to Division 9. K. Insulate piping; refer to Section 15260. L. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line on a horizontal line with the bulb located between 9:00 and 12:00 o'clock. M. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator. N. Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor. O. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing. P. Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves. Refer to Section 16180. 3.03 Application A. Provide line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser, or if receiver is provided in liquid line leaving receiver. B. Provide line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve. Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used install single main liquid line strainer. C. On steel piping systems, provide strainer in suction line. D. Provide shut-off valve on each side of strainer. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Refrigeration Piping and Specialties Specifications 15535-3 E. Provide permanent filter-driers in low temperature systems and systems utilizing hermetic compressors. F. Provide replaceable cartridge filter-driers, with three-valve bypass assembly on all open drive or semi-hermetic compression. G. Provide solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump- down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems and in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into the suction line when system shuts down and in hot gas bypass lines to accomplish pump-down. H. Provide refrigerant charging packed angle valve connections in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve and expansion valve. I. Utilize flexible connectors at or near compressors where within piping configuration does not absorb vibration. J. Use only copper tubing which has been stored with caps in place. Open piping must be capped at end of each work shift. K. Brazing of copper lines shall be done only when a small flow of dry nitrogen is passing through the tube to prevent formation of copper oxide. L. After leak testing triple evacuate system to 500 microns breaking vacuum, with type of refrigerant that will be used in system between evacuations. 3.04 Field Quality Control A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5. B. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and 200 psig using halide torch electronic leak detector or with fluorescent dye and ultra violet light. Test to no leakage. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Refrigeration Piping and Specialties Specifications 15535-4 SECTION 15781 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Packaged roof top unit identified as AC unit(s) on drawings. B. Unit controls. C. Vibration isolation type roof mounting frame and base. D. Maintenance service. 1.02 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. C. Indicate electrical service and duct connections on shop drawings or product data. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.03 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Submit operation and maintenance data. B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data and parts listing. 1.04 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Deliver products to site. B. Store and protect products. C. Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting frames are in place, ready for immediate installation of units. 1.05 Warranty A. Provide five year compressor warranty. B. Warranty: Include coverage of 5 year refrigeration compressors warranty and 10 year heat exchangers warranty. Warranty certificates with expiration date shall be given to the Owner after equipment start-up. 1.06 Maintenance Service A. Furnish complete service and maintenance of packaged roof top units for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide maintenance service with a two month interval as maximum time period between calls. Provide 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions. C. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data, including minimum of six filter replacements, minimum of one fan belt replacement, and controls check-out, adjustments and recalibrations. D. Submit copy of service call work order or report and include description of work performed. 1.07 Quality Assurance A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Each unit shall be UL labeled and certified by the California Energy Commission. 1.08 Extra Materials A. Provide one set of filters under provisions of Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Standard Units - Approved Manufacturers A. Carrier. B. Trane. C. Lennox. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. Note: Basis of design is Carrier (see Drawing - Equipment Schedule). If contractor submits on listed alternates, he shall assume responsibility for any and all necessary structural, electrical, plumbing, architectural and HVAC modifications, and coordinate such. 2.02 Equipment (Standard) Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units Specifications 15781 -1 A. General: The 48PG unit shall be a factory assembled, single-piece heating and cooling unit. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, Puron refrigerant charge (R-410A), and accessories noted here prior to field start-up. Outdoor sound ratings on sizes 03-06 shall be as low as 72 dB, on sizes 08 to 16 as low as 80 dB and on sizes 20 to 28 as low as 82 dB. B. Unit Cabinet: 1. Constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with a pre-painted baked enamel finish on all externally exposed surfaces. 2. All air stream interior surfaces shall be insulated with a minimum V2-in. thick, 1 Ib density foil-faced cleanable insulation. Insulation shall have an "R" Value of 3.70 and shall be coated with an acrylic material that meets the NFPA 90 flame retardance requirements. 3. Cabinet panels shall be hinged with integrated non-corrosive hinges. Hinged access panels for the filter, compressors, evaporator fan, control box and heat section areas. Each panel shall use multiple quarter-turn latches and handles. Each major external hinged access panel shall be double-wall construction and permanently attached to the rooftop unit. Panels shall also include tiebacks. 4. Return air filters shall be accessible through a hinged access panel and be on a slide-out track using standard size filters. 5. Holes shall be provided in the 16 gage base rails for rigging shackles. 6. Unit shall have a factory-installed internally sloped condensate drain pan, providing a minimum %-in.-14 NPT connection to prevent standing water from accumulating. Pan shall be fabricated of high impact polycarbonate material and shall slide out for cleaning and or maintenance on 03-14 sizes. An alternate vertical drain (3/4-in. NPT) connection is also available. Pan shall be fabricated of epoxy powder coated steel for other sizes. All drain pans conform to ASHRAE 62 self-draining provisions. 7. Unit shall have standard thru-the-bottom power and control wiring connection capability. C. Fans: 1. Evaporator Fan: a. Centrifugal supply air blower shall have rubber-isolated, cartridge type ball bearings or pillow-block ball bearings and adjustable belt drive. b. Fan wheel shall be made from steel with a corrosion resistant finish. It shall be a dynamically balanced, double-inlet type with forward-curved blades. c. The indoor fan system (blower wheels, motors, belts, and both bearings) shall slide out for easy access. d. Evaporator-fan motors shall be continuous operation, open drip-proof. Bearings shall be sealed, permanently lubricated ball-bearing type for longer life and lower maintenance. 2. Condenser fans shall be of the direct-driven propeller type, with corrosion- resistant aluminum blades riveted to corrosion-resistant steel supports. They shall be dynamically balanced and discharge air upwards. Condenser fan motors shall be totally enclosed, thermally protected, and be of a shaft down design. 3. Induced-draft blower shall be of the direct-driven, single inlet, forward-curved, centrifugal type. It shall be made from aluminized steel with a corrosion-resistant finish and shall be dynamically balanced. D. Gompressor(s): 1. Fully hermetic, scroll type with crankcase heaters, internal high-pressure and temperature protection. 2. Factory mounted on rubber grommets and internally spring mounted for vibration isolation. 3. Be mounted on dedicated mounting plate to ensure secure design and reduced sound levels. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units Specifications 15781-2 4. Units 7.5 tons and larger shall use multiple compressors and have dual refrigerant circuits. E. Coils: 1. Standard evaporator and condenser coils shall have aluminum lanced plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless internally grooved copper tubes with all joints brazed. 2. Dual circuit models shall have face-split type evaporator coil. 3. Condenser coils shall be continuous slab design to facilitate easy coil cleaning. 4. Coils shall be leak tested at 170 psig and pressure tested at 1875 psig. 5. Pre-Coated Coils: Pre-coated aluminum-fin coils shall have a durable epoxy- phenolic coating to provide protection in mildly corrosive coastal environments. Coating shall be applied to the aluminum fin stock prior to the fin stamping process to create an inert barrier between the aluminum fin and copper tube. Epoxy-phenolic barrier shall minimize galvanic action between dissimilar metals. F. Heating Section: 1. Induced-draft combustion type with energy saving direct-spark ignition system and redundant main gas valve. All units 3-phase units shall have 2-stage capability. 2. Heat Exchanger: a. The standard heat exchanger shall be stainless steel of the tubular- section type, constructed of a minimum of 20-gage type 409 stainless steel, including stainless steel tubes, vestibule plate, and collector box. b. The optional stainless steel heat exchanger shall be of the tubular- section type, constructed of a minimum of 20-gage type 409 stainless steel, including stainless steel tubes, vestibule plate, and collector box. 3. Burners shall be of the in-shot type constructed of aluminum-coated steel. 4. All gas piping shall enter the unit at a single location. Gas entry shall be capable through bottom of unit. 5. All factory-installed orifices are for operation up to 2,000 feet of altitude. 6. The integrated gas controller (IGC) board shall include gas heat operation fault notification using an LED (light-emitting diode). 7. Unit shall be equipped with anti-cycle protection with one short cycle on unit flame rollout switch or 4 continuous short cycles on the high-temperature limit switch. Fault indication shall be made using an LED. 8. The IGC board shall contain algorithms that modify evaporator-fan operation to prevent future cycling on high-temperature limit switch. 9. The LED shall be visible without removal of control box access panel. 10. Gas burner tray, when disconnected, shall easily slide out for maintenance. G. Refrigerant Components: Each refrigerant circuit shall include: 1. Thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) with removable power element. 2. Solid core refrigerant filter driers. 3. Gage port and connections on suction, discharge, and liquid lines. H. Filter Section: Standard filter section shall consist of factory-installed 2-in. thick throwaway fiberglass filters and shall be on a dedicated slide out track to easily facilitate access and replacement. I. Controls and Safeties: 1. Unit ComfoAfLink™ Microprocessor Controls: a. Scrolling Marquee display. b. CCN (Carrier Comfort Network) capable. c. Unit control with standard suction pressure transducers and condensing temperature thermistors. d. Shall provide a 5° F temperature difference between cooling and heating set points to meet ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Standard. e. Shall provide and display a current alarm list and an alarm history list. f. Automatic compressor redundancy. g. Service run test capability. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units Specifications 15781-3 h. Shall accept input from an indoor or outdoor CO2 sensor (if shown on plans). The CO2 sensor shall have the ability to monitor CO2 levels and relay information to the controller. The controller will use CO2 level information to modulate the economizer and provide demand control ventilation. The sensor shall be available as field or factory-installed. i. Configurable alarm light shall be provided which activates when certain types of alarms occur. j. Compressor minimum run time (3 minutes) and minimum off time (5 minutes) are provided. k. Service diagnostic mode. I. Economizer control. m. Multiple capacity stages. n. Unit shall be complete with self-contained low-voltage control circuit. o. Unit shall have 0° F low ambient cooling operation. 2. Safeties: a. Unit shall incorporate a solid-state compressor lockout that provides optional reset capability at the space thermostat should any of the following safety devices trip and shut off compressor: 1) Compressor lockout protection provided for either internal or external overload. 2) Low-pressure protection. 3) Freeze protection (evaporator coil). 4) High-pressure protection (high pressure switch or internal). 5) Compressor reverse rotation protection. 6) Loss of charge protection. 7) Start assist on singe-phase units. b. Supply-air sensor shall be located in the unit and detect both heating and cooling operation. c. Induced draft heating section shall be provided with the following minimum protections: 1) High-temperature limit switch. 2) Induced-draft motor speed sensor. 3) Flame rollout switch. 4) Flame proving controls. 5) Redundant gas valve. J. Operating Characteristics: 1. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at 125 F ambient outdoor temperature per maximum load criteria of ARI Standard 210 (03-12 sizes) and 360 (14-28 sizes). 2. Unit with ComforfLink™ controls will operate in cooling down to an outdoor ambient temperature of 0° F. 3. Unit shall be provided with fan time delay to prevent cold air delivery in heating mode. K. Electrical Requirements: All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single location - thru the bottom. L. Motors: 1. Compressor motors shall be cooled by refrigerant gas passing through motor windings and shall have line break thermal and current overload protection. 2. Evaporator fan motor shall have permanently lubricated, sealed bearings and inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection or manual reset calibrated circuit breakers. Evaporator motors are designed specifically for Carrier and do not have conventional horsepower (hp) ratings listed on the motor nameplate. Motors are designed and qualified in the "air-over" location downstream of the cooling coil and carry a maximum continuous bhp rating for the motor. No "safety factors" above that rating may be applied. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units Specifications 15781-4 3. All evaporator fan motors 5 hp and larger shall meet the minimum efficiency requirements as established by the Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT), effective October 24, 1997. 4. Totally enclosed condenser-fan motor shall have permanently lubricated, sealed bearings, and inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection. 5. Induced-draft motor shall have permanently lubricated sealed bearings and inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection. M. Accessories: 1. Full Perimeter Roof Curbs (Horizontal and Vertical): a. Formed of 14-gage galvanized steel with wood nailer strip and shall be capable of supporting entire unit weight. Shall be interlocking or factory welded design and shall meet the structural requirements of the 2001 Universal Building Code. b. Permits installing and securing ductwork to curb prior to mounting unit on the curb. c. Shall be available in 11-in. height. d. Roof curb shall be manufactured by CanFab. 2. Integrated Economizer: a. Tilt-out economizer shall be furnished and installed complete with outside air dampers, hood with cleanable aluminum screens or filters, and controls. b. Low-leakage, opposing, gear-driven dampers with UL approved gears. c. Capable of introducing up to 100% outdoor air for minimum ventilation as well as free cooling. d. Damper actuator shall be electronic 4 to 20 mA/2 to 10 vdc fully modulating design. e. Economizer shall be manufactured by CanFab. 3. Power Exhaust with Modulating Controls: a. Package shall include fan, damper, motor, hardware, variable frequency drive, and hoods to relieve excess internal building pressure. b. Manufacturer shall include 25 feet of %" tubing and brass sensor pickup. Contractor shall mount sensor 10 feet above floor, and connect tubing. Location shall not be adjacent to supply or return grilles or doorway. Enclose sensor in a field-supplied stainless steel faceplate. If more than 25 feet of tubing is required contractor shall furnish and install 5/16" tubing not to exceed 50 feet in length. c. Power Exhaust Sequence of Operation: The power exhaust shall be controlled by a variable frequency drive, an end switch mounted on the damper frame, and a differential pressure transmitter mounted in the space. When the economizer begins to open, the end switch activates the run command at the VFD. As the building pressure increases relative to the building external pressure, the differential pressure transmitter signals the VFD to increase the speed of the exhaust fan. The VFD will modulate the speed of the exhaust fan as required until the space pressure relative to the external pressure is zero. When the economizer returns to a fully closed position the end switch will de-activate the run command at the VFD and stop the power exhaust. d. Power Exhaust shall be manufactured by CanFab. 4. CO2 Sensor: The duct-mounted or wall-mounted CO2 sensor shall have the ability to monitor CO2 levels and relay information to the controller. The controller will use CO2 level information to modulate the economizer and provide demand control ventilation. The sensor shall be available as field or factory-installed. 5. Filter Status: The filter status switch shall be a pressure switch and will indicate a dirty filter. The switch shall be available as field or factory-installed. 6. Fan Status: The fan status switch shall be a pressure switch and will indicate indoor fan operation. The switch shall be available as field or factory-installed. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units Specifications 15781-5 7. Phase Loss Protection (3-phase units only): Shall provide unit shutdown when an electrical phase loss is detected - automatic reset type. 8. Thru-The-Curb Gas Connection Kit: Shall provide hardware for through the curb routing of gas piping. Minimize roof penetration. 9. Thru-The-Bottom Gas Connection Kit: Shall provide hardware for through the unit bottom routing of gas piping. Minimize roof penetration. 10. Gas Heat options (sizes 04-06): a. Single-stage gas heat shall be provided in lieu of two-stage heat. b. NOx reduction shall be provided to reduce nitrous oxide emissions to meet the California Air Quality Management NOx requirement of 40 nanograms/joule or less. c. Primary tubes on low NOx units shall be 409 stainless steel. Other components shall be aluminized steel. 2.03 100% O.S.A. Units - Approved Manufacturers A. Aaon. B. or approved equal. C. Note: Basis of Design is Aaon "RN" (see Drawing Equipment Schedule). D. Substitute equipment may be considered for approval that includes at a minimum: 1. R-410A refrigerant. 2. Direct drive supply fans. 3. Double wall cabinet construction. 4. Insulation with a minimum R-value of 13. 5. Stainless steel drain pans. 6. Hinged access doors with lockable handles. 7. Variable capacity compressor with 10-100% capacity. 8. All other provisions of the specifications must be satisfactorily addressed. 2.04 100% O.S.A. Units - Manufactured Units A. Unit Performance: 1. Unit cooling capacities shall be in accordance with and tested to ARI standard 210/240-89 or 360-85. 2. Units up to 20 tons shall carry the ARI compliance label. 3. Unit MINIMUM cooling efficiency, including the standard supply air blower motor shall be as shown on the plans. 4. Unit shall have a minimum heating system efficiency of 80%. 5. Units shall be safety certified in accordance with UL Standard UL1995, and ANSI Standard Z21.47. 6. Unit shall be safety certified by an accredited testing laboratory. 7. Unit nameplate shall carry the label of the certification agency. 8. Unit shall be shipped completely assembled by the manufacturer including all standard items and optional items. 9. Unit shall be 100% run tested by the manufacturer with a copy of the run test report shipped with the unit. B. Unit Construction: 1. All cabinet walls, access doors and roof shall be fabricated of rigid, impact resistant, double wall, high performance composite panels with G90 galvanized steel on both sides and a closed cell polyurethane foam interior core. 2. Foam shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds/cubic foot and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D-1929 for a minimum flash ignition temperature of 610°F. 3. Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, maximum 8 inches of positive or negative static pressure. Deflection shall be measured at the midpoint of the panel height and width. 4. Cabinet leakage rate shair not exceed 1% when tested at 6 inches of static pressure. 5. Insulation shall have a minimum R-value of 13. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units Specifications 15781-6 6. All cabinet walls, access doors and roof shall have a thermal break with no metal path from inside to outside. 7. Units with cooling coils shall include double sloped 304 stainless steel drain pans and a factory provided p-trap, for field installation. 8. Unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped, wired and shipped in one piece. 9. Unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor rooftop application with a fully weatherproof cabinet. 10. Unit design shall be dedicated bottom supply / return air style system for mounting on a roof curb. 11. Cabinet shall be constructed entirely of G90 galvanized metal with the exterior constructed of 18 gauge or heavier material. 12. The unit roof shall be cross broken and sloped to assure drainage. 13. Access to compressor(s), controls, filters, blower, heating section, and other items needing periodic checking or maintenance shall be through hinged access doors with a quarter turn latch (door fastening screws are not acceptable). 14. Air side service access doors shall be fully gasketed with rain break overhangs. 15 Air side access doors will have an internal metal liner to protect the door insulation. 16. Unit exterior shall be painted with polyurethane paint over a primer and a G90 type galvanized steel. 17. Paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2500 hours, with no visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance with ASTM B 117-95 test procedure. 18. All wiring shall be color coded. 19. The interior air side of the cabinet shall be entirely insulated on all exterior panels with 1" thick, 1.5 pound density, neoprene coated, fiberglass insulation. 20. To guarantee no leakage of conditioned air from the cabinet all of the cabinet under positive pressure, downstream from the supply air blower, shall have a separate internal cabinet contained within, and separate from, the exterior cabinet by an air gap. The internal cabinet shall be guaranteed to hold a static pressure of up to 12 inches water column. 21. All openings through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least Yz" in height around the opening through the base pan. 22. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate unit lifting - rigging, service areas and caution areas. 23. Wiring diagrams shall be in color and marked to match the color and markings of the wires and shall be both "point-to-point" and "ladder" diagrams. 24. Diagrams shall also be laminated in plastic and permanently fixed to the control compartment door. 25. Installation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with each unit, located in a metal pocket in the control access compartment. 26. Unit exterior to be "Grey" in color. C. Blowers: 1. Blower(s) shall be entirely self-contained on a slide deck for service and removal from the cabinet. 2. All belt drive blower(s) shall have backward inclined airfoil blades. 3. Adjustable V-belt drive shall be provided with a minimum rating of 140% of the motor nameplate brake horsepower when the adjustable pulley is at the minimum RPM. 4. Blowers, drives and motors shall be dynamically balanced. D. Outside Air: Shall be 0-100% with a motor operated outside air damper constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, air foil blade with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 25 CFM of leakage per square foot of damper area when subjected to 2" WG air pressure Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units Specifications 15781-7 differential across the damper. Damper motor shall be spring return to ensure closing of outdoor air damper during periods of unit shutdown or power failure. E. Condensing Section: The condensing section shall be equipped with direct drive, vertical discharge condenser fans(s). The condenser coil shall be sloped at least 30 degrees from horizontal to protect the coil from damage. F. Evaporator Coil: 1. Evaporator coil(s) shall be six row copper tube with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. 2. Evaporator coils to have galvanized steel and casings. 3. Evaporator coils to have equalizing type vertical tube distributors with a top suction connection. 4. Evaporator coils for multi-compressor units shall be circuited with one circuit and expansion valve per compressor. G. Condenser Coil: Condenser coil(s) shall be copper tube with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. Condenser coil(s) to be sized for a minimum of 10 degrees sub- cooling. H. Refrigeration System: 1. Compressor(s) shall be of the hermetic scroll type with internal thermal overload protection and mounted on the compressor manufacturer's recommended rubber vibration isolators. 2. All units over 7 tons shall be multiple stage and shall have a minimum of 2 stages of capacity control. 3. Compressor(s) shall be mounted in an isolated compartment to permit operation of the unit without affecting air flow when the compressor compartment is open. 4. Compressor(s) shall be isolated from the base pan and supply air to avoid any transmission of noise from the compressor into the building area. 5. System shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve(s) type refrigerant flow control. 6. System shall be equipped with automatic re-set low pressure and manual reset high pressure refrigerant controls. 7. Unit shall be equipped with Schrader type service fittings on both the high side and low pressure sides of the system. 8. Unit shall be equipped with refrigerant liquid line driers. 9. Unit shall be fully factory charged with refrigerant R-41 Oa. 10. Options: a. All circuits shall be equipped with liquid line sight glasses. b. Unit shall be equipped with a 5 minute anti-short cycle delay timer for each compressor. I. Filters: Unit to be furnished with 2", 30% efficient, pleated, throw away supply air filters. J. Temperature Control: Single zone electronic with night set back, T7300 or equivalent. K. Optional Roof Curbs: Roof curbs shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Curbs are to be fully gasketed between the curb top and unit bottom with the curb providing full perimeter support, cross structure support and air seal for the unit. The curb shall be adjustable up to %" per foot to allow for a sloped roof. L. Coatings: AZs a minimum the Evaporator and Condenser Coils shall have a coating to prevent corrosion as a minimum as follows: 1. Generic Type Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Description A clear coat finish that provides added UV protection over pigmented Carboline polyurethanes. Exceptionally hard film and excellent depth-of-image provide extended service life to the Carbothane® topcoats, especially when deeptone and metallic colors are used. 2. Features: Hard finish with excellent impact and abrasion resistance. 3. Excellent resistance to UV degradation. 4 High gloss version provides very good depth of image. 5. Attractive gloss and satin finishes. 6. Suitable for conventional spray or roller application. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units Specifications 15781-8 7. Graffiti resistant. 8. VOC compliant to current AIM regulations. 9. Color Clear (0910) Finish Gloss & Satin 10. Substrate apply over pigmented Carbothane finishes as recommended. 11. Dry Film Thickness: 1.0-2.0 mils (25-50 microns) per coat. 12. Solids Content: By Volume: (Gloss) 60% ± 2% By Volume: (Satin) 57% + 2% 13. Theoretical Coverage Rate for Gloss: 962 mil ft2 (23.2 m2/l at 25 microns), Allow for loss in mixing and application, 14. Theoretical Coverage Rate For Satin: 914 mil ft2 (23.2 m2/l at 25 microns), Allow for loss in mixing and application. 15. VOC Values Gloss As supplied: 2.8 Ibs/gal (335 g/l), Thinned: 13 oz/gal w/#214: 3.2 Ibs/gal (384 g/l) 13 oz/gal w/ #215 3.2 Ibs/gal (384 g/l) 13 oz/gal w/#236E 2.8 Ibs/gal (335 g/l) These are nominal values. 16. VOC Values Satin As supplied: 2.3 Ibs/gal (340 g/l), Thinned: 13 oz/gal w/ #214: 3.4 Ibs/gal (407 g/l) 13 oz/gal w/ #215 3.4 Ibs/gal (407 g/l) 13 oz/gal w/#236E 2.3 Ibs/gal (360 g/l) These are nominal values. 17. Dry Temp. Resistance Continuous: 200°F (93°C) Non-Continuous: 250°F (121 °C) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are'as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that proper power supply is available. 3.02 Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mount standard units on factory assembled, spring isolated sloped type curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. C. Mount 100% O.S.A. units on factory built sloped type curb. 3.03 Manufacturer's Field Services A. Provide initial start-up and shut-down during first year of operation, including routine servicing and check-out. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units Specifications 15781-9 SECTION 15783 SPLIT TYPE AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Split type air conditioning units. B. Controls. 1.02 Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section A. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Installation of thermostats and other control components. 1.03 Related Sections A. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical supply to units. 1.04 References A. ARI 210 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment. B. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. C. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation System. 1.05 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate refrigerant, drain and electrical rough-in connections on shop drawings or product data. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1. 1.06 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Submit operation and maintenance data. B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions and maintenance and repair data. 1.07 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Deliver products to site. B. Store and protect products. C. Protect finished cabinets from physical damage by leaving factory packing cases in place before installation and providing temporary covers after installation. 1.08 Warranty A. Provide one-year manufacturer's warranty. B. Provide six years manufacturer's warranty on refrigeration compressor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers A. Mitsibishi. B. Sanyo. 2.02 Manufactured Units A. Indoor, direct-expansion, wall-mounted fan coil. Unit shall be complete with cooling coil, fan, fan motor, piping connectors, electrical controls, microprocessor control system, and integral temperature sensing. Unit shall be furnished with integral wall-mounting bracket and mounting hardware. 1. Unit Cabinet: Cabinet discharge and inlet grilles shall be attractively styled, high- impact polystyrene. Cabinet shall be fully insulated for improved thermal and acoustic performance. 2. Fans: Fan shall be tangential direct-drive blower type with air intake at the upper front face of the unit and discharge at the bottom front. Automatic, motor-driven vertical air sweep shall be provided. Horizontal direction may be manually adjusted (using remote controller). 3. Coil: Coil shall be copper tube with aluminum fins and galvanized steel tube sheets. Fins shall be bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion. A drip pan under the coil shall have a drain connection for hose attachment to remove condensate. Unit shall have an electronic expansion valve. 4. Motors: Motors shall be open drip-proof, permanently lubricated ball bearing with inherent overload protection. Fan motors shall be Hi / Med / Low / and Auto. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Split Type Air Conditioning Units Specifications 15783-1 5. Controls: Controls shall consist of a microprocessor-based control system, which shall control space temperature, determine optimum fan speed, and run self- diagnostics. Include wireless remote controller with 24-hr.timer. Unit shall have automatic re-start after power failure. 6. Filters: Unit shall have washable Apatite filters. 7. Electrical Requirements: Unit shall operate on 115-V, 60 Hz power supply as specified on the equipment schedule. Power shall be single-point connection to outdoor unit, and the indoor unit shall get its power from there. Do not run indoor unit power wiring and control wiring in the same conduit. 8. Operating Characteristics: Unit shall have a variable-capacity rating of 3,000 to 11,900 BTUH. High-speed sound level rating shall be 36 dB-A. 9. Refrigerant Lines: Unit shall have rotatable refrigerant lines for penetration through the wall using flare connections. Use %" copper for Discharge, and 3/8" copper for suction. Both lines shall be insulated. Maximum piping length shall be 65 feet. 10. Condensate Pump: Provide field-supplied and installed condensate pump to remove condensate from the drain pan when gravity drainage cannot be used. Pump shall be designed for quiet operation, and shall be of the same voltage as the outdoor unit. Pump shall consist of two parts: an internal reservoir/sensor assembly, and a remote sound-shielded pump assembly. Connect pump power to terminals 1 and 2 of the fan coil; separate power for the condensate pump is not required. Manufacturer shall be Sauermann or approved equal. B. Outdoor-mounted, air-cooled, condensing unit using R-410a refrigerant, suitable for ground or rooftop installation. Unit shall be complete with condenser coil, fan, fan motor, electrical controls, and variable-speed inverter-driven compressor that automatically adjusts to room cooling load requirements. Unit will discharge supply air horizontally as shown on contract drawings. 1. Unit Cabinet: Unit cabinet will be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with an acrylic baked-on enamel finish. 2. Fans: Condenser fan will be direct-drive propeller type, discharging air horizontally. Condenser fan motors will be a DC Motor with 8 poles. An internal controller with over-current protection will be used as a safety device. 3. Compressor: Compressor will be hermetically sealed. 4. Condenser Coil: Condenser coil will be air cooled. Coil will be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes which are then cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Coordinate installation of units with architectural and electrical work. C. Supply units fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil. D. Scheduled performance is based on ARI 210 test conditions. Scheduled sound rating is based on ARI 270. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Split Type Air Conditioning Units Specifications 15783 - 2 SECTION 15875 VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Cabinet exhaust fans. B. Upblast exhaust fans. C. Roof mounted supply fans. D. Gravity intake and relief ventilators. E. Utility type exhaust fans. 1.02 Related Work A. Section 15242 - Vibration Isolation. B. Section 15890 - Ductwork. C. Section 15910 - Duct Accessories. 1.03 References A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. C. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. D. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA SOO.and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. 1.05 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide product data on wall and roof exhausters, and ceiling and cabinet fans. C. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. D. Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Cook. B. Greenheck. C. Breidert. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.02 Cabinet Exhaust Fans A. Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven, with formed galvanized steel housing lined with 1/2 inch acoustic insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge. B. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor and wall mounted multiple speed switch. C. Grille: Molded white plastic or aluminum with baked white enamel finish. D. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings. An exchange of sheaves and belts shall be supplied at no additional charge if required for air balance. E. Drive assembly and wheel shall be hinged to swing out without dismantling the unit. The fan inlet shall be spun Venturi throat overlapped by a backward curved centrifugal wheel with spun cone. F. Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled mounted on the hinged size exterior isolated from the air stream. See equipment schedule for horsepower characteristics. G. Fans shall be equipped with factory suspension brackets, motor cover and insulated housings. H. Motors: 1. All motors shall be open drip-proof with ball bearings. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Ventilators and Exhaust Fans Specifications 15875 -1 2. Fractional horsepower motors shall be split phase or capacitor start and have a resilient base. 3. Integral horsepower motors shall be induction with rigid base. 4. See equipment schedule for horsepower and characteristics. I. Drives: Shall be v-belt designed for 150% of motor horsepower and be complete with variable pitch motor drives. J. Motors shall be selected at 15% greater than the brake horsepower, including drive loss, at design conditions. K. Accessories: Shall be as noted on the drawings. 2.03 Exhaust Fan (Upblast) A. Roof exhaust units shall be of the belt drive, upblast vertical discharge type. Construction of housing shall be heavy gauge aluminum. The windband shall have a rolled bead and additional structural members for added strength. The fan and wheel inlet cone shall be aluminum and of the high performance, centrifugal blower type. Wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Construction shall include built-in grease drain. Motor and drives shall be isolated from the exhaust airstream. Motors shall be of the heavy duty type with permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearings. Air for cooling the motor shall be taken into the motor chamber by means of an air tube from a location free of discharge contaminants. The entire drive assembly and wheel, as a unit, shall be removable through the support structure without dismantling the fan housing. The wheel shaft shall be mounted in heavy duty ball bearings. Drives shall be sized for 150% of driven horsepower. Sheaves shall be adjustable cast iron type keyed to the fan and motor shafts. The entire drive assembly shall be mounted on rubber vibration isolators. Fans shall be AMCA approved for sound and air performance. An exchange of sheaves and belts shall be supplied at no additional charge if required for air balance. B. The unit shall be complete with bird screen, backdraft damper and roof curb. C. Fans shall meet the requirements of the city and other authorities having jurisdiction. D. Motor shall be selected for at least 15% greater than brake horsepower of fan, including drive loss, at design conditions. E. Accessories: shall be as noted on the drawings. 2.04 Supply Fan A. Roof mounted, filtered, makeup air units shall be of the belt-driven, double width/double inlet, forward curved, centrifugal blower type. The hood shall be tiered type constructed of extruded aluminum and adequately sized to prevent rain from entering the building. The cover shall be constructed of aluminum, removable for service and insulated to prevent condensation. Permanent washable 1" aluminum filters shall be provided. Fan wheels shall be centrifugal backward inclined, airfoil type, and statically and dynamically balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy duty, ball bearing type. The fan shaft shall be mounted in heavy duty, sealed ball bearings, selected for a minimum life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum operating conditions. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. The entire fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on rubber vibration isolators. Fans shall be AMCA approved for sound and air performance. An exchange of sheaves and belts shall be provided at no additional charge if required for air balance. B. The unit shall be complete with roof curb, filters, backdraft dampers and disconnect switch. C. Accessories: Shall be as noted on the drawings. 2.05 Gravity Intake A. Furnish and install roof hoods as shown. Hood construction shall be of spun aluminum sheets with rolled interlocking seams for reinforcement. Units shall have rigid aluminum hood support members for rigidity. The unit shall have 1/2 x 1/2 inch galvanized bird screen. Units with throat dimensions of 36 x 38 inches or less shall have hinged hoods to allow for easy access to dampers and ductwork. Units with throat dimensions of 36 x 48 inches or less shall be shipped assembled and have dampers where specified mounted in throat. Carlsbad Joint First Res ponders Training Facility Ventilators and Exhaust Fans Specifications 15875-2 B. Units shall be complete with motorized damper or gravity type as shown on equipment schedule and pre-fab curb. C. Bases shall be heavy gauge aluminum construction five inches high. 2.06 Exhaust Fans (Utility Set) A. General: 1. Utility fan shall include housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings and drives, belt-guard, and waterproof enclosure, as a factory assembled unit. Discharge arrangement as shown on drawings. 2. All fans shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA Standard 210 and the Certified Ratings Program. 3. Capacities and performance shall be as specified on drawings. See equipment schedule for details. B. Housing: 1. Fan housing shall be constructed of heavy-gauge steel with the side sheets fastened to scroll sheets with lock seam. A stiffener bead shall reinforce the sides and top of discharge. 2. Inlet collars shall extend beyond the fan housing to provide uninterrupted duct connection. Inlet collars shall be round with slip joint type connections. 3. Cutoffs and aerodynamically spun inlet cones shall be designed to provide for the smooth air flow through the fan with a minimum of turbulence. 4. Motor and bearings supports shall be adjustable in design and be constructed of heavy welded steel. 5. Provide a drain connection in housing for vertical discharge applications. C. Fan Wheels: 1. Utility sets shall be steel centrifugal backward inclined, non-overloading flat blade type wheel as indicated in equipment schedule. 2. All blades shall be continuously welded to the backplate and deep spun inlet shroud. 3. Wheel hubs shall be keyed and securely attached to the fan shaft. 4. All wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at factory after assembly. 5. Fan shafts shall be solid AISI C-1040 ground and polished steel. Close tolerance shall be maintained where shaft makes contact with bearings and fan wheel hub. All shafts shall have factory applied rust-preventive coating. D. Bearings: Shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated, pillow block type. A contact seal shall be provided for grease retention and protection from contaminates. Bearings shall provide a minimum life of 200,000 hours at maximum operating conditions. E. Drives: Shall be V-belt designed for 150% of motor horsepower and be complete with variable pitch motor drives. An exchange of sheaves and belts shall be supplied at no additional charge if required for air balance. F. Accessories: Shall be as noted on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure roof exhausters with lag screws to roof curb or as detailed on the drawings. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Ventilators and Exhaust Fans Specifications 15875-3 SECTION 15885 AIR CLEANING PART1 -GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Disposable, extended area panel filters. B. Extended surface high efficiency media filters. C. HEPA filters. D. Filter frames. E. Filter gages. 1.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide all filters as product of one manufacturer. B. Assemble filter components to form filter banks from products of one manufacturer. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly and filter frames. 1.04 Operation And Maintenance Data A. Include 4 copies of instructions for operation, changing and periodic cleaning. 1.05 Extra Stock A. Provide one set of disposable panel filters for each air-handling unit. 1.06 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Store and protect products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Approved Manufacturers A. Flanders. B. Farr Filter C. American Air Filter 2.02 Disposable, Extended Area Panel Filters A. Media: Pleated, lofted, non-woven, reinforced cotton fabric; supported and bonded to welded wire grid; enclosed in cardboard frame; 2 inches deep, size as scheduled. B. Rating: ASHRAE 52; 30-35 percent dust spot efficiency, 90-92 percent weight resistance; face velocity as scheduled, 0.30 inch WG initial resistance, 1.0 inch WG recommended.final resistance. C. Model: Pre Pleat 40 by Flanders. 2.03 Extended Surface High Efficiency Media Filters A. Media: Pleated, water-resistant glass fiber with aluminum separators; in 16-gage steel holding frame with corrosion resistant coating. 12 inches deep, size as scheduled. B. Rating: ASHRAE 52; 95 percent dust spot efficiency; face velocity as scheduled, 0.50 inch WG initial resistance, 1.0 inch WG recommended final resistance. C. Model: Super-Flow V by Flanders. 2.04 HEPA Filters A. Media: Pleated, continuous, non-woven water resistant glass fiber with hemmed-edge corrugated aluminum separators; in 16-gage steel holding frame with corrosion resistant coating, 12 inches deep, size as scheduled. B. Rating: IEST-RP-CC-001.3, Type A, 99.97% efficient on .30 micrometer particles. C. Model: Alpha 2000 by Flanders. 2.05 Filter Frames for Pre-filters and 95% Filters A. General: Fabricate filter frames and supporting structures of 16 gage galvanized steel or extruded aluminum T-section construction with necessary gasketing between frames and walls. Housing to accommodate the pre-filter and 95% filter. B. Housings to be equipped with two access doors that are sealed with neoprene gasketing on the perimeter. C. Model: SureSeal by Flanders. 2.06 Filter Frames for HEPA Filters Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Air Cleaning Specifications 15885-1 A. General: Fabricate filter frames and supporting structures of 14 gauge galvanized steel. All metal to metal joints shall be welded. Housing to accommodate HEPA filter only and connect to pre-filter/95% filter frames. B. Each HEPA filter shall be secured in place with four spring loaded swing arm assemblies. C. Access doors shall be hinged/removable and shall have continuous neoprene gasketing on the perimeter. D. Model: Surelock-B by Flanders. 2.07 Filter Gages A. Inclined Manometer: One piece molded plastic with epoxy coated aluminum scale, inclined-vertical indicating tube and built-in spirit level, range 0-3 inch WG 3 percent of full scale accuracy; by Dwyer. B. Accessories: Static pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 1/4 inch plastic tubing, 2-way or 3-way vent valves. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install air-cleaning devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber or neoprene gaskets. C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction. D. Install filter gage static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Adjust and level. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Air Cleaning Specifications 15885 - 2 SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. 2.0" pressure class ducts. 1.02 Definitions A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. B. Pressure-Velocity Classification: Duct construction pressure classification shall comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 1.03 Regulatory Requirements A. Duct system shall be constructed, installed, sealed and insulated as provided in Chapter 6 of the California Mechanical Code. B. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and NFPA 96 standards. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds and configuration prior to start of work for air distribution, kitchen hood exhaust, glass fiber duct systems as applies. C. Submit samples of diffuser outlet boxes. D. Certain requirements on this project exceed SMACNA Standards. Contractor shall conform to special details shown on the drawings. 1.05 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Deliver products to site. B. Store and protect products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Approved Manufacturers - Flexible Ducts A. Casco flexible duct. B. Thermaflex flexible duct. 2.02 Materials A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, orUL181. B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 or ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 oz per sq ft for each side in conformance with ASTM A90. C. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14.Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061- T6 or of equivalent strength. D. Flexible Ducts: Fully encapsulated, galvanized steel wire; rated to 2 inches WG positive and 0.5 inches WG negative. Flexible ducts shall consist of fully insulated blanket of fiberglass insulation R-6 (K = .29 @ 75 degrees F), sealed between two layers of tough polymer material with polyethylene jacket externally applied. Individual lengths of flexible ducts shall contain factory fabricated steel connection collars. Flexible ducts shall be supported at or near mid-length with 2" wide 28 ga. steel hanger collar attached to the structure with an approved duct hanger. Installation shall minimize sharp radius turns or offsets. The maximum length will be seven feet and can be used at the terminal ends only, except that flexible ducts properly installed may be used to cross- seismic joints without offsets. E. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Flexible duct wrapped with flexible glass fiber insulation, enclosed by seamless aluminum pigmented plastic vapor barrier jacket; maximum 0.23 K value at 75 degrees F. F. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts or sheet metal screws. G. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape or heavy mastic. H. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end or continuously threaded. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Ductwork Specifications 15890-1 I. Exposed round ductwork shall be spiral lock seam with paintable surface. Unlined round duct shall be Uni-Seal by United McGill or equal. Lined round duct shall be Acousti-Line by United McGill or equal with 1" liner. 2.03 2.0" Pressure Ductwork (Supply, Return, Exhaust, Ductwork Downstream Of Terminal Boxes, Plenums, Casing) A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA Pressure Duct Construction Standards for 2.0" pressure classification and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide [air foil] turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. E. Provide easements where ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easements exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area. F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws. G. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 12 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of airflow. H. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. I. Special terminal boxes are required for all ceiling diffusers which exceed SMACNA Standards. Refer to details on the drawings. Square boxes with collar in top of box are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Obtain manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of fabrication and installation of glass fiber ductwork at beginning of installation. B. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. C. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. D. Connect diffusers or troffer boots to ducts with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp. E. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. F. Neck connection of diffuser or register shall not be made directly into main trunks. Where direct duct neck connection are required due to space limitations, main duct shall be lined 5 feet each side of neck connection. 3.02 Ductwork Application Schedule Air System Material Up to 2.0" Low Pressure Supply (Heating Systems) Steel Up to 2.0" Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coils) Steel Return and Relief Steel General Exhaust Steel Outside Air Intake Steel Combustion Air Steel Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Ductwork Specifications 15890-2 3.03 Adjusting and Cleaning A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment that may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters or bypass during cleaning. B. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment that may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Ductwork Specifications 15890 - 3 SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Volume control dampers. B. Combination fire and smoke dampers. C. Back draft dampers. D. Air turning devices. E. Flexible duct connections. F. Duct access doors. G. Duct test holes. I. Cable controls systems and volume dampers. 1.02 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide shop drawings for shop-fabricated assemblies indicated, including volume control dampers, duct access doors, and duct test holes. Provide product data for hardware used. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for fire dampers and combination fire and smoke dampers where required on the drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Volume Control Dampers A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for pressure classification, in which it will be installed. B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches. C. Fabricate splitter dampers of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure blade with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/4-inch diameter rod in self- aligning, universal joint action flanged bushing with setscrew. D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30 inch. E. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. F. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. [Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.] H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on standoff mounting brackets, bases or adapters. 2.02 Approved Manufacturers - Combination Fire and Smoke Dampers A. Pottorff. B. Ruskin. C. California Aire. 2.03 Combination Fire and Smoke Dampers A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and as indicated. B. Provide factory sleeve for each damper. Install damper operator on exterior of sleeve and link to damper operating shaft. C. Fabricate with multiple blades with 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil- impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, stainless steel jamb seals, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade tops, lock and 1/2 inch actuator shaft. D. Operators shall be spring return pneumatic type suitable for operation on 0-20 psig instrument air or electric type suitable to operate on 120 V AC, 60 cycle, to match the type of control system. Operators shall be UL listed and labeled. Provide end switches to indicate damper position. 2.04 Approved Manufacturers - Backdraft Dampers Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Ductwork Accessories Specifications 15910 -1 A. Pottorff. B. Ruskin. C. California Aire. 2.05 Backdraft Dampers A. Gravity back draft dampers furnished with air moving equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction. B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced back draft dampers of [16 gage galvanized steel], [or] [extruded aluminum], with [center pivoted] blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2.06 Approved Manufacturers - Air Turning Devices A. Duro Dyne. B. Elgin. C. or equal. 2.07 Air Tuning Devices A. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. 2.08 Approved Manufacturers - Flexible Duct Connections A. Duro-Dyne. B. Elgin. C. or equal. 2.09 Flexible Duct Connections A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as indicated. B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 20 oz per sq yd, approximately 6 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip. C. Leaded vinyl sheet, minimum 0.55 inch thick, 0.87 Ibs per sq ft, 10 dB attenuation in 10 to 10,000 Hz range. 2.10 Approved Manufacturers - Duct Access Doors A. California Aire. B. Ruskin. C. Pottorff. 2.11 Duct Access Doors A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards suitable for pressure classification in which it will be installed. B. Review locations prior to fabrication. C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one-inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks. E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes. F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not approved. 2.12 Duct Test Holes A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, airtight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. 2.15 Bowden Cable Control Systems and Volume Dampers A. Manual volume dampers, round or rectangular, with cable control or manual quadrant, Pottorff Model RCS-10/10R or equal. B. General: All volume dampers above inaccessible ceilings shall be provided with remote cable controls as manufactured by Pottorff or Young Regulator Company, no known third Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Ductwork Accessories Specifications 15910 - 2 equal. Dampers mounted in diffuser inlets or requiring ceiling access panels for adjustment are not acceptable. C. Construction: 1. Round and Rectangular balancing dampers will have. "V" style blade(s), and will be provided with nylon bearings that require no lubrication and that prevent rattling and minimize leakage. 2. The remote control cable assembly will be factory attached to the damper to eliminate any field assembly. The opening in the ceiling/wall for remote adjustment will not exceed one inch in diameter and will be provided with finishing cover. D. Manual Quadrant: Manual quadrant shall be commercial quality, locking type for 3/8" square or 1/2" round shaft and shall be available on an extended base for externally insulated ductwork. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide balancing dampers at points on (__2__" pressure classification) supply, return and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. C. Provide combination fire and smoke dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. D. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative. E. Provide back draft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. F. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. Flexible connections shall have a minimum of 1" slack in fabric material with a minimum space of 1-1/2" between metal edging strips. G. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8x8 inch size for hand access, 18x18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. H. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Ductwork Accessories Specifications 15910 - 3 SECTION 15920 SOUND ATTENUATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Duct Silencers. 1.02 Performance Requirements A. Maintain sound level of spaces at levels not to exceed those listed below by utilizing acoustical devices as required to achieve specified sound levels. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 the General Conditions. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, materials, thicknesses, dimensional data, pressure losses, acoustical performance, layout and connection details. C. Product Data: Provide catalog information indicating, materials, dimensional data, pressure losses and acoustical performance. D. Design Data: Provide engineering calculations, referenced to specifications and standards indicating that maximum room sound levels are not exceeded. E. Test Reports: Indicate dynamic insertion loss and noise generation values of silencers. Data must be certified and be in compliance with ASTM E.477-99. Data from older standards is not acceptable and will not be used to compare performance of listed silencers. AMCA 1011 certification is preferred. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements, which maintain integrity of sound isolation. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Perform work in accordance with ASTM E-477-06a. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.05 Qualifications A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Design application of duct silencers under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed at the place where the Project is located. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Approved Manufacturers - NVLAP Accredited Only A. VWA Basis of Design. B. Industrial Acoustics Company. C. Dynasonics. 2.02 Duct Silencers A. Description: Duct section with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fill material, and inner casing of perforated sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similar construction. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. B. Configuration: Rectangular with lined splitters with radiused nose and contoured tails. C. Materials: 1. Outer Casing: Minimum 22 gage thick galvanized steel stiffened as required, with mastic filled lock formed seams, 2 inch long slip joints on both ends. 2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 26 gage thick perforated galvanized steel. 3. Fill: None. D. Rating: See equipment schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Support duct silencers rigidly to ductwork. Refer to Section 15890 and 15910. 3.02 Manufacturer's Field Services A. Provide services of AABC and NEBB testing agency to take noise measurement. Use meters meeting requirements of ANSI S1.4. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Sound Attenuators Specifications 15920-1 B. After start-up, final corrections and balancing of systems take octave band sound measurements over full audio frequency range in areas adjacent to mechanical equipment rooms, duct and pipe shafts and other critical locations as directed. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Sound Attenuators Specifications 15920-2 SECTION 15940 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Diffusers B. Registers/grilles. 1.02 References A. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide product data for items required for this project. C. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type, size, location, application and noise level. D. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish and type of mounting prior to submitting product data and schedules of outlets and inlets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers - Ceiling Diffusers A. Anemostat. B. Tuttle & Bailey. C. Price. D. Titus. 2.02 Rectangular Ceiling Diffusers (Modular Core) A. Rectangular, adjustable pattern, stamped, multicore type diffuser to discharge air in 360- degree pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated; Model SMD manufactured by Anemostat. B. Ceiling Diffusers: Shall be aluminum (or in steel) with baked off-white enamel over prime coat construction with separate opposed blade, Allen key-operated volume controls. Diffusers shall be provided with 24 x 24 extended shells or filler panel suitable for use in ceilings as indicated on drawings. Verify frame type with Architect prior to ordering. Diffusers shall be as manufactured by "Anemostat Model SMD" or "MetalAire Series 9000" or "Anemostat Model RMD" modular type or approved equal. C. Provide frame as required for ceiling type. No perforated face allowed. D. Fabricate of steel or aluminum with baked enamel finish, color as specified by Architect. E. Provide opposed blade damper, square to round neck adaptor and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. 2.03 Acceptable Manufacturers - Ceiling Registers/Grilles A. Anemostat B. Metal Aire C. Kreuger D. Nailor E. Titus 2.04 Ceiling Exhaust and Return Registers/Grilles A. Streamlined blades, depth of which exceeds 3/4 inch spacing with spring or other device to set blades, Model X30 HD manufactured by Anemostat. B. Ceiling Return and Exhaust Registers and Grilles: "Anemostat Model X30 HD" or "MetalAire Model S30 HD" with baked off-white enamel over prime coat construction with opposed blade gang-operated volume control. Cores shall be without indents. Where located in tee ceilings provide with 24 x 24 extended shell or filler panel as shown on drawing. Verify frame types with Architect before ordering. C. Frame type shall be compatible with ceiling. No perforated face allowed. D. Fabricate of steel or aluminum with baked enamel finish, color as specified by Architect. E. Where not individually connected to exhaust fans, provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.05 Acceptable Manufacturers - Wall Registers/Grilles Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Air Outlets and Inlets Specifications 15940-1 A. Anemostat B. Metal Aire C. Kreuger D. Nailor E. Titus 2.06 Wall Supply Registers/Grilles (Double Deflection) A. Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, depth of which exceeds 3/4 inch maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, horizontal face, double deflection; Model X20H manufactured by Anemostat. B. Sidewall supply registers shall be "Anemostat Model X20 H " or "MetalAire Model H4004D" or double deflecting type with key operated opposed blade volume control all aluminum (or in steel "Anemostat S20 H") with baked off-white enamel over prime coat construction. All sidewall supply registers shall be equipped with extractors. C. Fabricate 1-1/4 margin frame with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. D. Fabricate of steel or aluminum with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades or aluminum extrusions with factory baked enamel finish. E. Provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.07 Wall Exhaust and Return Registers/Grilles (High Wall) A. Streamlined fixed 45° angled deflecting vanes, depth of which exceeds 0.5 inch spacing horizontal face; Model X35 HD manufactured by Anemostat or "MetalAire Model RH. B. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with countersunk screw mounting. C. Fabricate of steel or aluminum with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades with factory baked enamel finish. D. Where not individually connected to exhaust fans, provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.08 Acceptable Manufacturers - Linear Diffusers (Shooting Range Supply Fans Only) A. Anemostat B. Metal Aire C. Kreuger D. Nailor E. Titus _ 2.09 Linear Diffusers (Shooting Range Supply Fans Only) A. The linear slot diffusers shall consist of heavy wall extruded aluminum outer frames, adjustable and removable air pattern controllers, and inverted T-members. Steel outer frames, inverted T-members, and pattern controllers will not be accepted. Non- removable inner T-members and pattern controllers also will not be accepted. B. The diffusers shall be specifically designed to integrate into the ceiling system in which they are installed. Where continuous runs are required, the slot diffusers shall include keyways to accept concealed coated steel alignment strips between sections to correct for misalignment. Alignment strips are to be furnished by the diffuser manufacturer. Where applicable, concealed mounting brackets shall be provided for attaching the diffusers to the air plenums. The attaching screws and mounting brackets shall not be visible after installation of the pattern/volume controllers. Mounting brackets shall be minimum 18 gauge coated steel with stiffeners and shall consist of a single piece spanning across the entire width of the diffuser. C. For exposed flange applications, the face shall be painted factory white. For concealed flange applications, the face shall be painted black. Architect specified colors will also be available. Internal pattern controllers shall be black. D. Diffusers shall utilize air pattern controllers that are fully adjustable. Adjustment shall allow for air volume balancing and directional control from horizontal to vertical. The diffusers shall be mounted in the ceiling and shall be adjusted for both the pattern and airflow volume as shown on the plans. Provide industrial heavy duty opposed blade dampers for 700 FPM velocity. E. All diffusers shall be certified as to performance data as tested in accordance with ASHRAE standard 70-91. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Air Outlets and Inlets Specifications 15940 - 2 F. Diffuser manufacturer shall provide blank-off plates, air plenums, light shields, mitered corners, and any other accessories as indicated in the schedule, as shown on the plans. G. Diffusers shall be as manufactured by Anemostat Model Free Flo. 2.10 Acceptable Manufacturers - Supply Grilles (Shooting Range 100% OSA A/C Units Only) A. Anemostat B. Metal Aire C. Kreuger D. Nailor E. Titus 2.11 Supply Grilles (Shooting Range 100% OSA A/C Units Only) A. The return grilles shall integrate with the ceiling style as scheduled. The core shall be an aluminum grid consisting of a 1/4" x 1/4" x Yt" cells, and shall have a minimum free area of 90%. Lay-in models shall include extension panels where required for the scheduled duct size and grid system module size. The grilles shall have a baked-on arctic white finish. Grilles shall be Model GC5 by Anemostat. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser or grille and register assembly. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Air Outlets and Inlets Specifications 15940 - 3 SECTION 15950 ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 Description of Work A. Provide all work for the complete installation of automatic temperature controls. B. Work in this Section: Principal items include: 1. Electronic and electric controls, includes sensors, switches, relays, control panels for instruments. 2. Electric motors for air dampers, valves, etc. 3. Local control panels. 4. Adjustment and validation of control system. Instruction of Owner's representative on maintenance and operation of control equipment. 5. Electric diagrams showing interlocks between equipment furnished under the other sections and control furnished herein. 6. Direct digital control for systems. 7. Wiring and Conduit: Low voltage for the control system under Division15, all required conduits and Power Wiring under Division 16. 8 Dedicated phone line for off-site monitoring. 1.03 System A. The Temperature Control System shall be installed as a installed project and shall consist of all sensors, actuators, direct digital controllers, supervisory controller, electrical low voltage (24 VAC) and line voltage control wiring for a complete and operating installation as specified herein. The system shall be a standard product with the manufacturer who will guarantee ongoing parts availability and factory trained field support for five (5) years after system acceptance. 1.04 Related Sections A. Refer to Division 9 for patching and painting required for the control system installation. Not work of this section. B. Automatic dampers in ductwork, casings, etc. furnished and installed by the Mechanical Division under control people's supervision. The dampers shall be correctly installed so that they operate freely and close tightly. Provide and install blank off plates when the control application requires dampers smaller than duct size. C. Refer to Division-16 sections for the following work; not work of this section: 1. Power supply wiring for power source to power connection on controls and/or unit control panels, including starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer. 1.05 Quality Assurance A. Codes and Standards: 1. General: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent applicable: ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, Latest Edition. EIA - Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital Interface Circuits; RS- 485. NEMA - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum); 250-1979. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; 1981. NFPA 90A - Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; 1981. 1.06 Submittals A. Submit installation drawings, control strategy flow charts, sequences of operation and catalog cut sheets for each device of the proposed system prior to installation for engineer's approval. The drawings shall include the location and intercommunication of Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Energy Management Control System Specifications 15950-1 all stand-alone and subordinate control panels; the schematic diagrams, of the controlled equipment with sensors and actuators shown interconnected to the system controllers; and logic diagrams that depict the sequence of operation. B. After completion of the installation and commissioning of the system including final adjustments, a full set of as-built documentation shall be turned over to the Owner. The as-builts shall include one (1) set of reproducible drawings and two (2) copies of the database on flexible or removable hard disk for each stand-alone controller and the supervisory computer. 1. As-built documentation shall include diagrammatic layouts of the automatic control systems specified herein. Layouts shall show all control equipment, and the function of each item shall be indicated for the different seasons, Layouts shall be located in plastic protective folder and placed in the control panels. 2. All Drawings shall be accompanied with a complete description of sequence of operation. Each control element mentioned in the sequence description shall be identified with the same mark as shown- on the control diagram. C. Submittal of Materials: 1. Material submittals shall be manufacturers prepared catalog cuts indicating type, size and technical details. 2. Reference catalog cuts to the applicable specification article (e.g. 2.02A). 3. Catalog cuts shall be submitted in complete groups of manufacturer's material. 4. Partial submittals of groups or systems are not acceptable. 5. Verify that the submittal has been reviewed in detail and is in fact the Contractor's choice of materials. D. Upon receipt of contract and prior to the delivery of parts, submit eight copies of the following drawings: 1. Submit eight copies of schematic drawings showing the respective locations of components, as applicable and interconnecting wiring between all devices. Also all field terminal and sensing devices. Also all field terminal and sensing devices shall be listed by function and point number and shall display interconnecting wiring and terminals of controlled systems and devices. E. Submit eight copies of schematic drawings showing electric connection details for actuators, transducers, and other electric components. All connections shall be labeled to coordinate with the description of operation, including descriptions to indicate action of components, normal positions, spring ranges, etc. 1.07 Manufacturers A. This specification is written around "Carrier Controls" which to match the existing system. B. If a substitution is proposed, it must be approved 10 days before the bid date, and offer a complete campus wide controls solution. The substituted manufacturer shall provide the complete system specified herein that can be integrated into the existing Carrier system at the site and at the district headquarters. Communicate with and display graphics of all existing sites and controls equipment currently available. Provide programming labor and any interfacing panels or devices to accomplish this complete district wide controls system. If there is additional work (electrical connections, added risers, added panels), the cost for such must be included in the substituted system proposed. 1.08 Warranty A. Provide all labor, material and equipment necessary to maintain beneficial performance of the entire Building Automation System for a period of one (1) year after acceptance of the system, or parts thereof, by an authorized representative of the Owner. Any defects in workmanship or material during the warranty period shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor at no charge to the Owner. All work shall be accomplished during normal working hours, Monday through Friday excluding legal holidays. Precaution shall be taken to minimize disruption of facility operations. B. A prepaid Warranty Service Agreement shall be turned over to the Owner at the time of the acceptance test as a prerequisite of system acceptance. The contract shall include the terms and conditions stated herein. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Energy Management Control System Specifications 15950 - 2 C. Service work shall be performed by service personnel in the direct employ of the control contractors. The service technicians shall be factory trained and certified by the manufacturer to be competent in all aspects of the installed system. The technician shall have a working knowledge of calibration techniques, preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, software diagnostics and microprocessor repair. D. Provide preventive maintenance at one (1) month intervals such that one twelfth of the system is tested and recommissioned if necessary at each monthly inspection. An Owner's representative shall certify that the monthly test has been conducted and the control system is functioning properly. A log of tasks performed at each test shall be maintained by the controls contractor and signed by the Owner as evidence of satisfactory completion of the Warranty Service Agreement. The log shall be retained on site and available for review by authorized personnel. E. System modifications shall be incorporated into the as-built documentation and/or operators and maintenance manuals when operating parameters, control point settings or control strategies are changed. System modifications made by the user of the controls contractor shall have both parties' approvals in order to maintain the Warranty Service Agreement. All database changes shall be saved on disk for backup to the system. F. Software upgrade program shall be implemented on the anniversary or anniversaries of the warranty period. The upgrade shall provide all enhancements offered by the manufacturer for programs in the accepted systems. G. System enhancements beyond the scope of the project shall be field upgradable with pull out/plug-in ease. Provided at reasonable value added cost these upgrades may be purchased at the Owner's option. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Field Installed Controller A. The Field Installed Controller shall be a solid state sixteen bit micro-controller with pre-tested and factory configured software specifically designed for regulating building equipment using closed-loop Direct Digital Control and facility management routines. B. General Purpose Electronic Controller (GPEC): The GPEC shall be located where shown on the plans and shall include inherent input/output capability. Each controller shall include a minimum of eight inputs and eight outputs. If the GPEC's input/output capability is exceeded, additional controllers with inherent input/output capability shall be provided. The GPEC's input/output capability shall include a combination of standard HVAC sensor input and output types. The GPEC shall support discrete and either 0-10vdc and 4-20ma type analog outputs. The GPEC shall support the following sensor input types as a minimum: 1. Dry contact and pulsing dry contacts 2. 0-10vdcand4-20ma 3. 5K and 10K thermistors 4. 1000 ohm Nickel RTD C. Communication status for the primary communication bus and Local Interface Device (LID) shall be indicated by LEDs. The separate LEDs shall flash whenever communications are occurring. The GPEC shall communicate to all connected points at least once a second. D. General Purpose Electronic Expandable Controller (GPEX): The GPEX shall be located where shown on the plans and shall include inherent input/output capability. Each GPEX shall include a minimum of eight inputs and eight outputs. If the GPEX's input/output capability is exceeded, the GPEX shall be capable of supporting additional GPEX-I/O modules. Each GPEX-I/O module shall be capable of supporting a minimum of eight additional inputs and outputs. The GPEX's and associated GPEX-I/O modules shall include the ability to support a combination of universal HVAC sensor input and output types. The GPEX and GPEX-I/O modules shall include the inherent ability to support any combination of discrete, 0-10vdc and 4-20ma outputs and the following sensor inputs types as a minimum: 1. Dry contact and pulsing dry contacts 2. 0-10vdcand4-20ma 3. 10K thermistors 4. 1000 ohm Nickel RTD Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Energy Management Control System Specifications 15950 - 3 E. All output channels shall include diagnostic LED's. Whenever a discrete output has been enabled by the GPEX, a LED associated with that channel shall light. F. When used with analog output points the LED will indicate the commanded position by dimming and brightening of the LED when the H-O-A is in the Auto position. When the output is commanded to its minimum position the LED will become dim. As the analog output commanded position increases, the brightness of the LED will increase, until it is fully illuminated at the maximum commanded output. G. Each input and output channel shall include a configuration switch such that the user shall be able to select the input or output type from any of the types listed above. The GPEX and GPEX-I/O shall not require wiring to a terminal strip. Both types of controllers shall utilize H. "plug type" terminals such that the user may be able to disconnect and replace a module simply by removing the plug type connectors and plugging them into a new module. I. The GPEX shall be capable of supporting HAND-OFF-AUTO (H-O-A) override switches for all output channels. The H-O-A switches shall be accessible to the user and shall allow the user the ability to force the controllers discrete outputs on, off, or in an automatic mode allowing the GPEX to command the discrete output channel on and off. When used with analog output channels, the hand position will command the analog output to its maximum value. When the switch is indexed to the automatic mode the GPEX's algorithm will command the output. 2.02 Controller Attributes A. The controller shall be powered from standard, off the shelf, Class II, 24 volt transformers. The controller shall be listed under UL916-PAZX (Energy Management), UL 864-UDTZ (General Utility Signaling), VDE, and CSA. Products shall be manufactured in a facility having a Quality System that is registered to either ISO 9002 or ISO 9001 Quality Assurance Standard. The controller shall be designed to be easily mounted in a standard NEMA 1 type enclosure without special rails or mounting hardware and as local and national code dictates. B. The controller shall include a 365 day real time clock and watchdog timer diagnostic indicator provided by a LED. The watchdog timer shall reset upon power on and be resettable by software thereafter. Should the watchdog timer not be resettable during the timing period, it shall time out and set all outputs to their non-powered state. The LED shall illuminate solidly to indicate this failure. C. The controller shall not require a battery. All configuration data, custom programs, etc., will be stored in non-volatile memory. The controller shall provide a minimum of two days data retention for the time clock and consumable data (runtimes, GPM, KWH, etc.). Systems that require a battery to store data is not acceptable. D. The controller shall include the capability to provide a local interface for all operating values, alarms, etc., via a hand held, panel mounted, or remotely mounted Local Interface Device. The controller shall also be capable of interfacing to a portable PC for configuring programs, etc. through a separate, additional RJ14 plug. E. The controller shall be capable of operating in either a stand-alone mode or as part of a network with Energy Management PC operator's station(s) and other system elements including Product Integrated Controllers (PICs). 2.03 Controller Software A. The controller shall provide stand-alone operation and shall accept analog and discrete signals from sensors, switches, relays, etc. and shall multiplex the various signals into digital format. All closed loop Direct Digital Control routines shall utilize controller based software algorithms that shall be resident in its memory. All standard and custom control controller based algorithms shall operate independently, and systems that require an on-line host B. Computer or intermediary processor to control mechanical or electrical equipment is not acceptable. C. Time Schedules - Each time schedule shall include provisions for eight individual-day types (Monday through Sunday and holidays), and each individual-day type shall contain at least seven individual on-off time periods. The controller shall support one minute granularity. Systems that use a granularity of greater than one minute shall not be accepted. D. Setpoint Schedules - Each setpoint schedule shall be individually definable in terms of: Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Energy Management Control System Specifications 15950-4 1. Engineering Units 2. Occupied High Setpoint 3. Occupied Low Setpoint 4. Unoccupied High Setpoint 5. Unoccupied Low Setpoint E. Controller software shall include the capability to link specific time schedules with corresponding setpoint schedules for any particular DDC loop. F. Remote Timed Override - The controller shall support remote timed override through the use of a space sensor with an integral override button or a momentary contact switch. Whenever the override is initiated during the unoccupied period and the controller is configured to provide remote override the time schedule associated with the override shall become occupied for 0-1-2-3-4 hours (operator selectable). Whenever the time schedule becomes occupied the controller shall control its associated control points to their occupied setpoints. G. The controller shall provide a power-fail restart routine that shall provide an adjustable staggered time delay for each DO point selected, to avoid sudden power peaks. 2.04 Input / Output Signal Processing A. Input Processing: 1. Each connected or calculated input point shall be independently processed to provide accurate data values. All point processing shall be performed by the controller. All connected and calculated points, both analog and discrete, shall be individually configured and be capable of displaying their values at the LID, portable PC or at a connected Energy Management PC operator's station. Input points may be added, deleted or modified via the Local Interface Device, portable PC, and if tied into a network, by the Energy Management operator's PC station(s). Discrete input points shall be monitored for status, alarm or consumable data. 2. Analog inputs shall be monitored to provide feedback to a control loop, to annunciate that an analog alarm limit has been exceeded, to offer centralized analog monitoring or to monitor consumable data. Discrete and analog inputs shall be able to interact with controller resident algorithms for local processing. 3. The operator shall be able to create sensor groups for use in the algorithms. The sensor groups will provide the lowest, highest, or average values, as applicable to the application and algorithm. 4. Controller software shall include a trim function to allow for the field calibration of analog input sensors. B. Alarm Processing: The controller shall contain a routine to process alarms and alerts. Alarm processing shall be initiated once per second and shall consist of a scan of all input points. Alarm processing logic shall also monitor return to normal conditions as part of the alarm scan. The operator will have the ability to modify the alarm/alert priority level. C. Output Processing: 1. Discrete Outputs: a. Discrete outputs shall be used to command two state devices (on/off, open/close, etc.). Each discrete output point must be capable of being individually configured by the operator. b. The following types of direct digital control routines shall be provided for discrete outputs as a minimum: 1) Enthalpy/analog comparison 2) Analog 3) Interlock 4) Time Clock/Cycling 5) Time Clock/Cycling with Temperature override 6) Staged thermostat (Minimum of four stages plus the fan 7) Staging control (Minimum of 6 stages. For VAV & and cooling towers) 8) Lead/Lag pump control with automatic fault logic Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Energy Management Control System Specifications 15950 - 5 c. Staging algorithms will include adjustable on/off delays as well as adjustable differential between stages. 2. Analog Outputs: a. Analog outputs shall be used to command modulating/variable position devices. Each analog output must be capable of individual configuration via the operator. b. As a minimum, the following preprogrammed analog out algorithms shall be resident at the controller: 1) Cooling Coil Control (CV & VAV) 2) Heating Coil Control (CV & VAV) 3) Mixed Air Damper Control (CV & VAV) 4) Minimum outside air CFM for VAV air handlers 5) Air and water reset 6) Sequenced Cooling and Heating Coil Control for CV applications 7) Static Pressure and Fan Tracking Control 8) Adaptable Control c. Systems which require a host computer to perform any of the above algorithms shall not be acceptable. The algorithms shall support both dual (master/submaster) and single control loops, and shall include PID control, as required. 2.05 Overrides and Interlocks A. Provide the capability to manually override a controller's input or output value and input a different value in its place. Manual overrides shall be capable of being initiated via the Local Interface Device (LID), portable PC or the Energy Management operator's station(s), if part of a network. All manually initiated overrides shall be manually removed. The controller shall also be capable of providing event initiated overrides of normal control algorithms. Specific preprogrammed interlock sequence programming shall be configured via either the LID, portable PC or the Energy Management PC operator's station(s), if part of a network. 2.06 Stand Alone Data Collection A. Traces: The controller shall include the inherent ability to perform automatic point tracing based on a change in value of a discrete or analog point. The trace function shall be operator selectable to store up to 60 samples at an operator configured interval. When the point trace is full the operator shall be able to have the trace stop, wrap around, or to stop and trigger another trace of the point to begin. The trace values shall be displayed at the LID, portable PC or Energy Management PC operator's station, if part of a network. B. Runtimes/Consumables: Any discrete input may be linked by the operator to a runtime table for the purposes of displaying equipment runtime totals. Equipment runtime alarms shall also be displayed at the LID. C. Any discrete or analog input shall be capable of being used to calculate and display consumable data such as; GPM, KWH, #/hour, etc. This information shall be displayed at the LID. D. Facility Management Application Software. E. The controller shall contain the following preprogrammed application software: 1. Night Time Free Cooling (NTFC) 2. Adaptive Optimal Start/Stop 3. Power fail restart 2.07 Custom Programming A. Provide a controller based, user-friendly interactive, programming language for the purpose of creating custom programs for specific, unique applications. Complex control strategies shall be able to be developed by the end user. B. All custom programming must be performed in English language shall be addressable by user specific English names without requiring alphanumeric addresses or point numbers. Programming languages such as BASIC or FORTRAN shall not be acceptable for these applications, and the custom programs shall be retained in controller memory and shall not require a host CPU to operate correctly. Custom programs shall be capable of supporting either SI metric or customary US units. All custom programming point data shall be capable Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Energy Management Control System Specifications 15950 - 6 of being transferred from one controller to another (if networked) directly without an on-line CPU or host computer or regard to whether the transfer occurs over different buses (primary/secondary). 2.08 Local Interface Device A. At least one Local Interface Device (LID) shall be provided and shall connect to the controller through a RJ14 plug. Systems that require wiring of the LID via any other means of simply plugging in, will permanently mount a LID on the face of every control panel. The B. LID shall provide the local means of configuring and modifying the data base, viewing point statuses, alarms, maintenance data, equipment runtimes, or consumable data such as; GPM, KWH, and #/hour, without the need of a portable PC or any other type of external interface. C. The LID shall be password protected and shall include a backlit, alphanumeric liquid crystal display, and shall be capable of displaying at least two lines of data; 24 characters per line. The keypad shall include function, operative, and numeric keys. The LID shall utilize a hierarchy of levels (menus) such that the operator may easily access functions by simply following the menu prompts. D. The LID display shall include 24 character point descriptors (as a minimum), and shall display the point values in either SI Metric or Customary US units. The LID shall automatically log off after ten minutes of no operator activity. The default LID screen shall include the controllers name, current time and date, and present alarm status as a minimum. 2.09 Networking A. The controller shall include the inherent ability to be networked with other system elements to allow a dynamic exchange and sharing of information without the addition of communication cards or additional software. Systems that require a host computer to be in the system architecture or on-line is not acceptable. This information exchange shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Broadcast of time, date, holiday, outside air temperature and relative humidity 2. Data Collection of consumable and runtime data (in addition to stand-alone requirements) 3. Data transfer to receive and utilize I/O point data from and to other system elements 4. Timed force and Facility time schedule 5. Peak Demand Limiting 6. Water System Manager (to allow a dynamic exchange of information between the air handler load and the water source) 7. Dynamic linkage software between an air handler and its associated air terminals 8. DataPort (ASCII conversion) and alarm printer 9. Custom Programming 10. Chiller Plant Manager 2.10 Communicating Input / Output A. The communications input/output module shall be a general purpose software storage module that is connected to the Communications Bus. The module shall be capable of performing the following functions: 1. Interface between remotely located Energy Management PC and Communications Bus. 2. Interface with Product Integrated Controls, Field Installed Controllers and Electronic Space Control. 3. Interface between primary and secondary Communications Buses. 4. Storage of peak demand limiting, data collection and data transfer, timed force, facility time schedule, alarm printer interface, Chiller Plant Manager and autodial gateway software. 5. The Communicating Input/Output module shall come with two, three-wire termination blocks (one for power.one for communication). It shall be capable of being wired into the Communications Bus in any location and shall be capable of being installed in an enclosure with other input/output modules and controllers. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Energy Management Control System Specifications 15950-7 2.11 Communication Bus A. The Communications Bus shall be a three-conductor cable with shield. EIA Standard RS-485 Communications protocol shall be employed. B. Communications Bus shall be capable of having multiple system elements connected. Each Communications Bus shall allow for the use of modules as an interface to secondary Buses. C. Whenever the Communications Bus enters or leaves a building, the Bus shall be provided with adequate lightning suppression devices. D. The Communications Bus shall be capable of communicating through a telephone modem to a remote building. This interface shall allow any Energy Management PC operator's station to communicate with any other remotely located, compatible, Communications Bus. 2.12 Field Installed Sensors A. Space Temperature Sensors: Space Temperature Sensors shall be 5,000 or 10,000 ohm thermistor with wall plate adapter and blank cover assembly. The sensor shall include an integral occupancy override button and shall also include a RJ11 communications port. Space Temperature Sensors shall include space temperature adjustment slides where shown on the plans. The Space Temperature Sensors shall be mounted approximately 60" above the floor. B. Duct Temperature Sensors: Duct Temperature Sensors shall be 1000 ohm averaging RTD's, 5,000 or 10,000 ohm thermistors. C. Momentary Push-button - Tenant Override: A field installed momentary push-button shall be installed where shown on the plans to initiate the timed override period. 2.13 System Interface A. System shall have interface back to existing operating software through Ethernet connection. Graphics package shall be added to existing software to reflect new devices. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All system components and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and requirements. All necessary interconnections, services and adjustments required for a complete and operable system, shall be provided by this contractor who shall be a Carrier certified installer of the systems herein. 3.02 Installation A. General: 1. Electric Wiring: This contractor is responsible for all electrical installation and wiring for a fully operational Building Control System as shown on the drawings and shall include all items not shown on the electrical plans or required as per the electrical specifications. Perform all electrical installation in accordance with local and national electrical codes. Provide conduit in walls for thermostat locations and in all exposed areas. Plenum wire may be used in ceilings where anchored support is provided every 10 feet. 2. Install all low voltage and line voltage control wiring in conduit under this section and in accordance with Division 16. 3. Install all electronic wiring, 24VDC or less, in No. 20 AWG as a minimum. Provide shields as required by equipment manufacturer. 3.03 Permits and Fees A. This contractor shall secure and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and inspections as required by federal, state or local law. This includes providing required notices, plans, licenses, and fees, obtaining any necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction, and delivering any certificates of inspection as may be required. No work is to proceed until all proper certificates and licenses are obtained and posted. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Energy Management Control System Specifications 15950 - 8 3.04 Clean-Up A. This contractor shall clean up regularly in order to maintain clean site conditions. In general, clean-up programs shall be scheduled by contractor at least once per week; however, the contractor shall clean up more often if required to meet OSHA standards. B. This contractor is responsible for coordinating the work with other trades so as to eliminate unnecessary cutting and patching. 3.05 Equipment Installation A. Space Thermostat and Sensor Locations: In general, locate thermostats and sensors for room control immediately inside door, above light switch at approximately 60 inches from floor. Coordinate thermostat locations with General Contractor and approval by Engineer. B. Local Control Panels: Mount all local control panels as indicated on the control drawings. 3.06 Cutting and Patching A. This contractor is responsible for coordinating the work with other trades so as to eliminate unnecessary cutting and patching. 3.07 Equipment Installation A. Space Thermostat and Sensor Locations: In general, locate thermostats and sensors for room control immediately inside door, above light switch at approximately 60 inches from floor. Coordinate thermostat locations with General Contractor and approval by Engineer. B. Local Control Panels: Mount all local control panels as indicated on the control drawings. C. Control Valves: All control valves shall be furnished to the mechanical contractor for installation. 3.08 Owner Training A. Provide 8 hours of owner training and familiarization with all of the HVAC controls installed. Owner's representatives shall be provided a booklet showing the system layout, components, and operation and maintenance data. B. Training to include. 1. Explanation of drawings and diagrams. 2. Walkthru of jobsite to locate control components 3. Overview of operation and maintenance features. 4. System front end operation (where applicable) C. Manufacturer will operate a free 40 hour a week customer support hotline for additional user support services that are required. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Energy Management Control System Specifications 15950-9 SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Testing, adjustment and balancing of air systems. B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 1.02 Related Sections A. Section 15781 - Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units B. Section 15783 - Split Type Air Conditioning Units C. Section 15875 - Ventilators and Exhaust Fans D. Section 15890-Ductwork E. Section 15920 - Sound Attenuators F. Section 15940 - Air Outlets and Inlets 1.03 References A. AABC - National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentations, Total System Balance. B. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. C. Submit test reports. D. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets and indicating thermostat locations. 1.05 Report Forms A. Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. B. Forms Shall Include the Following Information: 1. Title Page: a. Company name b. Company address c. Company telephone number d. Project name e. Project location f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor 2. Instrument List: a. Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date 3. Air Moving Equipment: a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model d. Air flow, specified and actual e. Return airflow, specified and actual f. Outside airflow, specified and actual g. Total static pressure and total external, specified and actual h. Inlet pressure Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Specifications 15990-1 i. Discharge pressure j. Fan RPM 4. Exhaust Fan Data: a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model d. Air flow, specified and actual e. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual f. Inlet pressure g. Discharge pressure h. Fan RPM 5. Electric Motors: a. Manufacturer b. HP/BHP c. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load. d. RPM e. Service factor f. Starter size, rating, heater elements 6. V-Belt Drive: a. Identification/location b. Required driven RPM c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave, diameter and RPM f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum and actual 7. Air Distribution Test Sheet: a. Air terminal number b. Room number/location c. Terminal type d. Terminal size e. Area factor f. Design airflow g. Test (final) airflow h. Percent of design air flow 8. Flow Measuring Station: a. Identification/station b. Location c. Size d. Manufacturer e. Model f. Design flow rate g. Design pressure drop h. Actual/final pressure drop i. Actual/final flow rate j. Station calibrated setting 9. Sound Level Report: a. Location b. Octave bands - equipment off c. Octave bands - equipment on 10. Vibration Test: Air Moving Equipment a. Location of points: 1) Fan bearing, drive end 2) Fan bearing, opposite end 3) Motor bearing, center (if applicable) 4) Motor bearing, drive end 5) Motor bearing, opposite end Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Specifications 15990-2 6) Casing (bottom or top) 7) Casing (side) b. Test readings: 1) Horizontal, velocity and displacement 2) Vertical, velocity and displacement 3) Axial, velocity and displacement c. Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration d. Unusual conditions at time of test e. Vibration source (if non-complying) 1.06 Project Record Documents A. Submit record documents. 1.07 Quality Assurance A. Agency shall be company specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified in this Section with minimum three years experience. Perform Work under supervision of AABC or NEBB Certified Test and Balance Engineer. B. Total system balance shall be performed in accordance with AABC "National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance" or NEBBS "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems". C. Provide a Quality Assurance Program to assure Owner and specify design progressional that the testing, adjusting and balancing will perform in accordance with the current applicable NEBB Procedual Standards, or equivalent by AABC. Program shall remain in effect or 12 months after submission of the "Final" balance report to the specifying design firm. 1.08 Sequencing and Scheduling A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before date of Substantial Completion. 1.09 Agency Qualifications A. Testing, adjusting and balancing agency shall be certified by AABC or NEBB. Agency must be an independent agency and not a subsidiary of, or affiliated with any firm who performs services other than testing, adjusting and balancing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Before commencing work, verify that systems are complete and operable. B. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services to the Engineer. C. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions, which prevent system balance. D. If, for design reasons, system cannot be properly balanced, report as soon as observed. E. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. F. Air balance not to commence until ductwork shop drawings have been submitted to a design engineer for review acceptance. 3.02 Preparation A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. B. Provide additional balancing devices as required. 3.03 Installation Tolerances A. Adjust air moving systems to plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent for return and exhaust systems from figures indicated. B. Adjust hydronic systems to plus or minus 10 percent of design conditions indicated. 3.04 Adjusting A. Recorded data shall represent actually measured or observed condition. B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Specifications 15990-3 D. Provide labor at no additional cost to the Owner to change sheaves and belts as required to accomplish specified fan performance. Mechanical Contractor to provide material as required. E. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes and restoring thermostats to specified settings. F. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Architect. 3.05 Air System Procedure A. Adjust distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return and exhaust air quantities. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. F. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Specifications 15990 - 4 SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope A. This section supplements all sections of this division and shall apply to all phases of work hereinafter specified, shown on the drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of electrical systems for the Project. The Work required under this division, is not limited to the Electrical Drawings. Refer to Site, Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical Drawings that may designate Work to be accomplished. The intent of the Specifications is to provide a complete electrical system that includes all documents that are a part of the Contract. 1. Work Included: Furnish all labor, material, services and skilled supervision necessary for the construction, erection, installation, connections, testing, and adjustment of all circuits and electrical equipment specified herein, or shown or noted on the Drawings, and its delivery to the Owner complete in all respects ready for use. B. Contract Drawings: The Contract Drawings are shown in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the Scope of Work indicating the intended general arrangement of equipment, conduit and outlets. Follow the contract drawings in laying out the work and verify spaces for the installation of the materials and equipment based on actual dimensions of equipment furnished. Where conflicts occur, the most stringent application shall apply wherever a question exists as to the exact intended location of outlets or equipment, obtain instructions from the Architect before proceeding with the Work. C. Equipment or Fixtures: Equipment and fixtures shall be connected to provide circuit continuity in accordance with the Specifications whether or not each piece of conductor, conduit, or protective device is shown between such items of equipment or fixtures, and the point of circuit origin. D. Work Installed but Furnished under Other Sections: The Electrical Work includes the installation or connection of certain materials and equipment furnished under other sections. Verify installation details. Foundations for apparatus and equipment will be furnished under other sections unless otherwise noted or detailed. 1.02 General Requirements A. Guarantee: Furnish a written guarantee for a period of one year from date of substantial completion. B. Equipment Safety: All electrical materials and equipment shall be new and shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories and bear their label, or listed and certified by a nationally recognized testing authority where UL does not have an approval. Custom made equipment must have complete test data submitted by the manufacturer attesting to its safety. C. Codes and Regulations: 1. Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials furnished under the requirements of these specifications shall conform to the latest publications or standard rules of the following: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - IEEE National Electrical Manufacturers' Association - NEMA California Fire Code - CFC California Building Code - CBC Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. - UL National Fire Protection Association - NFPA Federal Specifications - Fed. Spec. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM American National Standards Institute - ANSI American Standard Association - ASA California Electrical Code - CEC National Electrical Safety Code - NESC Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Basic Electrical Requirements Specifications 16010 -1 Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association - IPCEA Public Utilities Commission - PUC California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Subchapter 5 California Code of Regulations, Title 24 State & Municipal Codes in Force in the Specific Project Area Occupational Safety and Health Administration -OSHA The term "Code", when used within the specifications, shall refer to the Publications, Standards, ordinances and codes, listed above. In the case where the codes have different levels of requirements the most stringent rules shall apply. D. Seismic Design of Electrical Equipment: 1. All electrical prefabricated equipment is to be designed and constructed in such a manner that all portions, elements, sub-assemblies and/or parts of said equipment and the equipment as a whole, including their attachments, will resist a horizontal load equal to the operating weights of those parts multiplied times the following factors: Horizontal CP Vertical CP supported piping or as boilers, chillers, transformers, unit 0.50 0.33 Type of Equipment Rigid and rigidly equipment such pumps, motors, substations and control panels. flexibly supported air-handling units, equipment so fundamental period equipment and its greater than 0.05 Flexible and equipment such as piping and other supported that the of vibration of the supporting system is seconds. Communication equipment and emergency stand-by equipment. 1.00 0.67 2. Load is to be applied at the center of gravity of the part and to be in any direction horizontally. Design part and to be in any direction horizontally. Design stresses shall be in accordance with the specifications for design of the American Institute of Steel Construction. Anchorage, support and/or attachment of said prefabricated equipment to the structure should be in accordance with the details found in the plans and specifications. 3. It is the entire responsibility of the Contractor to verify the design of equipment so that the strength and anchorage of the internal components of the equipment exceeds the force level used to restrain and anchor the unit itself to the supporting structure. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Codes, Permits and Fees: Where the Contract Documents exceed minimum requirements, the Contract Documents take precedence. Where code conflicts occur, the most stringent shall apply unless variance is approved. Where provisions in the drawings and specifications differ in regard to code application, size, quality, quantity or type of equipment, Contractor shall include in the bid, costs for the most costly provision either denoted in the specifications or on the drawings. This provision shall apply as an amendment to the California Public Contracts Code. a. Comply with all requirements for permits, licenses, fees and Code. Permits, licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the Work shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense, unless otherwise specified. b. Comply with the requirements of the applicable utility companies serving the Project. Make all arrangements with the utility companies for proper coordination of the Work. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Specifications Basic Electrical Requirements 16010-2 2. Substitutions: The materials, products, and equipment described in the Contract Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance, and quality. Architect may consider requests for substitutions of specified equipment, materials, or products and then only when request are submitted in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents, Division 1, and are received by the Architect a minimum of 21 days prior to the date established for the receipt of the bid. No substitutions will be considered after the date of the receipt of the bid or contract award unless there is cause for a substitution which complies in every respect to the provisions of the Contract Documents, Division 1. Substitution requests shall be made in accordance with Public Contracts Code (AB2084) revisions as follows: a. No substitutions are allowed after bid opening. b. All substitutions shall be requested 21 days prior to bid opening date. c. Final addendum naming approved substitutions of materials/equipment must be issued 7 days prior to bid date. F. Record Drawings: Comply with Division 1. Keep up to date, monthly payments withheld if not updated. G. Shop Drawings and Submittals: Submittals on all material prior to installation. 1. Drawings shall be submitted, as required under Division 1. 2. Shop drawings shall be submitted on all materials. H. Trenching and Backfilling: All trenching and backfilling for electrical work shall be the responsibility of the contractor and shall be done in accordance with Division 2 of this specification. The Contractor shall examine the drawings of all other sections to determine locations of all existing underground lines. The Contractor shall use extreme caution when working in the vicinity of these lines and shall be responsible for the proper and approved repair of any damage caused by his work. I. Cutting and Patching: 1. Obtain written permission from the Architect before core drilling or cutting any structural members. Exact method and location of conduit penetrations and/or openings in concrete walls, floors, or ceilings shall be as approved by the Architect. 2. All core drilling, cutting and patching for this work shall be performed under this Section of the specifications. Use craftsmen skilled in their respective sections for cutting, fitting, repairing, patching of plaster and finishing of materials including carpentry work, metal work or concrete work required for this Work. Do not weaken walls, partitions or floor with cutting. Holes required to be cut in floors must be drilled without excessive breaking out around the holes. Patching and/or refinishing shall be determined by the Architect. 3. Use care in piercing waterproofing. After the part piercing the waterproofing has been set in place, seal openings and make absolutely watertight. 4. Seal all openings to meet the fire rating of the particular wall floor or ceiling. Conform to Division 7. 5. Conform to Division 1. 1.03 Job Conditions A. Protection: 1. Protection of apparatus, materials and equipment. Take such precautions as necessary to properly protect all apparatus, fixtures, appliances, material, equipment and installations from damage of any kind. The Architect may reject any particular piece or pieces of material, apparatus or equipment scratched, dented or otherwise damaged. 2. Seal equipment or components exposed to the weather and make watertight and insect proof. Protect equipment outlets and conduit openings with temporary plugs or caps at all times that work is not in progress. B. Sequencing and Scheduling: 1. Work lines and established heights shall be in strict accordance with architectural drawings and specifications insofar as these drawings and specifications extend. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Basic Electrical Requirements Specifications 16010-3 Verify all dimensions shown and establish all elevations and detailed dimensions not shown. 2. Lay out and coordinate all work well enough in advance to avoid conflicts or interferences with other work in progress so that in case of interference the electrical layout may be altered to suit the conditions, prior to the installation of any work and without additional cost to the Owner. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's responsibility. Maintain all code-required clearances about electrical equipment. Unless specifically noted otherwise, establish the exact location of electrical equipment based on the actual dimensions of equipment furnished. 1.04 Work in Cooperation with Other Sections A. Examine the drawings and specifications and determine the work to be performed by the electrical, mechanical and other sections. Provide the type and amount of electrical materials and equipment necessary to place this work in proper operation, completely wired, tested and ready for use. This shall include all conduit, wire, motor starters, disconnects, relays, time clocks and other devices for the required operation sequence of all electrical, mechanical and other systems or equipment. Where a conflict occurs on drawings, the most stringent shall apply. B. Provide conduit and wire for all controls and other devices, both line and low voltage, described in this or other parts of the contract documents. Install all control housings and backboxes required for installing conduit and wire to the controls. C. Install control wiring in separate conduit between each heating, ventilating and air conditioning sensing device and its control panel and/or control motor. Before installing any conduit for heating, ventilating and air conditioning control wiring, verify from the control manufacturer's shop drawings where these separate conduit runs are required. D. Plan all work so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference with other sections. Inform all parties concerned of openings required for equipment or conduit required in the building construction for Electrical Work and provide all special frames, sleeves and anchor bolts as required. Coordinate the electrical work with the mechanical installation. Promptly report to the Architect any delay or difficulties encountered in the installation of this work which might prevent prompt and proper installation, or make it unsuitable to connect with or receive the work of other sections. Failure to so report shall constitute an acceptance of the work of other sections as being fit and proper for the execution of this work. 1.05 Testing and Adjustment A. Upon completion of all Electrical Work, the contractor shall provide all testing as follows: 1. Operational Test: Test all circuit breakers, receptacles, motors and all other electrical and communication equipment. Replace all faulty devices and equipment discovered during testing with new devices and equipment at no additional cost, and that part of the system (or devices or equipment) shall then be retested. 2. Secondary Grounding Resistance: Perform ground continuity test between main ground system and equipment frame, system neutral and/or derived neutral point. 3. Ground Fault System Components 4. All test procedure shall be performed by an independent testing firm. 1.06 Maintenance, Servicing and Instruction Manuals, and Wiring Diagrams A. Prior to substantial completion, the contractor shall submit 5 copies of operating and maintenance and servicing instructions, as well as an equal number of copies of complete wiring diagrams all neatly bound in hard cover 3-ring binders with table of contents and tabs: (See Division 1 - Operation and Maintenance Data): B. All wiring diagrams shall specifically cover the installed system indicating zones, wiring, and components added to the system. Typical drawings will not be accepted. 1.07 Final Inspection and Acceptance Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Basic Electrical Requirements Specifications 16010-4 A. After all requirements of the specifications and/or the drawings have been fully completed, representatives of the Owner will inspect the Work. The Contractor shall provide competent personnel to demonstrate the operation of any item of system, to the full satisfaction of each representative. The Contractor shall provide 8 hours (two 4-hour sessions) of minimum scheduled operation and maintenance training for maintenance staff on each system indicated in 1.06A above. See specific sections for additional training/operation hours required for school personnel. B. Final acceptance of the work will be made by the Owner after receipt of approval and recommendation of acceptance from each representative. C. The Contractor shall furnish Record Drawings before final payment of retention. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Basic Electrical Requirements Specifications 16010-5 SECTION 16111 CONDUIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Metal conduit. B. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. C. Nonmetal conduit. D. Fittings and conduit bodies. 1.02 References A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI/NEMA FB 1-88 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. D. NEC A "Standard of Installation." E. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. F. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Conduit (EPC^O and EPC-80). G. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 1.03 Design Requirements A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, flexible nonmetallic conduit, nonmetallic tubing, fittings, and conduit bodies. 1.05 Project Record Documents A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches. 1.06 Regulatory Requirements A. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.07 Field Samples A. Provide under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide field sample of conduit, two each at 2 feet long. C. Provide field sample of expansion/deflection fitting, two each. 1.08 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.09 Project Conditions A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough in. C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Conduit Requirements A. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified. B. Underground Installations: 1. Use rigid steel conduit, concrete encased PVC Schedule 40 or as indicated on drawings. 2. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise noted. C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid steel conduit. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Conduit Specifications 16111-1 D. Conduit shall not be installed in any floor slabs. Install conduit 18" minimum below bottom of finished flow slab. E. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel and aluminum conduit. F. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Use rigid steel conduit. 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel conduit. 2.02 Metal Conduit A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1-88; all steel fittings. 2.03 PVC Coated Metal Conduit A. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 20 mil thick. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1-88; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit. 2.04 Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1-88. 2.05 Nonmetallic Conduit A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits. F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190. G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Route conduit under slab from point-to-point. M. Do not cross conduits in slab. N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. O. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends. Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum. S. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes. T. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2-inch size. U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. V. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic, control and expansion joints. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Conduit Specifications 16111-2 W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170. Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195. 3.02 Interface with Other Products A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods under the provisions of Division 7. B. Route conduits through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Conduit Specifications 16111-3 SECTION 16114 LADDER RACK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Ladder rack and accessories. 1.02 References A. CEC - California Electrical Code. B. ASTM A 123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip. C. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated Galvanized by the Hot-Dip Process. D. NEMA VE 1 - Metallic Cable Tray Systems. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes. C. Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.05 Project Record Documents A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Record actual routing of ladder rack and locations of supports. 1.06 Qualifications A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.07 Regulatory Requirements A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers A. P.W. Industries B. B-line. C. Erico. D. Approved equal. 2.02 Ladder Rack A. Description: NEMA VE 1, Class 20C ladder type tray. B. Material: Steel. C. Finish: ASTM A 123, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. D. Inside Width: 18 inches. As indicated on drawings. E. Inside Depth: 4 inches. As indicated on drawings. F. Straight Section Rung Spacing: 9 inches on center. As indicated on drawings. G. Inside Radius of Fittings: 24 inches or as indicated on drawings. H. Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps. 2.03 Warning Signs A. Engraved Nameplates: 3/4-inch high black letters on yellow laminated plastic nameplate, engraved with the following wording: WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT. USE ONLY AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND TUBING! PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install metallic cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 1. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Ladder Rack Specifications 16114-1 C. Support trays in accordance with Section 16190. Provide supports at each connection point, at the end of each run, and at other points to maintain spacing between supports of 8 feet maximum. D. Use expansion connectors where required. E. Ground and bond cable tray under provisions of Section 16170. 1. Provide continuity between tray components. 2. Use anti-oxidant compound to prepare aluminum contact surfaces before assembly. 3. Provide 2 AWG bare copper equipment grounding conductor through entire length of tray; bond to each component. 4. Connections to tray may be made using mechanical or exothermic connectors. F. Install warning signs at 20-ft centers along cable tray, located to be visible. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Ladder Rack Specifications 16114-2 SECTION 16123 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Building wire and cable. B. Wiring connectors and connections. 1.02 References A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type. C. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. D. Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for aluminum conductors substituted for copper conductors. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. 1.04 Qualifications A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum ten years documented experience. 1.05 Regulatory Requirements A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.06 Field Samples A. Provide under provisions of Division 1. B. Submit two lengths, each 18 inches of cable assembly from each reel. C. Select each length to include complete set of manufacturer markings. D. Attach tag indicating cable size and application information. 1.07 Project Conditions A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Conductor sizes are based on copper. C. Aluminum conductors shall not be used. D. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. E. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required. 1.08 Coordination A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Division 1. B. Determine required separation between cable and other work. C. Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Building Wire And Cable A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70; Type THHN/THWN insulation for feeders and branch circuits. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. 3.02 Preparation A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3.03 Wiring Methods A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Building Wire and Cable Specifications 16123-1 B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. F. Use wiring methods indicated on Drawings. 3.04 Installation A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. C. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. D. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. E. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits. F. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120-volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet. G. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277-volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet. H. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. I. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. J. Neatly train and lace wiring. K. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. L. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. M. Use high compression type connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. N. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. 0. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. 3.05 Interface With Other Products A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195. B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings. 3.06 Field Quality Control A. Perform field inspection and testing under provisions of Division 1. B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. C. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended values. D. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Building Wire and Cable Specifications 16123-2 SECTION 16130 BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Pull and junction boxes. 1.02 References A. ANSI/NEMA FB 1-88 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Association. B. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 1.03 Project Record Documents A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Accurately records actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull and junction boxes. 1.04 Regulatory Requirements A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.05 Project Conditions A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough in. C. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at location required for box to serve intended purpose. Include installation within 10 feet of location shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Outlet Boxes A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel. B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum or cast ferroalloy. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs. 2.02 Pull and Junction Boxes A. Sheet Metal Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel. B. Surface-Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction box. 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron or cast aluminum. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance. C. Install pullboxes and junction boxes above accessible ceiling and in unfinished areas only. D. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods under the provisions of Division 7. E. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished area. F. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits, both supported within 12 inches of box. G. Use gang boxes where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional boxes. H. Use cast outlet boxes in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. I. Large Pullboxes: Boxes larger than 100 cubic inches in volume or 12 inches in any dimension. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Use hinged enclosure under provisions of Section 16160. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Boxes Specifications 16130-1 2. Other Locations: Use surface-mounted cast metal box. 3.02 Interface With Other Products A. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with Division 8. B. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. 3.03 Adjusting A. Install knockout closure in unused box opening. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Boxes Specifications 16130-2 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Occupancy sensors. D. Device plates. E. Drop cords. 1.02 References A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device - Dimensional Requirements. D. CEC 70 - California Electrical Code. 1.03 Submittals For Review A. Division 1 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. 1.04 Submittals For Information A. Division 1 - Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 Qualifications A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.06 Regulatory Requirements A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Wall Switches A. Single Pole Switch: 1. Hubbell, Model 1221. 2. Pass & Seymore, Model #20AC1. 3. Arrow-Hart, Model #1991. B. Double Pole Switch: 1. Hubbell, Model 1222. 2. Pass & Seymore, Model #20AC2. 3. Arrow-Hart, Model #1992. C. Three-way Switch: 1. Hubbell, Model 1223. 2. Pass & Seymore, Model #20AC3. 3. Arrow-Hart, Model #1993. D. Four-way Switch: 1. Hubbell, Model 1224. 2. Pass & Seymore, Model #20AC4. 3. Arrow-Hart, Model #1994. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. F. Description: NEMA WD 1, heavy-duty specification grade, AC only general-use quiet type snap switch, UL approved for tungsten lamp loads or inductive loads without derating. G. Device Body: Plastic with toggle switch. H. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics. 2.02 Receptacles A. Single Convenience Receptacle: Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Wiring Devices Specifications 16140-1 1. Hubbell, Model 8310. 2. Pass & Seymour, Model 5361. 3. Arrow-Hart, Model 5361. B. GFCI Receptacle: Hubbell, Model GF8300-I. C. Duplex Receptacle: 1. Hubbell, Model 8300. 2. Pass & Seymour, Model 9300-HG-BK. 3. Arrow-Hart, Model 8300. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. Description: NEMA WD 1; heavy-duty general-use receptacle. F. Device Body: Red plastic for emergency generator power source, orange plastic for UPS power source. G. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; type as specified and indicated. H. Convenience Receptacle: NEMA, Type 5-20. I. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements. 2.03 Occupancy Sensors A. Novitas, Inc., Type E1, Catalog #01-250, 120 VAC with neutral connection. Choice of automatic or manual on in one model. Gangable for two-level lighting control. B. Approved equal. 2.04 Wall Plates A. Device plates shall be stainless steel, for the number of gangs and type of openings necessary. B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover. C. Plates shall be engraved and fitted, when specified for: 1. More than two gangs. 2. Equipment that cannot be seen from the locations. 3. All lock type switches. 4. All receptacles other than 120 volts. 5. Emergency circuits, switches and receptacles and devices shall be red in color. 2.05 Drop Cords A. Fifteen foot long, 12 gauge, SO cord with 20 amp receptacle at end, and mesh grip. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3.02 Preparation A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.03 Installation A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. E. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. F. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. H. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. I. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished area, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. 3.04 Interface With Other Products A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting heights specified and indicated on drawings. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Wiring Devices Specifications 16140-2 B. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor. C. Install convenience receptacle 15 inches above finished floor. D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above backsplash of counter. E. Install telephone jack 15 inches above finished floor. F. Install telephone jack for wall telephone 48 inches above finished floor. 3.05 Field Quality Control A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. 3.06 Adjusting A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.07 Cleaning A. Division 1 - Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Wiring Devices Specifications 16140 - 3 SECTION 16160 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Cabinets. C. Terminal blocks and accessories. 1.02 References A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). B. ANSI/NEMA ICS 1 - Industrial Control and Systems. C. ANSI/NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. D. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Shop Drawings for Equipment Panels: Include wiring schematic diagram, wiring diagram, outline drawing and construction diagram as described in ANSI/NEMA ICS 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Hinged Cover Enclosures A. Construction: NEMA 250; Type 1, 3R, 4, steel. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. C. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key. D. Panel for Mounting Terminal Blocks or Electrical Components: 14 gage steel, white enamel finish. 2.02 Cabinets A. Cabinet Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable endwalls. Provide 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard painted matte white, for mounting terminal blocks. B. Cabinet Fronts: Steel, flush surface type with concealed trim clamps, screw cover front, concealed hinge and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard; finish as approved by Architect. 2.03 Terminal Blocks And Accessories A. Terminal Blocks: ANSI/NEMA ICS 4; UL listed. B. Power Terminals: Unit construction type, closed-back type, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts. C. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, channel mounted; tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts. 2.04 Fabrication A. Shop assemble enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or electrical components in accordance with ANSI/NEMA ICS 6. B. Provide conduit hubs knockouts on enclosures. C. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install cabinets and enclosures plumb; anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner, minimum. B. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment enclosures. C. Install trim plumb. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Cabinets and Enclosures Specifications 16160-1 SECTION 16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Grounding electrodes and conductors. B. Equipment grounding conductors. C. Bonding. 1.02 References A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. NPFA 99 - Health Care Facilities. 1.03 Grounding Electrode System A. Metal underground water pipe. B. Metal frame of the building. C. Concrete-encased electrode. D. Ground ring. E. Metal underground gas-piping system. F. Rod electrode. 1.04 Performance Requirements A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms. A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: Provide data for grounding electrodes and connections. C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of exothermic connectors. 1.05 Project Record Documents A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Accurately records actual locations of grounding electrodes. 1.06 Qualifications A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.07 Regulatory Requirements A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Rod Electrode A. Material: Copper-clad steel. B. Diameter: 3/4 inch. C. Length: 10 feet. 2.02 Wire A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Foundation Electrodes: 2/0 AWG minimum or as shown on plans. C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements or as shown on plans. 2.03 Grounding Well Components A. Well Pipe 8-inch diameter by 24-inch long concrete pipe with belled end. B. Well Cover: Cast iron with legend "GROUND" embossed on cover. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 3.02 Installation A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve a maximum resistance to ground of five ohms. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Grounding and Bonding Specifications 16170-1 C. Provide grounding well pipe with cover at each rod location. Install well pipes top flush with finished grade. D. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing where indicated. Bond steel together. E. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. F. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground. G. Bond together reinforcing steel and metal accessories in pool and fountain structures. H. Install transient suppression plate where indicated. I. Install ground grid under access floors where indicated. Construct grid of 2 AWG bare copper wire installed on 24 inch centers both ways. Bond each access floor pedestal to grid. J. Bond together each metallic raceway, pipe, duct and other metal object entering space under access floors. Bond to underfloor ground grid. Use 2 AWG bare copper conductor. K. Provide grounding and bonding in-patient care areas to meet requirements of NFPA 99 and ANSI/NFPA 70. L. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. 3.03 Field Quality Control A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of- potential method. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Grounding and Bonding Specifications 16170 - 2 SECTION 16180 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other Sections or furnished by Owner. 1.02 References A. FS W596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 5 - Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices. 1.03 Related Sections A. Division 1 - Work by Others. B. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment. C. Section 16111 - Conduit. D. Section 16123 - Building Wire and Cable. E. Section 16130 - Boxes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Hubbell. B. Pass & Seymour. C. Arrow-Hart. 2.02 Cords And Caps A. Straight-blade Attachment Plug: NEMAWD1. B. Locking-blade Attachment Plug: NEMAWD5. C. Attachment Plug Configuration: Match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment. D. Cord Construction: Oil-resistant thermoset insulated Type SO multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for extra hard usage in damp locations. E. Cord Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Inspection A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.02 Preparation A. Review equipment submittals prior to installation and electrical rough-in. Verify location, size, and type of connections. Coordinate details of equipment connections with supplier and installer. 3.03 Installation A. Use wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat- producing equipment. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid tight flexible conduit in damp or wet locations. C. Install pre-fmished cord set where connection with attachment plug is indicated or specified, or use attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps. D. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord connections to outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. E. Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of pre-wired equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide interconnecting wiring where indicated. F. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices such as limit switches and temperature switches as indicated. Connect with conduit and wiring as indicated. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Equipment Wiring System Specifications 16180-1 SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners. 1.02 References A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. California Part 2 of Title 24/California Building Code (CBC) 1.03 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.04 Regulatory Requirements A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Product Requirements A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast insert system, expansion anchors, powder-actuated anchors and preset inserts or as directed by structural engineer. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beams clamps with seismic safety strap, spring steel clips, steel ramset fasteners, and welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 2.02 Steel Channel A. Description: Galvanized steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. E. Obtain permission from Architect before using powder-actuated anchors. F. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural members. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. I. In wet and damp locations uses steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch off wall. J. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Supporting Devices Specifications 16190-1 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable markers. C. Conduit markers. 1.02 References A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of Product. 1.04 Regulatory Requirements A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.05 Extra Materials A. Furnish under provisions of Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Nameplates And Labels A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background. B. Locations: Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. C. Letter Size: Use 1/4-inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. 2.02 Wire Markers A. Description: Tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers. B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams on drawings or shop drawings. 2.03 Underground Warning Tape A. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Preparation A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.02 Application A. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws. C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. D. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 6 inches below finished grade. 3.03 Nameplate Engraving A. Provide nameplates to identify all circuits in the service distribution and power distribution panelboards; motor control centers; branch circuit panelboards; separately mounted starting switches; disconnecting switches; motor control pushbutton stations; selector switches; transformers; terminal cabinets; telephone cabinets, etc. Clearly identify on the Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Electrical Identification Specifications 16195-1 nameplate the equipment such as "Air Handling Unit AH-1" and "Hot Water Cir. Pump P- 1" in lieu of abbreviated plan references such as "AH-1" or "P-1". B. Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled below. C. Panelboards and Switchboard Centers: 1/4 inch; identify equipment designation, voltage rating, and source. D. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters in Panelboards, Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: 1/8 inch; identify circuit and load served, including location. E. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches and Motor Starters: 1/8 inch; identify voltage rating, ampere rating and load served including location. F. HVAC and Plumbing Control Equipment: 1/8 inch; identify equipment designation and equipment served including location. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Electrical Identification Specifications 16195-2 SECTION 16421 UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Arrangement with Utility Company for permanent electric service, including payment of Utility Company charges for service. B. Overhead Underground service entrance. C. Metering equipment. 1.02 References A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.03 System Description A. Utility Company: B. System Characteristics: 480 volts, three phase, four-wire, 60 Hertz. C. Service Entrance: 1.04 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Submit Utility Company prepared drawings. 1.05 Quality Assurance A. Perform Work in accordance with Utility Company written requirements. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.06 Regulatory Requirements A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.07 Pre-lnstallation Conference A. Convene two weeks prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Division 1. 1.08 Field Measurements A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Utility Company drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Utility Meters A. Meters will be furnished by Utility Company. 2.02 Utility Meter Base A. Meter base will be furnished by Utility Company. 2.03 Metering Transformer Cabinet A. Manufacturers: 1. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. B. Size: As required by Utility Company. C. Include provisions for padlocking and sealing. 2.04 Overhead Service Rack A. Manufacturers: 1. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. B. Description: Porcelain insulator type rack. 2.05 Transformer PAD A. Manufacturers: 1. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. B. Description: Precast concrete transformer pad with cable pit sized as indicated on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Verify conditions under provisions of Division 1. B. Verify that service equipment is ready to be connected and energized. 3.02 Preparation Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Utility Service Entrance Specifications 16421 -1 A. Make arrangements with Utility Company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. B. Coordinate location of Utility Company's facilities to ensure proper access is available. 3.03 Installation A. Install service rack and weatherhead at height as required by Utility Company. Utility Company will connect service drop to service entrance conductors. Provide drip loop in service conductors. B. Install service entrance conduits in concrete envelope from Utility Company's terminal pole and from Utility Company's pad-mounted transformer to building service entrance equipment. Connect service lateral conductors to service entrance conductors. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Utility Service Entrance Specifications 16421-2 SECTION 16426 SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Switchboard. 1.02 Related Sections A. Division 3 - Concrete Materials & Proportioning: Concrete pads. B. Division 9 - Painting. 1.03 References A. ANSI C39.1 - Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments. B. ANSI C57.13 - Instrument Transformers. C. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. D. NEMA PB 2 - Dead front Distribution Switchboards. E. NEMA PB 2.1 - Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; and switchboard instrument details. C. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, fault current withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and components. D. The contractor shall require that the switchboard manufacturer furnish a computerized short circuit coordination study and control schematic that will provide optimum coordinated settings of all adjustable trip units at the switchboard. The settings shall provide selective tripping so that the breaker closest to a fault clears without interruption of service to other parts of the distribution system. The coordination study shall include the entire distribution system including all switchboards, panelboards, transformers, etc., as shown on the single line diagram. Provide a referenced single line diagram as part of the study. The study shall be furnished with the shop drawing submittal. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.05 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.06 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Deliver in 48 inch maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids. C. Accept switchboards on site. Inspect for damage. D. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. E. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. 1.07 Maintenance Materials A. Provide ten of each key. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Switchboard Specifications 16426-1 A. Square D. B. Cutler Hammer. C. Siemens. 2.02 Switchboard A. Description: NEMA PB 2 with electrical ratings and configurations as indicated. B. Main Section Devices: Individual mounted and compartmented. C. Distribution Section Devices: Panel mounted. D. Auxiliary Section Devices: Individually mounted. E. Bus Material: Copper with tin plating, standard size. F. Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance. G. Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard. H. Molded Case Circuit Breakers Below 225 amp Frame: NEMA AB 1, integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. I. Solid-state Molded Case Circuit Breakers Over 225 amp Frame: NEMA AB 1, provide with electronic sensing, timing and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings; instantaneous trip; and adjustable short time trip. Provide stationary mounting. J. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from the front only of the switchboard, suitable for the conductor materials and sizes indicated. K. Pull Section: Size as shown on Drawings. L. Future Provisions: Fully equip spaces for future devices with bussing and bus connections, suitably insulated and braced for short circuit currents. Provide continuous current rating as indicated. M. Enclosure: Type 1 - General Purpose. 1. Align sections at front and rear. 2. Switchboard Height: 90 inches, excluding floor sills, lifting members and pull boxes. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external surfaces. Coat internal surfaces with minimum one coat corrosion-resisting paint, or plate with cadmium or zinc. N. Switchboard dimensions shall not exceed those indicated on the drawings. If proposed equipment exceeds these dimensions, it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate all equipment arrangement within the room with all affected trades to provide all code clearances and proper arrangements. Switchboards that grossly exceed the space allocated and would require an increase in room size are not acceptable. 2.03 Ammeters and Voltmeters A. Ammeters: ANSI C39.1; direct-reading, full range, indicating ammeter with 4.5 inch square recessed case and 250 degree scale, white dial with black figures and pointer, 5 ampere, 60 Hertz movement, 1 percent accuracy. B. Voltmeters: ANSI C39.1; direct-reading, full range, indicating voltmeter with 4.5 inch (115 mm) square recessed case and 250 degree scale, white dial with black figures and pointer, 120 volt, 60 Hertz movement, 1 percent accuracy. 2.04 Meter Transfer Switches A. Ammeter Transfer Switch: Rotary multistage snap-action type with 600 volt AC-DC silver plated contacts, engraved escutcheon plate, pistol-grip handle, and four positions including OFF. B. Voltmeter Transfer Switch: Rotary multistage snap-action type with 600 volt AC-DC silver plated contacts, engraved escutcheon plate, pistol-grip handle, and seven positions including OFF. 2.05 Power Meters A. Watt-hour Meters and Watt Meters: ANSI/IEEE C12.1; three phase induction type with two stators, each with current and potential coil, rated 5 amperes and 120 volts at 60 Hertz. Meter suitable for connection to 3- and 4-wire circuits. Include potential indicating lamps; adjustments for light and full load, phase balance, and power factor; four-dial clock register; integral demand indicator and contact devices to operate remote impulse- Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Switchboard Specifications 16426 - 2 totalizing demand meter; ratchets to prevent reverse rotation; removable meter with draw-out test plug; semi-flush mounted case with matching cover. 2.06 Metering Transformers A. Current Transformers: ANSI C57.13; 5 ampere secondary, wound bushing bar or window type, with double secondary winding and secondary shorting device, primary/secondary ratio as required, burden and accuracy consistent with connected metering and relay devices, 60 Hertz. B. Potential Transformers: ANSI C57.13; 120 volt single tapped double secondary, disconnecting type with integral fuse mountings, primary/secondary ratio as required, burden and accuracy consistent with connected metering and relay devices, 60 Hertz. 2.07 Accessories A. A new printed single line diagram of the entire electrical distribution system as shown on the single line diagram shall be framed, plastic laminated, and mounted in the switchboard room. The diagram shall be a permanent black on white mylar at least 24" x 36" in size, professionally printed. Provide two (2) extra mylar drawings to Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Verify field conditions. B. Verify that surface is suitable for switchboard installation. 3.02 Preparation A. Provide concrete housekeeping pad under the provisions of Division 3. 3.03 Installation A. Install switchboard in locations shown on Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and NEMA PB 2.1. B. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard. 3.04 Field Quality Control A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 1. B. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. C. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase to phase and phase to ground for one minute each, at test voltage of 1000 volts; minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 2 megohms. D. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints using calibrated torque wrench. 3.05 Adjusting A. Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. B. Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values determined by manufacturer furnished short circuit and coordination study. 3.06 Cleaning A. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Switchboard Specifications 16426-3 SECTION 16440 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Disconnect switches. B. Fuses. C. Enclosures. 1.02 References A. ANSI/UL 198C - High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Types. B. ANSI/UL 198E - Class R Fuses. C. FS W-F-870 - Fuseholders (For Plug and Enclosed Cartridge Fuses). D. FS W-S-865 - Switch, Box, (Enclosed), Surface-Mounted. E. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers - Disconnect Switches A. Square D. B. Cutler Hammer. C. Siemens. 2.02 Disconnect Switches A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; FS W-S-865; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips: FS W-F-870. B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type HD; FS W-S-865; quick-make, quick- break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1; Type 1, for interior dry locations; Type 3R for exterior or wet locations. D. Switch Ratings: Number of poles, voltage, current and horsepower rating as required for particular installation. 2.03 Acceptable Manufacturers - Fuses A. Littelfuse. B. Gould Shawmut. C. Bussman. 2.04 Fuses A Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: ANSI/UL 198C, Class J; ANSI/UL 198E, Class RK1; current limiting, one-time fuse, 250, 600 volt. B. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes. C. Size fuses based on motor nameplate rating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings. B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches, otherwise required by Code. C. Properly align switches and support independent of the connecting raceway. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Disconnect Switches Specifications 16440-1 SECTION 16450 SECONDARY GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Power system grounding. B. Communication system grounding. C. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding. 1.02 System Description A. Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to metallic water service and to supplementary grounding electrodes. B. Ground each separately-derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded metallic water pipe and nearest effectively grounded building structural steel member. C. Provide communications system grounding conductor at point of service entrance and connect to nearest effectively grounded metallic water pipe and nearest effectively grounded building structural steel member. D. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing systems. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate layout of ground ring, location of system grounding electrode connections, and routing of grounding electrode conductor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Materials A. Ground Rods: Copper-encased steel, 3/4 inch diameter, minimum length 10 feet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder and branch circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing. B. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe using a suitable ground clamp. Make connections to flanged piping at street side of flange. Provide bonding jumper around water meter. C. Supplementary Grounding Electrode: Use driven ground rod on exterior of building, in main service equipment area. Install ground rod in suitable recessed well; fill with gravel after connection is made. Use effectively grounded metal frame of the building. Use minimum of 20 feet No. 4 bare copper wire embedded in concrete foundation. D. Use minimum 6 AWG copper conductor for communications service grounding conductor. Leave 10 feet slack conductor at terminal board. E. Isolated Grounding Systems: Use insulated equipment grounding conductor and connect only to service grounding electrode Provide separate grounding electrode as shown. F. Provide grounding and bonding at Utility Company's metering equipment and pad-mounted transformer in accordance with Section 16421. 3.02 Field Quality Control A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to convenient ground reference point using suitable ground testing equipment. Resistance shall not exceed 5 ohms. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Secondary Grounding Specifications 16450-1 SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards. 1.02 Related Work A. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. B. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates. 1.03 References A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and Service. B. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. C. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings for equipment and component devices under provisions of Division 1. B. Include outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker arrangement and sizes. 1.05 Spare Parts A. Keys: Furnish 10 each to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufactures A. Square D. B. Cutler Hammer. C. Siemens. 2.02 Branch Circuit Panelboards A. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB1; circuit breaker type. FS W-P-115, Type I, Class 1. B. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 1. C. Cabinet Size: 6 inches deep; 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards. D. Provide flush cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. E. Provide panelboards with copper bus, ratings as scheduled on Drawings. Provide copper ground bus in all panelboards. F. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 volt panelboards; or as shown on Drawings. G. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1 FS W-C-375; bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits. Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install panelboards plumb and flush with wall finishes, in conformance with NEMA PB 1.1. B. Height: 6ft. C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. D. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. E. Stub 5 empty one inch conduits to accessible location above ceiling out of each recessed panelboard. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Panelboards Specifications 16470-1 3.02 Field Quality Control A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference at any panelboard between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20 percent. Take care to maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Panelboards Specifications 16470-2 SECTION 16480 MOTOR CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Manual motor starters. B. Magnetic motor starters. C. Combination magnetic motor starters. 1.02 Related Work A. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices: Housekeeping pads. 1.03 References A. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. B. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service. C. FS W-P-115 - Power Distribution Panel. D. FS W-F-870 - Fuseholders (For Plug and Enclosed Cartridge Fuses). E. FS W-S-865 - Switch, Box, (Enclosed), Surface-Mounted. F. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. G. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. H. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. I. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate on shop drawings, front and side views of motor control center enclosures with overall dimensions. Include conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and components. C. Provide product data on motor starters and combination motor starters, relays, pilot devices, and switching and overcurrent protective devices. D. Submit manufacturers' instructions under provisions of Division 1. 1.05 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.06 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1. C. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. D. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to motor control center components, enclosure, and finish. 1.07 SPARE PARTS A. Keys: Furnish 10 each to Owner. B. Fuses: Furnish to Owner 2 spare fuses of each type and rating installed. C. Fuse Pullers: Furnish one fuse puller to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers - Motor Starters A. Square D. B. Cutler Hammer. C. Siemens. 2.02 Manual Motor Starters A. Manual Motor Starter: NEMA ICS 2, size M-0, 2 pole, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated non-reversing full-voltage controller for induction motors rated in Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Motor Control Specifications 16480-1 horsepower, with overload relay, low voltage protection, red pilot light, auxiliary contacts, and toggle operator. B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Starter: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, 2 pole, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, red pilot light, and toggle operator. C. Motor Starting Switch: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A manually operated 2 pole, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, low voltage protection, red pilot light, auxiliary contacts, and toggle operator. D. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6; Type 1. 2.03 Magnetic Motor Starters A. Magnetic Motor Starters: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. B. Full Voltage Starting: Non-reversing type. C. Size: NEMA ICS 2; size as shown on drawings. D. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS 2; melting alloy. E. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1. F. Combination Motor Starters: Combine motor starters with fusible switch disconnect in common enclosure. Combine motor starters with disconnecting means, type as scheduled. G. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2; iwo and field convertible contacts in addition to seal-in contact. H. Pushbuttons: NEMA ICS 2; START/STOP in front cover. I. Indicating Lights: NEMA ICS 2; RUN: green in front cover. J. Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2; HAND/OFF/AUTO, locking type, in front cover. K. Relays: NEMA ICS 2; as indicated on drawings. L. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, sized as required, in each motor starter, capacity as scheduled. 2.04 Controller Overcurrent Protection And Disconnecting Means A. Molded Case Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: NEMA ABM; FS W-C-375; circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. B. Motor Circuit Protector: NEMA AB 1; FS W-C-375; circuit breakers with integral instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. C. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; FS W-S-865; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. D. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; FS W-S-865; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips: FS W-F- 870. Designed to accommodate Class R or J fuses. 2.05 Acceptable Manufacturers - Fuses A. Bussman. B. Gould Shawmut. C. Littlefuse. 2.06 Fuses A. Fuses: ANSI/UL 198C, Class J; ANSI/UL 198E, As indicated on Drawings; dual element, current limiting, time delay, one-time fuse, 600 volt. B. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install motor control equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install fuses in fusible switches. C. Select and install heater elements in motor starters to match installed motor characteristics. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Motor Control Specifications 16480 - 2 D. Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter enclosure door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Motor Control Specifications 16480-3 SECTION 16481 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Manual motor starters. B. Magnetic motor starters. C. Combination magnetic motor starters. 1.02 Related Sections A. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. B. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates. 1.03 References A. UL198C - High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type. B. UL 198E-Class R Fuses. C. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. D. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. E. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. F. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details. C. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers A. Square D. B. Cutler Hammer. C. Siemens. 2.02 Manual Controllers A. Manual Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage controller with overload element, red pilot light, auxiliary contact, and push button operator. B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, red pilot light, and toggle operator. C. Motor Starting Switch: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, with red pilot light and toggle operator. D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 or 3R as indicated on drawings. 2.03 Automatic Controllers A. Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. B. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. C. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS; melting alloy. D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 or 3R as indicated on drawings. 2.04 Product Options And Features A. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 field convertible contacts in addition to seal-in contact. B. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, heavy duty type. C. Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form Z, rated A150. D. Pushbuttons: Recessed type. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Enclosed Motor Controllers Specifications 16481 -1 E. Indicating Lights: Incandescent type. F. Selector Switches: Rotary type. G. Relays: NEMA ICS 2. H. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary. Provide fused primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure. 2.05 Disconnects A. Combination Controllers: Combine motor controllers with thermal magnetic circuit breaker or fusible switch disconnect in common enclosure as indicated on drawings. B. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. C. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses. 2.06 Fuses A. Manufacturers: 1. Bussman. 2. Gould Shawmut. 3. Little Fuse. B. Description: Element, time delay, 600 volt, Class J. C. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install enclosed controllers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 16190. C. Height: 5 ft to operating handle. D. Install fuses in fusible switches. E. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics. F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195. G. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. 3.02 Field Quality Control A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 1. B. Inspect and test each enclosed controller to NEMA ICS 2. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Enclosed Motor Controllers Specifications 16481-2 SECTION 16485 CONTACTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. General purpose contactors. B. Lighting contactors. 1.02 References A. ANSI/NEMAICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. B. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. 1.03 Project Record Documents A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Accurately record actual locations of each contactor and indicate circuits controlled. 1.04 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for replacing and maintaining coil and contacts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers - General Purpose Contactors A. Square D. B. Cutler Hammer. C. Siemens. 2.02 General Purpose Contactors A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor. B. Coil Voltage: 120 VAC, Provide 480 volt to 120 volt control transformer. C. Poles: As indicated. D. Contact Rating: 30 amps minimum or as indicated on drawings. E. Size: As indicated. F. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 or 3R as required to meet conditions of installation. G. Accessories: As shown. 2.03 Manufacturers A. Square D. B. Cutler Hammer. C. Siemens. 2.04 Contactors A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor. B. Configuration: Mechanically held, 3 wire control. C. Coil Voltage: 120 VAC, Provide 480 volt to 120 volt control transformer. D. Poles: As indicated. E. Contact Rating: 30 amps minimum or as indicated on drawings. F. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, as indicated as required to meet conditions of installation. G. Accessories: As indicated on drawings. 2.05 Accessories A. Pushbuttons and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy duty type. B. Indicating Lights: NEMA ICS 2, push-to-test type. C. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Class A300. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Contactors Specifications 16485-1 SECTION 16510 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Interior luminaries and accessories. B. Exit signs. C. Ballasts. D. Lamps. E. Luminaire accessories. 1.02 Related Sections A. Section 16130 - Boxes. 1.03 References A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High-Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns. B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps -Specifications. C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. D. ANSI/NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. E. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.05 Project Record Documents A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Accurately record actual locations of each luminaire. 1.06 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Maintenance Data: Include replacement parts list. 1.07 Qualifications A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Luminaries A. Furnish products as specified on Drawings. B. Install ballasts, lamps, and specified accessories at factory. 2.02 Ballasts A. Fluorescent Ballast: 1. Advance Mark V Series I. 2. Magnetek HP-Triad. 3. Sound Rating: Less than 30 dB. 4. Description: ANSI C82.1, high power factor type, rapid start electromagnetic ballast. 5. Provide ballast suitable for lamps specified. 6. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Interior Luminaires Specifications 16510-1 7. Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. 8. Ballast Protection: Resetting type thermal protector. B. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballast: 1. Fixture manufacturers standard ballast. 2. Description: ANSI C82.4, metal halide or high pressure sodium lamp ballast. 3. Provide ballast suitable for lamp specified. 4. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage. 2.03 Lamps A. Fluorescent, Incandescent and High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamp Manufacturers: 1. GE. 2. Sylvania. 3. Phillips. B. Provide lamp type specified for luminaire. 2.04 Accessories A. Provide all required accessories such as sockets, glassware, boxes, spacers, mounting devices, lamps, etc. B. Provide 0.125 inches thick minimum, 100% virgin acrylic thermoplastic lenses where specified on drawings; as manufactured by KSH (Series 12). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Examine substrate and supporting grids for luminaries. B. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for lamps specified. 3.02 Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Install suspended luminaries and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaries as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. D. Install surface mounted luminaries and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prohibit movement. E. Light Fixture Support: 1. Suspended Acoustical Ceilings: a. Flush or recessed light fixtures weighing less than 56 pounds may be supported directly on the runners of a heavy duty grid system, but, in addition, they shall have a minimum of two 12 GA. slack safety wires attached to the fixture at diagonal corners and anchored to the structure above. All 4 ft. x 4 ft. light fixtures shall have slack safety wires at each corner. All flush or recessed light fixtures weighing 56 pounds or more shall be independently supported by not less than 4 taut 12 GA. wires each attached to the fixture and to the structure above regardless of the type of ceiling grid system used. The taut 12 GA. wires including their attachment to the structure above shall be capable of supporting 4 times the weight of the unit. b. All fixtures supported on intermediate duty grid systems shall be independently supported by not less than 4 taut 12 GA. wires each attached to the fixture and to the structure above. Conform to OSA IR 47-4 March, 1990. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Interior Luminaires Specifications 16510 - 2 c. Support surface mounted light fixtures by at least two positive devices which surround the ceiling runner and which are each supported from the structure above by a 12 GA. wire. d. Spring clips or clamps that connect only to the runner are not acceptable. Provide additional supports when light fixtures are 8 feet or longer. e. Support pendant mounted light fixtures directly from the structure above with hanger wires or cables passing through each pendant hanger and capable of supporting 4 times the weight of the fixture. 2. Suspended Drywall Ceilings: a. All recessed or drop-in light fixtures shall be supported directly by main runners or by supplemental framing which is supported by main with the ceiling contractor to provide appropriate framing and location for fixtures. b. Surface mounted fixtures shall be attached to a main runner with a positive clamping device made of material with a minimum of 14 gage. Rotational spring catches shall not be allowed. c. Conform to Division 9 and OSA IR 47-5, March, 1990. F. Install recessed luminaries to permit removal from below. G. Install wall mounted luminaries, emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings. H. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. I. Connect luminaries and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16130 as indicated. J. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. K. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. L. Install specified lamps in each luminaire, emergency lighting unit and exit sign. M. Verify all ceiling types and provide lighting fixtures with suitable mounting hardware for mounting in or on subject ceiling. N. Recessed mounted fixtures shall be approved for the fire rating of the ceiling or shall be enclosed with fire rated material and installed in complete accordance with fire marshal requirements. O. Surface Mounted Fluorescent Fixtures: Where fixtures are indicated for installation on low-density cellulose fiberboard (see room finish schedule on drawings), provide 1-1/2" ceiling spaces, unless UL approved for mounting directly to the ceiling material. P. Standard Plaster Frames: Provide plaster frames for all recessed lighting fixtures installed in plaster or drywall ceilings (see room finish schedule on drawings). Provide plaster frame designed and fabricated of such materials to preclude the possibility of staining the plaster. Q. Properly support and align fixtures and provide all necessary steel shapes for support of the fixtures. Coordinate complete fixture installation with the building construction. R. Square and rectangular fixtures shall be mounted with sides parallel to building lines unless otherwise indicated. S. Where special fixtures to be used in special ceiling are scheduled, verify all ceiling systems and coordinate fixture type and accessories prior to ordering fixtures. Coordinate and cooperate with ceiling supplier in the preparation of ceiling system Shop Drawings. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Interior Luminaires Specifications 16510 - 3 T. Install fluorescent fixtures as recommended by the manufacturer or as necessary to provide exact horizontal alignment, preventing horizontal or vertical deflection on angular jointing of fixtures suspended in continuous rows. U. Fixtures installed in mechanical areas shall be located to avoid interference with all mechanical equipment. V. Two-lamp ballasts shall be allowed to feed single lamps in tandem fixtures and shall be properly identified to show which lamps are fed from this ballast by markers on the fixture and the ballast. 3.03 Field Quality Control A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.04 Adjusting A. Adjust Work under provisions of Division 1. B. Aim and adjust luminaries. C. Adjust exit sign directional arrows as indicated. D. Relamp luminaries that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. 3.05 Cleaning A. Clean Work under provisions of Division 1. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.06 Demonstration A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide minimum of two hours demonstration of luminaire operation. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Interior Luminaires Specifications 16510 - 4 SECTION 16532 SITE LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Exterior luminaires and accessories. B. Poles. 1.02 Related Sections A. Division 3 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Foundations for poles. 1.03 References A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High-Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns. B. ANSI C82.4 - Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type). C. ANSI/IES RP-8 - Recommended Practice for Roadway Lighting. D. ANSI/IES RP-20 - Lighting for Parking Facilities. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire which is not a standard product of the manufacturer. C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data. D. Design Data: Include lighting calculations. E. Test Reports: Indicate measured illumination levels. F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under "Regulatory Requirements". G. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product. 1.05 Project Record Documents A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Accurately record actual locations of each luminaire. 1.06 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for maintaining luminaires. 1.07 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Accept products on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect poles from finish damage by handling carefully. D. Store and handle solid wood poles in accordance with ANSI O5.1. 1.08 Coordination A. Furnish bolt templates and pole mounting accessories to installer of pole foundations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Luminaires A. Furnish products as specified in schedule on Drawings. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.02 Lamps A. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamp Manufacturers: 1. General Electric. 2. Sylvania. 3. Phillips. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Examine excavation and concrete foundation for lighting poles. B. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for lamps specified. 3.02 Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install lighting poles at locations indicated. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Site Lighting Specifications 16532-1 C. Install poles plumb. Provide double nuts to adjust plumb. Grout around each base. D. Install lamps in each luminaire. E. Bond luminaires, metal accessories and metal poles to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 3.03 Field Quality Control A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation. B. Measure illumination levels to verify conformance with performance requirements. C. Take measurements during night sky, without moon or with heavy overcast clouds effectively obscuring moon. 3.04 Adjusting A. Adjust work under provisions of Division 1. B. Aim and adjust luminaires to provide illumination levels and distribution as directed. C. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at Date of Substantial Completion. 3.05 Cleaning A. Clean work under provisions of Division 1. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean finishes and touch up damage. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Site Lighting Specifications 16532-2 SECTION 16611 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Charger/rectifier unit. B. Inverter unit. C. Batteries. 1.02 References A. IEEE 519 - Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of Static Power Converters. B. NEMA PE 1 - Uninterruptible Power Systems. C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum.). D. CEC - California Electrical Code. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 3. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Provide battery rack dimensions; battery type, size, dimensions, and weight; detailed equipment outlines, weight, and dimensions; location of conduit entry and exit; single-line diagram indicating metering, control, and external wiring requirements; heat rejection and air flow requirements. C. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets and technical data sheets to indicate physical data and electrical performance, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. Include equipment installation outline, connection diagram for external cabling, internal wiring diagram, and written instruction for installation. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Operation Data: Description of operating procedures. C. Maintenance Data: Description of servicing procedures; list of major components; recommended remedial and preventive maintenance procedures; spare parts list. 1.05 Qualifications A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. B. Supplier: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum five years documented experience. 1.06 Regulatory Requirements A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 Pre-lnstallation Conference A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Division 1. 1.08 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Accept Products on site in factory packing. Inspect for damage. C. Protect equipment from extreme temperature and humidity by storing in a conditioned space. D. Protect equipment from dust and debris by wrapping unit in dusttight cover and storing away from construction activity. E. Deliver batteries no sooner than 5 days before charging. 1.09 Environmental Requirements Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Static Uninterruptible Power Supply Specifications 16611-1 A. Do not store or install unless temperature is maintained between 32 degrees F and 104 degrees F, at a relative humidity less than 95 percent (non-condensing). B. Maintain conditions during and after installation of Products. 1.10 Maintenance Service A. Furnish service and maintenance of uninterruptible power supply for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Include coverage of travel, labor, parts, and service. 1.11 Warranty A. Provide five-year warranty under the provisions of Division 1. B. Warranty: Include coverage for batteries. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers A. APC B. Liebert C. MGE D. Approved equal. 2.02 Uninterruptible Power Supply A. System Configuration: Nonredundant [type with reverse transfer. B. Components: 1. Battery. 2. Rectifier/charger to maintain battery charge and to provide input to inverter when utility power is available. 3. Inverter to provide power to load during normal operation. 4. Static switch to transfer load automatically and without disturbance between inverter and utility power. 5. Manual switch to bypass static switch for maintenance. 6. Input and output isolation transformers and filters to provide appropriate isolation and disturbance attenuation 7. Monitors, sensors, and control circuits. C. Design Standards: IEEE 519 and NEMA PE 1. 2.03 System Ratings and Operating Characteristics A. System Continuous Rating: As indicated on Drawings, 10 KVA, 8 KW,] over entire battery voltage range at specified power factor. Maintain output voltage within specified limits at any load from full load to no-load. B. Battery Capacity: [Capable of operating at full load for 30 minutes. C. Voltage Rating: 120/208 volts, 1 phase. D. Input Voltage Operating Range: Plus or minus 10 percent. E. Input Frequency Operating Range: 60 Hz. plus or minus 3 Hz. F. Input Current Limit: Adjustable to maximum of 125 percent of that required to operate at full load with battery bank on float charge. G. Current Walk-in: 25 to 100 percent in fifteen seconds. H. UPS Power Factor Over Full Range of Loads and Input Voltages: 74 to 100 percent, lagging. I. Harmonic Distortion of Input Current WaveForm: 5 percent maximum at full load. J. Output Voltage regulation: 1. Plus or minus 1 percent for balanced load, full range of DC input and no load to full load variations. 2. Plus or minus 1.75 percent for 50 percent unbalanced load, full range of DC input and no load to full load variations. 3. Plus or minus 2.5 percent during maximum overload of the system. K. Output Voltage Adjustment: Plus or minus 4 percent. L Output Free Running Frequency: 60 Hz Plus or minus 0.5 percent. M. Frequency Adjustment: Plus or minus 4 percent. N. Output Harmonic Distortion: Maximum 5 percent rms total harmonic distortion (THD) and maximum 3 percent any single harmonic, at rated frequency and voltage, from 10 percent load to full load and over battery voltage range, measured into a linear load. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Static Uninterruptible Power Supply Specifications 16611-2 0. Voltage Transient Response for Application of 0 to 50 Percent, 50 to 100 Percent, 100 to 50 Percent, and 50 to 0 Percent Step Loads, and Transfer To and From Bypass Line: 1. Plus 8, minus 10 percent for maximum of 8.3 milliseconds. 2. Plus or minus 5 percent for maximum of 25 milliseconds. 3. Plus or minus 3 percent for maximum of 50 milliseconds. 4. Recovery to steady state within 100 milliseconds after any out-of-tolerance variation. P. Phase Displacement: 1. 120 plus or minus 1 degrees for balanced loads. 2. 120 plus or minus 4 degrees for 50 percent unbalanced loads. 2.04 Design A. Inverter Type: Pulse-width modulated. B. Rectifier/Charger Capacity: Sufficient to supply full load to inverter while recharging fully-discharged battery to 95 percent of full capacity in four hours or less; and within the input current limits specified. C. Provide means for on-line testing of UPS, including test points to allow adjusting and servicing. Provide means for testing static switch while load is bypassed to utility. D. Mean Time Between Failures: 60,000 hours, minimum. E. Cooling: Provide forced air cooled unit with redundant cooling so that failure of any one cabinet cooling fan or fan circuit will not affect continued operation at full load and ambient temperature of 77 degrees F or lower. F. Operate battery floating, isolated from the UPS AC input and AC output. The battery may be resistance grounded through 5,000 - 10,000 ohms for the purpose of ground fault sensing. G. Do not use continuous moving parts or electron tubes. Accomplish power switching using semiconductor devices. H. Construct equipment so each power component can be replaced without a soldering iron or special tools. 1. Use front-panel removable plug-in control modules. 2.05 Fabrication A. Electroplate brackets and securing hardware with corrosion resistant material. Secure bolts, studs and nuts with lock washers. B. Identify internal wiring at each end of conductor. Provide cabinet grounding lug. C. Conversion Equipment Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure allowing access from front for servicing adjustments and connections. Access through hinged door equipped with tumbler lock and latch handle. Equip cabinet for fork truck lifting. D. Equip air inlet with permanent type filters and pressurize cabinet, or use gaskets around door and panel openings to prevent entry of dirt. E. Cabinet finish: Primed and painted inside and outside with suitable semi-gloss enamel. 2.06 Battery A. Storage Battery: Sealed lead acid heavy-duty industrial battery, designed for auxiliary power service. Provide battery with impact resistant plastic case. Provide cells with explosion proof vents, clear containers, and ample space for plate growth without stressing container and cover. B. Electrolyte Specific Gravity: No greater than 1.250 when full charged and measured at 77 degrees F. C. Ampere-Hour Rating: Sufficient to supply direct current to inverter for outage period specified, with inverter operating at full rated output, to a discharge limit of not less than 1.65 volts per cell. D. Battery Racks: Maximum of three-tier, all steel construction, with plastic insulating rails at all points of contact with the battery case. Paint racks with acid resistant paint. 2.07 Controls and Indicators A. Controls: 1. AC input circuit breaker. 2. "Inverter operate" switch to initiate inverter operation. 3. "Inverter standby" switch to cause inverter to cease operation Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Static Uninterruptible Power Supply Specifications 16611-3 4. "Static switch transfer" switch to permit manual actuation of static transfer switch. 5. "Static switch lock-out" switch to inhibit automatic retransfer of load to inverter. 6. Battery charge timer. 7. "Indicator test" switch. 8. Static switch preferred input circuit breaker 9. Static switch output circuit breaker 10. Static switch bypass circuit breaker. 11. Controls for maintenance bypass switch. B. Indicators: 1. "Inverter synchronized to utility." 2. "Load connected to utility." 3. "Static transfer switch inhibited." 4. "High/low DC voltage." 5. "Overtemperature." 6. "Inverter output overload." C. Meters: Use 1-percent accuracy meters to indicate the following: 1. Rectifier/charger DC voltage and current. 2. Utility, inverter output, and load AC voltage. 3. Load AC current. 4. Inverter output and utility frequency. 5. UPS output watts. D. Wall-mounted Alarm Panel: Surface mounted annunciator panel with the following monitoring and alarm functions: 1. "Utility power available." 2. "Utility bypass power available." 3. "Inverter output available." 4. "Inverter synchronized to utility." 5. "Load connected to inverter output." 6. "Load connected to utility bypass power (alarm)." 7. "Static transfer switch inhibited (alarm)." 8. "High/low DC voltage (alarm)." 9. "Overtemperature (alarm)." 10. "Inverter output overload (alarm)." 11. Audible alarm (sounds when any of the above alarm conditions occur). 12. Alarm/indicator "silence/test" switch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 Field Quality Control A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 1. B. Verify specification performance criteria; measure battery discharge and recharge times; simulate fault in each system component and utility power; Operate unit at 77 degrees F for eight hours; and other tests as recommended by manufacturer. 3.03 Manufacturer's Field Services A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Division 1. B. Include services of technician to supervise adjustments, final connections, and system testing. 3.04 Demonstration A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Division 1. B. Demonstrate operation uninterruptible power supply by simulating an outage. C. Provide 24 hours of instruction each for three persons, to be conducted at project site with manufacturer's representative. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Static Uninterruptible Power Supply Specifications 16611-4 SECTION 16640 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY SACRIFICIAL ANODES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE This section includes materials, testing, and installation of corrosion protection and monitoring systems for metallic pipes including insulating flange kits, test stations, copper/copper sulfate reference electrodes, sacrificial anodes, wiring, and exothermic welds.. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. CONTRACTOR. The qualified construction firm selected by the Owner to have prime responsibility for the completion of work. B. OWNER. The Owner, as referred to in these specifications, is the City of Carlsbad. C. ENGINEER. The Engineer is the Owner's representative who is assigned to be the direct contact between the Owner and the Contractor. D. CORROSION ENGINEER. Retained by the Contractor, who is trained and experienced in cathodic protection installations and design and who is either a Registered Corrosion Engineer or a NACE Certified Cathodic Protection Specialist. 1.3 SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C94-86 Ready-Mixed Concrete D-2220 Polyvinyl chloride Insulation for Wire and Cable D-1248 Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials B3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire B8 Concentric-Lay Stranded Copper Conductors B. Federal Specifications (FS) Military Specification (Mil. Spec): MIL-C-18480B Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent, Coal Tar Base C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications: 83-80 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires 486-76 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors D. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE): RP0169-96 Recommended Practice, Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems E. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE): RP0286 Electrical Isolation of Cathodically Protected Pipelines JUNE 2008 1 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes 1.4 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be submitted for approval of the ENGINEER in accordance with Section 1300 of these specifications. A. Catalog Cuts: 1. High potential magnesium anodes 2. At-grade concrete test box with cast iron lid 3. Shunts 4. Wire and cable 5. Exothermic weld kits 6. Weld caps 7. Weld coating 8. Plastic warning tape 9. Insulating flange kits 10. Wax tape coating system B. As-Built Drawings. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain As-Built drawings showing exact locations of anodes, test stations, insulators, and wire trenching runs. Location changes from the design shall be clearly marked in red on a blue line copy of the design drawings. The As-Built drawings shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at the end of the project. The project is not considered complete until As-Built drawings are submitted. C. Test Results. 1. Insulator tests 2. Continuity tests 3. Anode testing and cathodic protection performance PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL Materials and equipment shall be new and the standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products. All materials and equipment shall bear evidence of safe operation approval from a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 2.2 HIGH POTENTIAL MAGNESIUM ANODES A. Capacity. High potential magnesium anodes shall have a theoretical energy content of 1000 ampere-hours per pound and have a minimum useful output of 500 ampere-hours per pound. JUNE 2008 2 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes B. Chemical Composition (High Potential Magnesium). Aluminum 0.01 percent (max) Manganese 0.5 to 1.3 percent Zinc 0.002 percent (max) Copper 0.02 percent (max) Nickel 0.001 percent (max) Iron 0.03 percent (max) Silicon 0.002 percent (max) Other 0.05 percent each (max) Magnesium balance C. Open Circuit Potential. The open circuit potential of all anodes, buried in the soil, shall be between 1.55 and 1.75 volts dc versus a copper-copper sulfate reference electrode. D. Ingot Size And Weight. Anodes shall be 48-pound pre-packaged, high potential ingots with a trapezoidal cross section. Ingot length shall be 32 inches long. The total packaged weight shall be 105 Ibs. E. Anode Construction. Anodes shall be cast magnesium with a galvanized steel core rod recessed on one end to provide access to the rod for connection of the lead wire. Silver braze the lead wire to the rod and make the connection mechanically secure. Insulate the connection to a 600-volt rating by filling the recess with epoxy and covering any exposed bare steel core or wire with heat shrinkable tubing. The insulating tubing shall extend over the lead wire insulation by not less than 1/2 inch. F. Anode Pre-Packaged Backfill Material. The anodes shall be completely encased and centered within a permeable cloth bag in a special low resistivity backfill mix with the following composition: Gypsum 75% Powdered bentpnite 20% Anhydrous sodium sulfate 5% G. Backfill grains shall be such that 100 percent is capable of passing through a screen of 100 mesh. Backfill shall be firmly packed around the anode such that the ingot is approximately in the center of the backfill. The resistivity of the backfill shall be no greater than 50 ohm-cm when tested wet in a soil box. Total prepackaged weight shall be approximately 105 pounds. 2.3 AT-GRADE TEST STATIONS A. Test Box. At-grade test boxes shall be round, pre-cast concrete with a cast iron lid. The dimensions shall be 14-1/4 inches O.D. by 9 inches I.D. by 12 inches high, similar to Christy G5 Utility Box with a cast iron supporting ring and lid. The lid shall be cast with the legend "Test Station". B. Identification Tags. All test leads shall be identified with an Avery label (model 5361), self-adhesive covered with polyolefin clear heat shrink tubing (3mfp301). The label shall include: name of facility - size - pipe material; type of insulation; station number. C. Concrete Pad. Test boxes mounted in unpaved areas shall be mounted in a reinforced 24-inch square by 4-inch thick concrete pad constructed of ASTM C94 ready-mix concrete. Rebar shall be No. 4 steel. JUNE 2008 3 Of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes 2.4 WIRE AND CABLE All wires shall be stranded copper with HMWPE or THWN insulation suitable for direct burial in corrosive soil and water, conforming to UL 83 and ASTM standards B3 or B8. HMWPE insulation shall conform to ASTM D1248 type 1, class c, grade 5. THWN insulation shall conform to ASTM D-2220. A. Test Leads. No. 8 AWG HMWPE. B. Anode Lead Wire. Anode lead wires shall be No. 12 AWG THWN. C. Mechanical Joint Bond Wire. No. 2 AWG HMWPE. D. All wire and copper connectors shall conform to UL 486-76. E. Wire Splicing. NO wire splicing is permitted. 2.5 EXOTHERMIC WELD KIT Wire-to-metal connections shall be made by the exothermic "cadweld" welding process. Weld alloy shall be for steel pipe. It is the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to determine the manufacturer's recommended weld charge size for metallic surfaces. A. Weld Caps. Royston Roybond Primer 747 and Royston Handy Cap 2 or equal. B. Weld Coating. Cold-applied fast-drying mastic consisting of bituminous resin and solvents per Mil. Spec. MN-C-18480B such as Koppers bitumastic 50 or 505, Tnemec 40-h-413, tape-coat TC mastic or 3M Scotch Clad 244. The minimum coating thickness shall be 25 mils (0.025 inch). 2.6 INSULATING FLANGE KITS A. Gaskets: ANSI B-16.21, Type E, NEMA G10 glass with a rectangular o-ring seal for operation between 20-deg. F and 150-deg. F. Gaskets shall be suitable for the temperature and pressure rating of the piping system in which they are installed. B. Insulating Sleeves: 1/32-inch thick tube, full length, G10 glass material per NEMA LI-1 for operation between 20-deg. F and 150-deg. F. For installation at threaded valve flanges, half-length sleeves shall be used. C. Insulating Washers: 1/8-inch thick, full length, G10 glass per NEMA LI-1 for operation between 20-deg. F and 150-deg. F. D. Steel Washers: 1/8-inch cadmium plated steel placed between the nut and insulating washer. E. Coating: All buried insulating flanges shall be wax taped coated per AWWA C217. See section for "External Coating for Buried Surfaces" below. JUNE 2008 4 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes 2.7 EXTERNAL COATING FOR BURIED SURFACES A. All buried insulating flange kits, AND buried pipe sections and fitting surfaces that are not epoxy or polyurethane coated shall be wrapped with a three-layer petrolatum wax tape coating system per AWWA C217. B. Primer: All surfaces shall be prime coated with a blend of petrolatum, plasticizer, inert fillers, and corrosion inhibitors having a paste-like consistency. C. Wax Tape: Covering material shall be a synthetic felt tape, saturated with a blend of petrolatum, plasticizers, and corrosion inhibitors that is formable over irregular surfaces. D. Plastic Outer Wrap: The primed and wax taped surface shall be covered with a plastic outer wrap consisting of three layers of 50-guage (10-mil) polyvinylidene chloride or PVC, high cling membrane wound together. 2.8 PLASTIC WARNING TAPE A. Plastic warning tape for all cable trenches shall be a minimum of 4 mils thick and 6 inches wide, inert plastic film designed for prolonged use underground, and printed with "Caution: Cathodic Protection Cable Below". PART 3 CATHODIC PROTECTION INSTALLATION 3.1 GENERAL A. Standard. Cathodic protection installation shall conform to NACE RP0169-96 "Recommended Practice, Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems. B. CONTRACTOR Qualifications. All work shall be performed by qualified, experienced personnel working under continuous, competent supervision. Qualified CONTRACTORS must demonstrate at least five years of experience with cathodic protection installations. C. Test Results. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a CORROSION ENGINEER'S report including all test data, conclusions, repairs, and cathodic protection system performance. D. Notification For Testing. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER at least five days in advance of the anodes and test station installations. The ENGINEER or the OWNER'S representative shall, at their discretion, witness the installation of anodes and cathodic protection facilities. Testing shall be as described in this specification section. 3.2 MAGNESIUM ANODES A. Inspection. All lead wires shall be inspected to ensure that the lead wire is securely connected to the anode core and that no damage has occurred to the lead wire. Lead wire failures shall require replacement of the complete anode and lead wire. B. Pre-Packaged Anode Inspection. Each anode shall be inspected to ensure that the backfill material completely surrounds the anode and that the cloth bag containing the anode and backfill material is intact. If the prepackaged anodes are supplied in a waterproof container or covering, that container or covering shall be removed before installation. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER at least five (5) days in advance of installing the anodes. JUNE 2008 5 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes C. Location. Anodes are to be installed in augured holes as shown in the drawings. Anode positions can be adjusted slightly to avoid interference with existing structures. Alternate anode positions must be approved by the ENGINEER. D. Handling. Care shall be taken to ensure that the anode is never lifted, supported, transported, or handled by the lead wire. All anodes shall be lowered into the hole using a sling or a rope. E. Anode Hole Size and Depth. Anodes shall be placed vertically at the bottom of a 12 feet deep augured hole, 12 inches in diameter (minimum). F. Soaking Requirements. Pre-Packaged Anodes. Once the prepackaged anodes are in the hole, 15 gallons of water shall be poured into the hole so that the anodes are completely covered with water. Allow the anodes to soak for a minimum of 30 minutes before any soil backfill is added. G. Soil Backfill. After the pre-packaged anodes are soaked, the hole is backfilled with stone-free, native soil. No voids shall exist around the anode bags and the anode lead wire shall not be damaged. The backfill shall be tamped and compacted in 18-inch lifts taking care not to damage the anode lead wire. 3.3 AT-GRADE TEST STATIONS A. Location. At-grade corrosion monitoring test boxes shall be located at the edge and directly behind the curb. All test box locations shall be approved by the ENGINEER. B. Test Box Bottom. Test boxes shall be set in native soil. C. Test Lead Attachment. Test leads shall be attached to the pipe using the exothermic weld process. An 18-inch length of slack wire shall be coiled at each weld at the pipe and inside each test box. D. Concrete Pad. A 24-inch square by 4-inch thick reinforced concrete pad is required around each at-grade test station. Test boxes and concrete pad shall be flush with the top of the curb. 3.4 WIRE AND CABLE A. Test Lead Trench. Horizontal test or anode lead runs shall be placed in a 36- inch trench. B. Wire Handling. Wire leads shall not be stretched or kinked. Care shall be taken when installing wire and backfilling. If wire insulation is damaged during installation, it shall be rejected and replaced completely at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. All rejected wire shall be removed from the job site at the close of each workday. C. Plastic Warning Tape. Plastic warning tape shall be installed in all wire trenches and 12 inches below finished grade. JUNE 2008 6 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes D. Splicing. Wire splices are not permitted. JUNE 2008 7 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes 3.5 WIRE-TO-PIPE CONNECTIONS A. All connections of copper wires to the pipe shall be made by the exothermic weld method. B. Weld Charge Size. It is the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to ensure that the manufacturer's recommended weld charge size is used. C. Preparation Of Wire. Do not deform cable. Remove only enough insulation from the cable to allow for the exothermic weld. D. Preparation Of Metal. Remove all coating, dirt, grime and grease from the metal structure by wire brushing. Clean the structure to a bright, shiny surface free of all serious pits and flaws by using a file. The surface area of the structure must be absolutely dry. E. Wire Position. The wire is to be held at a 30-degree angle to the surface when welding. Only one wire shall be attached with each weld. F. Testing of All Completed Welds. After the weld has cooled, the weld shall be tested by striking the weld with a 2-lb hammer while pulling firmly on the wire. All unsound welds shall be cleaned, re-welded, and re-tested. All weld slag shall be removed. G. Coating Of Welds. The area to be coated shall be clean and completely dry. Apply a primer specifically intended for use with an elastomeric weld cap. Apply the weld cap and a bituminous mastic coating material to all exposed areas around the cap in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The coating shall overlap the structure coating by a minimum of 3 inches. H. Mortar Repair. Coating voids shall be filled with cement grout. 3.6 BOND WIRES A. Mechanical Joint Bond Wires. Two (2) No. 2 HMWPE bond wires are required across each non-insulating, in-line yalve; a third No. 6 HMWPE bond wire is required from the valve to one outside flange as shown in the drawings. The bond wires shall be attached using the exothermic weld process. Bond wires shall have some slack wire at each weld to allow for creep when backfilling. 3.7 INSULATING FLANGE KITS A. General: Insulating flange kits shall be pre-assembled and installed as recommended by the manufacturer, and per NACE RPO 286. Moisture, soil, and other foreign matter must be fully removed and prevented from contacting any portion of mating surfaces. If foreign matter contacts any portion of these surfaces, then the entire flange shall be disassembled, cleaned, and dried before reassembly. B. Installation: Align and install insulating joints according to the manufacturer's recommendations to avoid damaging insulating materials. The manufacturer's bolt tightening sequence and torque specifications shall be followed. C. Paint Pigments: No electrically conductive pigments or paints shall be used either internally or externally on the bolts, washers, or flanges. D. Inspection: All buried insulating flanges shall be inspected, tested, and approved by the ENGINEER as described in Part 4 of this specification and prior to the application of wax tape coating. JUNE 2008 8 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes 3.8 EXTERNAL COATING A. All buried insulating flanges shall be covered with a 3-layer wax tape coating system per AWWA C217. Additionally, all in-line valves, flanges, couplings, and adapters that are not coated with a bonded dielectric coating shall be wax tape coated per AWWA C217. B. Primer: Surfaces must be cleaned of all dirt, grime, and dust by using a wire brush and clean cloth. The surface shall be dry. Apply the primer by hand or brush. A thin coating of primer shall be applied to all surfaces and worked into all crevices. The primer shall be applied generously around bolts, nuts, and threads, and shall fully cover all exposed areas. The primer should overlap the pipe coating by a minimum of 3-inches. C. Petrolatum Saturated Tape: The wax tape can be applied immediately after the primer. Short lengths of tape shall be cut and carefully molded around each individual bolt, nut, and stud end. For long bolts (such as in couplings), short lengths of tape shall be cut and circumferentially wrapped around each individual bolt. After the bolts are covered, the tape shall be circumferentially wrapped around the flange with sufficient tension to provide continuous adhesion without stretching the tape. The tape shall be formed, by hand, into all voids and spaces. There shall be no voids or gaps under the tape. The tape shall be applied with a 1-inch minimum overlap. D. Outer Covering: A plastic outer cover shall be applied over the petrolatum- saturated tape. The plastic shall be a minimum of 50-guage (10-mils) and shall have two layers applied. PART 4 TESTING AND INSPECTION The CONTRACTOR'S CORROSION ENGINEER shall submit his proposed test procedures to the ENGINEER at least five (5) days in advance of the time that the cathodic protection system testing is scheduled. The ENGINEER shall witness all testing at his discretion. All test data shall be submitted to the ENGINEER within seven (7) days of the completion of the testing. All testing shall be done under the supervision of a qualified CORROSION ENGINEER who is retained by the CONTRACTOR. All deficiencies found to be due to faulty materials or workmanship shall be repaired or replaced by the CONTRACTOR and at his expense. The City of Carlsbad shall be notified at least three (3) days in advance to witness the performance testing. 4.1 TEST LEADS It is the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to test all test leads A. Test Method. All completed wire connection welds shall be tested by striking the weld with a 2-lb hammer while pulling firmly on the wire. Welds failing this test shall have the surface re-prepared, have the wire re-welded to the pipe and re- tested. Wire welds shall be spot tested by the Engineer. After backfilling the pipe, all test lead pairs shall be tested using a standard ohmmeter. B. Acceptance. The resistance between each pair of test leads shall not exceed 150% of the total wire resistance as determined from published wire data. JUNE 2008 9 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes JUNE 2008 10 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes 4.2 Anode Lead Wire. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for inspecting anode lead wires. Lead wires shall be spot inspected by the ENGINEER. A. Test Method. A visual inspection and by running his hand along the full length of the lead while installing. B. Acceptance. All leads shall be free of cuts nicks or abrasions in the wire insulation. Damaged leads shall be rejected. 4.3 TEST LEAD TRENCHING The ENGINEER, at his or her discretion, shall inspect wire trenches and backfill material and methods. A. Test Method. The depth, trench bottom, padding, and backfill material shall be visually inspected prior to backfilling. B. Acceptance. Conformance with specifications. 4.4 PIPELINE CONTINUITY THROUGH IN-LINE VALVES The CONTRACTOR'S CORROSION ENGINEER shall measure the linear resistance of sections of pipe in which in-line valves or other mechanical joints have been installed. All testing shall be done by the CORROSION ENGINEER in the presence of the ENGINEER. A. Test Method. Resistance shall be measured by the linear resistance method. A direct current shall be impressed from one end of the test section to the other (typically test station to test station). A voltage drop is measured for several different current levels. The measured resistance (R) is calculated using the equation R=dV/l, where dV is the voltage drop between the test span and I is the current. The resistance shall be measured for at least four (4) different current levels. B. Acceptance. Acceptance is a comparison between the measured resistance (from the field test data) and the theoretical resistance. The theoretical resistance must consider the pipe (length and wall thickness) and the resistance of the bond wires. The measured resistance shall not exceed the theoretical resistance by more than 130%. The CONTRACTOR'S CORROSION ENGINEER shall submit, within seven (7) days of the completion of the testing and in a report format, to the ENGINEER all calculations of the theoretical resistance and measured pipe resistance for each section tested. 4.5 INSULATING FLANGE KITS A. Responsibility: Insulating flanges shall be inspected and tested by the CONTRACTOR'S CORROSION ENGINEER and in the presence of the ENGINEER, prior to backfilling. Testing of the buried insulating flange kit prior to backfill will result in non-acceptance of the insulator. B. Test Method: The assembled flange shall be tested using a Gas Electronics Model 601 Insulation Checker specifically design for testing insulating flanges. The testing shall be done by a qualified CORROSION ENGINEER accepted by the JUNE 2008 11 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes ENGINEER and shall be done in accordance with NACE RPO 286. C. Acceptance: The installation of the insulating flange kit shall be considered complete when the testing device indicates no shorts or partial shorts are present. The CONTRACTOR shall provide assistance in finding any and all snorts or shorted bolts. All disassembly and reassembly necessary for acceptance shall be done at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. 4.6 CATHODIC PROTECTION PERFORMANCE The cathodic protection system shall be activated and tested by the CONTRACTOR'S CORROSION ENGINEER in the presence of the ENGINEER. A. Test Method. The installed cathodic protection system testing shall include: native pipe-to-soil potentials, protected pipe-to-soil potentials, open-circuit anode potentials, and anode current output measurements. B. Acceptance. Shall be based on achieving the -850 mV criterion as outlined in NACE RPO169-96. All data shall be submitted, in a typed 8-1/2 X 11 inch report to the City's ENGINEER and the City's CORROSION ENGINEER for approval. C. Compliance With Specifications. Deficiencies or omissions in materials or workmanship found by these tests shall be rectified at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. Deficiencies shall include but are not limited to: broken leads, improper or unclean trenches, lack of 18-inchor slack wire in test boxes; improperly mounted test boxes; improper installation and testing of insulators; and other deficiencies associated with the workmanship, installation, and non- functioning equipment. END OF SECTION JUNE 2008 12 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes SECTION 16710 VOICE/DATA SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Provisions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 Summary A. This Section specifies standards of materials and execution in the provision of wiring, cables and related terminations to be provided under the work of Division 16 Sections. Refer to the requirements of such Sections for the functional requirements of systems to be provided using the materials and methods of this section, as well as the additional standards, materials, and execution specific to each Section. 1.03 Quality Assurance Comply with the requirements of Division 1 and the following A. Company: Work of each Section in this Divisions shall be performed by an Installer who has at least eight (8) years direct experience with the devices, equipment and systems of the type and scope specified herein, and who has a fully staffed and equipped maintenance and repair facility, and who is licensed to perform work of this type in the Project jurisdiction. Raceway installation shall be performed by a licensed C-10 contractor. All other work shall be performed by parties licensed to perform such work. B. Personnel: Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section. Supervisors shall have at least eight (8) years direct experience in similar work. Installation and maintenance personnel shall have at least five (5) years direct experience in similar work. C. Designated Supervisor: Provide a designated supervisor present and in responsible charge in the fabrication shop and on the Project Site during all phases of installation and testing of the Work of this Section. This supervisor shall be the same individual through the execution of the Work unless illness, loss of personnel, or other circumstances reasonably beyond the control of the Contractor intervene. D. Coordination: Coordinate the Work of this Section with the Work of all other Sections. Comply with Division 1. E. Verification: Verify dimensions and conditions at the Project Site. Submit any conflicts in timely manner for resolution. F. Project Site Installation and Testing: Install as specified herein. Perform specified adjustment procedures. Provide test equipment and test according to procedures specified herein. Request verification of Project Site test in timely manner. G. Verification of Submitted Test Data: Re-test in presence of designated representatives of the Architect at reasonable mutual convenience. Provide services of the designated supervisor and an additional technician familiar with work of this Section. Provide all test equipment. Provide complete set of latest stamped, actioned submittals of record for reference. Provide complete set of Shop and Project Site Test Reports, as applies. Provide a complete set of manufacturer's original operation, instruction and service manuals for each equipment item for reference. H. Reference/Project Record Documents: At all times when the work is in progress, maintain at the workplace, fabrication shop or Project Site as applies, a complete set of the latest stamped, actioned submittals of record for reference. Also maintain a separate, clean, undamaged set for preparation of Project Record Documents. Also maintain at the workplace a complete set of manufacturer's original operation, instruction and service manuals for each equipment item for reference. I. Schedule: Comply with the Project schedule. Make all Submittals specified herein in a timely manner. Failure to make timely submittals complete as specified herein is considered to be lack of substantial progress of the Work of this Section. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Voice Data Systems Specifications 16710-1 J. Deliver all equipment, devices and materials required for the Work of this Section and install, test and ready all work for Acceptance Testing at least fourteen (14) days prior to the completion date for the associated area of the Project. 1.04 Regulatory Requirements A. Codes and Regulations: Perform all work in strict accordance with all applicable Federal, State, County and City Codes, regulations and ordinances. 1.05 Applicable Standards & Agencies A. Conform to the following: 1. CEC California Electrical Code. 2 NFPA National Fire Protection Association. 3. CBC California Building Code. 4. UL Underwriters Laboratories. 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. ANSIC2 (1990) National Electric Safety Code 6. American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A228 (1983) Steel Wire, Music Spring Quality b. ASTM C338 (1973; R 1983) Softening Point of Glass 7. Electronic Industries Association (EIA) a.EIA-455-3A b. c. d. e. g. EIA-455-5A EIA-455-41 EIA-455-46 EIA-455-47A EIA-455-51 EIA-455-53 EIA-455-81 EIA-455-103 (May 1989) Procedures to Measure Temperature Cycling Effects on Optical Fibers, Optical Cables, and Other Passive Fiber Optic Components (June 1990) Humidity Test Procedures for Fiber Optic, Connecting Devices (Feb. 1985) FOTP-41 Compressive Loading Resistance of Fiber Optic Cables (Mar. 1983) FOTP-46 Spectral Attenuation Measurement for Long-Length, Graded-index Optical Fibers (Sep. 1983) FOTP-47 Output Far-Field Radiation Pattern Measurement (Sep. 1983)FOTP-51 Pulse Distortion Measurement of Multimode Glass Optical Fiber Information Transmission Capacity (Apr. 1986)FOTP-53 Attenuation by Substitution Measurement - for Multimode Graded-index Optical Fiber or Fiber Assemblies Used in Long -Length Communications Systems (Mar. 1985) FOTP-81 Compound Flow (Drip) Test for Fiber Optic Cable (Jul. 1984) FOTP-103 Buffered Fiber Bend Test Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Specifications Voice Data Systems 16710-2 j. EIA/TIA568 (July 1991) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard k. EIA/TIA TSB36 I. EIA/TIA TSB40 (August 1992) Additional Transmission Specifications for Unshielded Twisted Pair Connecting Hardware m. EIA/TIA 569 (Oct. 1990) Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces n. EIA/TIA 606 Administrative Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings 8. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): a. ICEA S-56-434 (1983, 5th Ed.) Polyolefin Insulated Communication Cables for Outdoor Use. 9. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. UL 497 (Dec. 15, 1978,4th Ed.; Rev. thru Oct. 9, 1990) Protectors for Communications Circuits. 1.06 Performance Standards A. Voice, Category 6 and Data, Category 6, Copper Cabling: To EIA/TIA Category 6 Voice and Data standards. 1.07 Delivery, Storage and Handling Comply with requirements of Division 1, Section 16710 and the following: A. Shipping Conditions: 1. All cable shall be shipped on reels. 2. The diameter of the drum shall be at least 13 times the diameter of the cable. 3. The reels shall be substantial and so constructed as to prevent damage during shipment and handling. 4. Secure the outer end of the cable to the reel head so as to prevent the cable from becoming loose in transit. 5. Project the inner end of the cable into a slot in the side of the reel, or into a housing on the inner slot of the drum, in such a manner and with sufficient length to make it available for testing. 6. The inner end shall be fastened so as to prevent the cable from becoming loose during installation. End seals shall be applied to each of the cables to prevent moisture from entering the cable. B. Storage: 1. Retain factory cable protection until installation. Supplement with heavy gauge plastic sheeting if factory protective membrane is pierced prior to installation. Tape ends and seams water and dust tight. 2. The reels with cable shall be suitable for outside storage conditions when the temperature ranges from minus 40 degrees C1 to plus 65 degrees C1, with relative humidity from 0 to 100 percent. 3. Protect cable reels from physical damage from site construction vehicles or from settling into the soil. 4. Equipment, other than cable, to be delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Voice Data Systems Specifications 16710-3 1.08 Definitions A. Definitions of Terms: The following definitions and conditions apply to each of the respective parameters and the measurements of those parameters, unless specifically stated otherwise: 1. Frequency Response: The minimum acceptable frequency band over which the amplitude response is within 3 dB (or any specified range), or the specified limits of the response relative to the reference frequency under design load conditions, at any operating level up to and including the specified maximum output while fully in compliance with all other performance specifications. 2. Maximum Output Level: The minimum acceptable maximum signal output level (voltage, current or power) attained under design load conditions attained while fully in compliance with all other performance specifications. 3. Signal to Noise Ratio: The minimum acceptable ratio of signal to noise levels derived from broadband measurements under design load at maximum output over the entire range of the specified frequency response. 4. Design Load: The load (in ohms) specified by usage of the particular device input or output. 5. Loss: Attenuation in dB referenced to a path length and frequency. 1.09 Reference to Named Products A. Selected Item: Item so noted was selected based on comparative testing of similar products. Procedure for determination of equivalence is noted in the specification for the item(s). B. System Design Basis: Item so noted interacts with other system items to produce total system function. Substitution of this item may require coordinated substitution of other system items. C. Design Basis: Item so noted was used as basis for system drawings to establish features, size, etc. Use of specified equivalents may require adjustment of physical layout or wiring, but does not affect system function. No preference is implied. D. Industry Standard: Item so noted is unique. It is the de facto standard of the industry. Use of this item is required to cause other items to function as specified. 1.10 Submittals In addition to the requirements of Division 1, submit as applies all materials for review arranged in same order as Specifications, individually referenced-to Specification Section, Paragraph and Contract Drawing number. Conform in every detail as applies to each referencing Section. A. Shop Drawings: Prepare shop drawings in accordance with the provisions in Division 1. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings as a single submittal package. Manufacturer's data and shop drawings will not be reviewed separately. B. Make each specified submittal as a coordinated package complete with all information specified herein. Incomplete or uncoordinated submittals will be returned with no review action. C. Should the Contractor proceed with the Work of this Section in the absence of submittals for such work submitted and returned with action "No Exception Taken", the Contractor proceeds at the Contractor's sole risk. D. Progress Schedule: Include duration and milestones for at least the following: 1. All submittals specified. 2. Shipment to site. 3. Installation. 4. Field testing. E. Manufacturer's Product Data: 1. Bill of Materials and List of Materials. For each item, include: a. Manufacturer. b. Model number. c. Listing: UL. d. Quantity. 2. Manufacturer's Product Data Sheets: In sequence of List of Materials, Data sheet for each item, including all accessories, marked for proposed product. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Voice Data Systems Specifications 16710-4 F. Field and Shop Drawings: With each such submittal, resubmit for coordination references complete with corrections from previous submittal: 1. List of Materials. 2. Manufacturer's Product Data. G. Field (Installation) Drawings: Collate in sequence: 1. Drawing index/symbol sheet. 2. Floor plans. At scale of Contract Documents. Show: a. Rough-in. b. Mounting height. c. Outlet type. d. Conduit size. e. Wire type. f. Wire fill. 3. Sections/Elevations: At scale of Contract Documents: Mounting location reference. 4. Enlarged plans. At 172" = 1'-0" scale. Show: a. Refer to "floor plans" above. b. Architectural features. c. Racks and cabinets. d. Clearances required by applicable Code. 5. Wire run sheets. Show: a. Wire Number. b. Source. c. Designation. d. Signal Type. e. Wire type. 6. Patch bay/Jackfield details, front elevation, full size: a. Layout. b. Text of designations. I. Shop and Project Site Test Reports: 1. Schedule: Submit test reports in timely manner relative to Project schedule such that the representative of the Architect may conduct Verification of Submitted Test Data without delay of progress. 2. Shop test report: Submit prior to shipping completed equipment racks to Project site. 3. Project Site test report: Submit following system completion and prior to and as condition precedent to Acceptance Review and Testing of the Work of this Section. 4. Content: Include at least: a. Time and date of test. b. Personnel conducting test. c. Test equipment, including serial and date of calibration. d. Test object. e. Procedure used. f. Results of test - numerical or graphical presentation. 1.11 Operating and Maintenance Data A. Manuals: In addition to the requirements of Division 1, submit two (2) additional sets. Submit in three (3) post binders (not ring binder) with Tabs. B. Include: 1. Index. 2. Reduced set of system Record Drawings. 3. Maintenance and spare parts schedule. 4. Equipment manuals. Collate alphabetically by manufacturer. Provide manufacturer's original operation, instruction and service manuals for each item. For each set, provide manufacturer's original printed copies only. Photocopies not acceptable. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Voice Data Systems Specifications 16710-5 C. Quantity: 1. Review sets: As for Shop and Field Drawings. 2. Record set: Three (3) blueline. One (1) vellum. D. Format: Record Drawings: 1. Pencil, permanent ink or permanent photographic process. a. Front face only of vellum at least 3.0 mils thick. b. Applique film or lettering prohibited. c. Suitable for microfilming. Lettering 1/8" high minimum. 2. Diskette copy of Record Drawings - 1 copy of each drawing file in DXF or Autocadd 14 or 2000 format, 3-1/2 inch IBM PC, High Density format. E. Content: All drawings required under "Field and Shop Drawings". Show "as installed" condition. Where room designations according to Project permanent signage differ from construction designations in the Contract Documents, show both designations. F. Warranty Certificates: Comply with Division 1. 1.13 Warranty Service In addition to provisions of Division 1 provide the following: A. Warranty: Warrant all of the Work of this Section to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of Owner Acceptance of the Work of this Section. B. Response Time: Provide a qualified technician familiar with the work at the Project Site within twenty-four (24) hours after receipt of a notice of malfunction. Provide the Owner with telephone number attended eight (8) hours a day, five (5) days a week, to be called in the event of a malfunction. C. Off Site Service: Conduct all warranty repairs and services at the Project Site, unless in violation of manufacturer's standard product warranty. Provide substitute systems, equipment, and/or devices acceptable to the Owner for the duration of off-site repairs. Provide transportation for substitute and/or test systems, equipment, devices, materials, parts and personnel to and from the Project Site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Copper Communications Cables and Related A. General: Comply with applicable Code for insulation, jacket, marking and listing for applicable use. Data cable shall have a blue color jacket. Voice cable shall have a grey color jacket. B. Category 6 Cabling (Voice) 1. Construction: a. 24 gauge bare solid copper conductors b. Dual insulated with polyethylene and fire retardant overall jacket. c. Conductors are tightly twisted into pairs and jacketed with polyethylene. d. No shield in the sheath. e. Each sheath shall contain 4 unshielded copper pairs. f. Each pair shall have a different twist ratio per foot ranging from 12 to 24 twists per foot. g. UL Listed. 2. Performance: a. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B.1, 568-B.21 (Category 6). b. ANSI/ICEA S-90-661 Category 6. c. NEMA WC63.5 (Category 6). d. Electrical Characteristics: (1) DC Resistance (max) Ohms/100m (328ft) @ 20°C 8.9 (2) DC Resistance Unbalance (max) Individual Pair % 3.0 (3) Input Impedance Frequency (f): 1.0-250 MHz 100-250 MHz Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Voice Data Systems Specifications 16710 - 6 100 + 15 100 + 22 (4) Characteristic Impedance Freq uency (f): 1 -250 M Hz 100 + 15 (5) ACR@100MHz/@ 250MHz DB(min)21.5/1.4 (6) PS-ACR@100MHz/@ 250MHz DB(min) 20.1/0.04 (7) Delay Skew (max) ns/100m 25 (8) Nominal Velocity of Propagation (NVP) % Speed of Light 70 3. Acceptable Manufacturers, Subject to the above: a. BICC General b. Comscope c. Belden d. Essex e. Approved equal. C. Category 6 Cabling (Data): 1. Construction: a. 24 gauge bare solid copper conductors b. Dual insulated with polyethylene and fire retardant overall jacket. c. Conductors are tightly twisted into pairs and jacketed with polyethylene. d. No shield in the sheath. e. Each sheath shall contain 4 unshielded copper pairs. f. Each pair shall have a different twist ratio per foot ranging from 12 to 24 twists per foot. g. UL Listed. 2. Performance: a. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568A (Category 6). b. ANSI/ICEA S-90-661 Category 5x-160. c. ISO/IEC/180 d. Electrical Characteristics: (1) DC Resistance (max) Ohms/100m (328ft) @ 20°C 8.9 (2) DC Resistance Unbalance (max) Individual Pair % 3.0 (3) Delay Skew (max) ns/100m 25 (4) Nominal Velocity of Propagation (NVP) % Speed of Light 70 (5) Characteristic Impedance Frequency (f): 1-500 MHz Ohms 100+ 15 (6) Input Impedance Frequency (f): 1.0-250 MHz 100-250 MHz 100+ 15 100 + 22 3. Acceptable, Subject to the above: a. BICC General b. Comscope c. Belden d. Essex e. Approved equal. 2.02 Data & Voice Station Jacks A. Category 6 Voice Jacks Performance Requirements, General: Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Voice Data Systems Specifications 16710-7 1. Construction: a. High impact, flame retardant UL-rated 94V-0 thermoplastic. b. The jack shall be designed with an integral locking mechanism which, upon insertion of a modular plug, provide maximum pullout strength at the plug/jack interface. c. Integral ID label holders and color keyed jack identifier inserts. 2. Performance - The jack shall meet or exceed the following standards. a. EIA/TIA 568 "Commercial Building Wiring Standard: Telecommunications Outlet Connector Specification b. TIA/EIA TSB40 "Telecommunications Systems Bulletin-Additional Transmission Specifications for Unshielded Twisted pair Connecting Hardware", Category 6. c. CSA Certified d. ETL Certified e. UL listed f. FCC Part 68, Subpart F g. Electrical - The modular jacks shall meet the following electrical performance and certification requirements. (1) Insulation resistance - 500 MO maximum (2) Dielectric withstand voltage (a) 1000 VAC RMS, 60 Hz minimum, contact to contact (b) 1000 VAC RMS, 60 Hz minimum to exposed conductive surface (3) Contact Resistance - 20 mD maximum (4) Current Rating -1.5 amps at 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) per IEC Publication 51 2-3, Test 5b. h. Physical - The modular jacks shall meet the following physical requirements. (1) connector-insulation displacement connectors accepting 22 and 24 gauge AWG solid conductor wire. (2) Jack wires-square copper alloy wires with 50 micro-inch lubricated gold plating over 100 micro-inch nickel plate (3) stamped crossover lead frame conductor paths (4) wired to meet EIA 568B specifications (T568B) (5) stamped "CAT 6" on facing surface above the jack opening- i. Mechanical - The modular jacks shall meet the following mechanical requirements (1) Plug insertion minimum 750 plug insertions (2) Contact Force 100 grams minimum using FCC-approved modular plugs (3) Plug Retention Force - 30 Ib (133 N) minimum between modular plug and jack (4) Temperature Range - -40 to 150 degrees F The outlet should be approved to work in all applications up to 100 Mb/sec, including, but not limited to 100 Mb/sec TP-PMD (100 meters over UTP, per ANSI X3T9.5), 16 Mb/sec token ring, 10 Base T and 4 Mb/sec token ring. B. Category 6 Data Jacks Performance Requirements, General: 1. Construction: a. High impact, flame retardant UL-rated 94V-0 thermoplastic. b. The jack shall be designed with an integral locking mechanism which, upon insertion of a modular plug, provide maximum pullout strength at the plug/jack interface. c. Integral ID label holders and color keyed jack identifier inserts. 2. Performance - The jack shall meet or exceed the following standards. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Voice Data Systems Specifications 16710 - 8 a. EIA/TIA 568 "Commercial Building Wiring Standard:,Telecommunications Outlet Connector Specification b. TIA/EIA TSB40 "Telecommunications Systems Bulletin-Additional Transmission Specifications for Unshielded Twisted pair Connecting Hardware", Category 6. c. CSA Certified d. ETL Certified e. UL listed f. FCC Part 68, Subpart F g. Electrical - The modular jacks shall meet the following electrical performance and certification requirements. (1) Insulation resistance - 500 MO maximum (2) Dielectric withstand voltage (a) 1000 VAC RMS, 60 Hz minimum, contact to contact (b) 1000 VAC RMS, 60 Hz minimum to exposed conductive surface (3) Contact Resistance - 20 mD maximum (4) Current Rating - 1.5 amps at 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) per IEC Publication 51 2-3, Test 5b. h. Physical - The modular jacks shall meet the following physical requirements. (1) connector-insulation displacement connectors accepting 22 and 24 gauge AWG solid conductor wire. (2) Jack wires-square copper alloy wires with 50 micro-inch lubricated gold plating over 100 micro-inch nickel plate (3) stamped crossover lead frame conductor paths (4) wired to meet EIA 568B specifications (5) stamped "CAT 6" on facing surface above the jack opening- i. Mechanical - The modular jacks shall meet the following mechanical requirements (1) Plug insertion minimum 750 plug insertions (2) Contact Force 100 grams minimum using FCC-approved modular plugs (3) Plug Retention Force - 30 Ib (133 N) minimum between modular plug and jack (4) Temperature Range - -40 to 150 degrees F The outlet should be approved to work in all applications up to 100 Mb/sec, including, but not limited to 100 Mb/sec TP-PMD (100 meters over UTP, per ANSI X3T9.5), 16 Mb/sec token ring, 10 Base T and 4 Mb/sec token ring. Device Plates, 6 Ports, Single Gang: 1. Construction: a. Modular, with snap-in receptacle options as scheduled. b. Single gang plate size and mounting. c. 6 ports per plate, provide inserts in unused openings. d. Integral labeling provided for plate identifier and identifier for each receptacle on the plate. Provide as follows: (1) Plate Nominally 1-1/2" by 1/2" recessed slot with clear plastic cover over paper label. See labeling requirements in Part 3. (2) Receptacle Identifiers): Iconic or literal descriptions of each receptacle type. Labels shall be molded or silk-screened on the receptacle in high contrast colors. Removable components less than 1/2" by 1/2" shall not be acceptable where such components are provided, they shall be permanently secured with cyanoacrylate adhesive or similar means. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Voice Data Systems Specifications 16710-9 2.03 Cable Termination Devices And Related A. Data Patch Panels, Category 6 Rated, Rack Mounted: 1. Functions/Features: a. 19" El A rack mountable. b. At least 24 ports per EIA rack unit (1.75"). c. Keyed, block form RJ-45/Cat 6 Jacks and 110 terminations meeting specifications elsewhere herein, (1) arranged in rows on steel panel, (2) jacks on front, (3) terminations on rear. d. Port identifier label space on front e. Provide wire management rings in a ratio of at least 12 for every 24 ports. 2. Acceptable, provide additional wire management systems to conform: a. Leviton Gigamax Cat 6. b. Ortronics. c. Or approved equal. B. Category 6 Terminal Block: 1. Provide as required per quantity of voice cables as indicated on plans. 2. General: Insulation displacements connector blocks consisting of oxygen free mechanical fastening system arranged in a flame-retardant molded plastic fastened to a mounting bracket. 3. Features/Functions a. Category 6110 type punchdown type. b. 50-pair block size c. 24-gauge stub type equipped with top-mounted cable stubs, polyethylene insulated with an overcoat of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) for flame resistance. d. Cable routing space behind the blocks. 4. Acceptable, provide complete with standoff mounting brackets and at least four distribution posts or rings per block: a. Leviton Gigamax Cat 6. b. Ortronics. c. Or approved equal. C. Category 6 Patch Cords: 1. Provide to match terminated port count plus 10%. 2. Factory fabricated 3. EIA/TIA568B.1,568-B2.1 4. 24 ga AWG, Cat 6 portable cordage cable. 5. Lengths: 7 feet. 6. Category 6 rated assembly including RJ-45 type ends and cabling. 7. Acceptable: a. Leviton Gigamax Cat 6 or approved equal. b. Ortronics. c. Approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All system cabling and terminations be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as shown. B. All necessary interconnections, seivices, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system shall be provided. All installation work must be done in accordance with the safety requirements set forth in the general requirements of ANSI C2 and NFPA 70. 3.02 Test Equipment A. Provide at least one (1) each of the following items or approved functional equivalents for the duration of each test: 1. Level 11,6 Cable Pair Tester - Microtest, HP, Scope, Fluke or Siemon Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Voice Data Systems Specifications 16710-10 2. Time Domain Reflectometer (Canoga-Perkins 1201 or equal) 3. True RMS Audio Digital Volt-Ohm-Millimeter (Fluke 8060A). 4. Tone Test Sets. 5. Optical power meter (HP, Siecor, 3M, Fotec). 6. Site portable communications systems. 7. Any other items of equipment or materials required to demonstrate conformance with the Contract Documents. 8. Voice Cabling Plant Tester - Capable of detecting shorts, opens, reversals, mis- wiring and crosstwists. Siemon STM -8 or equal by Mod-Tap. 3.03 Wire and Cable Installation A. All wire and cable shall be continuous and splice-free for the entire length of run between designated connections or terminations. B. Identify data and voice cables distinctly by using different color overall jacket or insulation. C. Verify that all raceways have been de-burred and properly joined, coupled and terminated prior to installation of cables. Verify that all raceway is clear of foreign matter and substances prior to installation of wire or cable. D. Inspect all conduit bends to verify proper radius. Comply with Code for minimum permissible radius and maximum permissible deformation. E. Apply a chemically inert lubricant to all wire and cable prior to pulling in conduit. Do not subject wire and cable to tension greater than that recommended by the manufacturer. Use multi-spool rollers where cable is pulled in place around bends. Do not pull reverse bends. F. Provide a box loop for all wire and cable routed through junction boxes or distribution panels. Provide tool formed thermal expansion loops at cable at manholes, handholes and at both sides of all fixed mounted equipment. Cable loops and bends shall not be bent at a radius greater than that recommended by the manufacturer. 3.05 Signal Polarity & Color Code Convention A. RJ45 - Per EIA T568B: 3.06 Wiring Practice A. Coordinate insulation displacement (quick connect) terminal devices with wire size and type. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Make connections with automatic impact type tooling set to recommended force. B. Dress, lace or harness all wire and cable to prevent mechanical stress on electrical connections. No wire or cable shall be supported by a connection point. Provide service loops where harnesses of different classes cross, or where hinged panels are to be interconnected. C. Correct any and all of the following unacceptable wiring conditions: 1. Deformed, brittle or cracked insulation. 2. Torn or worn cable jacket. 3. Excessively scored cable jackets. 4. Insulation shrunken or stripped further than 1/8" away from the actual point of connection within a connector, or on a punch block. 5. Ungrommeted, unbushed, or uninsulated wire or cable entries. 6. Deformation or improper radius of wire or cable. 3.07 Voice and Data Cabling Wiring Practice Conform to the following, in addition to the general requirements above: A. Limit cable bends to a minimum radius of eight (8) times cable diameter except where otherwise noted herein. B. Box Loops: At data cabling, form circular radius bends of eight times cable diameter minimum. Up to two (2) flat bends of 90 degrees or less are permitted in any single cable run where necessary to accommodate field wiring conditions. Flat bends exceeding 90 degrees will not be accepted. C. Receptacle Loop: At the receptacle, a single bend of 90 degrees or less and a 1 inch radius shall be permitted subject to the cable manufacturer certification of such an installation meeting Category 5 requirements. Contractor to field verify the performance Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Voice Data Systems Specifications 16710 -11 of the proposed installation in a mockup using the proposed cabling, jacks, raceway and listed test equipment prior to proceeding. D. Secure: Tie wraps to be hand (not tool) tightened.®: E. Run Lengths: 1. Station, Horizontal and Closet Links: a. Horizontal Distribution runs (including vertical portions) shall not exceed 90 meters (295 feet) from station outlet to the associated communications closet. b. Station cabling runs to be 3 meters (10 feet) or less. c. Closet distribution wiring not to exceed 6 meters (19.5 feet) 2. Alternately, total length not to exceed 100 meters (328 feet). 3. Report to the Architect conditions exceeding these requirements. 3.08 Labeling A. Provide permanent identification of run destination at all raceway terminations. Identify at each manhole, vault, handhole, terminal cabinet, pull box, equipment rack and receptacle/outlet. B. Unless otherwise noted, conform to the standards and methods of EIA/TIA 606. C. Identify all wire and cable clearly with permanent labels wrapped about the full circumference within one (1) inch of each connection. Provide any of the following: 1. Continuous permanent imprint; equivalent to Clifford of Vermont, Inc. "Quik-Pull". 2. Direct hot stamp. 3. Heat shrinkable factory hot stamped; equivalent to Bradysleeve Heatshrink. 4. Adhesive strip printed labels wrapped the full circumference of the wire and sealed with clear heat shrink tubing; equivalent to Thomas and Setts or Panduit Insta-code with clear heat-shrunk tubing equivalent to Alpha. 5. Lead tags, 2" square, drilled for cable attachment. Use THWN #12 or 2 #14 wrapped twice around the cable bundle and secure to tag using a crimp fastener. D. Indicate: 1. Indicate the number designated on the associated field or shop drawing or run sheet, as applies. Assign wire or cable designations consistently throughout a given system. Each wire or cable shall carry the same labeled designation over its entire run, regardless of intermediate terminations. 2. Indicate installation date. E. Patching Bays and Jacks and Receptacles containing six or fewer jacks/outlets: Provide designation strip holders with clear plastic covers to retain replaceable designation strips. Provide designation strips with block lettering on permanent background in contrasting color. Use photographic print, laser print on acid free paper, plotting ink on Mylar, or equivalent non-fading process. Alternatively, provide black on white adhesive labels equivalent to those produced by Brother brand P-Touch Letter Machine. Embossed plastic (Dymo) labels shall not be acceptable. The presence of manufacturer provided silk screen iconic identification labels shall not relieve the contractor from the requirement to identify the receptacle with its associated cabling and circuit. 3.09 Testing A. Category 6 System: 1. Test and report on each segment separately, including station cabling, horizontal distribution (each segment, if multiple) and telecommunications closet wiring. 2. Test each collective segment as a whole. v 3. Using the listed transmit/receive meter, test and report on at least the following: a. Attenuation at 5 MHz (dB) b. Attenuation at 10 MHz (dB) c. Noise, all Building systems powered and operating: 1 0 Hz- 1 50 kHz (mV) d. Noise, all Buildinq systems powered and operating: 150 kHz-16MHz (MV); 7@~ e. Noise, all Building systems powered and operating: 16 MHZ-100 MHz (mV) Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Voice Data Systems Specifications 16710-12 f. Near end crosstalk (dB). g. Measured qualification of the link (Meets Category 6). 4. Note exceptions to Category 6 standards, as applies. Remedy and retest. 5. Submit copy of final results on paper and in IBM PC format disk based copy, organized by Circuit Number, consistent with circuit numbering scheme used in preparing submittal drawings and in labeling receptacles and terminations. 3.10 Equipment Enclosure (Rack) and Equipment Backboard Fabrication A. Combustible material, other than incidental trim of indicated equipment, is prohibited within equipment racks. B. Within each equipment enclosure, provide a full-height multi-circuit ISOLATED GROUND outlet strip locate on the left side of the equipment enclosure, as viewed from the rear. Provide flexible steel raceway and junction box for connection of power service. Bond internal raceway to rack frame. C. Provide a permanent label on the front of each equipment rack including the rack designation, and the circuit breaker number and associated electrical distribution panel designation servicing same. D. Access shall not require demounting or de-energizing of equipment. Install access covers, hinged panels, or pull-out drawers to insure complete access to terminals and interior components. E. Fasten removable covers containing any wired component with a continuous hinge along one side, with associated wiring secured and dressed to provide an adequate service loop. Provide an appropriate stop locks to hold all hinged panels and drawers in a serviceable position. F. Provide permanent labels for all equipment and devices. Where possible, fasten such labels to the rack frame or to blank or vent panels-which will remain in place when active equipment is removed for possible service. G. At jackfields, provide service loop to permit removal of jackfields from rack sufficient to conveniently access all jack contacts for routine cleaning and maintenance. Organize the service loop and harness such that reasonable reconnection of jacks and jack normals is possible -without cutting apart the harness. H. Coordinate the design and execution of wire harnessing of multi-bay rack ensembles with conditions of delivery to installation locations at Project Site, and with the requirement herein for test of the completely wired system in the shop prior to delivery to the Project Site. Organize the wiring harnesses such that they will fold within one shippable unit without risk of damage, or provide polarized multipin connectors and related interconnect systems as specified elsewhere herein. I. At each equipment backboard, provide UL Listed surge suppressing multioutlet assembly with at least six (6) receptacles. 3.11 Acceptance Review and Testing Procedures Complete all Work of this Section. Submit Test Report. Submit review copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals, less reduced set of Record Drawings. Notify the Architect in writing that the Work of this Section is complete and fully complies with the Contract Documents. Request Acceptance Review and Testing. The representative of the Architect will conduct Verification of Submitted Test Data, and otherwise direct testing and adjustment of this Work. These Procedures may be performed at any hour of the day or night as required by the representative of the Architect to comply with the Project Schedule and avoid conflict with these procedures from possible ongoing work of other sections. Provide all specified personnel and equipment at any time without claim for additional cost or time. A. Personnel: Provide services of the designated supervisor and additional technicians familiar with work of this, Section. Provide quantity of technicians as required to comply with Project Schedule. B. In Addition, Provide: 1. All test equipment. 2. Complete set of latest stamped, actioned submittals of record for reference. 3. Complete set of Shop and Project Site Test Reports. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Voice Data Systems Specifications 16710-13 4. Complete set of manufacturer's original operation, instruction and service manuals for each equipment item for reference. C. Demonstrate: Complete operation of all systems. D. Adjust: As directed by the representative of the Architect. E. Correct: In timely manner, failure to comply with the Contract Documents, as reasonably determined by the representative of the Architect. 3.12 Closeout A. Punch List: Perform any and all remedial work, at no claim for additional cost or time. Where required, retest and submit Test Report. Notify Architect completion of Punch List. B. Portable Equipment: Furnish all portable equipment and spares to the designated representative of the Owner, along with complete documentation of the materials presented. Where applicable, furnish portable equipment in the original manufacturer's packing. C. Operating and Maintenance Data: instructions. Submit Manuals. D. Project Record Documents: Submit. E. Keys: If applicable, replace construction locks with permanent locks. Transmit keys to Owner. F. Training: Conduct specified training. G. Warranty: Submit Warranty dated to run from date of Acceptance of the Work of this Section. 3.13 Owner's Right to Use Equipment Acceptance of the Work of this Section will be after completion of corrections and ad adjustments required by the "Punch List" which results from Acceptance Review and Testing of the completed installation. The Owner reserves the right to use equipment, material and services provided as part of the Work of this Section prior to Acceptance without incurring any obligation to Accept any equipment or completed systems until all Punch List work is complete and all systems comply with the Contract Documents; or accept any claim for additional cost or time. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Voice Data Systems Specifications 16710-14 SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Scope A. Work Included: This specification document provides the requirement for Simplex 4100U Fire Alarm Control Panel. The system shall include a digital communication module (DACT), a CRT terminal, a printer, system cabinet, associated peripheral devices, programming, wiring, and other relevant component for a complete operational full automatic fire alarm system. All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section, complete, as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Examine all other specifications sections and drawings for related work required to be included as work under Division Sixteen. 2. General provisions and requirements for electrical work. 1.02 Submittals A. Submit eight (8) copies of the following to the Architect/Enginneer for approval: 1. A listing of all fire alarm components and equipment including the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) listing numbers. 2. CSFM listing sheets of all devices being used. 3. Manufacturers standard catalog data for fire alarm components. a. The submittal shall be arranged in the order of the Specification and shall list the specification paragraph number, the name, the proposed model and manufacturer for each item as well as a reference indicating the specific piece of data which can be easily located in the brochure. b. The manufacturer's data sheets shall be marked to indicate the specific item being proposed in cases where the sheet covers several types or sizes of item. The data sheet shall completely describe the proposed item. c. Where modification to the equipment is necessary to meet the operational requirements of the contract documents, the data sheets shall include complete mechanical and electrical shop drawings detailing the modification. 4. A listing of the outlet rough-in needed for every device and equipment item. The applicable symbol which illustrates that rough-in item on the job plans shall be drawn on the proposal, opposite the description of the rough-in to facilitate locating the data by field personnel. B. Provide record drawings to City at end of construction showing entire fire alarm system including 1/8" scale redrawn building plans showing all devices, panels and interconnecting wiring. 1.03 Applicable Standards A. The equipment shall be listed, labeled, and approved for the application shown in contract documents, as fire alarm equipment complying with the following requirements: 1. Codes and Standards: a. 2006 IBC and 2007 California Amendments (2007 California Building Code - Part 2, Title 24, CCR)' b. 2006 UMC and 2007 California Amendments (2007 California Mechanical Code - Part 4, Title 24 CCR) c. 2006 UPC and 2007 California Amendments (2007 California Plumbing Code - Part 5, Title 24 CCR) d. 2006 International Fire Code with 2007 California State Amendments (2007 California Fire Code - Part 9, Title 24 CCR) e. 2005 National Electrical Code (NEC) and 2007 California Amendments (2007 California Electrical Code - Part 3, Title 24 CCR) f. National Fire Protection Association's - National Fire Code Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721 -1 2. The fire alarm system shall conform to CBC Sec. 305.9 CFC Article 10, Article 760 of California Electrical code, NFPA 72, and the applicable Standards and Guides referenced in CBC Chapter 35. B. Written certification by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer shall be submitted to the Architect, stating that the system and its component parts are listed and approved by the California State Fire Marshal and the installation has been tested, is operational and conforms to the requirements as set forth in Part 3, Article 24, Title 19, California Code of Regulations. 1.04 Equipment and Installing Qualifications A. The specification is based on the equipment of manufacturers who have been approved by the City and the manufacturers herein named shall be considered as meeting the requirements of this specification. For all items which are identified by part number and manufacturer the Performance specifications which are published in the most recent manufacturer's data sheets available at the time of bidding this project shall be applicable to the present work as though fully written out herein. B. All equipment shall conform to all local applicable codes and ordinances, and shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. C. To qualify as an acceptable bidder, whether the bid is submitted to the City, his agent, a general contractor or a sub-contractor, the system bidder or contractor shall hold all licenses required by the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work. The Contractor shall be the factory authorized distributor for the branch of equipment offered and shall have been engaged in the business of supplying and installing the specified type of system for at least five years. The Contractor shall maintain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate repair service to the equipment. The Contractor shall be financially able to provide a performance bond covering the work and the guarantee described. The Contractor shall provide that bond if requested. D. Installation Certification: 1. Work and material for cables, cable terminations and related components shall be performed by certified installers. The installer shall be certified by the respective product manufacturers. 2. The manufacturers of the indicated work and material, shall provide a installer education/training and certification program for the supplied products. 3. The installers performing the Contract work for the indicated products, shall have attended and successfully completed each of the respective manufacturer's installation training education programs for the specified products. 4. Submit six (6) copies of the manufacturer's certifications for each installer performing the work. The submittal shall be approved prior to initiating any related contract work. 5. Contract material installed and work performed by installers not complying with these requirements shall be removed. Removal of work and material not in compliance with these requirements shall done at the CONTRACTOR'S expense, without any additional cost to the contract and without any additional contract completion due date extensions. New material and work required to replace the non-compiling removed work and material shall be provided at the CONTRACTOR'S expense, without any additional cost to the contract and without any additional contract completion due date extensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 General System Operation A. System shall be microprocessor-based, addressable, and power-limited with Class A or Class B supervised circuits. 1. The microprocessor shall execute all supervisory and control programming to detect, report the failure or disconnection of any system module or peripheral device and initiate programmed control sequences. An isolated supervision "watchdog" circuit shall monitor the microprocessor and, upon failure, shall activate the system trouble circuits. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-2 2. The fire detection and alarm system shall consist of main control panel, transponder panel(s), notification alarm devices, remote annunciator, automatic detection devices, manual stations, printer, and CRT/keyboard, installed and wired in accordance with the drawings and shall function as specified herein. 3. The system shall be programmable in the field, by a non-computer trained person. All programmed information shall be stored in non-volatile memory. 4. The system shall operate both addressable and non-addressable ionization, thermal and photoelectric detecting devices, manual stations, water-flow switches, and external control modules. 5. The control panel shall provide power, annunciation, supervision and control for the fire detection and alarm system. The system shall be designed such that alarm indications override trouble and control conditions. 6. External circuit supervision shall not require additional wires other than the pair used for detection or alarm (only two wires shall be used from the control panel to each loop of initiating devices and two wires for the notification alarm devices). These two wires shall provide both supervision and notification alarm signals. There shall be no loss of supervision for Class "B" wired addressable devices. Class "A" supervision may be provided by adding an additional pair of wires. B. Alarm Conditions: 1. Actuation of any manual or automatic alarm initiating device, connected to the system shall cause the following automatic functions. a. All notification alarm signaling units shall activate continuously. Audible notification alarms shall sound the California State coded signal. b. The respective zone alarm lamp or annunciator alpha numeric readout on the central control panel, and remote annunciator panel, shall be activated. c. Activate the Digital Alarm Communicator system. 2. Actuation of HVAC air duct smoke detectors shall stop the designated fans and motors in the building's air distribution system. 3. Actuation of smoke detectors on either side of smoke doors shall energize the release mechanism on the smoke door causing the door to close. 4. Notification alarm signal duration shall be capable of continuous sounding" or adjustable from three to ten minutes. 5. Perform any additional functions as specified herein or shown on the drawings. C. Trouble Condition: 1. A single open or single trouble condition in a manual or automatic fire initiating wiring circuit shall activate the respective zone trouble lamp or annunciator readout on the fire alarm control panel and sound a trouble signal at the control panel. 2. A single open or single trouble condition in the notification alarm signaling wiring circuit shall activate the trouble lamp or annunciator readout in the control panel and sound a trouble signal at the control panel. 3. 120 volt AC normal power shall be monitored with indication by a "power on" lamp. Upon normal power outage, the system shall activate a power trouble condition lamp or annunciator readout, and indicate a trouble condition. 4. The control panel shall monitor the standby batteries and, upon a low battery condition, activate the low battery battery lamp or annunciator readout and indicate a trouble condition. 5. System ground detection shall be provided for the entire system. Upon ground detection, activate the ground detection lamp or annunciator readout and indicate a trouble condition. D. Control panels employing alpha numeric readouts shall display the trouble condition along with a prompt to review the list chronologically. The end of the list shall be indicated. 2.02 Fire Alarm Control Panel A. General: Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721 - 3 1. The fire alarm control panel shall be software programmable, microprocessor controlled, solid state, electronic integrated system. The panel shall be the product of one manufacturer. The control panel shall provide power, annunciation, supervision and control for the detection and alarm system. The detection system shall remain 100% operational, responding to an alarm condition while in the routine maintenance mode. 2. Addressable detection and control devices shall be individually identified by the system, and any quantity of addressable detection devices shall be in alarm and any quantity of addressable control units shall be operable at any time up to the total number connected to the system. 3. The microprocessor shall access the system program, which is stored in non- volatile programmable memory, for all control-by-event (CBE) functions. The system program shall not be lost upon failure of both primary and secondary power. Volatile memory shall not be acceptable. 4. A means shall be provided for acknowledging each abnormal condition. Each activation of the appropriate acknowledge button shall sequentially acknowledge every point in the system. After all the points have been acknowledged, the LEDs shall glow steady and the panel audible signal will be silenced. The total number of alarms, supervisory, and trouble conditions shall be displayed along with a prompt to review each list chronologically. The end of the list shall be so indicated. 5. An alpha numeric annunciator readout shall indicate on the control panel the activation by type, loop, and address of the specific device, sub-loop or alarm/monitor/control point via an alpha numeric display. An audible alert, shall sound at the control panel and an alarm light shall flash. 6. If the microprocessor fails, the system shall executive a default signaling program. This program shall enable the control panel to sound the audible signals and summon the Fire Department. In addition, a red LED shall light to indicate the communication loop wherein the alarm originated. Inability of the system to sound signals or summon the fire department during microprocessor failure shall not be acceptable. 7. Protected access to the system controls shall be provided to allow the user/operator access to the following system functions: a. Status of all addressable points. b. Status of all events logged. c. Set/change the real-time clock and date. d. Perform an operational manual test of the system from the control panel, including actuation of any initiating device and trouble circuit without alarming the remote central station. The panel shall automatically return to normal mode in the event the panel remains unattended in the service mode. e. Retrieve from event log the last 150 alarms, or control points and 150 trouble conditions. 8. Individual input (monitor) and output (control) device addressability shall all be performed on the same pair of wires. Wiring shall be Class "A" or "B". When Class "B" wiring is used, no special wiring sequence shall be required on addressable device circuits. An unlimited number of wiring branches shall be permitted with no loss of supervision. 9. A minimum of 25% spare addressable monitor, trouble and control points shall be provided. B. Cabinet: 1. A metal tamper resistant cabinet shall contain the control panel components. Panel shall be surface or flush mounting as indicated on the drawings. Provide a full height tamper resistant hinged locking cabinet door. The door shall have transparent, high impact windows to allow visual observation of all indicators and switches without opening the panel door. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-4 2. "In-out" circuit conductors shall terminate on numbered screw-type terminals. 3. All groups of circuits or common equipment shall be clearly marked and shall be expandable by inserting interchangeable units. C. The control panel shall provide positive protection against the fire alarm system inadvertently being left in a non-operating status. The alarm system shall automatically restore and resound alarms and trouble signals, if subsequent alarm initiating or trouble signals are received under any of the following conditions: 1. After the alarm or trouble silence switch have been activated. 2. Prior to resetting system after previous alarm or trouble conditions. D. The system indicating and operational control devices shall be mounted on the control panel face behind the panel door and shall provide the following minimum functions: 1. Individual visual indicating pilot lights annunciator or alpha numeric readout to monitor the following alarm system conditions: a. Input power. b. System common alarm. c. System common trouble. d. Alarm or trouble signal silenced. e. Ground fault. f. Battery condition. g. Each individual alarm, control or initiating zone-activation, h. Each individual alarm, control or notification zone-trouble. i. Report, by specific device number, any device removed from an addressable initiating circuit, all other devices shall continue to function. 2. Manual control switches to allow the following system controls: a. Alarm silence. b. Trouble silence. c. Test all indicating pilot lights and readouts. d. System reset, including remote devices connected to the alarm panel. e. Alarm test to initiate an alarm condition from the control panel. f. Alarm disconnect for system testing without activating the Digital Alarm Communicator system. g. Changing the status of configured circuits (arming or disarming and changing status of relays). If any change in status degrades system operation as configured, a trouble condition shall be reported and remain until system operation again meets configured status. h. Perform multiple operations at the same time. These operations shall include but not be limited to timed functions and multiple configured sequences. E. Alarm initiating zone modules: 1. Shall supervise and accept remote alarm actuating device input signals. An alpha numeric readout shall indicate separate zone alarm and trouble indicators for each zone. 2. Zones shall be compatible, and designed to operate with the connected initiating devices either addressable or non-addressabe type. 3. A spare double throw set of software programmable auxiliary alarm relay contacts shall be provided for control of remote devices for each zone. Contacts shall be rated 120 volt-60 HZ 3 Ampere. 4. Each device on the system shall report as its own unique address. F. Notification alarm signal control: 1. Shall supervise and activate remote notification alarm devices. 2. Notification alarm shall be compatible and designed to properly operate with the connected audio and visual notification alarm devices, with no signal degradation. 3. The notification alarm shall provide group notification signal control of all notification zones. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-5 4. The alarm modules shall be field resettable to provide either continuous or coded notification alarm signals. The coded alarm signal shall provide an intermittent "on-off" pulsed sound activation of audible notification alarm devices. 5. A notification alarm circuit trouble indicating readout shall be provided for each notification zone. G. Automatic ground detection shall detect either positive or negative voltages when earth connections of 50,000 OHMS or less occur, and activate the ground trouble signal. 1. A ground fault code shall provide indication of either a positive or negative ground fault and shall operate the general trouble devices as specified herein but shall not cause an alarm to be sounded. 2. A short circuit error message shall be a standard feature of the fire alarm control panel. Each communication loop shall be monitored for short circuits and shall have a distinctive error message for visual indication of circuits and operating trouble devices as specified herein but shall not cause an alarm to be sounded. H. Power Supply: 1. The power supply shall be adequately sized to properly operate the equipment, including remotely connected, spare and future indicated equipment with all alarm dvices in alarm condition. Provide 20% spare power supply capacity for future expansion. Provide transfer modules and multiple power supplies as required for proper operation. 2. Input voltage 120 volt 60 HZ. A.C. 3. Surge transient voltage protection on the input and output phases of the power supply shall be provided. 4. Supervised voltage types (i.e. 120V-60HZ A.C., 24 volt A.C., 24 Volt D.C., etc.) required by special connected equipment shall be supplied, including but not limited to: a. Alarm initiating devices. b. Door hold-open or closing devices. c. Automatic fire doors and dampers. d. Notification alarm devices. e. Control and annunciator panels. f. Fire and smoke dampers. 5. A solid-state power transfer circuit shall provide (UPS) uninterrupted power supply between internal standby power and line power automatically and instantaneously if normal power fails or falls below 15% of normal ("brown out" conditions). 6. Individual circuit fuses shall be provided for smoke alarm detector power, main power supply notification circuits, battery standby power, and auxiliary output. I. Battery Back-Up Operation: 1. Internal batteries and battery power supplies shall be provided to allow continuous automatic normal operation of the entire control panel and fire alarm system after the failure of the incoming utility power. 2. Batteries shall be maintenance free, sealed, lead-acid or lead calcium or gelled electrolyte type rated 25% larger than required to provide power for the entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power for a period the length of time indicated on drawings with five (5) minutes of alarm signaling at the end of the period. 3. The battery charger, shall be automatic, dual rate with capacity to recharge completely discharged batteries in 18 hours. Charger shall be temperature compensated. J. Lighting and transient voltage surge protection shall be incorporated in the power supply circuit, common control circuits, signal circuits, and telephone line circuit. K. Circuitry shall be provided in the control panel to permit transmission of trouble and alarm signals over leased or privately owned telephone cables to a remote receiving panel. A reverse polarity or a masterbox circuit as required, shall be provided in the control panel. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-6 There shall be a supervised disconnect switch to allow testing of the fire alarm signal without transmitting an alarm signal to the central station. L. The alpha numeric annunciator (printer and CRT/keyboard) shall list upon request: 1. Alarms with time, date and location. 2. Troubles with time, date and location. 3. Status of output functions, "on" or "off1. 4. Sensitivity of addressable smoke detectors. 5. Detection device number, type and location. 6. Status of remote relays, "on" or "off1. 7. Acknowledgment time and date. 8. Signal silence time and date. 9. Reset time and date. M. The system shall also provide the following: 1. Counting the number of addressable detectors within a "zone". 2. Which are in alarm. 3. Counting "zones" which are in alarm. 4. Counting the number of addressable detectors which are in alarm. 5. Alarm on the system. 6. Differentiating among types of addressable detectors such as smoke detectors, manual stations, water-flow switches, thermal detectors. 7. Assigning priorities to types of detectors, zones or groups of detectors. 8. Cross-zoning. N. Control Functions: 1. Control functions shall be assigned on the basis of multi-relational system initiation patterns of detection devices including full logic element equations using as "anding" zones, counting zones, counting devices, "anding" groups, conditional "if, "then", "or" programming and "anding" types of detection devices. 2. Control functions shall be assigned on the basis of, cycle, delay, count, time of day, day of week, day of month and with a holiday schedule of up to thirty (30) holidays per year. Each addressable detection device shall report its condition to the system control unit not less than every four (4) seconds in a manner such that failure of the connections to the internal electronics of the device will result in a trouble signal which identifies the specific device involved. 3. The system shall be field programmable for the response of control points to monitored devices. 4. The operating software program shall provide programmable control for the Event-lnitiated-Programs (E.I.P.) which shall allow automatic operation of system control points in the event of a alarm condition. To program these E.I.P.'s, the system shall use a specifically designed user friendly programming language, which shall not require a knowledge of computer programming to learn and understand. 5. The operating software shall support the following additional capabilities: a. Three levels of designated and unique Priority Alarms for each point. b. Designated "Sense Mode" for status interpretation for each point. c. Designated Print/No Print/Vectoring Mode for each point. 6. The input statement defines the conditions required to activate the associated output statement. The input statement shall consist of single or multiple monitor point status, subroutine status, time comparison and the utilization of AND, OR, NOT, COUNT, and DELAY logic functions. 7. The output statement defines the action to be taken by the control panel. The output statement shall consist of activation/deactivation of single or multiple control functions, subroutines, and remote Annunciator status LED's. Output statements shall also include the "Alert" messages. 8. The software shall provide an "alert" message, unique to each point in the system, which will provide specific instructions for the operator on duty. These messages shall be up to 5 lines with up to 70 characters in each line. Each Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721 - 7 system monitor point shall have 5 specific alert messages when in alarm. Control points shall also be assigned alert messages. 9. The hardware and software shall have the capacity to accept up to 64 independent programs. Each program shall have "Edit" or "No Edit" capability. Each program shall be written in an equation format comparable to ladder-logic equations. The Equations shall consist of an input and an output statement. 10. Provide initial programming services for coding, loading and debuging the initial Owner specified programs, as part of the contract. Provide Owner with a complete programming software package, including hardware keys and cabling, and specific system data disks with each installation. 11. Programming Command Definition a. Timing command shall provide time delay and time control functions based on internal clock/calendar by time of day; day of week; day of month; month in year. b. Count command shall provide a specific number of events to occur before a control action is initiated. c. Pulse command shall provide on control for a specific period of time. d. Cycle command shall provide on-off control for preset periods of time. e. Print command shall provide printing of specified information after an event occurs. 2.03 Fire Alarm Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter A. Enclosure shall be red. B. Panel shall be solid state with eight zones for off premise monitoring of the fire alarm control panel. C. System shall monitor alarm and trouble conditions. System shall be power limited. D. System shall include dual telephone line switcher for central station reporting. Telephone lines shall be supervised. E. System shall include dual battery harness, batteries, and battery charger. F. System shall be U.L. listed for central station fire signaling systems (NFPA 72). G. System shall be California State Fire Marshal approved for central station reporting. H. System shall be Simplex 5071 Series. System shall be approved for connection to the fire alarm control panel. Contractor provide and terminate all necessary cabling to interconnect Digital Communicator to City owned telephone equipment. I. Verify specific requirements with City and central station prior to submittals. 2.04 Manually Activated Alarm Initiating Devices A. An electronic, digital multiplex, addressable module shall be incorporated into each device. The module shall communicate the status and trouble condition of each device with a unique address code. The module shall communicate with and be supervised and monitored by the fire alarm control panel. B. Devices shall be suitable for use on a class "B", 2-wire supervised alarm initiating circuit. C. Numbered screw type terminals shall be provided for "in-out" connections of the alarm circuit wiring. D. The face of the station shall have lettering indicating "FIRE" and operational instructions. Stations shall be tamper resistant, semi-flush mounting. E. Auxiliary spare switch contact shall be provided for control of remote devices rated 120 volts - 60HZ, AC - SAMP minimum. F. Stations shall provide visual indication the station has been activated. A key and special tool shall be required to gain access into the station to reset the station after being activated. G. Stations shall be "nonbreak-glass" type and shall be provided with breakaway polycarbonate shields in non-administrative areas. H. RF and transient filtering shall be provided in the device electronics. I. Pull stations shall be non-coded double action, requiring a two distinct manual "pulling" actions to initiate the fire alarm system. J. Stations installed outdoors shall be weather resistant construction, double action to activate the pull station. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-8 2.05 Automatic Alarm Initiating Devices A. General: 1. An electronic digital, multiplex, addressable module shall be incorporated into each device. The module shall communicate the status and trouble condition of each device with a unique address code. The module shall communicate with and be supervised and monitored by the fire alarm control panel. 2. Devices shall be suitable for use on a Class "B", 2-wire supervised alarm initiating circuit. Where initiating devices are shown connected to an existing system, devices shall operated on two or four wire circuits plus - 2 - wire power circuit as required by the existing equipment. 3. Numbered screw type terminals shall be provided for "in-out" connectors of the alarm circuit wiring. 4. Auxiliary double throw spare relay contact shall be provided for activation of remote rated devices 120V-60Hz, 1 Ampere minimum. 5. RF and transient filtering shall be provided in the initiating device electronics. 6. Initiating devices shall be reset from the control panel and shall not require individual resetting. B. Smoke Detector: 1. Detectors shall comply with U.L. standard 268, 167 and 168, and shall use solid state electronic circuits throughout. 2. The smoke detector shall operate on a total of two circuit wires. Alarm signaling and detector power shall use the same conductors. Detector sensitivity shall be factory set at 1.5%. 3. A fine mesh insect screen shall be provided on all detector openings. 4. The detector shall lock-in on alarm and shall provide a visual alarm/trouble indicator light. An electromechanical test feature shall provide functional testing of the unit without smoke. 5. The detector shall also incorporate a fixed temperature heat detector rated at 135 degrees F. The heat detector shall operate the alarm circuit and alarm/trouble light. a. Photo electric type smoke detectors shall employ a light emitting diode (LED) as the detector light source, activated by the presence of combustion smoke products. Failure of the LED shall activate the alarm/trouble light on the detector. b. Air duct smoke detector photo electric or ionization type for installation on a mechanical air ducts. Two air tubes shall extend into the air duct. The sampling tube shall extend across the entire width of the air duct. The second tube shall allow air to escape back into the duct. C. Fire Detector - Heat: 1. Heat detectors shall be dual action electro-thermostatic combination rate of temperature rise and fixed temperature operation. An indicator shall be visible when detector has activated. 2. The rate of rise element shall be self restoring, after activation. 3. The fixed temperature unit shall be set at 136 degrees F (190 degrees F for high temperature areas i.e. over 110 degrees F.) 4. Provide a wire guard cover for the detector. D. Fire Sprinkler Water Flow Detector: 1. Vane-type water flow detectors shall be provided on the sprinkler system piping as shown on the drawings. Detectors shall be designed for mounting on either vertical or horizontal piping, but shall not be mounted in a fitting or within 12 inches of any fitting that changes the direction of water flow. 2. The detectors shall have a sensitivity setting to signal any flow of water that equals or exceeds the discharge from one sprinkler head. 3. Detector switch mechanisms shall incorporate an instantly recycling pneumatic retard element with an adjustable range of 0 to 70 seconds. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-9 Switches shall have a minimum rated capacity of 7 amp 125 volt A.C. - .25 amp 24 volt D.C. A D.P.D.T. switch shall be actuated by a polyethylene vane extending into the waterway of the piping. 4. Detectors shall be of weatherproof, dust tight construction and shall provide a %" inch conduit entrance. Detector shall be finished in red baked enamel. 5. Flow switch shall be sized to match the fire sprinkler riser pipe diameter. E. Fire Sprinkler Valve Tamper Switch: Tamper switch shall monitor the position of the fire sprinkler shut-off valve. Operation of the valve shall activate the switch and activate a trouble alarm. 2.06 Notification Alarm Devices A. General: 1. Notification alarm devices shall activate automatically from the control panel. Devices shall operate on a Class "B" (Style Y), 2-wire supervised alarm notification circuit. Series wired alarm devices shall not be used. 2. Numbered screw type terminals shall be provided for "in-out" connections of the alarm circuit wiring. 3. Devices shall be installed in a box, 3 1/2" deep maximum, flush mounting unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Size as required for the alarm indicating device and wiring connections. Provide a trim ring and metal grill cover assembly. Cover assembly shall be minimum of 1/16" minimum thick flat stainless steel or aluminum. Finish color as selected by Architect. The word "fire" shall appear on the grill minimum 1/2" letters. The grill shall be attached with screws to the box. 4. Each audible notification visual devices shall incorporate a visual alarm indicator. The visual alarm indicating device shall be an integral part of the audible alarm box assembly. 5. Audible notification device and visual notification devices shall be connected to separate notification alarm signal circuits. Do not connect these devices to the same circuit conductors. B. Audible Alarm Horns: 1. Horns installed indoors shall be electronic type. 2. Horn shall provide a minimum sound level of 75 DB at 10 feet, when installed in the field operating conditions shown on the drawings. 3. Outdoor horns shall be electro-mechanical, weatherproof and shall be mounted in a recessed backbox with vandal resistant grille, Soundolier 193-8/VP-161 series. 4. Audible devices shall provide a minimum sound level of 15DB over the ambient level measured 48" above the floor. C. Visual Alarm Indicator: 1. Lamp/Strobe internally illuminated projecting lens assembly, with flasher system. Unit shall flash on and off to provide visual indicating of fire alarm. 2. The word "fire" shall appear on the lens or lens plate. 3. Flash rate, one flash per second, with a flash duration of approximately 0.001 second flash rate independent of audible device. 4. Light source, Xenon high intensity flash strobe tube white/clear color. 5. Strobe shall have candela ratings indicated on drawings. 6. Strobe shall comply with NFPA 72 Chapter 4 and ADA requirements. 2.07 Remote Fire Alarm Annunciator A. General: 1. The annunciator panel shall be powered and operated from the fire alarm control panel. "In-out" circuit conductors shall terminate on numbered screw-type terminals. 2. A metal tamper resistant weatherproof cabinet shall contain the annunciator components. The panel shall be surface or flush mounted as indicated on the drawings. Provide a full height tamper resistant, hinged locking cabinet door. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721 -10 Door shall have transparent high impact windows to allow visual observation of all indicators and switches. 3. An electronic digital, multiplex, addressable module shall be incorporated into the annunciator. The module shall communicate the status and trouble condition of each device with a unique address code. The module shall communicate with and be supervised and monitored by the fire alarm control panel. B. Each alarm initiating zone (including spares) shall be individually annunciated in the annunciator panel. C. A common fire trouble alarm shall be annunciated in the annunciator panel from the fire alarm control panel. D. Annunciator lamp circuits shall be automatically supervised. Provide lamp test switch in the annunciator panel. E. An audible alarm/trouble buzzer with silence switch and automatic resound for subsequent alarm/trouble signals shall be provided. The annunciator panel shall be automatically reset when the control panel is reset. F. A keyed switch shall be provided for remote reset of the system. The annunciation panel shall also be automatically reset when the control panel is reset. G. Provide a floor plan of the facility framed under acrylic and mounted adjacent to the fire alarm annunciator. The floor plan shall be to scale and shall have room numbers clearly displayed on all rooms corresponding to the annunciator for the purpose of easily identifying the fire zones. 2.08 Remote Equipment Monitoring and Control A. An electronic digital multiplex addressable module shall be provided at each device or equipment indicated to be controlled by the multiplex system. Multiple addressable control ports shall be provided in each module quantity as required for each point controlled or monitored. The module shall communicate the monitor status control action and trouble condition of each device with a unique address code. The module shall communicate with and be supervised and monitored by the fire alarm control panel. B. Where multiple points are monitored or controlled, provide digital, multiplex, multipoints, monitor, control panel (MMCP). The panel cabinet shall be self contained NEMA 1 construction and hinged locking door. Provide tamper switch detection zone on the cabinet door, provide 60 hour battery UPS backup and power supply, the same as required for the fire alarm control panel. Panel shall be expandable using plug-in circuit monitor/control printed circuit cards. Provide barriered numbered terminal strips. C. Each control point shall provide a supervised "dry" relay contact single pole double throw maintained contact rated 10 ampere, 120 volt, 60 HZ. D. Each monitor point shall provide not less than one of the following supervised methods of monitoring a remote device or equipment action or status. 1. Remote "dry" contact operation normal open, normally closed or momentary contact operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Identification (Additional Requirements) A. The inside cover of alarm initiating devices shall be marked with the zone initiating number corresponding to the zone number in the control panel. Marking shall be with a felt-tip pen. B. Each fire alarm terminal cabinet shall be painted red. C. Provide nameplate: "Power to Main Fire Alarm Control Panel" screwed onto the branch circuit overcurrent device supplying power to the main fire alarm control panel. 3.02 Wiring (Additional Requirements) A. Review the total system point-to-point wiring layout to assure that the correct number and type of wires and conduit sizes are installed. B. Final connections, testing, adjusting and calibration shall be made under the direct supervision of a factory-trained technician of the system supplier. C. All wiring shall be in conduit, or surface metallic raceway. Refer to drawings. D. All wiring in cabinets shall be neatly formed, laced and made up on bolt and nut terminal blocks. Tag all spare conductors. All conductors shall terminate on terminal strips with Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-11 spade lugs, of adequate size for all incoming and outgoing conductors. The strips shall be labeled as to their use and wiring diagram shall be placed on the cabinet door showing connections of all related equipment to these strips. E. Wiring requirements for shielding certain conductors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide all conduit, raceways and conductors per manufacturers recommendations and include all material and labor costs in the contract price. F. The conductors used for digital, multiplex communication between the fire alarm control panel and external remote initiation devices, control points and annunciators, shall be twisted, shielded, multi-conductor cable, #16 AWG copper minimum with a separate internal ground/drain conductor, U.L. listed for fire alarm system use. One spare pair of multiplex conductors shall be provided in all main and branch device/equipment connections for future system use. "Tees" and taps at any junction box location in the communication lines, shall be permitted by the system to additional devices without affecting proper system operation. G. Wire Size: Wire shall be sized to insure installed circuit voltage drop does not exceed 10% and all devices function properly. 3.03 Outlet Boxes (Additional Requirements) A. Device outlet boxes shall be flush mounted unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Provide extension rings to finish flush with finish surface. Where the drawings indicate surface mounted devices, outlet boxes shall be cast metal with threaded hubs. Where the conduit entrances are not exposed for surface mounted devices, provide flush outlet box behind the device box and omit the conduit hubs on the device box. Size device boxes and outlet boxes per manufacturer's recommendation and as required by code for wire fill. B. Coordinate installation of exterior surface horns in recessed flush backboxes so that conduit enters backbox to align with entry port on horn. 3.4 Special Installation Requirements A. Air duct smoke detectors shall be installed in the supply air ducts and return air ducts with an air flow of 2000 CFM or greater, coordinate with mechanical contractor. Sampling tube shall extend across entire duct width. Provide 3/4" conduit with 2#12 to respective motor control device to automatically shut down the respective fan motor upon detection of smoke in the air duct and initiate the alarm. B. Water flow switches shall be installed on each main fire sprinkler rise pipe, coordinate with the fire sprinkler contractor. C. Tamper switches shall be installed on each main fire sprinkler shut-off valve, coordinate with the fire sprinkler contractor. D. Equipment shall be weatherproof gasketed where installed in locations exterior to the building, or where indicated on the drawings. Weatherproof equipment shall be tamper resistant. 3.05 Testing A. The entire fire alarm system shall be tested in the presence of the local fire official Inspector and a representative of the manufacturer after the installation is complete. Invite the local fire official to witness the test. 1. Individually activate each manual initiating station and verify correct alarm operation and control panel response. 2. Individually test each automatic initiating device and verify correct alarm operation, control panel response and remote equipment operation. 3. The communication loops and the notification alarm circuits shall be opened in at least two (2) locations per building to check for the presence of correct supervisory circuitry. B. Test the battery back-up system by disconnecting the incoming normal power and allowing this alarm system to operate 24 hours on battery power. Sound the alarm system for five minutes at the end of 24 hours on battery power. C. Perform all electrical and mechanical tests required by the equipment manufacturer's certification form. Measure and adjust each automatic detection detector to the maximum stable sensitivity setting. Detector tests shall be performed with the detector at its Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721 -12 operational location and under normal operational environmental conditions in the area. Bench settings are not acceptable. An operational check-out test and report shall be performed. Submit six copies of test report results. The tests and report shall include, but not be limited to: 1. A complete list of equipment installed and wired. 2. Indication that all equipment is properly installed and functions and conforms with these specifications. 3. Test of individual zones as applicable. 4. Serial numbers, locations by zone and model number for each installed detector. 5. Voltage (sensitivity) settings for each ionization and photoelectric detector as measured in place with the HVAC system operating. 6. Technician's name, certificate number and date. 7. The completed manual and automatic monitoring and control system shall be tested to insure that it is operating properly. This test will consist of exposing the installed units to a standard fire test. 8. Acceptance of the system shall also require a demonstration of the stability of the system. This shall be adequately demonstrated if the system operates for a ninety (90) day test period without any unwarranted alarms. Should an unwarranted alarm(s) occur, the contractor shall readjust or replace the equipment and detector(s) and begin another ninety (90) day test period. As required by the Architect, the contractor shall recheck the detectors using the fire test after each readjustment or replacement of detectors. This test shall not start until the City has obtained beneficial use of the building under tests. D. After the testing has been completed to the satisfaction of the inspectors, provide the NFPA certificate of compliance to the City, the local Fire Official, the Architect and Inspector of Record (IOR). E. Upon the receipt of Certificate of Compliance, the installer/supplier shall supply the Owner with a written operating, testing and maintenance instructions, point-to-point as- built drawings, and equipment specifications. 3.06 Instruction A. Provide a two (2) hour instructional sessions conducted by a factory-authorized technician at the job site after completion of all tests to instruct City personnel on the use of the system. The first session shall be videotaped and conducted prior to final acceptance of the project. The second session shall be held within eleven months of final acceptance of the project, when requested by the City. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721 -13 SECTION 16725 CAMPUS SECURITY SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Summary: Contractor to provide complete integrated campus security system which will be fully compatible and inter-connected with the existing security system installed for the City of Carlsbad Public Safety Center under as separate contract. 1. Exterior Closed-Circuit security cameras (CCTV) 2. Interior Closed-Circuit security cameras (CCTV) 3. Proximity access control card readers for doors (DACS) 4. Central camera monitoring and recording station(s). 5. Central door access control and programming station 6. Coordination and verification of system required infrastructure to be provided and installed whether shown within the contract drawings or implied as required for the intended security system operation. 7. Internet data connections to the City of Carlsbad main terminals for security cameras and access controls. 8. Coordination and review of proposed door hardware and installation of infrastructure to support noted security system equipment. 9. Coordination with installation and integration into building Fire Alarm System and controls as required by building codes: Refer to Fire Alarm drawings & Specifications. A Work in This Section to include: 1. Provide an integrated point monitoring and control system for door access (DACS), provide a closed circuit television system (CCTV) for internal and external monitoring, for selected entry points. Provide necessary software and hardware to integrate the systems and provide control terminals on a local network for access to all functions. This section describes the purpose of the system, location of control points, types of hardware, and installation practice. 2. System: Contractor shall provide a complete and satisfactory operating system for the control and monitoring of key access and security doors in the facility. It will consist of a proximity card reader door control system, door status indication and alarm, and an audit record of door access events. The system shall interface with the fire alarm system to release all doors in case of a fire alarm. The access control will be PC-based and will allow flexibility in programming on a permissive access on a door-by-door, card-by-card basis. 3. Contractor shall provide a complete and satisfactory operating system for a closed circuit television system for the monitoring of key doors and entrances. The system shall consist of fixed plus pan-zoom-tilt cameras. The system shall also provide a video and camera control system with operator access in specified locations. A video recording system shall also be provided. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-1 4. An open architecture security integration system shall be provided which will simultaneously control the DACS, the CCTV, and the door intercom systems. The system may be combined with the CCTV recording and matrix switcher hardware. It shall have the necessary hardware to provide a local network connecting the monitoring terminals to the City of Carlsbad main security system server, to allow monitoring and control of all building security functions from terminals which are permitted access. The requirements for the integration software are contained in a later section of this specification. 5. All equipment and installation material required to fulfill the above requirements shall be furnished, whether or not specifically enumerated herein or on the drawings. All necessary hookup and installation shall be by a factory-approved representative. The installation Contractor shall also instruct designated personnel in the correct operation of the system. A minimum of three hours for this instruction shall be included in the bid. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Although specific brand names and models are called out in this Specification, equipment manufactured by other reputable companies shall be acceptable if deemed equal and compatible by the City of Carlsbad. Complete engineering data and diagrams shall be submitted with the bid if a substitute system is proposed. B. Installation: All equipment furnished under this procurement shall be installed in final operational position by trained technicians or installers. C. Contractor Qualifications: 1. The Contractor shall be a firm with at least five (5) years experience in the fabrication, assembly, and installation of security systems of the magnitude and quality equivalent to those specified in this section. 2. The Contractor shall have supplied and installed at least three (3) systems of equal scope and complexity. These systems must have been operating satisfactorily for a minimum of three years. 3. The Contractor must insure compliance with an understanding of all local codes, union requirements, and contract conditions pertaining to this project. D. UL Approval: All equipment supplied according to this Specification and operating from 110 VAC shall carry approval of the Underwriters' Laboratories and shall be so marked with the approved UL seal. The system shall meet UL 264. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The security system shall be installed in accordance with all applicable national, state and local codes including but not limited to the following: 1. ANSI: Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. NEC, National Electrical Code 3. NFPA, National Fire Protection Association Life Safety Code. 4. Local and State Governing Codes. 5. UL: Underwriters Laboratory Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-2 Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-3 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Project Manual for Procedures. A. The Contractor shall submit prefabrication submittals consisting of product data and shop drawings for approval. Partial submittals will not be accepted without prior written approval by the Project Manager. The Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the contract documents by the Project Manager's approval of prefabrication submittals. No portion of the work shall commence nor shall any equipment be ordered until the prefabrication submittals have been approved in writing by the Project Manager. All work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. A detailed completion schedule shall be submitted with the prefabrication submittals. B. Product Data: Five (5) sets of product data shall be submitted in 3-ring binders divided into separate sections for each system. Each section shall include the following: 1. Equipment schedules listing all system components, the manufacturer, model number, and quantity of each. 2. General functional description of each system. 3. Manufacturer's literature sheets for all system components, including any warranty and maintenance information. 4. General functional description of any software to be used for the system. 5. Point charts defining all inputs and outputs for the system, if applicable. 6. Block diagrams for DACS, CCTV, and security system integration equipment. 7. Cable and wiring types. 8. Finishes and graphics C. Shop Drawings: Five (5) large format copies shall be submitted for each drawing. Shop drawings shall include, but be limited to the following: 1. Floor plans with all device locations, wire runs, and wire designations. 2. System riser diagram with all devices, wire runs, and wire designations. 3. Block diagrams for each system. 4. Wiring diagrams for each system defining the interconnection for all inputs and outputs for all equipment. 5. Wiring diagram for fail-safe release of electric locking mechanisms. 6. Wiring diagram for interface between the intercom and CCTV systems 7. Fabrication shop drawings for all custom equipment. 1.05 GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS A. Intent: 1. The intent of these Specifications is to define the operational and equipment requirements to implement and operate the DACS, and CCTV in a manner that is totally responsive to the needs of the users. Any reference to one manufacturer's equipment is for descriptive purposes only as to level of quality and functions desired and is not restrictive to that manufacturer. 2. This Specification also is intended to define quality equipment that is dependable and capable of delivering maximum performance with high reliability. All equipment furnished under this procurement shall be the latest model available, shall be new, and shall not have been used in any demonstration or exhibit. The overall design shall meet or exceed the latest applicable standards of the Electronics Industries Association (EIA), and the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-4 B. Turnkey System: All bids shall be for the entire system, as specified, to ensure that a complete turnkey system is bid and that nothing remains to be purchased or supplied by the customer other than those items so indicated. C. System Completeness: These Specifications may not necessarily list all equipment required to produce a fully operational system that will satisfy the requirement for an operational Campus Security System. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify completeness of the equipment list and suitability of the units. Any equipment or special installations required by these performance specifications and not specifically called out herein shall be provided by the Contractor without claim for additional payment. It shall be understood that bid award will be comprehensive in nature and will lead to a completely operational system. D. Equipment Offering: Contractor shall offer equipment that most nearly meets the specific details of this Specification. If no deviations are noted, the buyer shall assume complete conformance to this Specification and system requirements. The Contractor will be required to assume responsibility for all equipment offered in the bid. Absence of specification details implies that best general practice will prevail and that the Contractor will supply only high-quality, commercial-grade equipment. E. Installation: Refer to the approved contract drawings for the location of specified equipment and tables listen in paragraph 3.05 of the specification. F. Maintenance and Repair: The Contractor shall specify and clearly state the policy and procedure for maintenance and repair of all items delivered under any contract resulting from this Specification. The Contractor shall clarify provisions of maintenance and repair during and after the first warranty period. The Contractor shall outline those routine and precautionary maintenance procedures and standard checkout procedures that should be used. This company must have a repair facility within 50 miles of the buyer's location. G. Parts: The Contractor shall formulate and state plans for assuring an on-going stock of replacement parts for each item included in the offering, and shall guarantee to make available such part(s) as may be required for a period consistent with the life of the equipment or for a period of not less than ten years, whichever is greater. If one of the items or components becomes obsolete and replacement parts are ordered, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide a device that will appropriately replace the defective unit. 1.06 WARRANTY: A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and installation for a period no less than two (2) years against defects in design, material, and workmanship. The warranty period shall begin with installation completion and system acceptance. Repairs to correct discrepancies identified during this period will include labor and materials at no cost to the City of Carlsbad. The Contractor, as a warranty action shall replace any faulty equipment that, in the opinion of the City of Carlsbad, is not reasonably repairable. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Installers A. Single Source Approved Installer: The City of Carlsbad accepted single source installer of the Campus Security system and integration shall be performed by the below listed source. Products and Equipment listed within this section are based compatibility and standards of the existing campus security system installed elsewhere in the city under a separate contract. Substitutions shall be considered under the provisions of Section 01030 of these specifications. 1. Company: JMG Security Systems 7297 Ronson Rd. #A San Diego, CA 92111 Tele (800) 900-4564 FAX (714) 545-0352 2. Contact: Mike Tremblay, Senior Agent 3. Website: www. i mqsecuritv. com 2.02 DOOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (DACS) A. Basis of Design: The selected manufacturer and system selected for the Door Access Control System shall be as specified herein. Substitutions shall not be considered. 1. Manufacturer: HID 2. Series: iCIass 3. Model No. Refer to specified products herein. B. Functional Specifications: 1. The DACS system shall consist of a alarm input/control output data gathering panels Wiegand Interface Modules (WIMs). The WIMs shall be capable of collecting card reader data, multiplexing the information, and transmitting that data back to the computer. The WIMs shall be capable of providing control output points initiated by alarm events, remotely controlled by the operator's terminals or by software. 2. The system shall have the capability of being operated from two (2) locations. a. Shooting Range Building b. City of Carlsbad Main Terminal Control (Verify location with the Owner): 3. The main equipment terminations and appropriate nodes shall be located in the Tele/Data Room #107 of the Shooting Range Building. The CCTV monitoring location shall be located in Room Range Control Room #118. Local WIM panels may be located in convenient places to group card readers locally. The door lock strikes will be provided by others. Refer to Door Hardware Specification. An interface with dry switch closures will be provided to the door access system to operate request to exit functions for selected doors for remote release. The door access system shall provide dry contract closures to indicate door position/status. 4. The system shall provide for at least six (6) password restricted operator access levels. This feature shall restrict operator access levels. This feature shall restrict access to sensitive programming functions to authorized personnel only. 5. The system shall provide an audit trail feature to maintain an historical record of what changes were made to the data base, when the changes were made, and who made them. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-6 6. All user programming shall be accomplished via the administrative/CRT keyboard terminal. Any terminal may enter the programming mode by proper password entry. 7. The system shall provide for user programming of the following data for each card: a. Card number (internal and hot stamp) b. Access level(s) c. Card holder name d. Card holder department name e. Four (4) user-definable fields of at least 24 characters each 8. The system proximity cards shall be match the City of Carlsbad existing issued access control system access cards. 9. The system shall provide for bulk loading of the cardholder database for large numbers of cards with the same access levels. 10. The system shall provide for partitioning of the cardholder database by password, to restrict access to card programming functions for groups of cards and readers. 11. The system shall provide for user programming of the following for each alarm input points: a. Point number b. Point type c. Point priority group d. Point location e. Point description f. Normal mode descriptor g. Abnormal mode descriptor h. Response message i. Restore message j. Time program arm and disarm k. Real time arm and disarm 12. The system shall allow all alarm input points in the system to be partitioned by software to be reported only at certain terminals during certain time periods and at other terminals during other time periods. 13. The system shall provide for user programming of the following for each control output point: a. Point number b. Point activation (alarm point, time schedule, or real time) c. Maintained or momentary output d. Normally open or normally closed output 14. The system shall allow all control output points in the system to be partitioned by password for real time control only by certain operators. 15. Exact alarm input and control output point partitioning requirements shall be as indicated on the Point Charts. 16. Certain alarm input points shall be "transparent" as indicated on the Point Charts. These points, used to initiate another event within the system, shall not be annunciated at the operators' CRT or event printer. 17. The system shall provide for time programmable and real time arming and disarming of all alarm input points and all control output points as indicated in the Point Charts. 18. Alarm reporting shall take precedence over all other system functions. The operators' CRT shall visually and audibly annunciate that an alarm condition Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-7 exists, independent of any other current operator's CRT activity. The alarm signal volume shall be adjustable on all terminals. 19. The operators' CRT shall display the date, time, and number of alarms waiting at all times. 20. Multiple alarms shall be queued in their order of priority. 21. The operators' monitor and event printer shall display and record the alarm message including: the time, date, location, point number, event type, and point status for each point transaction. 22. The event printer shall record with time designations all or selected system activities, including but not limited to: a. Log-on and log-off denoting operator's I.D. b. Program changes c. Alarm conditions d. Alarm resets e. Alarm acknowledge f. Control commands g. Guard tour stops h. Selective card tracking i. Invalid card use j. Selective reader tracking 23. The system shall provide for report printing and/or display of any group of events within any selectable time period. The report printer shall be capable of producing a hard copy of any report that the system may generate. Reports shall include historical events, defined by any combination of the following categories: a. All events b. Location c. Point number d. Event type (e.g., intrusion, door open, etc.) e. Point status (e.g., on, off, alarm, normal, shunted, etc.) f. Management reports of transaction history by card number, cardholder, reader number, time period, or invalid attempts g. Audit trail reports 24. The system shall monitor the alarm input point status of the following equipment and systems as indicated within the Project Plans and the Schedule of Card Reader Locations, paragraph 3.05 of this Specification Section. a. Access Control: Card reader controlled door prop alarms, intrusion alarms, and invalid card use alarms. b. Fire Alarm Systems: The Fire Alarm Contractor shall provide normally closed dry contacts for general fire alarm and system trouble alarm. c. Door Position Switches: A concealed door position switch, an overhead door position switch, a surface mount door position switch, a hinge position switch (Refer to Section 08710), a lock position switch (Refer to Section 08710), a sliding gate, and swinging parking lot gate position switch (provided by others), or a fourfold door position switch (Refer to Section 08710) shall be used to monitor the secure status of each door in the system as indicated on the plans and in the Schedule of Card Reader Locations, paragraph 3.05 of this Specification Section. d. Exit Alarm Units: Exit alarm units shall be provided for local monitoring of the secure status of certain doors as indicated on the Schedule of Card Reader Locations, paragraph 3.05 of this Specification Section. An alarm output Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-8 contact shall be activated whenever a protected door is opened to initiate an alarm condition on the DACS system. e. Door Control Panel Push-Buttons: The door pushbutton contacts or console door releases shall be wired as transparent alarm inputs. Contact closures will be provided from the radio control consoles. f. Panic Alarm: Panic alarm buttons shall be installed at selected pedestrian gate for the use of personnel in distress or needing help. g Tamper Switches: Tamper switches shall be provided in all WIMs. The number of WIMs are dependent on the system supplied by the Contractor and shall be included in the total alarm input figures. 25. The system shall provide control point outputs to the following equipment and systems. a. Access Control: Card reader, door control panel, DACS network keyboard, motion detector or time schedule activates lock release power control. b. Exit Alarm Units: Unit reset/bypass control is activated by DACS network keyboard and/or time schedule. 26. The system shall provide for card reader and remote control of certain doors listed in the Design Guidelines. 27. The system shall provide for controlling access through card reader controlled door based on the card user's access level, which shall be defined by a specific group of readers during specific time intervals. 28. The system shall provide the capability for controlling access through card reader/keypad controlled doors based on the card user's access level and personal identification number (PIN). The requirement for use of the keypad with each reader use shall be user programmable from the operator's terminal. 29. The system shall provide for automatic card invalidation after a programmable number of invalid transactions and/or a programmable time period. 30. The system shall store in memory every card access transaction, describing the nature of the transaction, time, date, reader location, card holder name, card number, and validity status. 31. Unauthorized reader use attempts shall cause an alarm indication at the operator's terminal. 32. The system shall provide operator's monitor display and event printing of card use (all transactions or violations only) by card and/or by reader. 33. The system shall provide momentary or maintained release of card reader controlled door locks via the operator's keyboard. 34. The system shall monitor the status of card reader controlled doors against intrusion or door propping. 35. Each card reader controlled door shall be equipped with an electric locking mechanism. Power supplies for the locking mechanisms shall be provided with local battery backup. 36. The DACS shall be connected (hard-wired) to the base building fire alarm system for failsafe release upon any fire alarm. A single low voltage/low current normally closed dry contact from the fire alarm system -shall be provided by others. This contact shall open on any fire alarm condition. The Security Contractor shall provide all additional UL listed failsafe relays as necessary to interface to this contact and unlock all of these doors. The fire alarm takes precedence over any card reader or other function. 37. All devices associated with each card reader controlled door shall be as indicated on the plans and in the Door Schedule. 38. The system shall provide for card reader and remote activation of the motorized site Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-9 parking gates as indicated on the plans. Refer Specifications Section 02835 and approved project plans for information pertaining to gate operation and signalization. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-10 C. Technical Specifications: 1. Computer (Provided by the Owner) a. The controlling computer and software of the logic controller for the DACS system shallbe provided and located by the owner. 2. Flat Panel Monitor & Keyboard Terminal (Provided by the Owner) a. The color flat panel monitor/keyboard terminal to support the access control system shall be provided and located by the owner. 3. Printer: (Provided by the Owner). a. The event printer which shall interface with the Computer shall be provided and located by the owner. 4. Wiegand Interface Modules (WIM) a. The WIM shall provide supervised alarm inputs to monitor the status of alarm circuits and report the status information to the PMAC Computer. b. The WIM shall provide control relay outputs for controlling devices by remote command from the PMAC operator's terminal, through time programming or on alarm point activation. c. Communications between WIMs and the Computer shall conform to EIA standards. d. The WIM shall automatically disconnect from the communication loop upon a communication failure to prevent communications to other WIMs in the loop from being interrupted. e. Upon loss of communication with the Computer, the WIM shall store up to 16 events per potential alarm input and transmit that data to the Computer as soon as communication is restored. f. Each WIM shall have 20 percent spare input points and output points after all specified points are connected. g. Eight (8) hours of rechargeable battery backup shall be provided in each WIM for memory backup. Batteries shall be sealed gel type. h. The WIM shall be housed in a locking steel enclosure designed for surface mounting. A tamper switch shall be provided to sense the removal or opening of the enclosure cover. The Contractor shall provide any conduit required from the WIM to power supplies, junction boxes, or wireways. i. All alarm and control points as well as card reader inputs shall be capable of independent time programming via software controls from the DACS computer. j. The WIM may be combined with the Reader Interface Module as one unit. 5. Reader Wiegand Interface Module (WIM) a. The WIM shall provide an intelligent interface between card readers and the Computer utilizing distributed processing technology. b. The RIM shall contain enough RAM to maintain a card database equal to the system capacity with the same expansion capabilities. c. Communications between WIMs and the Computer shall conform to EIA standards. d. Upon loss of communication with the Computer, the WIM shall contain enough RAM to operate normally without failing into the degraded mode. The access control database shall contain sufficient RAM to operate normally. e. The lock control output contacts shall be rated for 2 A @ 24 VDC. Relay activation time shall be adjustable from the PMAC operator's terminal from 1 to 30 seconds on a per reader basis. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-11 f. Transaction time for authorized cards shall be less than 0.5 second from the time of card read until the door is unlocked. g. The WIM shall be housed in a locking steel enclosure designed for surface mounting. A tamper switch shall be provided to sense the removal or opening of the enclosure cover. The Contractor shall provide any conduit required from the WIM to power supplies, junction boxes, or wireways. h. The WIM may be combined with the Data Gathering Panel as one unit. 6. Tamper Switch a. The tamper switch shall be a normally closed plunger type switch designed to be mounted to an enclosure to sense the removal or opening of the enclosure cover. b. The tamper switch shall be a Sentrol Model 3025T or approved equal. 7. Concealed Door Position Switch a. The concealed door position switch shall operate with up to a 1/2" gap between switch and magnet when mounted in a steel door and frame. The contact configuration shall be normally closed when the door is closed. The switch and magnet shall mount into a 1" diameter hole. b. The door position switch shall be a Sentrol Model 1078 or approved equal. 8. Surface Mount Door Position Switch a. The surface mount door position switch shall operate with a gap up to 3" between the switch and the magnet. The cable shall be armored when exposed. The contact configuration shall be normally closed when the door is closed. b. The surface mount door position switch shall be a Sentrol Model 2505-A or approved equal. 9. Overhead Door Position Switch a. The overhead door position switch shall be a heavy duty floor-mounted contact with a stainless steel armored cable, when exposed. The contact, which shall operate with up to a 3" gap, shall be configured to be normally closed when the door is closed. b. The overhead door position switch shall be a Sentrol Model 2205-A or approved equal. 10. Request to Exit Sensor. a. Panic exit devices shall contain integral "Request to Exit" solenoid sensors for the release of the electronic lock on the secure side of card reader controlled doors to allow exit through the door when in the locked mode. Activation of the sensor shall release the door strike mechanism and shunt the door position switch. b. Panic device hardware provided identified in Section 08710 of these specifications. Contractor to coordinate installation requirements. 11. Card Reader Unit a. The card reader shall be HID iCIass Series Keypad/Proximity Technology or approved equal, and shall read encoded data from access cards and transmit the data to the RIM. b. An LED on the face of the reader shall differentiate between authorized and unauthorized reader uses. c. An LED on the face of the read head shall indicate authorized and unauthorized reader uses. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-12 d. The read head shall provide for communication between the remote electronics unit and the card. The read head shall mount directly to a metal surface. f. Wall-mounted read heads shall be no larger than 4.80" H X 3.30" W X 0.9" D, and shall mount directly to a standard single gang electrical box. The read range of the read head shall be up to 2". g. Mullion card reader unit read heads shall be no larger than 4.80" H X 3.30" W X 0.9" D. The read range of the read head shall be up to 2". h. The driveway entrance pedestal read head shall be no larger than 12" H X 12" W X 1.25" D. The read range of the read head shall be up to 18". Dual heads shall be provided at driveway entrances, one at passenger vehicle height and the other at fire truck driver window height. i. The entry gate shall be provided with a access control system providing remote opening. Contractor to coordinate the required interface between the read head and the DACS System. j. The wall, door frame and mullion mounted card readers shall be: HID iCIass Model RK40 Keypad Reader 6130, or approved equal. k. The parking pedestal card reader shall be an HID iCIass R90 Long Range Reader standard unidirectional reader or approved equal. I. The Contractor shall provide a common ground wire from the proximity reader head through the remote electronics unit and power supply to the reader interface module to an isolated ground point from each card reader. The ground point shall be a grounding rod or the telephone equipment ground if available. The electrical service ground shall not be used. 12. Access Card : Proximity Type a. The access card shall be Electrostatic Proximity Technology. b. The access card shall have only a hot stamp card number visible on the card. c. The access card shall not indicate the Contractor name or logo. d. The access card shall accommodate photo identification packets. e. 100 access cards and photo identification packets shall be provided. f. The access card shall be an HID iCIass 2K ID Badge Proximity cards or approved equal. 13. Card Reader and Remote Electronics Unit Power Supply a. The proximity card reader and remote electronics unit power supply shall be a regulated linear DC power supply that supplies +12 VDC @ 170 mA. The power supply shall have a series pass transistor on the output side of the regulator to prevent noise and cross-talk to the reader. b. The proximity card reader and remote electronics unit power supply shall be per manufacturer's recommendation for system. 14. Card Reader Keypad Unit The card reader/keypad unit shall consist of a card reader and a 12-button keypad mounted as one unit. The card reader shall read encoded data from access cards. The keypad shall transmit the user's PIN number to the WIM. 15. Card Reader Pedestal The entry gate card reader pedestal and access control unit shall be as described in Specification Section 02835 and shown within the contract drawings. Contractor to coordinate installation. 16. Electronic Locking Mechanism Power Supply a. The electric locking mechanism power supply shall consist of a UL listed transformer with 120 VAC input and regulated and filtered 24 VDC output. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-13 The power supply shall have individual fused outputs to each lock. Refer to Door Hardware Section 08710. b. Security System vendor shall provide power supply to noted doors via central transformer located in Tele/Data Room #107. 17. Door Release Bypass Pushbutton a. The door release/optical turnstile bypass push- button shall consist of a momentary pushbutton and a SPOT switch rated for 6A @ 125VAC in a surface-mount enclosure designed for mounting in the knee space of a desk. Refer to Schedule of Card Reader Locations, paragraph 3.05 of this section. 18. Time Delay a. The time delay relay shall meet the following minimum specifications: 1) Input: One normally open input to activate time delay relay 2) Output: One normally closed time delay relay output contact for lock, and one normally open time delay relay output contact for alarm shunt 3) Time Delay: Adjustable 1 to 30 seconds 2.03 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV) A Basis of Design: The selected manufacturer and system selected for the Closed Circuit Television System shall be as specified herein. Substitutions shall not be considered. 1. Manufacturer: Pelco 2. Model No. Refer to specified products herein. B Functional Specifications 1. The systems described in this section will consist of a CCTV system used for surveillance of the entire site and key door security. Systems will terminate in the same rooms as DACS to be determined 2. The building security system will consist of both indoor and outdoor PTZ CCTV cameras that will be located at strategic positions inside and outside the buildings for observation of entrances and parking areas and key interior locations. 3. The interior CCTV cameras shall be high color models. The exterior cameras shall be high resolution color models. 4. The outdoor cameras shall be enclosed in weatherproof dome housings or suitable brackets. The interior cameras can be either on open brackets or also located in small domes in the case of ceiling mount locations. 5. The PTZ camera controls shall be accessed from all control positions through the network connected terminals. Any position with CCTV controls shall be accessible through password-protected format. 6. A matrix switcher shall allow the connection of the video from any camera. Monitors to be located in the designated room by Owner 7. The digital switcher shall connect appropriate video to a designated monitor when a video-monitored door produces an alarm or door-prop indication. 8. A digital video recorder shall be furnished which shall record all cameras in a sequential mode. The recorder shall use hard disk storage for immediate recording and playback. It shall use DVD archiving for permanent storage of the video. The recorder shall feature event or motion-triggered recording either by Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-14 alarms of the operators choice or activity or by input signals from access-control devices. 9. All user programming shall be accomplished via network access to the open architecture security integration system Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-15 C Technical Specifications 1. Camera Equipment a. Environment: Each unit shall be capable of operating without degradation over a temperature range of -20 to +60 degrees C. All cameras shall be weather-resistant dome type and able to withstand a blow from a 10-pound sledgehammer. b. Fixed Cameras: The indoor and outdoor fixed security cameras shall be equipped with vari-focal 4-8mm auto iris lens and shall additionally be compatible with snap on quick change lens options ranging from 2.9mm~16.mm. The main power board and camera assembly shall be easily removed/replaced via snap-in assembly. The cameras shall be 1/3" ccd, DSP, resolution shall be 540 TVL, with 50dB S/N ratio. c. PTZ: The outdoor PTZ cameras shall be the fully enclosed, weather-resistant dome type. The cameras shall be 1/3" ccd, DSP, resolution shall be 540 TVL, with 50dB S/N ratio. A minimum of 100 preset positions shall available. Pan and tilt speed shall be 300 degrees per second or higher. The PTZ dome shall include a zoom lens providing a total minimum zoom of 18X - 128X (Digital: 1x-8x and Optical: 16x - 128x). d. Image Burn: The image device shall be inherently resistant to image burn. e. Blooming: The bright spots and light shall not cause an excessive blooming effect on the display. f. Image Retention: Image retention shall be reduced to less than 10 percent per second during scene changes. g. Camera Resolution: The camera shall be capable of a resolution of 540 TVL or better at the center of the picture, and at least 400 lines within 1/10 of the edge of the frame on all sides. h. Camera Power: The power required by the cameras shall be furnished either through the coaxial cable or on a separate low voltage cable pulled in the same conduit as the video cable provided and installed by system vendor. 2. Monitors a. Contractor shall provide one (1) monitor within Range Control Room #118. Standard NTSC 1.0 v p-p video shall be provided from the matrix switcher. b. Monitor. Monitor size to be 24" measured diagonally and shall have sufficient high-voltage current capacity to produce a high-contrast picture without significant blooming or fading when operating in ambient light levels of 50 foot candles or more 3. Matrix Switcher a. General: A video matrix switcher shall be provided. The equipment shall be configured to mount in a standard EIA 19-inch panel. The operator control unit shall have the capability of automatically selecting, multiplexing, or sequencing selected cameras to one or more video monitors. a. Video Selection System: The video selection system shall be a remotely- controlled, microprocessor-based, matrix-type switcher. It shall allow an operator to select and view any operational video camera on a preselected local monitor. It shall also allow for remote camera operation, for those devices having zoom, pan, and tilt capability. The equipment shall be a Pelco 6800 Series switch platform for camera integration, combined with the digital video recorder or equal. b. The switcher shall be capable of 32 NTSC camera inputs, and five programmable analog video monitor outputs. It shall have a minimum of 24 alarm inputs. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-16 c. The switcher shall have a network interface card built-in. 4. Digital Video Recorder a. A digital video recorder shall be provided to continuously record video from the cameras, as selected by the matrix frame switcher. b. Video Recorder: The video recorder shall be a self-contained unit, a Pelco 8000 Series DVR Platform or equivalent. It shall be capable of 60 images per second per single camera input. c. Recording medium: Internal hard drive. Capable of thirty (30) days recording normal capabilities at default settings of 1 image per second per camera at minimum 15K files size for resolution, based upon medium to high activity levels. d. Recording shall be high-resolution wavelet compression e. Video Input: 0.5-2.0 V p-p,75 ohm, BNC connector f. Video Output: 1.0 V p-p 75 ohm BNC connector 5. Accessories and Hardware: a. General: The Contractor is to supply and install all cable, mounts, and hardware necessary to implement and operate the CCTV system. b. Housings: Suitable dome type weatherproof housings and mounts shall be provided for the outdoor cameras which will accommodate the pan, tilt, and zoom features. Wall mounts or ceiling mounts shall be provided for cameras in indoor locations. 2.04 BUILDING SECURITY SYSTEM INTEGRATION A. Functional Description 1. Contractor shall provide the necessary software and hardware to functionally integrate the DACS, CCTV systems. Combining of these functions shall be performed by an Open Architecture Security Integration System 2. Integration system shall use a software system contained on an existing local computer/server provided by the owner. An acceptable system which performs this function is the Integral Technologies Inc. Oasis Integration Software. Equivalent systems will be considered under Substitutions Section 01300. 3. System shall provide full on-screen control of cameras, DVR, doors, entry gate, pedestrian gate and relay functions. 4. System shall provide real-time status of each device on the system, on each workstation including doors, alarms, intercoms, lights, etc. 5. Security integration system shall log security system events and operator activities, including a "memo log" feature. Log to be stored on central server. 6. System Contractor shall include providing all required ethernet wiring between Security computer/server and the remote camera locations. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS A. General: The Contractor shall supply the necessary labor, cable, connectors, and other materials to install the cameras, monitors, housings, video recorder, the matrix switcher, card readers, door switches, DACS computer and other needed devices. The locations of cameras and associated conduits are indicated on the drawings and Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-17 specified herein.. Each bidder is cautioned to carefully examine the existing facility, project plans and specifications to properly plan and scope the shown installation. B. Installation: The installation of the building CCTV and DACS system shall be in accordance with current industry standards. All wiring, terminal blocks and the like shall be high-quality and subject to inspection and approval by the City of Carlsbad. C. Equipment: At the time of submittal, the Contractor shall furnish a complete and accurate listing of all major items to be used in assembling the system, including each item of equipment listed under this Specification. Contractor block diagrams shall indicate the proposed interconnection of all equipment to be furnished. A detailed listing of any proposed deviations from this Specification shall be included. Substitute standard equipment necessary to meet the Specifications shall be explained fully and must be accompanied by schematic diagrams. D. Mounting: All equipment shall be rigidly mounted including cameras, monitors, and cables. Fastenings and supports shall be adequate to support their loads with a safety factor of at least three. All switches, connectors, and outlets shall be clearly, logically, and permanently marked during installation. E. Precautions: 1. The Contractor must take such precautions as are necessary: a) to guard against electromagnetic and electrostatic hum b) to supply adequate ventilation c) to install the equipment so as to provide maximum safety to the person who will operate it. 2. Care shall be exercised in wiring so as to avoid damage to the cables and to the equipment. All joints and connections shall either be made with rosin-core solder or with mechanical connectors reviewed and approved by the Project Manager. All wiring shall be executed in strict adherence to standard broadcast practices. F. CCTV, DACS and Intercom Equipment Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with all applicable building and electrical codes. 3.02 IMPLEMENTATION PLAN A This plan should include equipment layouts, drawings, and detailed installation documentation. This plan will be reviewed by the architect and CITY OF CARLSBAD representative. The implementation plan must be approved prior to system installation. 3.03 DOCUMENTATION A. All equipment and installation must be fully documented. Drawings, descriptions, or schematics of any special strapping or modifications shall be provided in addition to manuals provided by the equipment manufacturer. Cables terminated on connection blocks shall be recorded to provide a record for future servicing. Documentation shall be in 3-ring binders to provide a complete as-built record. Three copies of equipment manuals and of the as-built documentation must be provided not later than 30 days after acceptance. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-18 3.04 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. System Test Procedure The Contractor shall prepare and deliver a detailed system test procedure at least two weeks prior to the start of the system installation. The architect shall review the test procedure, which may contain mutually concurred modifications as required. B. Correction and Documentation: In the event that problems are encountered during acceptance testing, those items failing to meet specifications shall be noted as well as the corrective action taken. The system will be accepted only after all required corrections are made. C. Witnessing of Tests: All acceptance test should be performed in presence of the architect and/or the Project Manager. The Project Manager may, at its option, waive witnessing certain acceptance tests or may spot-check units already installed. In these cases, the written test records must still be provided. D. Faulty Workmanship: Acceptance of the system shall not release the Contractor from liability for faulty workmanship or defects that may appear after the final payment has been made. E. Visual Inspection: In addition to functional testing, all elements of the system shall be subject to a thorough visual inspection by the architect and/or Project Manager's representative. These inspections shall include, but not be limited to, the items listed below: 1. General workmanship 2. Neatness of wiring and cable routing 3. Identification of cables and punch blocks 4. Overall system documentation Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-19 3.05 SCHEDULE OF CARD READER LOCATIONS A.The following table is a list of doors which shall be provide with card reader access hardware. Contractor shall refer to plans for door locations. Bldg Site Site Site S S S S S S S S S S S S S c R - , .• Room Name Vehicle Gate (Pedestal High) Vehicle Gate (Pedestal Low) Pedestrian Gate ^^^^^^^^^^fe^^^^^^^&^il^^^^ Lobby/Entry Lobby/Entry Hallway General Storage Armory/Secured Weapons Storage Armory/Secured Weapons Storage Tele/Data Range Control Room Range Control Room Hallway Vestibule Ready Area Fire Training Storage -' ;F>V;'"-'' Control Room• -;",-,-' . . • Smoke & Prop Equip Room -..-.- " " Room Number 101 101 113 104 106 106 107 118 118 121 124 130 129 106 1 104 Door # 01 02 04 07 08 09 10 22 23 26 30 32 37 05 05 Room* Card Side West West East Exterior Exterior 101 127 104 116 112 116 121 Exterior Exterior Exterior Exterior Exterior• • .- • . •• -. Exterior Room* Secure Side East East West 101 101 113 104 106 106 107 118 118 121 124 130 129 106 " 'a _ * - * 104 .. - Exit Ground Loop Ground Loop Latch ^^^^^^^^^^^^^ Panic Panic Latch Latch Latch Latch Latch Latch Latch Panic Panic Latch Latch Latch Latch Remote Release Yes1 Yes1 No No Yes2" No No No No No No No No No No No „ No B. Notes: 1. Remote access via telephone entry control system. Refer to specification section 02835 for additional information. 2. Remote door release via push button release located in Range Master's Office #105. The following table is a list of exterior perimeter doors of Building "C" which shall be provided with door contact switches which shall be interconnected to the access control system. Contractor shall refer to plans for door locations. 01 39 02 42 12 50 26 27 28 30 33 35 37 Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Specifications Campus Security System 16725-20 Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-21 3.06 SCHEDULE OF CCTV CAMERA LOCATIONS A. The following table is a list of CCTV camera locations. Contractor shall refer to plans for door locations. Bldg Site Site Site S S S ^ S S S S S Location Exterior (Facing West to Gate) Exterior (Facing East to Tower) Exterior (Facing North to Gate Lobby/Entry (Southwest Corner) Check-In Gathering Space , (Northeast Corner)) South Exterior Alcove (Northeast Corner) Ready Area (Northwest Corner) Ready Area (Southwest Corner) 25-Yard Range (Mount at 10-Yard Line) 25-Yard Range (Mount at 10-Yard Line) 100-Yard Range (Mount at 10-Yard Line) Drawing Reference A-C-5.1 A-1.1 A-1.1 A-S-3.1 A-S-3.1 A-S-3.1 A-S-3.1 A-S-3.1 A-S-3.1 A-S-3.1 A-S-3.1 Room# Tower 5tn Floor Level 101 116 130 131 130 130 131 Camera Type PTZ PTZ PTZ *i. *yf &fo~. PTZ PTZ PTZ PTZ PTZ PTZ PTZ PTZ Activation Door* Vehicle Entry Gate Pedestrian Entry Gate 01 &02 09 26&30 32&39 All Lanes All Lanes All Lanes Mount Tower Canopy Exterior Wall Exterior Wall Interior Ceiling Interior Ceiling Exterior Ceiling Interior Ceiling Interior Ceiling Interior Ceiling Interior Ceiling Interior Ceiling END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Specifications Campus Security System 16725-22 SECTION 16750 DATA/COMMUNICATION CABLING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 General Requirement A. Tenderers shall propose and submit a comprehensive Structured Cabling Solution to define the telecommunications infrastructure (patch panels, frames, patch cords, cables, faceplates and outlets) necessary to build a uniform premises distribution system, which will function for a multi-media communications solution to support up to lOOOMbps (1GBE) and to provide a 20 year warranted system. B. A Structured Cabling Solution that uses Category 6 components and Optical Fibre backbone shall be capable of providing 1 Gigabit Ethernet operation using full duplex transmission. The solution should define the method(s) of flexible patching for the telecommunications services to enable simple Moves, Adds & Changes, (MAC's) without frequent rewiring of locations. 1.02 Conformity to Standard A. The latest versions of the following standards are to be complied with unless otherwise specified: 1. AS/ACIF S008 Requirements for Authorized Cabling Products 2. AS/ACIF S009 Installation Requirements for Customer Cabling (Wiring Rules) 3. AS/NZS 3000 SAA Electrical Wiring Rules 4. AS/NZS 3080 Integrated Telecommunications Cabling for Commercial Premises 5. AS/NZS 3084 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 6. AS/NZS 3085.1 Administration of Communications Cabling Systems - Basic Requirements 7. AS/NZS 4117 Surge Protective Devices for Telecommunication Applications 8. AS/NZS ISO/I EC 15018 (Replaces AS/NZS 3086 SOHO Cabling) Generic Cabling for Homes 9. AS/NZS IEC 61935.1 Testing of Balanced Communications Cabling In Accordance with ISO/I EC 11801 - Part 1 10. ISO 11801 Ed 2 (Alternate reference only) Information Technology - Generic Cabling for Customer Premises 11. TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1 (Alternate reference only) Transmission Performance Specification for 4 Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cabling 12. TIA 568-B.2-10 (Draft 10GBE reference document) Information Technology - Augmented Category 6 Cabling Class E Tender Spec ADC KRONE 061201.doc Page 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Structured Cabling System (SCS) A. All ADC KRONE products supplied under this tender shall be genuine ADC or KRONE products. There shall be no unapproved or falsely claimed "Krone Compatible" or "Krone Alternative" products. B. The communications channel shall be capable of supporting 1GBE (1000BASE-T) Ethernet. All copper products in the communications channel shall be capable of supporting the provision of power to the Data Terminal Equipment via the electrically conductive Media Dependant Interfaces as specified in the latest IEEE 802.3af "Power over Ethernet" standard. All IDC connectors shall be KRONE IDC technology for all systems and subsystems. 2.02 Work Area System A. Tenderers shall supply and install the wiring or interconnections that connect active terminal devices to the telecommunication outlets. This includes patch cords, connectors, faceplates, as well as the work area patch cords (terminal fly leads) needed to make connections. B. The faceplates offered shall have the following; For Cat 6: 1. A choice of 4 outlets. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Data/Communication Cabling System Specifications 16750 -1 2. Options for vertical style or horizontal mounting style. 3. 4 port angled faceplates on perimeter trunking or surface skirting ducts. 4. A clear label application of circuit identification. C. Telecommunication Outlets (TO): 1. All copper telecommunication outlets supplied by the tenderer shall be ADC KRONE modular 8-position / 8-contact outlets, accepting standard modular RJ45 plugs. 2. The TO shall be: a. Capable of receiving 0.4 to 0.64mm diameter solid wires into insulation displacement contacts. b. Surface or flush mounted, single or dual sockets as specified in the drawings. c. Should have the ability to accept a dust cap to prevent dust and dirt getting into the socket. d. Underwriter Laboratories (UL) listed, and comply with CFR47 Part 68.500. e. Made from high-impact, flame-retardant, UL94 -VO rated thermoplastic material. f. Meet or exceed AS/NZS 3080:2003 Category 6 component requirements. 3. The TO shall provide Near End Crosstalk (NEXT) performance of: >54dB @ 100MHz, and >46dB @ 250MHz for Cat 6. 4. The Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) wiring termination shall have a minimum of 2 mechanical forces applied to the wire to provide a reliable and stress-free resistant connection. 5. The IDC termination must be have a 450 angled configuration when connecting with the cable conductor to reduce the effect of metal fatigue. 6. The IDC contact element shall be special spring brass with silver plating to increase conductivity, angularly arranged across the axis of conducting wire to maximize the gas tight connection. The contact range shall be 5um silver-plated to ensure minimum oxidization impact. 7. The socket offered shall be marked to conform to the T568A wiring scheme in AS/NZS 3080, as a minimum Class E Tender Spec ADC KRONE 061201.doc Page 6 8. The telecommunication outlet shall meet the following electrical performances; a. RJ Interface resistance: 20 mQ b. Insulation resistance >100 MQ at 500 Vdc. c. Contact resistance of 20 mQ maximum. (1mQ typical) d. Current rating of S2A at 20°C 9. The telecommunication outlet shall meet the following mechanical performance: a. Insertion life of Level B reliability to 60603-7 b. Plug/Jack contact force: > 100g minimum per contact using a FCC- approved plug. c. Plug retention force: 133 N minimum. d. Temperature range: -20°C to +75°C D. Work Area Patch Cord: The Cat 6 work area patch cords shall be factory terminated with color options and with length options of 1.2, 2.1, 3.0, 4.5, 7.5, and 15 metres. E. Horizontal Cable System. 2.03 Category 6 Cabling For 1 Gigabit Ethernet A. Tenderer shall supply ADC KRONE Category 6 horizontal 4 pair solid cable to connect each telecommunication outlet (TO) or consolidation point (CP) to the floor distributor (FD). The type of horizontal cables used shall be 4-pair 100Q high performance unshielded twisted pair (DTP) cable for Cat 6 applications. B. The DTP cable shall be of nominal 0.5 mm diameter bare solid copper conductors insulated with high-density insulation and a PVC sheath. The insulated conductors shall be twisted into pairs, with pairs balanced for maximum performance and noise reduction. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Data/Communication Cabling System Specifications 16750-2 C. The 4-pair UTP cable shall be run using a star topology format from the cross-connect at the floor distributor (FD) on each floor to every individual telecommunication outlet. D. The 4-pair UTP cable must exceed AS/NZS 3080:2003 Category 6 requirements. It must be tested to Class E to ensure performance for any application up to and including 1000 Mbps from the floor distributor (FD) to the telecommunications outlet (TO) at the work area. E. All horizontal UTP cable must meet requirement specified for current applications such as IEEE 802.3, 10/100/1000 BASE T; IEEE 802.5, 4/16/100Mbps; ATM Forum 52/155/622/1200 Mbps, 1 Gigabit Networking. F. Each run of cable from the cross-connect at the floor distributor (FD) to the telecommunication outlet (TO) shall be continuous without any joints or splices. Consolidation points (CP) are permitted provided Class E channel performance is maintained. G. The length of each individual run of fixed horizontal cable from the floor distributor (FD) to the telecommunication outlet (TO) shall be based on the distance set out in the tables and formulas in AS/NZS 3080:2003 plus the appropriate length de-rating for maximum ambient temperatures above 20°C. Installed lengths may differ from the designed lengths as long as they pass testing. H. The 4-pair UTP cable should be Underwriter Laboratories (UL) listed as type CM or CMR. The 4-pair UTP cable shall meet or exceed the following AS/NZS 3080:2003 requirements specifications for cable: 1. Conductor DC Resistance (Max): 9.38 Q/100m @ 20°C 2. DC Resistance Unbalance (Max) 5% 3. Insulation Resistance (Min): 5000 MQ /1 km @ 20°C 4. Mutual Capacitance (Typical): 5.6 nF/100m 5. Class E Tender Spec ADC KRONE 061201.doc Page 7 6. Characteristics impedance: 100Q 7. Worst Case Cable Skew: 45 nsec/100 Metres 2.04 Equipment Room & Telecommunications Room Cable Terminations A. The size, location and provisioning of services and facilities in the Equipment and Telecommunications Rooms (ER and TR) should be in accordance with AS/NZS 3084. B. For copper voice circuits, the tenderer shall supply ADC KRONE High Band 10-pair disconnect modules to terminate the incoming Service Provider cables, the outgoing Service Provider cables to the PABX, and the PABX Extension lines/cables. The mounting system shall be earthed as described later. These modules shall have the ability to accept over-voltage or surge protection devices, if required. C. The Equipment Room (ER) and Telecommunications Room (TR) shall contain black ADC or equivalent 19" Lab Rack units 44 RU in height, fitted with ADC glide cable management bays for vertical cable and patch cord management. All internal horizontal and/or backbone copper cables shall be terminated on rack mounted patch panels, or wall mounted Profile rods or back mount frames to suit either 8 or 25 pair ADC KRONE modules. The ER or TR must also house the rack mounted or wall mounted fiber termination units for termination of optical fiber cable as defined in the drawings. D. Patch cords shall be provided when patching of voice and/or data circuits is required at the cross-connections to facilitate Moves, Adds and Changes (MAC's). The patch cords supplied shall be able to support the designed application, like 1GBE applications. E. Lighting intensity on the front and back of installed terminations, patch panels and equipment should be 500 lux at 1m above floor to meet AS/NZS 3084 requirements. 2.05 Racks and Cable Management A. Tenderer shall utilize glide 19" racks, 44 RU high (product number 6460 1 141-00) for cable termination panels and for equipment mounting as appropriate. Locked cabinets may be used if additional security is warranted. B. Vertical cable and patch cord management on the 19" rack shall be by attaching either a glide 150mm front only cable manager (product number ADCCMVIBS06F-2), or(a 200mm (product number ADCCMS-08) or 250mm (product number ADCCMS-10) front & Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Data/Communication Cabling System Specifications 16750 - 3 rear cable manager. Hinged covers matching the vertical cable management shall be fitted to hide and protect the cables and patch cords. C. Horizontal cable and patch cord management between patch panels or equipment on the 19" glide cable management racks shall be 2 RU glide horizontal cable managers with front hinged-down cover (product number ADCCMHIB-2U). Horizontal cable and patch cord management at the top, middle or bottom of the 19" rack shall be either 2 RU or 4 RU horizontal crossover troughs. D. Fiber cable and fiber patch cord management shall be the ADC Fiber Guide tray and channel system that utilizes yellow plastic extrusions in 50mm, 75mm or 100mm wide troughs and molded interconnection fittings. Trough exits shall utilize downspout fittings to maintain the minimum bending radius of the cables and cords. 2.06 Cross-Connect System A. Tenderer shall utilize Patch By Exception for copper cross-connection of termination modules at the backbone and/or horizontal cross-connect. The cross-connect system inside Telecommunications Rooms (TR) shall consist of 2 modules per horizontal cable run. B. On Module 1, 4-pair positions shall be connected from the top of the module to the network equipment by a System Tail with the RJ45 plug at the equipment end. Class E Tender Spec ADC KRONE 061201.doc Page 8 C. On Module 2, 4-pair positions shall be connected at the top of the module to the horizontal cabling from the TO. The hard-wired jumper cable shall consist of 4-pair solid cable with sheath (the same cable as the horizontal 4-pair cable), and this will connect from the 4-pair positions on the bottom of Module 1 to the 4-pair positions on the bottom of Module 2. D. On 8-pair Profile-mounted modules, where possible, the solid jumpering shall all be laid to the left of the Profile modules to facilitate future hinging of the module on that side. E. The cross-connect terminations on Category 6 components shall be either; 1. ADC KRONE RJ45 Cat 6 patch panels for incoming voice and/or data services uptolGBE. 2. Cross-connect jumper cable shall be Cat 6 of any suitable length, with sheath, terminated on the bottom of the module on the A-side to the bottom of the module on the B-side. F. Tenderer shall supply appropriate patch cords with factory-assembled plug-ends for mating with the termination modules. These patch cords are to be used as the "Exception" patching facility during temporary Moves, Adds and Changes. G. Restoration of the original hard-wired jumper arrangement shall be by the removal of the "Exception" patch cords. H. When the temporary "Exception" patching arrangements are to be made permanent, the appropriate modules shall be hard-wired using solid 4-pair fully sheathed cable, and the"Exception" patch cords shall be removed and stored for future use. The type of patch cords shall match the termination modules used. 2.07 Termination Module A. The termination module shall be able to accommodate over 200 repeated wire insertions without incurring permanent deformation. For up to Cat 6 performance, the termination module shall be an ADC KRONE Cat 6 UltimS disconnection module to allow test cords to isolate the cabling system for testing purposes. B. For all modules, the termination shall be able to accommodate 0.4 - 0.64 mm diameter solid copper conductors and 7/0.2 - 7/0.32 multi-wire stranded conductors. C. The IDC contact element shall be set at 45o and made from special spring brass with silver plating. The wire contact area shall have 5 urn of silver-plating to ensure maximum reliability. All components that are to be connected to a carrier's network must comply with the A-Tick requirements in accordance with the Telecommunications Labeling Notice. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Data/Communication Cabling System Specifications 16750-4 2.08 Copper Patch Panels, Rack and Cabinet-Mounted A. The modular outlet patch panel shall be a ADC KRONE Cat 6 panel with 8 pin modular sockets having a worst pair NEXT loss values for the outlet of >54dB at 100MHz and >46dB at 250MHz. B. The patch panel shall be available in 16 or 24 port configurations in one rack unit height or 48 ports in two-rack unit height and shall fit into a 19" rack. Rear cable management shall be a Class E Tender Spec ADC KRONE 061201.doc Page 9 ADC KRONE cable manager either steel or plastic (MasterMinder) to occupy the same height as the 1 RU patch panel. C. The contact plating of the modular jacks shall have a minimum thickness of 1.3um of hard gold in accordance with FCC CFR47 Part 68.5, over a minimum thickness of 2.0um of nickel. The modular patch panel will have a plug insertion life of Level B reliability to IEC 60603-7. D. ADC KRONE Patch Cord Minders shall be fitted so that there is one patch cord minder for every 2 x flat patch panels. The front and/or rear vertical rails of the cabinet shall be set back sufficiently to accommodate the patch cord minders. E. When angled patch panels are used, the installation of patch cord minders is not mandated. However, the rack and/or cabinet must have sufficient space on the sides at the front to provide adequate room and support to contain the patch cords and their minimum bending radius. 2.09 Optical Fiber Termination Unit, Rack and Cabinet-Mount A. The ADC KRONE 19" rack mount fiber termination unit shall provide cross-connect, interconnect or splicing capabilities. B. The 19" rack mount fiber termination unit shall consist of a frame mountable housing for terminating and/or splicing fiber optic cables and allow for organization of the fiber optic interconnects. The assembly shall have rear openings for cable entry, with posts to accept strain relief terminations and with fiber storage guide facilities for maintaining bend radius. C. The 19" rack-mounting unit should be either 12 or 24 ports for one rack unit (1RU) and can be either a fixed position unit or have a slide or swing tray to improve access. D. The adaptor plates shall be suitable for SC simplex, SC duplex LC duplex or ST couplings, and the adaptor plates should be installed to angle the through adaptors to the left or to the right of the panel to improve the patch cord management and provide eye safety due to accidental exposure to active fibers. E. Connectors on all single-mode fibers (SMF) shall be fusion spliced on site. Connectors on all multimode fibers (MMF) should be fusion spliced on site for optimum performance. 2.10 Pre-Terminated Optical Fiber A. Where optical fiber cabling is specified on the drawings, consideration should be to the use of Pre-Terminated Optical Fiber (PTOF) cable to minimize installation time. B. The cable shall be preterminated with the appropriate style of connector to suit the requirements (like SC or LC style). The length of the PTOF shall be measured from FOBOT to FOBOT (Fiber Optic Break Out Tray) and there shall be an additional 650 mm minimum breakout length of fibers, located in each FOBOT, for direct connection into adaptors. 2.11 Patch Cords and System Leads A. Tenderer shall supply ADC KRONE Cat 6 patch cords and copper System Leads for cross-connection and/or inter-connection of termination modules, patch panels and network equipment. B. The type of patch cords and system leads shall match the termination module used, ie 8- pair UltimS modules, 25-pair Cat 6 modules or Cat 6 RJ45 patch panel. C. All Cat 6 patch cords shall be factory terminated 4-pair DTP cable with lengths of 1.2, 2.1, 3.0, 4.5, 7.5, and 15 metres. D. System Leads shall be supplied and installed to connect the network equipment to the cross-connect or interconnect modules. The system leads shall have 4-pair conductors with length and construction (stranded or solid) suited to the installation. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Data/Communication Cabling System S pacifications 16750 - 5 E. Class E Tender Spec ADC KRONE 061201.doc Page 10 System Leads shall have an RJ45 plug on each end and shall be "cut in half on site to achieve the desired lengths from network equipment to cross-connect module. Each System Lead will produce two (2) System Tails (RJ45 plug one end to IDC termination other end). F. The ADC KRONE Fiber Patch Cords shall; 1. Consist of one or two single, tight buffered, multimode graded-index fibers with a 62.5 or 50 micron core or singlemode 9 micron core with 125 micron cladding to suit the installed OM1, OM3, or OS1 fiber optic cabling. 2. Be used for optical fiber cross-connects and interconnects. 3. Have the fiber cladding covered by Kevlar fibers and a protective outer jacket. 4. Be factory terminated with SC, ST or LC ceramic connectors at each end. 5. Meet the following specifications: a. Minimum bend radius: 25 mm b. Operating temperature: -40 to +75° C c. Loss: 0.75 dB per mated pair of connectors d. Return Loss Maximum: -45Db e. Cable OD: 3 mm f. Tip material: Ceramic 2.12 Backbone System A. The backbone system shall include UTP 4-pair copper cable for voice and 4-pair Cat 6 copper UTP and fibre optic cable for high-speed data networking in the intra-building wiring. Tie cables between floor distributors may be Cat 6 UTP cable, if less than 90 m long. B. The backbone cables shall be run in a star topology, terminated in the Equipment Room (ER) or Building Distributor (BD) at one end, and in a Floor Distributor (FD) at the other end. 1. The UTP Copper Cables: a. Shall be marked CM or CMR b. Shall consist of 0.5 mm diameter, twisted pair copper conductor marked CM or CMR. c. The UTP multi-pair cable shall meet the requirements of AS/NZS 3080:2003 and AS/ACIF S008 2. The Optical Fiber Cables: a. The multi-core optical fiber cable shall consist of multimode or singlemode fiber, color-coded for identification for multi-core fiber optic cable. b. Consideration should be given to the use of Pre Terminated Optical Fiber cable for faster and easier installation. c. The fiber cables shall meet the following transmission specification: - where, OFL = Overfilled Launch Bandwidth, RML = Restricted Mode Launch OM1 Specification 62.5/125 urn Fibre 1) Sheath color Orange (if available), or black 2) Maximum fibre loss: 3.5 dB/km at 850 nm 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm 3) Minimum bandwidth: 200 MHz.km at 850 nm 500 MHz.km at 1300 nm 4) Numerical aperture: 0.275 5) Max length of GBE 300 m at 850 nm 6) Max length for GBE 550m at 1300 nm 2.13 Overload Protection A. The tenderer shall make provision to supply ADC KRONE overvoltage protection to all incoming lines from the Service Provider and to all above ground and underground lines between buildings in campus wiring design. The provision for overvoltage protection includes installation of correct earthling least 6 mm2 to the mounting frames and racks. The installation of the arrestor magazines shall be as agreed with the system designer and in any installation in the region of and above the Tropic of Capricorn and in Western Australia this is considered a requirement.Tenderer shall supply ADC KRONE Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Data/Communication Cabling System Specifications 16750-6 overvoltage magazines complete with 230 volts fail-safe overvoltage arresters for all incoming copper pairs to protect the incoming Service Providerlines and any outside plant multi-pair copper cables against any overvoltage surge and minimize the damage that may be caused by lightning. For lightning and overvoltage protection tenderer shall supply ADC KRONE ComProtectmaintenance-free 5-point solid state surge protection devices for voice applications and data applications up to and including 16Mbps. 2.14 System Performance A. Channel performance is the preferred acceptance criteria for all installations if possible. All Permanent Links are to be installed and all end-user patch cords, equipment cords and work area cords are to be in place, and left in the position where they were tested. Where this is not practical, the Permanent Link performance will be the acceptance criteria for the installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation Staff and Experience A. The successful tenderer shall supply a list of names of installation staff and their ADC KRONE Master Installers certificate number. All certificate numbers must start with the letter 'C' signifying Competency to be a valid certificate. This requirement does not apply to apprentices or trainees under the full-time supervision of an ADC KRONE Master Installer. Certificate numbers starting with the letter 'A' signifying Attendance are not valid as ADC KRONE Master Installers.Tenderer shall state when each staff was last trained by formal ADC KRONE Master Installer training.Tenderer shall provide a list of their technical support staff listing their working experience in the relevant field. Class E Tender Spec ADC KRONE 061201.doc Page 14Tenderer shall state the nearest location of their principal support centre. This centre shall have permanently stationed support staff that is capable of providing technical support effectively and efficiently. 3.02 Application Assurance and Warranty A. Tenderer shall provide at least a 20 year Warranty for Class E Channel performance of the Cat 6Channel Solutions backed by ADC KRONE'S 20 years warranty from the date of successful completion of testing and commissioning of the Structured Cabling System. The 20 year application assurance shall cover the failure of the offered cabling system to operate the applications that the system was initially designed to support, ie those identified in the current (at the time of tendering) versions of the Cabling Performance Specifications (that is the AS/NZS 3080, ISO11801 or TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1). 3.03 Compliance Tests A. The installer must individually test 100% of the DTP cables and fibre optic cables after installation of the cables to determine compliance to AS/NZS 3080 performance requirements. Where ever possible, progressive testing of both fibre and copper Permanent Links or Channels is recommended to ensure errors or unacceptable installation practices are minimized on the site. All test results, including Passes, 'Star- Passes' and Failures, shall be kept by the installer prior to customer acceptance of the site. At customer acceptance, the final test results shall be given to the end user for retention during the period of the warranty. ADC KRONE does not accept cable runs with failures as part of the normal Warranted installation. Prior to acceptance by the customer, all compliance test results shall be made available to ADC KRONE staff on request to verify Pass results and discuss failures and 'Star-Passes'. Any rectification work and re-testing of cable runs containing failures or 'Star-Passes' shall be at the installer's expense. B. Class E Performance Testing on Cat 6 Installations. The Structured Cabling System shall be tested by the installer for compliance to the requirements specified in the latest AS/NZS 3080 standard for Class E performance using Level 3 testers in accordance with AS/NZS I EC 61935.1 - Testing. A certain percentage of the outlets may be chosen at random for the final acceptance testing by the end-user or in their absence, by ADC KRONE. The design data and the full results of all compliance tests performed by the installer are to be fully documented and submitted to end-user to hold for the period of the warranty. The results must include 100% of total installation and provide full electronic data files for each cable run indicating the name of the person doing the Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Data/Communication Cabling System Specifications 16750 - 7 testing, date, building, cable identification, cable length, Insertion Loss, NEXT, PSNEXT, ACR, PSACR, Propagation Delay, Delay Skew, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT.and Return Loss. Length alone is not considered to be a pass/fail criteria. The compliance criteria shall be in accordance with the compliance requirements set out in AS/NZS3080:2003 or ISO/IEC 11801:2003 for the Class E copper Permanent Link or Channel. C. Optical Fibre Link Testing: 1. Test Requirements: All multimode and singlemode optical fibre links must be tested for; a. Continuity and Maintenance of Polarity b. Length: Class E Tender Spec ADC KRONE 061201.doc Page 15 c. Propagation Delay d. Optical Attenuation of Link, 2 x wavelengths, 2 x direction, Conduct the tests in accordance with ADC KRONE'S Performance Testing of Optical Fibre Links For Compliance To ISO/IEC 11801, using either LSPM and/or OTDR equipment. If conflict exists, correct testing with LSPM shall be taken as correct. Where LSPM results exceed the Power Loss Budget, the link shall be investigated with an OTDR to determine the location of the faulty component. D. Reference Setting (Zeroing) Methods for LSPM Testers on MMF and SMF: If the connectors are the same on the LSPM tester and the Link to be tested, use 1-Test Cord Method of Reference Setting as per Cl 9.1.2 of ISO/IEC 14763-3 (Eg. SC on tester and both ends of Link). Where the connectors on the LSPM tester are different from the connectors on the Link to be tested, use the 3-Test Cord Method of Reference Setting as per Cl 9.1.1 of ISO/IEC 14763-3 (Eg. SC on Tester and LC on Link) E. Use of Mandrels or Coils (for both 3 & 1-Test Cord Methods): For MMF, the LSPM Tester shall have the correct Coupling Power Ratio for the cable under test. This can also be achieved by using a Mandrel Wrap on the Launch Cord for mode stripping during Reference Setting and Testing. For a 3 mm Launch Cord, 5 turns on 17 mm 0 for 62.5 urn 5 turns on 22 mm 0 for 50 urn. For SMF, the LSPM test launch cord shall have at least 2 x turns of 40+5 mm diameter, aircoiled or on a mandrel, for stripping light out of the cladding and more consistent readings. F. Test Cords and Field Calibration Cords (for both 3 & 1-Test Cord Methods): All Test Cords & Field Calibration cords shall be Qualified. Launch and Tail Cords for MMF & SMF LSPM testing shall be 1m to 5m each and have a Reference Connector at one end. Field Calibration Cord used in the 3-Test Cord Method shall not exceed 2m in length and have Reference Connectors at both ends. Reference Connectors shall be the same type of connectors as the cabling to be tested. Reference Connectors shall have an attenuation of < 0.10 dB for MMF, and < 0.20 dB for SMF. G. Field Calibration Cord and Adaptor Removal (for 3-Test Cord Method): For both MMF and SMF cabling, after the 3-Test Cord Reference Setting has been done, the central Field Calibration Cord shall be removed and the cabling under test connected. For a Link, the 2 x adaptors are removed with the field calibration cord. [For a Channel, the 2 x adaptors remain on the launch and tail cords.] H. Compliance Criteria: The compliance criteria shall be a pass for all of the tests listed under Test Requirements. The Optical Attenuation of the Link shall not exceed the Power Loss Budget calculated in accordance with the losses set out in ISO/IEC 14763-3:2006 and AS/NZS 3080:2003 for the optical fibre components that make up the Link. For an ADC KRONE warranty, the optical fibre installation must pass the requirements and test methods set out in Performance Testing of Optical Fibre Links For Compliance To ISO/IEC 11801. I. Test Result Documentation: A copy of the full "Plot Data Enabled" test results for each copper cable run and each core of each optical fibre cable run shall be supplied to the end user on CD in a 'Microsoft Windows' Office application format, or in a recognized test vendor's application format like Fluke LinkWare or Agilent DataScope Pro or LANTEK Reporter. Class E Tender Spec ADC KRONE 061201.doc Page 16 Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Data/Communication Cabling System Specifications 16750-8 3.04 Customer Acceptance A. At the conclusion of the installation a preliminary walkthrough with the installation contractor will be performed to check for installation quality, accurate performance of the work, and to verify engineering diagrams. Any modifications to the documentation or the installation that may be required shall be accomplished within a 2 week period. "Customer Acceptance" shall consist of a final walkthrough with the installation contractor. The walk through shall be scheduled within 3 weeks of the completion of the installation in order to turn the project and documentation over to the end-user. "Customer Acceptance" does not release the installation contractor from repairing any cabling errors or improperly labeled circuits, caused by the installation contractors, that may be discovered at a later date. 3.05 Equipment and Materials Shall Be New A. All cabling and connection equipment and materials supplied shall be new ADC KRONE approved products. The Contractor shall check the surface finishes and paintwork around his area of installation and touchup or repair/replace all damaged parts after the installation of cabling and equipment. The Contractor shall provide ADC KRONE literature including data on maintenance and operation of all equipment installed. Relevant catalogues of all materials, instruments, equipment, and components, to be supplied shall be included in this Tender. All ADC KRONE equipment and materials shall be permanently and legibly marked to indicate clearly the ADC or KRONE name as the manufacturer or the ADC and/or KRONE registered trademark. 3.06 Labeling and Numbering A. Each piece of equipment, patch panel and outgoing cable from the patch panels shall be labeled. Corresponding labeling and numbering shall also be provided on the telecommunication outlets. Equipment racks/cabinets should be labeled from bottom to top, left to right, omitting the letters "I" and "O". All cable labels should be of clear wrap around self-adhesive type or slip-on plastic ring type or a long plastic strip type fixed onto each cable. Each cable is to be labeled at each end 100 - 150mm from the termination point. Lettering on the label is to be machine typed. Telecommunication Outlets are to be labeled with an approved label secured to the outlet faceplate/cover in a prominent position, firmly affixed. Cable and TO numbering shall be the same and should be in the format of; "BUILDING-FLOOR-ROOM-NUMBER". The designations can be letters or numbers. Room is optional. NUMBERS must be in sequential numbers. Use a dash between each designation with no spaces. Consolidation Points are to be additionally labeled with the distance back to the FD, in metres. MUTOs are to be additionally labeled with the maximum allowable patch cord length in metres, as per the MUTO cabling design. 3.07 Cabling Installation Requirements A. General: All cables shall be run and installed in a workmanlike manner in accordance with AS/ACIF S009 Wiring Rules for safety and network integrity, and AS/NZS 3080 for performance. The Installer shall plan the cabling system and routing ensuring adequate segregation from electrical and hazardous services, ensuring system integrity and performance, ensuring that it does not present problems of maintenance or access, and ensuring there is no conflict with the operation and maintenance of other systems. The Tender shall give full details of the type of cables to be used including the type of termination, identification method, method of installation and limitations (if any). Termination of cables in the FD shall be on racks, frames or wall-mount assemblies to suit the selected modules and/or patch panels. Cable installed underground either direct buried or buried in conduit shall be of gel-filled Loose Tube construction that meets the requirements of the 'Water Penetration1 test specified in I EC 60794-1-2 Clause 25, Method -FSB. In addition, such cable shall not allow fluids to penetrate through the sheath. To comply with the identification requirements of AS/ACIF S009, cable shall not be painted. Occasional overspray from Acrylic water-based painting can be acceptable provided the overspray coverage does not exceed 1m length on the cables. All metal pathways should be bonded to the building earth system thereby providing a bonding conductor facility to minimize the effects of noise coupling. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Data/Communication Cabling System Specifications 16750 - 9 B. Copper Cable: Cat 6 cables shall be grouped together in bundles not exceeding 24 cables per bundle. Cat 5 cables shall be grouped together in bundles not exceeding 32 cables per bundle. Cat 6A permanent links should be at least 15m long to minimize low NEXT or RL issues like *Pass. Do not mix Cat 6 and Augmented Cat 6 cables in the same bundle. CopperTen Augmented Cat 6 cables should have 25mm separation from Cat 6 cables to minimize alien crosstalk. Do not arrange any Cat 6 cables within bundles or in a tray in straight lines. Leave them in a random lay to help minimize external alien crosstalk between the cables. This is the ADC KRONE 'Random Lay In Bundle And Tray for Cat 6 cable and Cat 6A' principle. Cat 6 cables shall be secured with Velcro™ at least 10 mm wide or approved elastic ties. Use Velcro™ or approved elastic ties applied at random spacings up to 300mm apart on catenary wires. Provide adequate support for all cabling that is vertically installed, ensuring that the weight of the cables is sufficiently supported. Use Velcro™ or approved elastic ties at approx 300mm vertical spacing. Bend control accessories (eg 'water-falls') shall be used to restrict cable bending during and after installation so that minimum bend radius is not exceeded. This particularly applies to all locations where cables change from horizontal to vertical. Cables shall be installed so as not to exceed the minimum bending radius. Use a bending radius not less than 50 mm radius (100 mm dia) during cable pulling, and not less than 25 mm radius (50 mm dia) for hand placement on horizontal runs eg at the TO or in skirting ducts. For tighter bend radius applications, obtain the manufacturer's approval before installation. For Cat 6 cable installations, the provision of spare cable should be avoided by good design and careful selection of termination locations. However, if specified on the drawings, allow for approx 2-3 metres of spare in the cable runs at the FD (by J-bends or U-bends in the cabinet/rack) and possibly at the entry to the service pole or skirting duct containing the TO. Place this spare cable in such a manner that it is fully supported and that the minimum bending radius is maintained. Spare cable shall not be stored Class E Tender Spec ADC KRONE 061201.doc Page 18 inside service poles or skirting ducts. If spare cable is contained in loops, there shall be mo more than 4 loops in a coil at any one location and each loop shall be of different diameter with minimum diameter of 300 mm. Cables shall be installed so as not to exceed the maximum hauling tension of 11kg for Cat 6 cables and CopperTen Augmented Cat 6 cables. Consolidation Points, if installed, shall be at least 15 metres away from the FD. There is no minimum requirement between FD and TO, or CP and TO. Red sheathed horizontal fixed copper cabling shall be reserved for fire detection/alarm services. Cables that penetrate fire barriers shall have the penetrations suitably fire-stopped by qualified operators as required by local building code regulations/laws. The amount of un-twist in a pair at any termination shall be no more than 13mm for Cat 5 and 10mm for Cat 6 and Augmented Cat 6. The amount of cable sheath stripped back at any termination shall such that the sheath terminates approximately 10 mm or less from module or socket housing for C5, C6 and Augmented C6 cables. C. Optical Fibre Cable: Bend control accessories shall be used to restrict cable bending during installation so that minimum bend radius is not exceeded as specified in the relevant cable technical data sheet. Cables shall not be installed at a tension that exceeds their specified limited as per in the relevant cable technical data sheet. Cable enclosures (eg. pull boxes) shall be capable of accommodating the specified minimum bend radius of all installed cable as a bundle. Cable direct buried shall be in suitably prepared ground such as in well tamped surrounding sand or soft soil. Cables used in a building shall be of Tight-Buffered low smoke zero halogen construction and shall be resistant to UV radiation where the cable is exposed to direct sunlight. Optical fibre cables occupying the same conduits as LV power cables should be installed in sub-ducts to maintain the integrity of the optical fibre cable during installation and future maintenance. Consideration must be given to minimizing the risk of damage to underground cable through vehicle and structural loading or soil movement or severe bending radius or above-ground impact. Underground cable will be exposure to UV radiation where it enters and exits the ground and it must be suitably protected at these locations. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Data/Communication Cabling System Specifications 16750 -10 D. Pathways - Continuous: 1. Continuous pathways are Tray (flat, slotted, ladder), Ducts (in-floor, perimeter, skirting), Conduits, Power Poles or Blades or similar. The recommendations in AS/NZS 3084 Pathways and Spaces should be followed. All cable trays, catenaries and ductwork required to complete the installation will be the responsibility of the Tenderer to supply and install. The installer is to liaise with end-user, and/or main contractor when strip-out of existing floors commences to evaluate if any existing cable tray or ducts can be re-used. The preferred depth of surface/skirting ducts is 50mm to accommodate the minimum bending radius of Cat 5, Cat 6 and Augmented Cat 6 cables. Class E Tender Spec ADC KRONE 061201.doc Page 19. a. For 3-compartment communications ducts: 1) • A 50H x SOD mm duct shall contain no more than 18 x CopperTen cables, or 24 x Cat 6 cables, or 32 x Cat 5 cables (ie the maximum Cat 6 and Cat 5 bundle sizes). 2) • A 40H x 500 mm duct shall contain no more than 12 x CopperTen cables, or 24 x Cat 6 and Cat 5 cables. 3) • A 35H x 40D mm duct shall contain no more than 6 x CopperTen cables, or 12 x Cat 6 and Cat 5 cables. 2. All necessary pathway penetrations and access between floors is the responsibility of the Tenderer to provide, and to ensure all penetrations and access holes at the completion of the installation are fully sealed to local authority requirements and fire regulations by qualified personnel. Support all cabling within the false ceiling space or under indoor raised flooring by steel cable tray, trunking, ducting, or catenary wires, fixed by manufacturer approved hangers and methods onto structural building or flooring elements. All conductive pathways should be earthed to protective earth from the electrical distribution board on the floor where such cable tray is installed. A licensed electrical contractor must make the connection to the electrical distribution board protective earth. Before cable is installed and after installation, ensure that conduit, trunking and tray is thoroughly clean of any extraneous material such as cable scraps, dust, dirt, construction debris and moisture. Any cable that has been subjected to immersion in fluid shall have the pathway dried and cleaned and the cable shall be completely replaced with new clean dry cable. Co-ordinate all trunking, ducting, conduit and tray work with other services on site as necessary. Where cables exit a tray, provide adequate protection from sharp tray edges during the installation process and after completion. Where cables are installed in partitions or false walls through sharp-edged metal studs, ensure bushings are secured in these penetrations to protect cables. Restrict conduit runs to no more than 30m of continuous run inside a building between hauling points. Restrict any single pull to no more than two (2) x 90-degree bends, in conduits or ducts. The pathway system shall otherwise be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. E. Pathways - Non-continuous: Non-continuous pathways are Wireways (mesh, ribs), Catenaries, Hooks or Bags. Where non-continuous- pathways are used to cable support systems, the following minimum requirements shall be followed. The recommendations in AS/NZS 3084 Pathways and Spaces should be followed. Catenary wires shall be anchored to structural elements of the building and not to any service or support accessory. The maximum number of cables on one catenary shall be 2 x bundles of 32 for Cat 5 or 2 x bundles of 24 for Cat 6. The maximum sag of a pathway when fully- loaded with cables shall not exceed 150 mm between any two supports. Mesh trays for general use shall have metallic or non-metallic crossbars at 100 mm spacing or less. Around external corners, the maximum unsupported cable span shall be 150mm. Otherwise use a flat durable sheet in the bottom of the pathway to support the cables. Curved bend control accessories that support the cables shall be used to fully support the cables over the bend surface and maintain a minimum bend radius of 50 mm in all Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Data/Communication Cabling System Specifications 16750 -11 situations where the cable or the tray/mesh drops down at an angle of 45 degrees or greater. The maximum height of the mass of cables on a pathway shall be 90mm. The height is reduced to 75mm if the cross bar spacing is up to 120mm in special use trays. This ensures there is not too much weight on the bottom cables that rest on the crossbars. The clearance above the sides of the tray/mesh shall be at least 1/2 the width of the tray with 100mm as the minimum clearance. Supports for non-metallic mesh shall be at 1 m spacing or less. The maximum sag should be less that 200 mm when fully loaded. J-Hooks, bags or saddles shall be positioned at 800 mm spacing or less. The surface of the hook or saddle that supports the cable shall be smooth and at least 34 mm wide with rounded-off edges under the cables. The fixings of any cable support system shall be onto the building structure by solid mechanical means, not adhesive means. Non-continuous support pathways should be run in straight lines following the building lines, not a diagonal or zig-zag fashion. The pathway system shall otherwise be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. F. Separation: The minimum separation between the fixed telecommunications cabling and parallel runs greater than 3 m in length of LV fixed electrical cabling shall be at least 300 mm for performance and noise reduction reasons. Separation from other electrically noisy environments like power distribution mains and sub mains and fluorescent light fittings or halogen down light transformers shall be 300 mm. For non-warranted sites where performance is not the primary requirement, the following safety requirements shall be maintained. A minimum of 50 mm separation between the fixed telecommunications cabling and parallel runs of LV electrical cabling. If the run parallel to LV electrical cables is less than 50mm, separate the two with a solid durable barrier (if metallic it should be protectively earthed) for the entire length of run less than 50 mm separation. Where fixed telecommunications cables cross electrical cables, the crossing shall be at right angles with 50mm separation (or a protective conduit/barrier extending 50 mm both sides of the crossing) with both sets of cabling securely fixed in position to prevent any relative movement or change in the separation. These safety separation/segregation are set down in AS/ACIF S009 - Wiring Rules. Where fixed cabling is installed inside modular furniture partitions and similar enclosures or in service poles, maintain the 50 mm safety separation or have a solid durable separation barrier as per AS/ACIF S009. Wherever possible, maintain a performance separation of up to 300 mm from LV power cables to minimize noise induction. Install cables in partition ducts/trays, free from protrusion of screws and similar sharp fasteners that may damage the cabling. Remove or cover all sharp edges on the cabling pathway. Where patch cords are installed behind removable panels in modular furniture or in under-desk pathways, maintain a separation from LV power of 10 mm if possible. The preferred length of patch cords running continuously in parallel with LV power under desks plus in 'umbilicals' is 5 m maximum. In 'umbilical' pathways associated with modular office partition systems, the LV power and the telecommunications cables shall use separate compartments. No additional separation or barriers are required within the umbilical pathway. The end fittings for umbilical pathways shall be such that the minimum bending radius of the communications cables is not exceeded at either end. 3.08 Documentation The contractor shall provide complete documentation covering the installation and maintenance of the Structured Cabling System. This includes "as built" drawings showing the location of all installed equipment and racks in all Telecommunications Rooms, all main cable runs, cable trays and catenaries, CPs, MUTOs and TOs, complete with outlet numbering. A. Quantity: The Tenderer shall provide three complete sets of documentation. As built drawings shall be provided within 14 days of sectional or partial completion of any part of the project to the project manager and/or the client showing all main cable runs, locations, identifications and destinations. B. Printing And Binding of Documentation: The Tenderer shall provide installation/system manuals, product datasheets and all other documentation in suitably labeled, A4 sized binders. All binding shall be of a high quality to provide for a long and durable service. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Data/Communication Cabling System Specifications 16750 -12 C. Document and Drawing Sizes: All documentation shall be typed on either single or double-sided A4 pages. Drawings shall where practicable, be on A4 size however, A3 or A1 sizes may be used for larger drawings. D. Installation/Systems Manuals: The Installation/Systems Manual shall cover the following areas: 1. A detailed overview of the building cabling system, 2. Full description of the specific installation, 3. Full schematics showing the overall layout of the installation, and 4. Floor layout drawings showing the location and designation of each outlet, location of cable trays and ducts and location of all connection frames. E. Test Result Documentation: A copy of the full "Plot Data Enabled" test results for each copper cable run and each core of each optical fibre cable run shall be supplied to the end user on CD in a recognized test vendor's application format like Fluke LinkWare or Agilent DataScope Pro or LANTEK Reporter. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Data/Communication Cabling System Specifications 16750-13 SECTION 16770 TRAINING SOUND SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 General A. Provide an Integrated Sound System to provide added realism to the training evolution environment by implementing "True-to-Life" sounds that replicate those that a policeman or firefighter might hear in an emergency situations. B. Contractor shall provide and install an independent sound system, including speakers, players and amplifiers within each of the project buildings 1. Building "S": Shooting Range 2. Building "C": Commercial Burn Prop Building 3. Building "R" Residential Burn Prop Building. C. The source of sound will be from a series of integrated MP3 digital music players. The owner will be responsible for providing the various electronic sounds which will be uploaded to MP3 units and played throughout the system. The stereo system controls will allow for the control of the audio source selection MP3 players system status, amplification and equalization of the sound D. Each system will have a central control and distribution location. The control will allow independent operation and distribution of sound. Locations of building controls shall be as follows: 1. Building "S": Range Control Room #118 2. Building "C": Control Room #106 3. Building "R" Smoke and Prop Equipment Room #104. 1.02 Work Included A. Contractor to provide all work and materials for the installation and operation of each independent fully-integrated sound system. Work includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Provide and install weatherproof speakers in locations shown, including mounting brackets, conduit and speaker wire from speaker location to central control locations noted in Paragraph 1.01.D. 2. Provide and install stereo system with amplifier, including wall rack, wiring, connections and coordination in noted locations. 3. Provide and install MP3 players, including dock station, mounting, wiring, programming and all connections to stereo system. 4. Provide and install laminated floor plan showing locations of speakers. 5. Refer to Schedule of locations in Paragraphs 3.05 & 3.06 of this section. B. Coordination with other trades for required infrastructure and support. C. Coordination with Division 16 for supply, distribution and installation of conduits and power and required. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Training Sound System Specifications 16770-1 1.03 Related Work Described Elsewhere A. Section 04200 Unit Masonry B. Section 07900 Joint Sealants and Caulking C. Division 16 Electrical 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Installer: Contractor shall employ subcontractor familiar with system requirement and have at least five (5) years experience in the field. B. UL Listing: All products supplied and installed shall be have the appropriate UL approvals and bear the approval sticker on the equipment. 1.05 Submittals A. Product Data: Submit material specifications, manufacturer's installation, and maintenance instructions under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Provide scale drawings of each building and location of sound system equipment. Drawings to include the following: 1. Location of each speaker unit 2. Routing of conduit and wire from point of connection to central control. 3. Location of central control 4. Sound system wiring diagrams and distribution C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1.06 Product Handling A. Protection 1. Materials to be stored at the job site in a safe, dry place with all labels intact and legible at time of installation. 2. Use all means to protect materials before, during, and after installation. Do not allow products to become wet or damp. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, including water intrusion, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 Operation and Maintenance Manuals A. , Provide Protection a minimum of five (5) complete sets of manufacturer operation and maintenance manuals. 1.08 Warranty A. Contractor shall provide full five (5) year warranty from the dated of final acceptance for parts and labor of sound system and distribution. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Training Sound System Specifications 16770-2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Weatherproof Outdoor Speakers A. Acceptable Manufacturer: The Basis of Design manufacturer for the selected materials listed is: Refer to Substitutions in Division 1 for alternate resources. 1. OSD Audio: 1405 Pioneer Street, Brea CA 92851. Tele (562) 697-2600. Website www.outdoorspeakerdepot. B. Product 1. 120-watt Speakers: Model Number: AP525 2. Speaker dimensions - L 7.3", D 6.6", H 9.7" 3. Weight: 8 pounds 4. Mounting brackets: Full-swing adjustment 5. Enclosure: Acoustically inert, Teflon-sealed with stainless steel hardware and rust-proof aluminum grille 6. Exterior finish: Black powder coat. C. Power Requirements 1. A.C. Power: 120/208 2. 70V transformer - switchable for easy commercial installation D. Performance 1. Weather proof speaker 2. Frequency Response 45Hz - 20kHz 3. Sensitivity 90db 4. 1" silk dome tweeter 5. 5 1/4" polypropylene woofer 6. Speaker impedance: 8 ohms nominal, 6 ohms minimum 7. Speaker temperature operation range -20F to 200F 2.02 Stereo System Amplifier with 6 Zone Controls A. Acceptable Manufacturer: The Basis of Design manufacturer for the selected materials listed is: 1. OSD Audio: 1405 Pioneer Street, Brea CA 92851. Tele (562) 697-2600. Website www.outdoorspeakerdepot. B. Product 1. 6 Zone Controller/Amplifier with LCD Keypads: Model Number: CAA66 2. Dimensions: 17" W x 3.9" H x 11.5" D 3. Weight: 17 Ib 12.5 oz C. Electrical 1. Controller/Amplifier a. Trigger connectors: 1/8-inch TS, tip positive b. Power rating: 100-120 VAC 3 c. Fuse rating: F3.0A H 250V d. Speaker connectors: Removable 4-pole color-coded snap connectors Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Training Sound System Specifications 16770-3 2. Keypads a. Keypads connect to the CAA66 Controller/Amplifier using a color coded Cat 5 Cable punch down connector on the keypad. The maximum recommended wire run length is 250 feet for each keypad D. Performance 1. Audio sources: 6 2. Zones per controller: 6 3. Power output: 40 watts per zone RMS into 8 ohms 4. Frequency response: 20 Hz to 20 kHz +0/-2.5 dB 5. Distortion: <0.10% THD+N from 20 Hz to 20 kHz 6. Signal-to-noise ratio: >90 dB A-weighted, >88 dB un-weighted 7. Audio line outputs: Switchable fixed/variable, 2.2 Vrms 8. Mute trigger input: 12 VDC 9. System trigger output: 12 VDC, 100 ma maximum 10. LCD control provides system status, audio source selection including bass, treble, balance and volume 2.03 MP3 Player & Dock Station A. Acceptable Manufacture: The Basis of Design manufacture for the selected materials listed is: Creative Technology Ltd. Tele (800) 998-1000. Website www. http://us. creative, com B. MP3 Player Units (Total of 6 to be provided at each central control station) 1. Mfr. Sansa® e250 MP3 player 2. Model No. SDMX4-2048-A70 3. Capacity: 2 GB 4. Screen: 1.8" TFT color 5. Battery: Rechargeable Lithium Ion, up to 20 hours of battery life C. MP3 Docking Stations (Total of 6 to be provided at each central control station) 1. Sansa® Base Station 2. Model No. SAAMX-BST 3. Power: 120/208 4. A/V output to external Amplifier and audio cable 5. Remote control with storage cavity in Base Station 6. A/C Power Adaptor 2.04 Wall Mounted Shelf A. Provide a stainless steel, wall mounted shelf unit with supports to accommodate amplifier and MP3 player units. Shelf to be approximately 36" in length x 16" depth and rated for a maximum 50 pound load. Zesco Model #012-0-326 WS-12-36 or equivalent B. Provide single shelf at each central control location. Shelf to be mounted approximately 66" above finish floor surface, unless otherwise noted. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Training Sound System Specifications 16770-4 2.05 Laminated Floor Plan Diagram A. Each building shall be provided with laminated floor plans of the building (Minimum size 24" x 36") depicting speaker locations and numeral designations which correlate to the amplifier and MP3 outputs. Plan to be wall mounted near amplifier unit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Site Conditions A. Inspection 1. Prior to installation of the work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify all conduits and power are properly placed 3. Ensure the control room is made secure. 3.02 Preparation and Installation A. Verify the provided power circuit breaker is isolated and rated for the specific load. Visually ensure the circuit breaker is in the "off" position and mark the breaker used. B. Contractor to provide conduit from each Speaker located on the drawings to the central control unit location on the first floor of the buildings. C. Visually inspect and confirm proper sizing and compliance to code any pre- construction wiring that been installed. D. When connecting the wiring from the commercial power source, to the terminal strip, make sure you have provided a proper earth ground. If using a metal enclosure, connect the ground to the enclosure before making the connections. No ground is to connect directly to the equipment. E. Observe all wiring requirements established by the current edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and/or the authority having jurisdiction. 3.03 Equipment and Connections A. Mount all equipment securely to provided wall rack and structures. B. Caulk and seal all penetrations for wiring and conduits. C. All installation materials shall be stainless steel or galvanized to prevent rusting. Exposed metals without manufacturer finish shall be painted per the specifications. D. Install all inter-connectivity wires between speakers, amplifier, MP3 players and controls in direct accordance with the manufacturer's written specifications and guidelines. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Training Sound System Specifications 16770-5 3.04 Cleaning A. B. Clean ail areas of installed work free from debris and trash. Dispose of all waste in proper receptacles Wipe clean all equipment free from dust and smudges. Refer to manufacturer recommended cleaning agents. 3.05 Testing and Training A. Upon completion of installation, conduct a complete test of sound system in the presence of the Owner's representative. Test to include, but not limited to a. LCD control panel and Sound System control b. MP3 Player control and interface c. Sound level and equalization d. Standard operation features B. Upon final testing and validation, contractor shall provide a minimum of two (2) hours training in all system applications, operations and maintenance functions. Coordinate time of training with Owner Representative a minimum of ten (10) days prior to training. 3.06 Schedule of Speakers and Control Location: Shooting Range Bldg. "S" Bldg S S S S S S S . > Room Name 25-Yard Range 25-Yard Range 25-Yard Range 100-Yard Range 100-Yard Range 100-Yard Range 100-Yard Range . >-. -. - Room Number 130 130 130 131 131 131 131 Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ,. Remote Control Room Location 118 118 118 118 118 118 118 •••• Comments Mount behind baffle at 3-Yard Firing Line Mount behind baffle at 10-Yard Firing Line Mount behind baffle at 25-Yard Firing Line Mount behind baffle at 3-Yard Firing Line Mount behind baffle at 20-Yard Firing Line Mount behind baffle at 50-Yard Firing Line Mount behind baffle at 100-Yard Firing Line Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Specifications Training Sound System 16770-6 3.07 Schedule of Speakers and Control Location: Training Buildings "C" & "R" Bldg Room Name Room Number Quantity Central Control Location Room Comments Lobby/Entry 101 1 106 Bedroom 107 106 Retail 112 106 Retail 111 106 Open Training 115 106 Office 201 106 Bedroom 204 106 Open Training 205 106 Stairway 106 106 Mount Unit at 3™ Floor Level Mount units at 2na @ 4tn Floor LevelsStairway104106 Office 401 106 R Garage 103 104 R Living Room 107 104 R Open Training 201 104 END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Specifications Training Sound System 16770-7 SECTION 16775 PAGING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 Contractor A. The contractor shall furnish all equipment, accessories, and material required for the installation of a comprehensive communication system in strict compliance with these specifications and applicable contract drawings. Any material and/or equipment necessary for the proper operation of the system, which is not specified or described herein, shall be deemed part of this specification. B. The communications system shall bear the label of a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) such as ETL, DS&G, or UL and be listed by their re-examination service. All work must be completed in strict accordance with all applicable electrical codes, including NEC Section 800-51 (i), under direction of a qualified and factory approved distributor, to the approval of the owner. C. The system is to be designed and configured for maximum ease of service and repair. All major components of the system shall be designed as a standard component of one type of card cage. All internal connections of the system shall be with factory keyed plugs designed for fault-free connection. The printed circuit card of the card cage shall be silk screened to indicate the location of each connection. 1.02 Substitutions A. Any system and/or equipment proposed as an equal to that specified must be proven to conform to the standards contained herein. The contractor must obtain the architect's or engineer's approval in writing, prior to bidding equipment other than that specified. The manufacturer's name, model numbers, and three (3) copies of shop/working drawings complete with catalog sheets, technical and installation data shall be submitted for approval. B. Within thirty-five (35) calendar days after the date of award of the contract, the contractor shall submit to the Architect for review, eight (8) copies of a complete submission. The submission shall consist of five (5) major sections, with each section separated with insertable index tabs. The first section shall be the "Index", which shall include the project title and address, name of the firm submitting the proposal and the name of the Architect. Each page in the submission shall be numbered chronologically and shall be summarized in the index. The second section shall include a copy of the authorized distributor's valid State Contractors License, letters of factory authorization and guaranteed service, list of projects of equal scope and list of proposed instrumentation to be used by the contractor. The third section shall contain the comparative specification listing, including a complete listing of the characteristics of the equipment to be furnished. The fourth section shall contain an original factory data sheet for every piece of equipment in the specifications. The fifth section shall contain a wiring destination schedule for each circuit leaving each piece of equipment. 1.03 Qualifications A. The system shall be supplied by the manufacturer's authorized contractor who is qualified in the proper installation, operation, and service of the system. Certification shall be submitted verifying that the contractor is the manufacturer's authorized contractor. B. Upon request of the Architect/Engineer, the system proposed as an equal shall be made available for demonstration. The demonstration shall be coordinated with the Architect/Engineer and the end-user. C. Contractor shall attend mandatory job walk. 1.04 Equipment Warranty A. The contractor shall warrant the equipment to be new and free from defects in material and workmanship, and will, within one year from date of installation, repair or replace any equipment found to be defective. This warranty shall not apply to any equipment that has been subject to misuse, abuse, negligence, accident, or unauthorized modification. 1.05 Service Facilities Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Paging System Specifications 16775 -1 A. The contractor shall make available, and maintain a satisfactory service department capable of furnishing equipment inspection and service. The contractor shall be prepared to offer a service contract for the maintenance of the system beyond the warranty period. 1.06 Training A. The contractor shall instruct personnel designated by the owner in the proper use, basic care, and maintenance of the equipment. Such training shall be provided as an integral component of the system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturer A. The manufacturer shall be a United States manufacturer, who has been regularly engaged in the manufacture of communication systems for at least thirty (30) years. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Rauland-Borg 2. Dukane 3. Bogen 2.02 Features And Functions A. The communication system shall provide a comprehensive communication network between administrative and staff locations. The central processor and switching unit shall be of the modular plug-in printed circuit board type, using HMOS microprocessor and TTL logic and HCMOS memory and sensing. HCMOS circuitry shall be protected with transient suppression devices on all inputs and outputs. Nonvolatile EPROM shall store permanent memory and nonvolatile EEPROM shall store field-programmable memory. System which uses a battery to maintain system configuration information shall not be acceptable. B. The system shall provide no less than the following features and functions: 1. Integration to public branch exchange for a complete integrated telephone intercommunication solution. All features and functionality's of the system shall be accessible from the PBX or EKSU, as not to depend on the Administrative phones for all functionality. 2. Amplified-voice communication with loudspeakers shall use a shielded audio pair (shield can be used as one of the two required conductors for phone or call-in switch). 3. The system shall be available in the following configuration: Rack-mounted. Station capacity shall be from 24 to 240 stations in increments of 24. All telephone stations shall have the ability to support displays. 4. The system shall consist of ANY COMBINATION OF staff, enhanced staff, and administrative stations (minimum of one administrative telephone required per system). a. Staff stations shall consist of wall- or ceiling-mounted loudspeakers with call-in switches. b. Enhanced staff stations shall consist of DTMF dialing telephone sets, and shall be connected to the PBX or EKSU. Systems that require telephones to be connected to the intercom systems shall be deemed unacceptable. c. Administrative stations shall consist of DTMF dialing telephone sets with a four line by 16-character LCD display panel. They shall be equipped with a standard 12 key push button dialing keypad. Phones utilizing membrane-type keypads or requiring special function keys to perform common functions shall not be accepted as an equal. Optionally, a loudspeaker may be connected at each administrative station location. d. Enhanced staff and administrative stations shall have the option of including a loudspeaker. All types of stations shall utilize the same type of field wiring. Future station alterations to require only station type change, not field wiring or system head- end alterations. All field wiring and system head-end equipment shall support Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Paging System Specifications 16775-2 any type of station, at the time of installation. All contractor proposals shall reflect this capacity. Failure to submit and bid this project in this manner will be deemed as being in direct conflict of these specifications and will be rejected. There shall be no limit to the number of administrative display stations within the total capacity of the system (e.g. a 240 station will support 240 administrative display stations). It shall be possible at any time to change the type of station at any location without extensive rewiring. Systems that limit the quantity of each station type, or require future additional equipment and/or system expansion to provide additional administrative telephones shall not be accepted as an equal. 5. The system shall be capable of providing up to four (4) simultaneous amplified- voice intercom paths. One amplified intercom path shall automatically be provided with each increment of 24 stations of system capacity. All hardware, etc., required to achieve the maximum number of amplified-voice intercom channels for this system shall be included in this submittal. Amplified-voice intercom channels shall provide voice-activated switching. Systems requiring the use of a push-to-talk switch on administrative or enhanced staff telephones shall not be acceptable. There shall be an automatic level control for return speech during amplified-voice communications. The intercom amplifier shall also provide control over the switch sensitivity and delay times of the VOX circuitry. Systems that do not provide 4 simultaneous amplified voice intercom paths shall be unacceptable. 6. It is of utmost importance that emergency calls from staff stations receive prompt attention. It therefore, is important that there be an alternate destination in case the call does not get answered at the primary location. To this end: a. Staff generated Emergency calls shall be treated as the highest system priority. Therefore, all Emergency calls shall annunciate at the top of the call queue of their respective administrative telephone(s). Should that emergency call go unanswered for 15 seconds, the call should re-route to an alternate speaker station then prompt the caller to make a verbal call for help. During the transfer, the original administrative telephone shall continue to ring the distinctive Emergency ring. Should the Emergency transfer to station have an associated administrative telephone, it too shall ring the distinctive Emergency ring. b. The Emergency transfer to station shall be field programmable. c. Should the original administrative telephone be engaged in a non- emergency conversation, its conversation shall be automatically terminated, indicated with an alert tone, and then reconnected to the station that generated the Emergency call. d. Should the administrative telephone be engaged in an Emergency conversation, successive emergency calls shall log into the call queue as well as transfer to the emergency transfer station for their verbal call for help. Upon termination of the initial emergency conversation, the next one shall immediately ring the administrative telephone. e. Systems failing to transfer unanswered Emergency calls or failing to immediately connect to the administrative telephone shall not be deemed as equal. 7. There shall be a system-wide emergency all-call feature. The emergency all-call shall be accessed by dialing "911" from designated administrative phones or by the activation of an external contact closure which shall give the third audio program input emergency status. The Emergency "911" all-call function shall have the highest system priority and shall override all other loudspeaker related functions including time tone distribution. Considering that emergencies are to be treated with the highest level of concern, systems in which the Emergency-AII-Call page from an administrative telephone is not the highest priority shall not be deemed as equal. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Paging System Specifications 16775-3 Upon picking up the receiver and dialing "9", a menu shall appear on the display prompting the user to enter each subsequent digit. In this way, the user shall not be required to memorize complicated key sequences in order to access emergency functions. The emergency all-call shall capture complete system priority, shall be transmitted over all speakers. It shall also activate an external relay, which can be used to automatically override other systems. Systems without emergency all-call, or systems with all-call that cannot be activated by external means, or which do not capture complete system priority or activate an external relay, shall not be acceptable. 8. There shall be at least four built-in dedicated emergency alarm tones. Each may be accessed by dialing a three-digit number (912 through 915) from designated administrative telephones. These emergency tones should be separate from the time tones. Systems using external alarm generators, or having less than four emergency alarm tones shall not be acceptable. Upon picking up the receiver and dialing "9", a menu shall appear on the display prompting the user to enter each subsequent digit. In this way, the user shall not be required to memorize complicated key sequences in order to access emergency alarm tones. 9. There shall be four (4) external-function relay driver outputs, accessible from designated administrative telephones by dialing a four-digit number. These outputs remain set until accessed and reset at a later time. The user shall have the ability to review the status of each relay driver. A plain English menu, prompting the user through the fields without requiring the user to remember any dialing sequences shall support this feature. Systems that require the user to remember complicated dialing schemes or prompt the user via cryptic commands shall not be deemed equal. Systems without relay driver outputs for control of external functions shall not be acceptable. Upon picking up the receiver and dialing "9", a menu shall appear on the display prompting the user to enter each subsequent digit. In this way, the user shall not be required to memorize complicated key sequences in order to access external relay functions. 10. There shall be an optional outside line feature. The optional circuitry shall interface with the station ports of an external telephone system, and shall provide facilities for up to eight (8) incoming lines which shall be designated by the user to ring "day" and "night" enhanced staff or administrative stations. Where an administrative station is designated to receive outside line calls, the phone shall ring with a unique tone and the outside line number shall appear on the display panel. The option shall also provide the ability to make outside line calls from enhanced staff or administrative stations. This ability shall be programmable for each phone and there shall be three (3) access levels: no access, restricted access (local calls only), or unrestricted access (local and long-distance calls). This feature shall be capable of supporting DIL, DISA and a password protected DISA function. Security is of the utmost concern. The password DISA feature shall be accessible only from an off-premise security office, which monitors the facilities security system. It shall function as follows: Upon confirmation of the password DISA number, the system shall allow security personnel to dial access any station and monitor the activity without the preannounce and the privacy tones. This will then allow the security office to determine exactly what actions need to be taken. Systems that do not allow DISA access from the outside public telephone network to the intercommunication system shall be deemed unacceptable. 11. The system shall provide for field-programmable three-digit architectural station numbers. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Paging System Specifications 16775-4 12. An architectural-number/station-number cross-reference shall be field-accessible to facilitate service. 13. There shall be an automatic level control for return speech during amplified-voice communications. 14. Each station loudspeaker shall be assignable to any one, any combination, or all of eight (8) paging zones. Systems with less than eight (8) paging zones shall not be acceptable. 2.3 Console A. Equipment shall be rack-mounted. B. Rack-mounting panel. Includes the following components: 1. Power Supply (1 per system) 2. Power Supply (1 for up to 120 stations , 2 for more than 120 stations) 3. MCAPI-Audio Program Module Interface Assembly (1 per system) C MCRMF - Rack mounting mainframe (1 per 120 stations). Includes built-in ventilation fans and the following circuit cards: 1. MCPCA2-Processor card (1 per system) 2. MCACB-Analog card (1 per 24 stations) 3. MCSC-Station card (1 per 24 stations) 4. MCJCA-Ribbon cable assembly (interconnects 2 MCRMF) D. MCRM - Relay module (1 per 24 stations). Mounts to: 1. MCRRP-Stand-alone configuration 2. SBA225-Series 2223 configuration 3. SBA325-Series 2233 configuration E. MCRCA - Ribbon cable assembly F. CPT1B - AM/FM cassette unit G. Power Amplifiers 1. BPA60-60watt 2. HTA-125A-125watt 3. HTA-250A-250 watt 4. As required H. Optional Equipment - MCTC-Telephone access card PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Division of Work A. While all work included under this specification is the complete responsibility of the contractor, the division of actual work listed following shall occur. B. The conduit, outlets, terminal cabinets, etc., which form part of the rough-in work shall be furnished and installed completely by the electrical contractor. The balance of the system, including installation of speakers and equipment, making all connections, etc., shall be performed by the manufacturer's authorized representative. The entire responsibility of the system, its operation, function, testing and complete maintenance for one (1) year after final acceptance of the project by the owner, shall also be the responsibility of the manufacturer's authorized representative. 3.2 Equipment Manufacturer's Representative A. All work described herein to be done by the manufacturer's authorized representative shall be provided by a documented factory authorized representative of the basic line of equipment to be utilized. B. As further qualification for bidding and participating in the work under this specification the manufacturer's representative shall hold a valid C-10 Contractor's License issued by the Contractor's State License Board of California. The manufacturer's representative shall have completed at least ten (10) projects of equal scope, giving satisfactory performance and have been in the business of furnishing and installing sound systems of this type for at least five (5) years. The manufacturer's representative shall be capable of being bonded to assure the owner of performance and satisfactory service during the guarantee period. C. The manufacturer's representative shall provide a letter with submittals from the manufacturer of all major equipment stating that the manufacturer's representative is an Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Paging System Specifications 16775-5 authorized distributor. This letter shall also state the manufacturer guarantees service performance for the life of the equipment, and that there will always be an authorized distributor assigned to service the area in which the system has been installed. D. The contractor shall furnish a letter from the manufacturer of the equipment, which certifies that the equipment has been installed according to factory intended practices, that all the components used in the system are compatible and that all new portions of the systems are operating satisfactorily. Further, the contractor shall furnish a written unconditional guarantee, guaranteeing all parts and all labor for a period of one (1) year after final acceptance of the project by the owner. 3.3 Installation A. Plug disconnect: All major equipment components shall be fully pluggable by means of multi-pin receptacles and matching plugs to provide for ease of maintenance and service. B. Protection of cables: Cables within terminal cabinets, equipment racks, etc., shall be grouped and bundled (harnessed) as to type and laced with No. 12 cord waxed linen lacing twine or T & B "Tie-Rap" cable. Edge protection material ("cat-track") shall be installed on edges of holes, lips of ducts or any other point where cables or harnesses cross metallic edge. C. Cable identification: Cable conductors shall be color-coded and individual cables shall be individually identified. Each cable identification shall be a unique number located approximately 1-1/2" from cable connection at both ends of cable. Numbers shall be approximately 1/4" in height. These unique numbers shall appear on the As-Built Drawings. D. Shielding: Cable shielding shall be connected to common ground at point of lowest audio level and shall be free from ground at any other point. Cable shields shall be terminated in same manner as conductors. E. Provide complete "in service" instructions of system operation to school personnel. Assist in programming of telephone system. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Paging System Specifications 16775-6 SECTION 16781 TELEVISION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Provide and install a complete and operating master antenna RF Distribution System as specified and indicated, including all required amplifiers, couplers, outlet devices, cables, connectors and all other materials and equipment required to complete and operate the system. 1.02 Related Sections A. Section 16010: Basic Electrical Requirements. B. Section 16160: Cabinets and Enclosures. C. Section 16470: Panelboards. 1.03 System Description A. The cable RF distribution system shall conform to the highest present state of the art in the field of RF television transmission. B. System shall include, as indicated on drawings. C. The completed systems are required to pass proof-of-performance tests as described and specified. D. Television reception, processing, amplification and distribution system shall provide the following functions: 1. The system shall be designed to provide amplification and distribution in the frequency range of 54 to 550 MHz in the forward direction. 2. Return information spectrum space in the 7 to 31 MHz band. 3. All passive distribution equipment, components, connectors and cables installed after the headend amplifier shall pass all frequencies from 5 to 750 MHz. 4. All systems shall be capable of delivering all NTSC color and monochrome signals to Standard EIA television receivers and FM receivers. 5. The minimum level of the video carrier signal on any channel shall be +6dB at the tap. 6. The video carrier level of the weakest channel shall be greater than or equal to +10 dB at the input to a distribution amplifier. Use distribution amplifiers as required to insure this result. 7. The video level of the return channel signal shall be greater than or equal to +10 dB at the input to all distribution amplifiers. Use return channel amplifiers as required to insure this result. E. Performance: 1. All television systems shall meet or exceed the following performance parameters to insure total compatibility with CATV systems and for future developments in modes of RF transmission. a. 5-750 MHz passive devices. b. 54-550 MHz forward direction active devices. c. 7-31 MHz future reverse direction active VHF devices. d. 30-54 MHz frequency spectrum reserved for couplers, filters and networks for forward and reverse RF transmission. Isolation between the forward and reverse spectrum shall be 50 dB. 2. Cross modulation, minimum 57 dB for CATV and -46 for MATV system for all active devices. 3. Carrier to noise, 45 dB for the total in school system. 4. Shielding, all system components must meet or exceed - 80 dB. 5. There shall not be more than 10DB difference between the highest and lowest channel anywhere in the system. 6. Visual to aural carrier ratio, minus 15 dB, minimum. 7. The minimum level of the video carrier signal on any channel shall be +6 dB and the maximum level shall be +15 dB measured at the tap at any tap in the system. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Television System Specifications 16781 -1 8. The video carrier level of the weakest channel shall be greater than or equal to +10 dB at the input to a distribution amplifier. Use distribution amplifiers as required to insure this result. 9. The video level of the return channel signal shall be greater than or equal to +10 dB at the input to all distribution amplifiers, when driven by a +40 dB signal inserted into any selected tap in the system. Use return channel amplifiers as required to insure this result. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit in accordance with the Section Submittals. B. The Contractor shall provide the following submittal and shop drawing information for review and approval: 1. Contractor shall deliver eight copies of the Material List Submission with Shop Drawings for review and approval. a. Each submittal shall be bound and shall contain an index organized vertically by assembly and item number and horizontally by columns. The leftmost column shall be the item number; next shall be the description, followed by the specified item, which is followed by the submitted item. The rightmost column shall be for notes, which shall be used to reference the reason for submitting items other than as specified. b. Each submittal shall contain product data sheets or catalog cut sheets for each item listed in the Index. These shall be arranged in the same order as the index and if more than one item is shown, the submitted items shall be highlighted or marked with an arrow. The product data shall be sufficiently detailed to allow the Engineer to evaluate the suitability of the product and to allow other trades to provide necessary coordination c. Drawings that are specific to this section shall be included in the submittal. "A" size, (8 & 1/2" x 11"), and "B" size, (11" X 17"), shall be bound into the manual. Larger drawings shall be folded and inserted into transparent envelopes which are bound into the manual. d. Installation drawings which show devices from many specification sections shall be submitted separately. Contractor shall submit eight blue line copies and one reproducible copy of all such installation drawings. 2. Contractor shall submit a complete set of scaled, dimensioned drawings for all equipment racks, plates and panels. Show finishes, mounting condition, doors and lock type and catalog number. Submit a scaled, dimensioned drawing for all custom plates with all connectors, controls, switches and indicators identified by manufacturer and part number and with all designations and finishes shown. 3. Contractor shall submit a complete one line drawing showing all system components in the head end equipment including splitters, taps, combiners and booster amplifiers. The signal distribution one line diagram shall show levels and losses throughout the system. It shall account for all cable loss, tap loss, through loss and amplifier gain. It shall show a predicted signal level at the output of each tap which is between +10dB and +15dB. These drawings shall be 11" x 17" or "B" size and shall be bound into the Material List Submission. 4. The Architect reserves the right to require submission of samples of any material or equipment proposed for use under this contract for evaluation and approval. Where samples are requested for evaluation and approval, they must be submitted within five working days from the date of the request. 5. A copy of all measurements and readings shall be installed in all line extender cabinets. 6. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect as a condition of final payment and acceptance, the following documentation: a. A single reproducible set of drawings of each system, exactly as it was installed with all cable numbers designated on the drawings. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Television System Specifications 16781-2 b. Three copies of the test results for each system installed. The test results shall be presented in a printed or typed format in soft cover binders. c. Three copies of complete operating and service manuals containing schematic drawings and service manuals on all types of active and passive equipment installed. C. Operation and Service Manual Submission with As-Built Drawings. 1. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect as a condition of final payment and acceptance the following documents: a. Manufacturer's operation and service manuals with schematics, data sheets and service and operation information for each active and passive system component. b. A copy of all test results obtained during system checkout. c. Each manual shall contain copies of all drawings specific to this system, including rack elevations, one line diagrams of the existing head end and of the distribution equipment, and any details. d. A single reproducible set of drawings for the entire system, including installation plan drawings with all "as built" revisions showing accurate conduit paths and wire numbers. e. A single blue line set of the drawings provided in d. above shall be folded and inserted in pockets in a copy of the service manual. This manual is to be placed in a plastic pocket mounted on the inside of the rear door of the main equipment rack. 1.05 Quality Assurance A. Work shall conform to California Electrical Code. B. All active and passive devices and all coaxial cables and connectors installed from the headend mainline amplifier through the most remote tap or termination in the system shall exceed FCC regulations Part 76, Sub-Part "k". Radiation requirements for connectors, cables and passive devices must exceed 80DB. C. All work shall be performed by a qualified television antenna system contractor holding a valid California Contractor's license of a class for the work to be performed. The Contractor shall be an authorized Engineering Contractor of an equipment manufacturer of established reputation and experience who has supplied similar apparatus for at least 5 years. D. All wiring enclosures, terminal cabinets, outlets, control boxes, the frames of cabinet racks, and other enclosures shall be grounded in compliance with the requirements of the California Electrical Code. E. The Contractor shall provide a warranty for equipment specified to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years after system is installed and accepted by the Owner. F. Contractor shall include in the Material List Submission a list of five projects of similar scope and shall have a service organization capable of responding to warranty service requests within twenty-four hours of receipt of written notification. Contractor shall include in the material list submission a list of projects with the telephone number of the customer's client contact for each project and a letter signed by a corporate officer, a partner or the owner of the contracting company describing the service capability of the company and stating the company's commitment to maintain that service capability through the warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Equipment Standards A. Where applicable all active electronic equipment installed under this contract shall be listed by UL. B. All television equipment and components exclusive of cable shall be like products of a single manufacturer except otherwise approved by the Architect. C. Equipment Requirements: Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Television System Specifications 16781-3 1. Items of equipment shown on the Drawings and as mentioned in the Specifications are chosen from products manufactured by Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc. To further establish a reference for comparison of specifications which meet the Hospital's requirements, it is understood that the manufacturers published specification sheets on all items so named, are wholly embodied herein. 2. The Architect will establish equivalency and compliance of product or components offered for use under this Contract. 2.02 Equipment A. Mainline Distribution Amplifier and Extender Amplifier: The mainline distribution amplifiers shall be integrated push pull circuitry housed in a heavy die cast 100% shielded enclosure. The amplifiers shall have mounting tabs for securing to any flat surface. The amplifiers shall be equal to Blonder Tongue BIDA 550-30, BIDA 550-50, or RMDA-550-30 for rack mounting as required and shall meet or exceed the following specifications: 1. Passband: 50 to 550 MHz. 2. Flatness: + 0.75 dB or better. 3. Minimum Full Gain: 33dBor49dB. 4. Manual Gain Control Range: 15dB. 5. Manual Slope Control Range: 10 dB. 6. Minimum Return Loss: 14 dB input and output. 7. Terminal Impedance: 75 ohms. 8. Noise Figure: 7.0 dB maximum. 9. Hum Modulation: -65 dB. 10. Number of Channels: 77. 11. Output Level: a. Lowest Channel: 44 dBmv. b. Highest Channel: 44 dBmv. 12. Composite Triple Beat Distortion -58 dB 13. Cross Modulation: -61 dB. 14. AC input: 120 volt, 60HZ. 15. RF Shielding: 90 dB. 16. Operating Temperature: -20° C. to 60° C. 17. Unit shall be two way capable with the addition of passive return filters Blonder Tonque BIDA-RF and Active Return Amplifiers, Blonder Tonque BIDA-RA. B. Isolation Directional Couplers Outlets and Tapoffs: All taps and/or tap-outlets shall be of the directional coupler design for installation in specified outlet boxes or junction boxes. The specified directional couplers and directional coupler tapoffs shall be chosen by the Contractor for installation at the outlets, junction-boxes and terminal cabinets in accordance with physical size requirements and they shall be chosen to provide the highest tap isolation values permissible in each system design to meet performance requirements. They shall be equal to Blonder Tongue V-3889. C. Two-Way Splitters: The two-way VHF/UHF splitter combiners shall consist of a 75 ohms hybrid network mounted in a die cast zinc housing with F series fittings. The network shall be equal to Blonder Tongue # SUV-2 and SUV-4 and shall meet or exceed the following specifications: 1. Passband: 10 to 890 MHz 2. Loss (in each leg): 4.0 dB nominal 10-470 MHz. SUV-2 4.5 dB nominal 470-900 MHz. SUV-2 7.5 db nominal 10-470 MHz. SUV-4 9.0 db nominal 470-900 MHz. SUV-4 3. Isolation (between terminals B & C) 20 dB nominal 10-300 MHz 18 dB nominal 470-810 MHz 4. Impedance: 75 ohms at all terminals Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Television System Specifications 16781-4 5. Match (at all terminals): 18 dB nominal 10-50 MHz 12 dB nominal 50-1000 MHz 6. Radiation: Meet or exceed FCC Regulations. D. Radiation Proof Directional Couplers: Four outlet directional couplers shall be Blonder Tongue SDC-4 with radiation shielding. The coupler shall be weather protected. Bandwith: 5-1000 MHz Isolation Values (dB) = 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 30. E. Diplexer for Sub-band and VHF Channels 1. 75 Ohm frequency dividing multiplexers shall be employed for isolating and separating VHF/CATV TV signals (50 to 550 MHz) from sub-channel signals (5 to 30 MHz). They shall permit two-way transmission of RF signals on a single coaxial cable. Typical isolation between bands shall be 55 dB with a match of 15dBRL 2. Diplexers shall be Blonder-Tongue model DSV or equivalent. High-Pass Low-Pass Filter Section Filter Section Impedance 75 Ohms 75 Ohms Passband Frequency 50 to 550 MHz 5 to 30 MHz Bandpass Flatness 0.5 dB PA/ 0.5 dB PA/ Insertion Loss 0.5 dB 0.5 dB Match Input Return Loss 14 dB 14 dB Output Return Loss 14 dB 14 dB Stopband Frequency 5 to 40 MHz 45 to 1000 MHz Minimum Attenuation 5 to 30 MHz 55 dB 30 to 35 MHz 45 dB 45 to 500 MHz 55 dB 50 to 550 MHz 45 dB 550 to 1000 MHz 45 dB Power Passing Cap. No 500 mA 2.03 Accessories A. Terminal outlets in system from remote directional coupler tap, shall be designed to mount in a single gang box. Terminal outlets shall have an integral 75 ohm resistor and a cable connector actuated switch which automatically terminates the tap line when the push-on cable connector is withdrawn. Terminal outlets shall be equal to Blonder Tongue V-ST. Antennas and mast shall be suitable for a 100 MPH wind load. B. Coaxial Connectors: 1. Provide coaxial connectors that are used with 412 type cables and which provide continuous maximum radiation security which exceeds FCC requirements for radiation suppression. All connectors for cable-to housing, seized center conductor, termination adaptors and splice connectors shall exhibit the same radiation suppression characteristics. 2. Coaxial connectors that are used with the specified cables shall be F type fittings with separate crimp rings. C. Terminators provided shall be precision 75 ohm types, 1/4 watt F type terminator designed for use in the 54 to 300 MHz and 470 to 890 MHz frequency range. Terminators shall be equal to Blonder Tongue BTF-TP. D. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Racks and cabinets shall be furnished with the required 120 volt power outlets for the active system components. E. Audio-Video Input Panels: Provide custom audio-video input panels as indicated on Drawings. Input panels shall consist of an engraved stainless steel cover plate with a UHF type SO-239 video receptacle and a Cannon type XLR-3-31 audio receptacle. The cover plate shall be engraved "VIDEO-IN" and "AUDIO-IN". Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Television System Specifications 16781-5 2.04 Coaxial Cables A. Typically, coaxial cables provided shall consist of three basic types and shall meet or exceed the following specifications: 1. Coaxial cables shall be RG-6, RG-11, or 412 Type. 2. All RG-6, and RG-11 types used in the system shall be constructed as follows: a. Center conductor, RG-6: 18 gage copper-clad steel with 21% minimum conductivity. Center conductor, RG-11: 14 gage copper-clad steel with 21% minimum conductivity. b. Dielectric: Foamed polyethylene. c. First Shield: 2 mil laminate of aluminum and polyester with a 1/8" overlap. d. Second Shield: 40% density aluminum braid. e. Jacket: Low temperature polyvinyl chloride. B. Approved RG-6 type cables shall be used for feeders, antenna down leads, internal rack wiring and trunks as designed on the Drawings. The main usage shall be for feeder lines and tap drops. Where conduit space limitations dictate usage for trunk lines other than as noted on the Drawings, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and obtain approval prior to installation. The Contractor shall be responsible for system performance in all cases where the RG-6 cables are substituted for other specified or drawn trunk cables. All substitutions of approved cable types shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. The RG-6 type cables shall meet the following specifications: 1. Impedance: 75 ohms 2. Return loss match: Better than 20 dB to 890 MHz 3. Attenuation, dB/100 feet: 1.5 dB at 55 MHz 3.43 dB at 300 MHz 4.51 dB at 500 MHz 4. Sweep tested and 5 to 1000 MHz certified from: 5. Radiation shielding: 80 dB, minimum. C. Approved RG-11 type cables shall be used for trunk lines as noted on the Drawings and shall be flooded when used underground. Cables shall meet the following specifications: 1. Impedance: 75 ohms 2. Return loss match: Better than 21 dB to 890 MHz 3. Attenuation, dB/100 feet: .95 dB at 55 MHz 2.17 dB at 300 MHz 2.85 dB at 500 MHz 3.58 dB at 750 MHz 4. Sweep tested and certified from: 5 to 1000 MHz 5. Radiation shielding: 80 dB, minimum. D. Jacketed 412 type cable shall be used for trunk lines where noted on the Drawings, shall be flooded when used underground and shall meet the following specifications: 1. Impedance: 75 ohms 2. Attenuation dB/100 ft at 70 degrees F: 0.68 dB at 55 MHz 1.35dBat211 MHz 2.03 dB at 450 MHz 2.68 dB at 750 MHz 3. Center Conductor: Copper-clad aluminum, 14 gage, diameter .092". 4. Dielectric: Foamed Polyethylene. 5. Seamless Aluminum Sheath Jacket: Outside diameter: .412" Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Television System Specifications 16781-6 6. Outer Jacket: Black polyethylene 7. Sweep tested and certified: 5 to 1000 MHz E. All cables provided shall be new cables of recent manufacture. Cables which show bruises, kinks, or shipping damage shall not be installed in the system. Cables shall be as manufactured by Times Fiber Communications, Inc. or approved equal. F. Audio cables used for the CCTV input to the modulators shall be miniature type standard 2-conductor, shielded with Mylar and integral drain wire with an overall vinyl jacket with a nominal outside diameter of .135". G. Cable entries to junction boxes shall use water proof grip connectors T & B series 2000 service entrance cable sheathed connectors. Connectors used with aluminum sheathed cables shall be designed to prevent corrosion caused by matching of dissimilar metals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. All coaxial cable runs shall be continuous between devices. No connectors, fittings, terminations, splices or passive devices shall be installed in any inaccessible location. Said connections shall only be made at outlets, junction-boxes or terminal cabinets or as noted on Drawings. B. All exposed conduit clamps, mast brackets, mounting frames and accessory hardware shall be heavy gage steel and be hot-dip galvanized. C. Where splitters and couplers are mounted in terminal cabinets they shall be mounted using L-brackets with cable connections made in a vertical plane. D. Exterior junction boxes for conduit and coaxial cable runs shall be 6" x 6" x 4" weatherproof enclosures and shall be Federal Model A6R44. Conduit entries to junction boxes shall use compression waterproof connectors. E. All coaxial cable connectors shall be of the solderless type with nominal impedance of 75 ohms. F. All coaxial cables entering and leaving terminal cabinets and junction boxes shall be tagged with plastic coated cable markers wrapped around cable. G. All coaxial cables used for interconnection in terminal cabinets shall be tagged and neatly dressed to facilitate servicing and identification. H. All coaxial connectors shall be installed using factory recommended tools designed for the connectors being installed. I. All equipment shall be mounted to rack rails or to panels which are mounted to rack rails. Cables to all equipment shall be routed vertically at the inside wall of the rack and shall be neatly bundled and secured to the rack or the rail. Cables shall be broken out for each item of equipment and routed horizontally. Cables shall not be run horizontally for more than nine inches without being secured. Cables and cords to panel mounted equipment shall all enter from the same side to allow the panel to be swung out for access and service. 3.02 Adjacent Channel Interference A. In reception areas where adjacent are received on the antenna arrays the Contractor shall provide high-Q-traps or band pass filters for attenuating the unwanted signals a minimum of 40 dB on both aural and visual carriers. The systems installed under this contract shall show no visible evidence, when viewed on a standard school receiver, of interference caused by antenna pickup of adjacent channels. The Contractor shall install all such devices at no extra cost to the Owner. 3.03 Grounding A. All equipment in the headend cabinets shall be bonded together with a common braided grounding wire which shall be grounded to the nearest earth ground. 3.04 Testing - Documentation - Proof Of Performance A. Before the Contract is considered complete, the Contractor shall demonstrate the performance of the system in the presence of the Architect. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Television System Specifications 16781-7 B. The Architect may order any changes, adjustments, or further tests deemed necessary to assure that the systems are complete and operational in accordance with the Specifications. C. The Contractor shall provide all test and reception gear required to prove the performance as outlined and all costs of test and documentation will be borne by the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall provide the following equipment for testing and proof-of- performance. 1. A solid state video signal generator capable of providing color bars and test patterns, Extron model VTG 200 or equal and an Agile audio-video modulator with audio and video inputs and sub band through 550 Mhz output, broadcast and CATV, including HRC and IRC assignments, Blonder Tongue AM 40-550 with Opt.H., or equal. 2. A field strength meter capable of displaying the video and audio carrier levels for all channels used, Wavetek SAM-2000 or equal. E. The Owner will provide a standard EIA color television receiver for system checkout. The Contractor may verify the convergence of the receiver supplied for testing of ringing and color fidelity. F. Using the test equipment as outlined the Contractor shall conduct and record the following tests: 1. Aural and visual signal level measurements on every received channel. 2. Aural and visual signal level measurements on every received and distributed channel at the end tap of each branch, and at random taps of each branch in each system. 3. Signal-to-noise ratio at the output of the last active device in the system. 4. Using the received and processed television signals, visual checks shall be conducted on all received and originated signals at the source and compared to the outlets in the distribution system. System features which shall be checked using the test receiver are as follows: a. Evidence of ringing, ghosting, noise and changes in hue or color fidelity at all test points. b. Evidence of cross-channel intermodulation components. c. Evidence of any RF beats in any received or distributed channel. d. Visual evidence of hum modulation in installed system observed on a blank screen. 5. Measure and record th sub-band return channel performance from the last tap and from the weakest tap in each branch to the input of the head end distribution channel processor utilized by the return channel system. Measure and record the level of the return channel signal at each distribution amplifier in the system. 6. To test return characteristics, radiation integrity and sub-channel capabilities of each system the Contractor shall provide the following test equipment. a. A Sub-channel Modulator on assigned output channel T-10 (23.75 - 29.75 MHz). b. A frequency splitter with output spigots of 0 to 47 MHz and 54 to 216 MHz. c. A Sub to VHF Channel Processor for Channel T-10 to VHF Channel 8. 7. In the Sub-Channel return tests the Contractor shall insert the sub-channel at the last tap on each feeder line and at the input point of line extender frequency splitters where line extenders are used. Each feeder line in each system shall be tested for the return characteristics. 8. To complete the testing of this portion of the proof-of-performance, the Contractor shall use the 12 inch Color Monitor receiver provided under these specifications for a color picture and audio source for the sub-channel modulator. The returned channel will be reviewed at the headend after conversion on a standard school receiver supplied by the Owner. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Television System Specifications 16781-8 9. Visual checks of the return signals shall be viewed for noise cross-modulation components and interference in the presence of color picture and without modulation. G. Correction of Defects: If the Architect deems that the system or any part of the system does not meet the specified performance, the Contractor shall conduct further tests including complete sweep analysis to locate faulty or defective components or faulty workmanship. The Contractor shall replace any defective components, parts or cables before further tests are ordered. H. Records: 1. All measurements and readings taken during system checkout shall be recorded and included with the manuals and as-built drawings. 2. A copy of all measurements and readings shall be installed in all headend and line extender cabinets. 3. Contractor shall supply as a condition of final payment and acceptance, the following documentation: a. A single reproducible drawing of each system, exactly as it was installed with all cable numbers designated on the drawings. Send to Architect to file. b. Three copies of the test results for each system installed under this contract. The test results shall be presented to a printed or typed format in soft cover binders. c. Three copies of complete service manuals containing schematic drawings and service manuals on all types of active and passive equipment installed under this contract; one copy of which is to be retained by Owner; others by Maintenance Electronic Shop. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Television System Specifications 16781 - 9 SECTION 17000 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The work described within this section shall be coordinated and provided as described herein. The contractor shall review the scope of services described, and within the contract drawings. All required reference, coordination efforts and infrastructure to be included whether shown or implied. It is recommended that the affected subcontractors conduct a pre-construction meeting prior to installation to discuss, review and address all necessary installation requirements for the Audio- Visual systems and infrastructure. B. This section is to describe the work required for the installation of a fully-integrated Audio/Visual system within building. The Contractor shall include all labor and materials required to provide a system as defined to properly perform and operate the equipment as it is intended. C. Audio-Visual systems shall be located within Building "A", Shooting Range and Classroom Building. Rooms with the building which shall contain equipment are: 1. Lobby/Entry #101 2. Conference Room #114 3. 2nd Floor Lobby #209A 4. Divisible Training Classroom #201 (North Side) 5. Divisible Training Classroom #201 (South Side) D. The central input point of connection and distribution of the building cable television signal will be located within Tele/Data Room #107. Refer to electrical drawings for additional information and requirements. E. This Specification, in conjunction with the Drawings, establishes the requirements necessary to achieve the intended performance, installation and functions of the Multi-Media Presentation Systems in locations noted. F. Contractor to provide the services necessary to furnish, install, train, and to provide maintenance support for the Multi-Media Presentation Systems including all required peripheral apparatus conforming to acceptable industry standards. All work shall be in accordance with the true intent of these Drawings and Specifications, and as required to leave the Multi-Media Presentation System complete and in satisfactory operating condition. G. Verify dimensions and conditions at the job site prior to installation, and perform installation in accordance with these Specifications, Manufacturers recommendations and the latest edition or revision of all applicable building and industry codes and standards. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-1 H. The wireless Multi-Media Presentation Systems located in the Divisible Training Classroom #201 shall include providing and integrating the following principal systems: 1. Audio/Video Switching. 2. Sound Reinforcement and distribution. 3. Video interface equipment. 4. Audio and Video interface equipment and components. 5. Independent or combined system control capabilities. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, transportation, temporary construction and special and occasional services to make complete, working audio- visual and auxiliary systems. Demonstrate by specified tests that all components and the completed systems meet the specifications. 1. It shall be the responsibility of the Audio/Visual contractor to coordinate and direct all installation and power requirements with the project electrical contractor prior to submission of bidding for cost and prior to the beginning work for installation. 2. Audio-Visual system installer to review the contract documents and confirm all power and infrastructure requirements. Any additional installation requirements not shown within the contract documents or specified herein, shall be noted and addressed with the appropriate subcontractors prior to bidding. All additional costs associated with the necessity to add power, conduit or interface equipment for proper operation shall be borne by the contractor. B. Work Included, but not limited to the following: 1. All wiring and cabling. 2. All audio-visual system receptacles and faceplates for interfacing systems. 3. All equipment and materials. 4. The support and back-cans for all recessed ceiling fixed speakers 5. The articulating support brackets for wall-mounted television units 6. The supports for projection equipment 7. Cover-plates for outlet and junction boxes. 8. Extension rings where required to provide a flush surface for cover-plate mounting on finished walls 9. Engraved nameplates on all boxes, equipment racks and equipment. 10. Coordination and integration of system controls with motorized projection screens in Divisible Classroom. 11. Cable television signal distribution to all shown equipment from main MATV distribution point in Room #107 throughout. C. Related Work to be provided by others: 1. All conduits including device junction boxes and pull-wires are to be furnished and installed. For reference, refer to Division 16 sections. 2. Safety wires for all fixed system equipment. 3. The isolated grounding electrode, isolated grounding electrode conductor and other equipment and materials for this isolated ground system are specified, furnished and installed under Division 16. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-2 1.03 SCHEDULE OF WORK AND SUBMITTALS A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Prepare complete product and systems shop drawings for proposed Audio/Visual System for review, in accordance with the General Conditions shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Submission of shop drawings, samples and layouts for all items described herein. 2. Completion dates for the following tests: 3. Labels for equipment racks and equipment. 4. Example of engraved cover plates. F. Test results shall be submitted for review for the following as specified herein: 1. Performance tests on completed component sub-assemblies including all racks, consoles and enclosures. 2. Performance tests on the complete system. G. Layouts shall be submitted for approval as follows: 1. Individual Room layouts showing equipment locations and dimensions. 2. Equipment racks ("AVR"), showing locations, dimensions and connections. 3. Wiring Diagrams and routing for all equipment and interface H. Product Data Submittal: The Contractor shall submit for review a complete and final lest of all components that are to be furnished. This list shall be in the same order and format as the Specifications and shall include confirming manufacturers' independent test data for each specified item. A brochure and photograph (unless included in the brochure) of each item shall also be furnished. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless otherwise stated, all electrical, electronic and optical equipment shall be products of firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical, electronic or optical equipment. The equipment shall be the latest model or type offered which meets the applicable specifications at the time of the submittal. Discontinued items replaced by newer models or versions are acceptable and shall be noted as "Alternate" in the submittal for review. B. Quality of workmanship and fabrication of all equipment and components which are custom fabricated shall be comparable to professional equipment produced by specialized manufacturers of the trade involved and shall be verified by observation. Only skilled craftsmen of the profession required shall be utilized for all aspects of the fabrication and installation of the system. C. All materials and products shall be new and of professional quality designed for the intended use. No used materials shall be installed. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-3 1.05 WARRANTIES A. All warranties shall be provided in accordance with Division 1 General Requirements. B. A full two (2) year warranty from the time of system acceptance shall be provided in writing covering all components and systems including materials and workmanship. This obligation is limited to exclude conditions of misuse. C. The Contractor shall submit, in writing, provision during the warranty period of one year for availability of service personnel within twenty-four (24) hours of call and for exchange of faulty components within seven days. This service requires assurance of commitment by the subcontractors and suppliers of all components. 1.06 AIDS TO USE A. All record documentation, Operation and Maintenance Data and training shall be provided in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Upon completion, the Contractor shall provide: 1. Manuals of operating and maintenance literature, pursuant to the requirements of the General Conditions. 2. System geographical layout and block diagrams under a plastic cover on the door of the AVR cabinets. 3. Contractor to provide a minimum of two (2) days of training for City of Carlsbad personnel in the operation, upkeep and basic maintenance of the system. 4. During the installation, all cables and wires shall be labeled. The type, number and location of all microphones, speakers and other receptacles shall be engraved on the receptacle cover plates and shall be shown on the system diagrams. 1.07 MAINTENANCE OF SYSTEM A. The Contractor shall, for the first year of system operation: 1. Establish and provide an approved maintenance program for all Audio-Visual and Communication systems specified herein. Coordinate with the City of Carlsbad. 2. Perform a complete system survey, including critical electronic and optional measurements, on a quarterly basis and provide written summary for review. 1.08 ROOM DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEMS A. General: Contractor shall install all necessary equipment and support infrastructure to provide the systems as described in locations where noted. 1. Systems shall be provided and installed with all necessary interconnection and wiring for proper function. 2. A requirement noted or inferred in this specification section shall have the same effect as if it were included in all parts. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-4 B. Lobby/Entry #101: The lobby shall be provided with one (1) wall mounted television units as shown. The units shall have input from cable television signal, computer desktop or DVD Player unit. The DVD player and computer desktop unit shall be remote located in the Range Master's Office #105. (Computer at desk and DVD provided by owner). C. Conference Room #114: The conference room shall be provided with wall mounted television unit as shown. The unit shall receive input from cable television signal or from recessed floor mounted computer interface unit to be located in the center of the room. D. 2nd Floor Lobby #209A: The vending area shall be provided with one (1) wall mounted television units as shown. The units shall have input from cable television signal, computer desktop or DVD Player unit. The DVD player and computer desktop unit shall be remote located in the Range Master's Office #105. (Computer at desk and DVD provided by owner). E. Divisible Classroom #201 (North & South): The classroom shall have two (2) independent systems that can be operated independently or combined as one master controlled system when operable wall stored. a. Each system shall be provided with one (1) suspended overhead projector unit, and one (1) recessed motorized projection screen. Operation shall be through wireless touch panel unit. b. Each system shall be provided with a sound reinforcement system distributing sound through recessed ceiling mounted speakers. Operation shall be through wireless touch panel unit. Systems shall have the capability to be combined into one system. c. Both north & south portions of the classrooms shall have multiple computer interface locations (CIU) in locations shown on the drawings. Signal input shall terminate at the independent AVR racks. d. Each system shall be controlled with an intuitive wireless control system for the audio-visual equipment, motorized projection screen, lighting controls, and sound systems via portable touch panels unit. Touch panel shall have one master control for combined system and one slave control for independent. e. Divisible classroom shall be provided with one (1) ADA required hearing impaired audio system for use when operable wall is stored. System will be equipped with rechargeable headset units and be integrated into sound reinforcement system. F. MATV System shall allow reception and distribution of Television broadcasts throughout the facility. Cable service, equipment and associated installation to be provided by City of Carlsbad. Audio/Visual systems will allow for the incorporation of this equipment into the Sound Reinforcement and Video Systems. Refer to the electrical drawings for additional information on cable television distribution system and outlet locations. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-5 1.09 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. The work specified herein shall be accomplished and/or under the direction of a single Audio-Visual Systems Specialty Contractor experienced in the design, fabrications, installation, checkout and warranty contract management of systems such as those described in each section. This specialty Contractor shall have complete responsibility for the systems described herein and shall be the single contact point for the City of Carlsbad with respect to all work specified herein. B. The bidder shall, with the bid, in accordance with the Instruction to Bidders, submit at least the following information to verify that the bidder has the necessary experience and qualifications to perform the specified work: 1. A detailed brochure describing its capabilities in terms of facilities, personnel, experience background, examples of similar installations (at least two projects within the past two years), distribution arrangements with manufacturers and financial capability 2. Information identifying any and all local agents and/or subcontractors who will assist in the work in their role in the project. 3. Identification of sources of labor for all fabrication and installation throughout the duration of the project. 4. Evidence that he has acquired all the necessary licenses and approvals to perform the specified work. 5. Information on how and by whom it will fulfill the requirements of the warranty period. 6. Equipment to be furnished, per paragraph 2.01 below. 7. This submittal must justify that the Contractor has the capability to manage and install a project of this size and scope and that he is capable of the necessary business and technical arrangements for this installation and the pursuant warranty service. C. The Contractor shall have on his staff a qualified project engineer. This person shall: 1. Be a university graduate engineer in electrical or electronic engineering or physics, and have at least five (5) years experience with similar electronic specialty systems or other approved educational experience background. 2. Observe at all time a good working relationship with the Architect and City of Carlsbad's representatives, and cooperate with engineers and technicians assigned by the City of Carlsbad, who are charged with the operation and maintenance of the system. 3. Provide a technical liaison between the Contractor, the Architect, and the City of Carlsbad. This shall include participation in meetings and conferences. He will be required to be present at the job site for final observation, approve the operating and maintenance manuals, and provide the specified instruction to designated members of the City of Carlsbad's staff. 4. Be responsible for supervision of all technical work which is part of the contract. This supervision includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Preparation of all construction drawings from information within the specifications and the drawings. b. Supervision of shop fabrication and field installation work to assure conformance with the contract drawings, the specifications and the approved shop drawings to assure workmanship of the highest quality. He shall oversee the testing of all assemblies and sub-assemblies prior to delivery to the job sit. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-6 c. Take a leading role in the specified testing of the completed installation to assure himself for the Contractor that all specifications are met. Coordinate, and be present at, the Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance observations. 1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS TO SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT A. Proposed substitutions for approved equipment specified under this Section shall conform with Section 01030 of the Specifications. B. The Contractor shall submit for review, with the bid, a complete list of proposed substitutions for approved equipment listed in Part 2, below. All proposed substitutions of specified components and equipment shall be listed as addenda to the base bid. The base bid shall include all equipment specified in Part 2, below. C. For all substitutions, the Contractor shall provide manufacturer's independent test data to demonstrate that the proposed alternatives to the approved equipment comply with the specifications. Specifications shall contain at least all information available for the specified product. D. The Contractor shall submit a description or drawings showing all changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for proper functionality and operation. E. Proposed substitutions shall not affect dimensions shown on the Contract Document except as submitted for review and approved by the City of Carlsbad. F. Any redesign or construction costs required to integrate the proposed substitution shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Any costs incurred by the City of Carlsbad, its representatives, Architect, or Consultants attributable to the integration of a proposed substitution shall be borne by the Contractor. G. Any proposed substitution shall have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule or specified warranty requirements. H. The functionality, performance, general appearance and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent to or superior to those of the specified item. I. Any change to the Contract (deductive or additive cost) associated with a proposed substitution shall be submitted to the City of Carlsbad for review at the time the substitution is proposed and accompanying the substitution request documentation. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-7 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.00 GENERAL A. Material and equipment specified herein have been selected on the basis of acceptable quality and performance and have been coordinated to function as components of the included systems. Where a particular material, device, equipment or system is specified directly, the current manufacturer's specification for same is a part of these specifications, as if completely elaborated herein. B. Unless otherwise stated, all equipment and components shall be products of firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of projection, electronic or curtain equipment and components. C. All manufacturers' stock equipment and component labeling and console designations will be in English. All system nomenclature, signage and custom labeling pertaining to routine system operation shall be either on the equipment itself or on descriptive drawings, charts or diagrams. D. The equipment listed in section 2.01, below, consists of all major equipment for the project. The Contractor will integrate into the system design and provide any additional components, wiring, programming, etc., to complete a functional system operating as described within the specifications and shown on the drawings. E. In the event that a specified piece of equipment or product has been superseded, discontinued or is no longer available from the manufacturer, the Contractor may submit alternate for substitution of the originally specified product as described in paragraph 2.01. The substitute product shall be the manufacturer's most current model of the specified product, or if the specific product line has been discontinued, a product by the same manufacturer with specifications meeting or exceeding, and as close as possible to those of the originally specified product. F. Components or equipment not specified or indicated on the drawings that are required to make fully functional systems per the City of Carlsbad's requirements and the implied or described design intent, shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor, and shall be submitted for City of Carlsbad review with the Bid. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-8 2.01 EQUIPMENT Following is a list of the major equipment to be furnished and installed according to general system type or space type: Refer to drawings for additional information. A. Lobby #101: (Stand Alone System): 1. Audio-Visual Display Units 1) One (1) High Definition (1080p) Flat 50" Panel Display: Panasonic Model #TH-50PF11UK with Panasonic Speaker Kit Model #TY-SP50P8WK. 2) Full Swing/Tilt Wall Mount: Omni-Mount U3-T Wall Mount Kit 3) DVD Player: Panasonic Model DVD-S54 or Equivalent. Locate in Range Master's Office Room #105. 4) Extron RGB4 64 xi Computer Interface Unit. Locate in Range Master's Office Room #105. B. Conference Room #114: (Stand Alone System): 1. Audio-Visual Display Units 1) High Definition (1080p) Flat 65" Panel Display: Panasonic Model #TH- 65PF11UK with Panasonic Speaker Kit Model #TY-SP65P7W-K. 2) Full Swing/Tilt Wall Mount: Omni-Mount U3-T Wall Mount Kit 3) Extron RGB4 64 xi Computer Interface Unit. Locate in center of room. C. 2nd Floor Lobby #209A: (Stand Alone System): 1. Audio-Visual Display Units 1) One (1) High Definition (1080p) Flat 50" Panel Display: Panasonic Model #TH-50PF11 UK with Panasonic Speaker Kit Model #TY-SP50P8WK. 2) Full Swing/Tilt Wall Mount: Omni-Mount U3-T Wall Mount Kit 3) DVD Player: Panasonic Model DVD-S54 or Equivalent. Locate in Range Master's Office Room #105. 4) Extron RGB4 64 xi Computer Interface Unit. Locate in Range Master's Office Room #105 D. Divisible Classroom #201: (Two Stand Alone Systems): 1. Audio Equipment 1) Wireless Microphone System: Shure Diversity Body Pack with #WL183 Omni-directional Lavalier Microphone #ULXP14/83 2) Digital Processing Unit: Biamp Nexia PM with 4 mic/line inputs, 6 stereo line inputs and 3 stereo outputs intended for multi-media presentations 3) Power Amplifier - Dual 70.7 Volt: #QSC CX302V (250 watts per channel) 4) Full-Range Ceiling Loudspeaker: Atlas Sound Speaker Package #HD72W 10oz Loudspeaker 25/70.74W xfmr/62-8; Refer to Drawings for locations 5) Audio connections to provide single system use of al! speakers. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-9 2. Video Equipment 1) S-VHS VCR/DVD Player: Panasonic Model PV-D4745K or Equivalent 2) TV Tuner: Contemporary Research #232-MTA 3) Rack Kit for A/V Tuner: Contemporary Research 4) Seven (7) Input Video System Switcher: Extron System 7SC #60- 340-01 5) Video Projector: Mitsubishi Model No. XD2000U Digital Projector DLP-XGA, 1024 x 768 - 16.7 million colors (24-bit), 3,500 Lumens - Digital Zoom. Provide with ceiling mount and support. 3. Infrared Listening System (One system for Room) 1) Integrated 2-Channel Infrared System: SoundPlus® Model #WIR SYS 90 PRO. Integrate into to room audio system. 1) Transmitter: SoundPlus® Model #WIR TX90 2) Five (5) Receivers: SoundPlus® Model #WIR RX16 3) Charging Station: SoundPlus® Model #CHG 516 4. Control System 1) Integrated Master/NetLinx: AMX #NI-4100, Controller with 404 MIPS Processor 2) Wireless Touch Panel: AMX #NXT-CV10 10-inch Table Top Touch Panel with 128 MB Compact Flash Memory: 16:9 Aspect Ratio, 8I/R ports, 8 Relays and 4 NXC Card Slots (1 Central Control System) 3) Dual COM Serial Port Control Card: AMX #NXC-COM2, RS- 232/422/485 4) Wireless Compact Flash Card: AMX #NXA-WC80211 g/CF 5) Quick Charger: AMX #NXT-CHG Kit, FG2250-50k 6) Integrate control with motorized projection screen Specification Section 11132 7) Units to provide independent use and combined use of both systems. 5. Racks, Mounting Hardware and Miscellaneous 1) Ceiling Plate: Chief #CMA-110, 1 1/2" NPT fitting 2) Extron RGB4 64 xi Computer Interface Unit. Locate in walls and floors throughout room. Refer to drawings for locations. 3) Projector Mounting Plate: Mitsubishi #XD2000U 4) Equipment Rack: Middle Atlantic 24 Space Rotating Sliding Rail System 5) Rack Shelf: Middle Atlantic 2 space Black Custom Rack shelf Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-10 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.0 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. The following Installation requirements shall govern the design, fabrication and installation of the system(s) specified herein. In case of a discrepancy between these overall system standards and the individual equipment item specifications, the latter shall govern: a. The equipment specified shall be installed according to standards of good human engineering practice and the conditions specified herein. b. Workmanship on the installed systems shall be of professionally quality, best commercial practice and accomplished by persons experienced in the techniques and standards of the particular industries involved. c. The specifications describe required performance. The specifications describe a general design; it is the intention of the specification that the Contractor will supply from his background of experience and knowledge the necessary supporting details; for example, the implementation of specific components into functioning sub-systems. d. In general, the specifications describe materials, qualities and methods. Any work not mentioned in the specifications, shall be performed as though gully set forth in the specifications. In case of conflicts, the decision of the City of Carlsbad shall govern. Work not particularly detailed, marked or specified, shall be construed to be the same as similar parts or areas that are detailed, marked, or specified. 2. Equipment markings shall present only needed information and be readable from the operator's normal work position. These markings shall be designed to minimize ambiguous interpretation. 3. Control panels shall be designed to reduce chances of human error and controls shall be natural and consonant with normal operator expectations. 4. All control consoles and their panel mountings shall be provided with the necessary controls, clocks and switches, etc., as outlined in the pertinent sections of the specification. The grouping of these facilities shall, in all cases, be arranged to present a neat, functional appearance. The layout of controls shall be such that priority of accessibility shall be given to those facilities which frequently require attention. 5. The total design of the system shall simplify the operator's task and insure maximum performance and reliability while minimizing possibilities for human error and providing a comfortable environment for the operator during operation. B. The Conduit System: 1. The Contractor shall inspect and verify that the conduit system shall support the installation of the audio-visual systems, and shall report any discrepancies in writing and provide written notification that the conduit system is ready for the Architect's approval. The Contractor shall also verify that conduits are adequate for the wiring and functions specified. 2. Each conduit shall contain wires or cable of the same signal level or the same type of circuitry only. Level lines and control circuits shall be run in their respective, separate conduits. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-11 3. The conduit diagram indicates schematically the functions served by the conduit system. Also, the conduit diagram may indicate the locations at which functions are served at several locations in the facility. 4. Low level lines, medium level lines, video level lines, high C. Wiring and Cabling: 1. During installation both ends of all single wires or cables shall be marked with consecutive approved number markers, and a careful running log kept of route and terminations. After attachment at terminations these markers shall be accessible and readable for identification. A detailed wiring diagram shall be furnished with these numbers shown. At the operational level (i.e., patch panels, Audio-Visual equipment, receptacle boxes, etc.) all-receptacles shall be clearly marked by function and number (when there are many of the same function.) For example, where a given microphone line may appear at several locations, the same label shall show. Extreme care and rigid observation shall be exercised when making patch bay, receptacle, patch cord and extension cable soldered connections. 2. Extreme care must be taken to physically segregate and separate all high level lines from lower level lines. 3. Control cables and power distribution wiring shall not be installed adjacent to signal cables. Power distribution cabling shall be on the opposite side from signal wiring in equipment enclosures and shall be uniformly located throughout an installation. 4. It is intended that, within the Audio-Visual Equipment Rooms and cabinets, all cables and wires that are semi-permanent (i.e., those leading from rack to rack; rack to conduit terminus or rack to equipment locations) shall be carried not within conduit, but rather within ducts, troughs or cable trays mounted along walls or below the ceiling. This provides flexibility, ease or access, ease of modification and promotes order and neatness. 5. Likewise, appropriate hooks along the wall or on the ceiling will aid in running occasional or frequently changed extension cables to use position. 6. A wall location near the racks shall be chosen and suitable suspension "fingers" provided so that all patch cords of a given type can be grouped and suspended. 7. Cables shall be grouped and bundled by type and routed from source to termination in a uniform manner throughout all equipment housing. Care shall be taken not to break the insulation or deform the cable by harness supports. Cables shall not change relative position in a cable group throughout a cable route. 8. Cable support bars shall be installed to support cables in areas of dense harness breakouts such as behind patch panels, distribution amplifiers and other multiple input/output devices. 9. Edge protection material ("cat rack") shall be installed on the edges of holes, lips of ducts or any other point where cables or harnesses cross metallic edges. 10. The contractor shall employ the latest installation practices and materials. Coaxial connectors shall be crimp-on and then soldered. Audio and control wires shall be crimp-on and then soldered. Audio and control wires shall be terminated in crimp-on lugs, and then soldered, at terminal strips or installed with other approved devices. 11. Audio and control cable ends shall be neatly formed and shrinkable tubing applied where necessary to secure the insulation against fraying or raveling. 12. All wire and cable utilized in systems interconnection shall be of the flame retardant type (FR-1 flame test). Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-12 13. Audio and Video cabling. 14. All cabling or system interconnection which passes through or into acoustically isolated areas, shall as sound locks and studios, shall be suitable sealed after cable has been installed. 15. The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying any additional conduit which may be required to complete the system installation in accordance with the specifications. D. Audio-Visual Cabinet Arrangements: The Contractor shall prepare and submit detailed layouts for approval. E. Rack Layouts and Assembly: 1. Great care shall be exercised to keep low level signal lines separated from the AC power lines and from high level signal lines. This shall be observed both in rack layout and in mechanical support or passage within Audio-Visual Equipment Room and Cabinets. 2. Wherever signal lines entering the Cabinets must be connected into racks, the use of intermediate terminal strips shall be used. This will also facilitate the testing of maximum increments of the systems in the Contractor's shop. All connections of lines at terminal strips, as well as at signal receptacles, shall be mechanically secured and then soldered. No unsoldered connections shall be permitted. Where lines approach the racks and terminal strips they shall also be mechanically anchored at the rack, and provided with sufficient slack length to avoid strain, abrasion or wear. F. System Grounding: 1. The "spider" concept, is designed to avoid ground loops and inductive coupling. 2. The systems shall be free of 'hums', stable and free of oscillation with the earth ground temporarily disconnected. 3. The earth ground shall be made at only one point in the system as indicated and shall be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association 70-1990, paragraphs 250-74 Exception No. 4, 250-75 Exception and 384-2 Exception or the equivalent from the latest NEC. 4. The grounding method shall insure that the system is free of the following problems under any mode of operation: a. RF oscillation, pickup and interference. b. Distortion. c. Crosstalk. d. Signal Leakage. e. Audio Hum. 5. Major wiring ducts or trays shall be grounded to the conduit system. 6. The equipment racks shall be isolated from, and not electrically connected to, the building grounding system. This means that the conduit system shall not be electrically connected to the equipment racks and that the equipment racks shall be installed so that they are eclectically isolated from the building structural steel. The racks shall be electrically connected at only one point to the isolated grounding system. 3.01 OVERALL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND QUALIFICATIONS A. High quality laboratory instruments shall be employed to verify, calibrate and adjust the systems. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-13 B. Specific Tests: 1. General: a. Tests shall include but not be limited to those listed below in order to verify that the system meets all design requirements. b. All tests shall be fully recorded and a neat copy presented for review and inclusion in the system manual. c. The Contractor shall pre-assemble and test as much of the system as possible in his own facility before delivery to the project. 2. Performance Tests on Individual Components: a. Perform in Contractor's facility. b. Verify that the manufacturer's specifications are met. c. Measure the impedance and verify the acoustical output and freedom from rattles and distortion of all loudspeakers. 3. Performance Tests on Completed Component Sub-assemblies: a. Perform in Contractors facility. b. Verify the achievement of the specifications for each electronic component in situ, i.e., as assembled in its console, rack or other enclosure, powered by the system power supply and with all other components also activated, i.e., powered and interconnected. The magnitude and character of the threshold noise shall be observed for appearance of hum in excess of that present with individual activation, or the appearance of high frequency oscillation. c. Projection equipment shall be tested to verify that the manufacturer's specifications are met after it has been incorporated into a complete subassembly. 4. Performance Tests on the Complete System: C. Verify that all wiring is correctly and completely installed. Verify that there are no short circuits between conductors within any cable, or from cable to cable. Verify the integrity of each conductor, i.e., that the conductor is not open circuited. In addition, the correct polarity of each connector, including those in patch panels, shall be verified and the color coding scheme shall be recorded and included in the documentation provided to the City of Carlsbad. D. Verify that the entire system performance is in accordance with the design requirements. E. All optical projection system performance shall be in accordance with the following: 1. Projected images shall properly fill their respective screens to full size without "cropping." This may not be the case for the secondary screens in some of the classrooms. 2. Projection lenses shall provide distortion free images without color fringing or aberration. 3. Screen brightness and screen brightness ratio shall reasonably approach the theoretical value based on the projector's specified light output value with the necessary light loss corrections. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-14 F. Test procedures for the optical projection systems shall conform to the following basic guidelines. 1. All equipment items shall be 100% tested for correct functional operation. 2. Image brightness and side-to-center/corner-to-corner brightness distribution ratio shall be determined with a commercial grade light meter (Tektronix, J-16 or approved equal) using the SMPTE standard light measurement technique and form (SMPTE Motion Picture Projection and Theatre Presentation Manual, 1969, page 60). 3. Image brightness and brightness ratios shall be determined as before with the SMPTE method and light meter. Sound track measurement shall be principally by observation but unsatisfactory performance may require further electrical tests. G. All these tests, and any others that the Contractor may wish for his own satisfaction, shall have been performed and successfully achieved before observation is requested. The City of Carlsbad's representative may request repetition and demonstration during observation of certain of these tests of other critical tests if problems become apparent. If specifications are not met, further observations will be at the Contractor's expense. 3.02 PROGRAMMING A. General: 1. Perform the Work of this Section in accordance with acknowledged industry and professional standards and practices, and the procedures specified herein. 2. Furnish all programming labor required for complete and operational systems. 3. User Group Interview: Conduct interview with end users to acquire programming requirements. Submit in writing results of interview and the requirements set forth by the user group. Associate user group requirements into the programming of each system. B. Digital Signal Processor (DSP): Programming of the Digital Signal Processor shall include, but not limited to, the following: 1. A user-friendly graphical interface shall be programmed by the contractor to allow for easy operation of the system. This interface shall allow novice users the control of main system components without having to access the digital schematic diagram. These main system control functions shall include as a minimum: a. Master volume control. b. Zone volume control. c. Room combining. d. Routing. e. Switching. f. Source equipment level control. 2. Signal present indicators shall be placed on the graphical user interface to allow monitoring of all inputs and outputs to the audio system. 3. Meters will be placed along strategic points in the signal chain to allow for monitoring signal level. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-15 4. Schematic diagram will be arranged so wire paths are easily traced. All inputs and output will be clearly labeled. 5. Basic signal processing functions available for DSP programming shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Equalization b. Automatic microphone mixing. c. Standard (manual) mixing. d. Compression and limiting. e. Signal delay. f. Metering. g. Room Combining, h. Signal routing. i. Speaker control. j. Automatic gain control. k. Gating. 6. Room combining of audio control to be accomplished through presets that control the various room arrangements. These presets will include routing, level change, delay, etc. 7. Contractor to allow programming time for at least (20) twenty different presets as directed by owner and his representative. 8. A floor plan of the facility will be imported into the graphic user interface of the digital signal processor. Each speaker zone will be identified and labeled. Each zone will have a child window associated to it. When a zone is selected, its child window will appear. This window will house the control functions associated with that zone. The control function will include but not be limited to muting, level control, source select, signal present LED of all incoming and out-going signals. The owner might have other functions that they require in this child window. The contractor is to assess these requirements during the user group interview and incorporate them into the programming. Control System: Programming of the Control system shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Control of Digital Signal Processor for user defined presets. Contractor to allow time in bid for on-site programming with consultant and owner. The time allotted for on-site programming will be at least 4 hours. 2. Control of all video equipment including DVD decks, projectors, projector screens, video switchers and any other equipment necessary for the system to function remotely. 3. Contractors must allow sufficient time for the programming of the system, and then allow time in bid accordingly. Any question as to the systems functional requirements must be sent in RFI form to the consultant. All programming schemes must be submitted to consultant for approval before programming starts. This includes the appearance of user interfaces and touch panel pages. Contractor will also submit a narrative for the control system concept to consultant for approval. 4. Contractor is to interview the client to acquire the necessary information needed to allow the proper programming of this system as he is directed. The contractor, after interviewing the client, will then submit a written report stating his interpretation of the client's requirements for approval by consultant. After the client and consultant has approved the programming report may the contractor proceed with the programming of this system. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-16 D. Contractors must allow sufficient time for the programming of systems. Contractors must evaluate the system functional requirements and user interface, then allow time in the bid accordingly. Any question as to the systems functional requirements must be sent in RFI for to the consultant. All programming schemes must be submitted to consultant for approval before programming starts. This includes appearance and function of the user interface, preset and sub-preset information (acquired through client interviews), speaker control schemes, Contractor will also submit a narrative for the audio and control system concept to consultant for approval. 3.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, OBSERVATIONS AND ACCEPTANCE A. Substantial Completion Observation: Prior to the Substantial Completion Observation, the Contractor shall file a written notice with the General Contractor when all of the aids to use described in paragraph 1.06, above, have been submitted for approval, all of the tests described in paragraph 3.02, above, are complete and the systems are ready for the Substantial Completion Observation. 1. The City of Carlsbad's representative shall perform a Substantial Completion Observation of the systems and may request repetition or demonstration of any or all of the tests described in paragraph 3.02, above, or other critical tests, if problems become apparent and the specifications are not met. 2. In the event that the systems are found not to be Substantially Complete, all of the observation costs including consulting fees, travel and living expenses in connection with subsequent observations or corrective work may be borne solely by the Contractor. This includes now problems that arise during the course of the subsequent observations. B. Acceptance Observation: 1. After Substantial Completion of the systems has been documented, and the Contractor has filed written notice with the General Contractor that the corrections ordered, per paragraph 3.03.A3, above, have been completed, as Acceptance Observation shall be scheduled. 2. The City of Carlsbad's representative shall perform and Acceptance observation of the systems and may request repetition or demonstration of any of all of the tests described in paragraph 3.02, above, or other critical tests if problems become apparent and the specifications are not met. 3. In the event that the corrections have not been completed, or if new problems arise at the time of the Acceptance Observation, all of the observations costs including consulting fees, travel and living expenses in connection with subsequent observations or corrective work may be borne solely by the Contractor. C. Acceptance: 1. After observations and tests indicate that the entire Audio/Visual system and auxiliary systems as specified herein are in total compliance with same, the City of Carlsbad shall document acceptance. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Audio Visual Systems Specifications 17000-17